JP6403081B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a bullet ball gaming machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine), and provides a gaming machine characterized by a notification means. An informing means 208L, 120 is a first winning means in a first case (when a big hit game with probability variation is executed) in a certain state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. The second information of the first information related to the number of prize balls acquired by entering the game ball into 234a and the second information related to the number of prize balls acquired by entering the second winning means 2266 Notification (notification by display of “000018Get” shown in (5) -8) is performed, and in the second case in the certain state (when the big hit game without probability change is executed), the first information First notification (notification by display of “000015Get” shown in (5) -6) is performed. [Selection] Figure 180

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known that are provided with notification means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the notification means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a notification means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-mentioned object is
Notification means;
Multiple winning means,
A game machine equipped with
It is possible to shift to the electric support state,
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means,
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means,
The informing means is means capable of informing information relating to the number of prize balls acquired in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as “a certain state”),
The notification means is a means that may notify information related to the number of winning balls (hereinafter referred to as “first information”) acquired when a game ball enters the first winning means.
The notification means is a means that may notify information related to the number of winning balls (hereinafter referred to as “second information”) acquired when a game ball has entered the second winning means.
The notification means is means for performing notification of the first information and the second information (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”) in a fourth period in the certain state.
The informing means is means for not informing the second information in a fifth period in the certain state,
The fourth period and the fifth period are different periods;
The fourth period is a period including a period in which the jackpot game is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “jackpot period”),
The fourth period, the collector support between states and the period is a probability variation state (hereinafter. Referred to as "third period") is a period including,
The third period is a period following the jackpot period,
The fifth period is a period not including the jackpot period,
The fifth period, Ri said conductive support state and period der is non probability variation state,
The fifth period is a period following the third period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the notification means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM of Tonosama character is taking action with respect to the change icon h0. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM which wore the red kimono has taken action with respect to the change icon h0. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM raise | generates the action of multiple times with respect to the fluctuation | variation icon h0 in one fluctuation | variation display of a decoration symbol. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 23 in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of icon change production. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM is raising the action of multiple times with respect to a pending | holding icon in the 1 time fluctuation display of a decoration symbol. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 26 in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one variation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM raises the action of multiple times with respect to a holding | maintenance icon in the variation display of the decoration pattern of multiple times. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 28 in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the multiple variation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of an icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decoration symbol performed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of the ninja of a default display mode is taking action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example which the navigation character NJ of a red ninja is taking action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of an icon change notice display, and a mode change. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown from the 3rd column after the left in FIG. 34, and the further another example of the change effect of a navigation character. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown after the 3rd column from the left in FIG. 35, and another example of production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown after the 3rd column from the left in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed an example of the item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 1, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 3, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 7, and the item provision production in time series. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 8, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 10, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a selection effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a selection effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a continuous operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a continuous operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a continuous operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed during a big hit game. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board of what is called a right-handed machine from the front. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating the front surface of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 177 is a diagram of the attacker unit 2340 as viewed from the back surface. It is the figure which looked at the attacker unit 2340 from the back. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of the 2nd variable prize opening 235a. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 176. It is a figure which shows the example of production after hitting a probable big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect after hitting a big hit without a probability change. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which a timer notice effect is performed during a big hit game, and is promoted to a big hit with probability change. 182 shows the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 182, and further shows the first half of the effect example in the case where the V winning is successful during the big hit game. FIG. It is the figure which showed the latter half part of the example of production in the case of succeeding in V prize during a big hit game, and also shows the example which notifies the prize every time there is a win to a general prize opening during a big hit game. FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 184 and further illustrating an example of notifying the winning whenever there is a winning to the attacker during the big hit game. FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 185 and further illustrating an effect example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 186. It is the figure which showed another example of production | presentation in the jackpot game of a rank up bonus. 188 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 188 and further illustrating another example of the effect in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus. FIG. FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 189. 190 shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 190, and further shows from the example effect during the big hit game to the example effect during the symbol variation display during the ST period. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 191. It is a figure which shows a part of effect example in the design change display in another ST period from the effect example in jackpot game. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 193. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation at the time of winning a prize to another general winning opening different from the unit general winning opening 2266 during a big hit game, and also showing an example when winning to an irregular general winning opening occurs. FIG. 196 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 195 and a part of the example in the case where a door opening error occurs during the big hit game. 196 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 196. FIG. FIG. 197 shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 197 and further shows a part of the example in the case where a dish full tank error occurs during the big hit game. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 198. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of a power failure / recovery occurring during the big hit game. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the carrying machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs low sound) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is stored in the outer frame 102, the outer frame 102 is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102. A pair of floating connectors is provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other). Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided. ing.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-frequency speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. It has been. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a light source that uses an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, and the like. It corresponds to.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation A ball launch handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board, and an effect button 136 (chance button 136) that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation. , A chance button lamp 138 that is built into the production button 136 (chance button 136) and emits the production button 136 (chance button 136) and a ball rental instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store A ball lending operation button 140 to perform, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status, Is provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In the operation key unit 137, as the cross key, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged, and a determination key is arranged at the center of the cross key. Yes. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided. The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage tray) is open with respect to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means provided in the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) Button lamp 138. Production by production movable body is included in front frame door 106 (including production movable body), ball rental display section display, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142, and The operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower pan full detection sensor can be detected. In the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) The game board 200 may include a door 108), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated. The ball launching handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that disables the launching (injection) of the game ball due to the operation of the ball launching handle 134 by the player's operation, and the player touches the ball launching handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launching handle 134 has been operated from a state in which the ball launching handle 134 has not been operated while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, an effect display by the display means, an effect sound by the sound output means, a light emission effect by various decoration LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on the game board or frame) can be mentioned. The effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more types of effect means. In addition, even with the same type of production means, there may be production means for performing exclusive production and production means for not performing (for example, the production of the frame production movable body performs the special production, but the production movable body of the game board is dedicated. For example, the effect movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board does not perform the dedicated effect, etc. This example can also be applied to other effect means. .)

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is detachable from the main body 104. When the payout device 152 is mounted at a predetermined position, the payout device 152 is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. , A payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply having a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 that houses the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three start openings, two first special figure start openings may be provided, one second special figure start opening may be provided, and conversely, one first special figure start opening may be provided. There may be provided two second special figure starting ports. Moreover, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more start ports may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning ports are provided, the other variable winning port is always closed while one of the first variable winning port and the second variable winning port is opened. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Further, three or more variable prize winning openings may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), and a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special figure starting opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out mouth. In addition, the sensor comprised so that detection of only one part among a winning opening, a starting port, and an out port may be sufficient.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit includes two counters), It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Note that the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, but may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like; Driving members, for example, driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects the various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the like, and the press of various buttons constituting the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137. A detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the CPU 504. A VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (general figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  A main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in the above step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are awarded, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interruption process described later with reference to FIG. 51, a special figure prefetching process is performed within the winning award winning process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S303 is performed before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 11, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is Prior determination is performed before the success / failure determination process in the related lottery process (step S229) in FIG. In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, prior determination of the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is performed prior to the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S311 is performed before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, prior determination of the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is performed prior to the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4" "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the determination result and the special figure variation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and is also stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information. Can be sent.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result. In addition, it is applicable also to the success / failure determination table used in the lottery process per special figure in step S801 in FIG.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected. Note that the present invention is also applicable to the small hit determination table used in the special figure small hit lottery process in step S803 in FIG.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lot. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Note that the symbol determination table of this example may be used for the symbol determination in the special symbol state update process of FIG. 53 (a), and the display symbol data of the special symbol 1 is obtained in the display symbol lottery processing of step S708. When determining, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A, based on the result of special figure 1 by lottery processing per special figure in step S707 and the numerical range of the random value, The display symbol data of special figure 1 is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control processing, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is updated to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and operation according to the detection result. A process of changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command is read from a ROM (not shown), and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, other effects random number update processing and the like are performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 sets information on image data (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variation icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variation icon h0 is displayed, the fact that the symbol variation is being displayed is informed. Note that the variation icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol confirmation display is in progress (the symbol is stopped). A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate a pedestal for the hold icon. In addition, the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed at all times, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol variation display, and symbol variation display holds accumulated) May be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. The fluctuation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. Good. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design (fifth design) smaller than the first decorative design is a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (in this case, “4” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Also, a crest character 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative design display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral role 224Gd and thousand carton box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position in the vicinity of the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). Depending on the progress, the display mode may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  Further, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Thousand box accessory 224H is disposed in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 15A1 to 15A2 show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. That is, when the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 15A1, the mode shown in FIG. 15A2 is obtained. Specifically, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front. Each rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to an overlapping position at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-thousand box feature 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role 224Gd, and the first big board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral feature 224Gd Compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H, it is difficult to view. In addition, you may be comprised so that the thousand-thousand box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral thing 224Gd. Further, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-thousand box role 224H and overlap with the thousand-thousand box role 224H.

  In FIG. 15B1, the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL easier to see. .

  15 (C1) to FIG. 15 (C4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15C1 to FIG. 15C4, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I is provided as an effect movable body in place of the family crest member 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 includes a lift arm and an LED array that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm. The lifting arm can be lifted and lowered by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data that is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing in this way, the light emission aspect of several LED changes during rotation of an LED array, and an afterimage is visually recognized by a player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED, and a pattern is represented. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 15C1 shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  FIG. 15C2 shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the lifting arm, and the LED array overlaps the front side of the substantially central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

  FIG. 15 (C3) shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbols, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 15C4 shows a state in which the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, characters “HEAT” are displayed, and a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. Note that the image displayed on the POV display 224I is not limited to that described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is decreased to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Also good. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be dark-displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to visually recognize.

  15 (E1) to FIG. 15 (E2) show how the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest member 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than at least a part of the icons does not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest actor 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 15 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position that overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped because the two-and-a-half box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this effect example, when the Senryo box combination 224H operates, the family crest combination 224E is prevented from operating so that the Senryo box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E do not interfere with each other. Note that there may be a case where both the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are operating. In addition, when the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest accessory 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 15G1, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that has not been displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are slid can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Accordingly, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward. The second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the enlarged left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the enlarged right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Are displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbols may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

15 (I1) to FIG. 15 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. 15 (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided instead of the family crest character 224E. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and is rotated at a constant speed. The figure shows that the speed is reached and the rotation speed is constant, and the word “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  15 (K1) to FIG. 15 (K4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 15 (K1) to FIG. 15 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 15 (K1) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

  FIG. 15 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is scrolled in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In other words, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlapping images are adjusted in accordance with the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest actor 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. Further, the family crest character 224E may rotate at an initial position or vibrate when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. You may vibrate while rotating.

  15 (K3) to 15 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of rotating integrally in the direction (CCW direction) is shown. FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating, but the displayed image does not rotate.

  FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative design display device 208 instead of the family crest actor 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative design display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the savory character SBH is walking from the right side to the left side is shown. It is more difficult to view than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15 (L1 ′), a display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 15 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the letters “large”, “board”, “vibration”, and “mai” are in front, respectively, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position that is in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position that is approximately the front side. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined notice effect or a pre-read notice effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 17 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and the general symbol hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A is applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B can also be applied. Also, in the following, illustration of the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, the thousand-car box function 224H, and the light guide plate IL is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in accordance with the stop indication of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 16 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed on the second UI part 281. Both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are indicated by a broken line, but this broken line is not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), so that it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display device by the start of variation → the start of blinking or extinction of the fourth symbol → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → decoration Although it is performed in the order of the change start of the symbols, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design. It should be noted that the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variation display of the fourth symbol. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (3), the second number-of-holds display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. In addition, the update display of the second reserved number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time. The display may be started, or the updated display of the second hold number display may be performed after the second decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 16 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 has started. In this movement (decrease) animation, the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts to move toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 16 (5), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the movement animation and the start of the first decorative symbol change display may be at the same timing, or after the movement animation ends, the first decorative symbol change display may be started. The moving animation may end after the display of the variation of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 16 (7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), a state is shown in which a navigation character advance notice is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon with the characters “opportunity” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), a state in which the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed is shown. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In the Navi character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “Opportunity” to the character display of “No”, thereby informing that the sense of expectation for the big hit is further increased. Note that the timing at which Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “NO”, or the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “NO”. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) to be promoted from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Intense heat”) may not be performed. . In addition, the Navi character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, an explanation display (characters appearing in various notices, game states, and effects of the pachinko machine 100) And explanation of stage of production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting the user to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation effective period. The button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation effective period are displayed. It is comprised by the remaining time display meter MT showing remaining time. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, no display corresponding to this is performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Ton-sama's conversation image CI1 is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In the Navi character notice, the balloon display changes from “No” to “Intense fever”, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of the balloon overlaps with a part of the habit conversation image CI2. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense heat”, or after the conversation image CI2 is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to “Intense fever”, or after the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense fever”, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not performed. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama does not have to be reduced (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 16 (9) is displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13). It is shown that the person is pressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon display has been deleted. When the production button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the above-mentioned operation valid period, as shown in FIG. May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. It should be noted that the notice text display such as “It is intense heat” may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the production button 136 (chance button 136). It may also be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without being operated.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 and the spear's conversation image CI2 are erased, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 7 "is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be employed. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 is changed. The icon h0 is left out of the display area and out of the frame, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed on the second UI unit 281 (the hold icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 16 (20)) are also framed out. . Note that the start of moving display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative design and the start of frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or the first After the display of the left and right symbols of the decorative design starts, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd operating. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both of the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior. Only the operation of the accessory 224Gd may be performed, and the light guide plate IL may not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL may emit light, and the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act. The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd return to the initial positions, respectively, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the second large board acting 224Gad. The start of the movement of the four large board acting items 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit rather than the case where an effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 17 (26), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (27) shows a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the button effect is started is shown. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30), the state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. A notice effect is performed. The cut-in image CI3 of Tono overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is not displayed. Note that Tonosama's cut-in image C13 may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may also be displayed when the operation valid period has passed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is deleted, and a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is continued is shown.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the second button effect is started after the development to super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the animation display of the duel scene to the effect image display. At the same time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd operating. Also, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation valid period has passed without being performed. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is not performed, and an effect display that is lost may be performed. After the effect display is performed, the revival effect may be displayed and the effect display that is a big hit may be performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuation icon h0 is hidden, but may be continuously displayed.

  After that, in FIG. 17 (39), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 17 (40) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  FIG. 17 (41) shows a state where the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the thousand-carton box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each move toward the initial position. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 17 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure A at the timing shown in FIG. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol confirmation is stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, the special symbol display device 208 displays “special bonus” and the game It is notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), mini right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that mini right-handed display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and “1R” that is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, you may make it display the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game, and the total number of prize balls acquired during the retreat.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round “15R” is displayed.

  FIG. 18 (56) shows a state where the big hit game is finished and the big hit end effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (a probability varying state with electric support). Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that effect is performed, and it is informed that the state will shift to a positive change state with electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (attention display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) is performed. This warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game at the first big hit that was a big hit in a gaming state that is not in electric support, or it may be a big hit regardless of the situation where it was a big hit. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the big hit game is over and the state is shifted to the probability variation state with electric support and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is a background image for the probable state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also displayed differently from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of icons displayed. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square patternless and white display mode, and the display form (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1, and the player Can be distinguished at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same. 18 (58) to 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown with a broken line. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not. Further, in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive homes are displayed below the display. ing. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to make a right stroke. A right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters “please right-handed” are displayed on the translucent band image. In the right-handed notification, the decorative symbol is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is finished and shifted, but it may be displayed in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is finished and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game is finished and the electronic support state is entered. In addition, after shifting to the electric support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In such a case, it may be determined that left-handed has been made and a right-handed notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61) shows that the decorative symbol variation display has started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notification is displayed, the right-hand notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues.

  FIG. 18 (63) shows a state in which the number of symbol variation display suspensions of special figure 2 is four. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special figure 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed. In the second hold number display, “4” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 2 is four is also displayed.

  FIG. 19 (49a) shows another effect example following FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17, the description has been given of the case where “decoration 7” is in the reach state and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol. A case where “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol is fluctuated by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not been determined to stop the symbol determination. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51 a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit of either 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit has become.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “bonus” and the player It is reported that either the 5R probability big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit is one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 19 (38b) shows another effect example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the game is lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, then the duel scene animation display fades out, and as shown in FIG. It is left and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the holding icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, shaking fluctuation is started by a combination of decorative symbols in which the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. Since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300 at the timing shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), a variable icon deletion animation is displayed. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 is gradually reduced, and finally, the animation display in which the variation icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (46b). Note that the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the special drawing stops.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  20-30 is a figure which shows the change effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment in steps. The example of production shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 is an example of production executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the example of production shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 is shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be executed. 20 to 30, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> N may be used instead of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the second decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. 20 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The code | symbol shown in FIGS. 20-30 represents a common component, when the same code | symbol as used so far is used. Even if different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and the technical idea shown in other drawings. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  The description in FIGS. 20 to 30 can be applied to any effect example in this specification, but is preferably applied to the effect examples described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the navigation character YM of the Tono-sama character as an effect icon takes action on the change icon h0.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, first, in the figure (a), the decoration symbol display device 208 ends the variation display of the decoration symbol, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”). -“Decoration 2”) is stopped. Note that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and in FIG. 20A, the navigation character YM of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20A is displayed in a display form wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least a part is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in FIG. 20A, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 in FIG. 1 are displayed. ing. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is.

  Further, FIG. 20A shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and the change icon h0 is also displayed. is there. The variation icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is confirmed and displayed. Note that the navigation character YM is not displayed even at the timing of the final display, and the navigation character YM is continuously displayed during the final display.

  In FIG. 20 (b), the hold of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Both the hold icons h1 to h3 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed with an initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 20 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts icon change animation, turns to the changing icon h0, and changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 20D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 20E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the variation icon h0. Is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is the blue display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode is changed. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 20 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the change icon h0 has also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, red, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (f), the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM may have the timing (effect image shown in FIG. 20 (f)). You may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 20 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (g) immediately before returning to the initial posture, or while a wave is oscillating (FIG. 20). (D) to (e)) may be regarded as an animation that is performed only, or may be regarded as an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, a big hit announcement (normal announcement) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In this case, the decorative symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed remains displayed, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Note that the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 described above, the A-th effect icon (the icon of Tono-sama's navigation character YM) of the A-th color (blue) changes the default display mode variation icon to the A-th color. This is an example of changing at the Ath frequency (probability).

  Next, the second example from the left in FIG. 20 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end in FIG. 20, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the following description, the description overlapping the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be omitted, but the description of the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 is applicable. In the second example from the left in FIG. 20, (A) to (D) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a blue kimono is used. The display character NM of the wearing display mode changes to the default (white) variation icon h0 of the display mode, pulls out the sword and swings up, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. ing. In FIG. 20E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to the aspect. At least a part of the change icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in red. The change icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the variation icon h0 after the change (red aspect) is different from the kimono aspect (blue aspect) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the second example from the left of FIG. 20 described above, the A-th effect icon (the icon of Tonosama's navigation character YM) of the A-th color (blue) is the variation icon of the default display mode. This is an example in which the color (red) is changed at the B-th frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the Ath frequency and the Bth frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be higher at the Ath frequency than at the Bth frequency. The Bth frequency may be higher than the frequency, and the Ath frequency and the Bth frequency may be the same.

  Next, the third example from the left in FIG. 20 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end in FIG. 20, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the third example from the left in FIG. 20 as well, the same figure (A) to (D) is the same as (A) to (D) described above, and the blue kimono is used. The display character NM of the wearing display mode changes to the default (white) variation icon h0 of the display mode, pulls out the sword and swings up, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. ing. In FIG. 20 (o), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with an effect image Eh0 that is the same blue smoke image as the kimono aspect of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is visually recognized before being covered. It has become difficult. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20F, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed, and the variation icon h0 remains in the default (white) display mode. Thus, even if the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, it may not only change but also may not change. Of the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered with the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (K), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lose (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  Next, the example shown in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 20 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown on the left end of FIG. In FIG. 20C shown at the left end, the variation icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but may be a blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (c) is an example of a blue display mode. In FIG. 20 (d1), the navigation system of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed. The character YM swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in blue. In FIG. 20E1, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is the same as the kimono aspect of the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is a blue smoke image that is the same as the display aspect of the variation icon h0. The covered and changing icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f1), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was in the blue display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 has changed to the red display mode. That is, the variation icon h0 changes to a different aspect from the effect image Eh0 and the kimono aspect (blue aspect) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice.

  Next, the example shown in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 20 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown on the left end of FIG. 20, and redundant description may be omitted. In FIG. 20C shown at the left end, the variation icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but may be a blue display mode. Moreover, although the Tona-sama navigation character YM is in a display mode with a blue kimono, it may be in a display mode with a red kimono. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 20C is a blue display mode, and the Tona-sama navigation character YM is a display mode wearing a red kimono. In (d2), the Tono-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono swings a sword toward the variation icon h0 in the blue display manner, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in red. In FIG. 20 (e2), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with an effect image Eh0 that is a blue smoke image that is the same as the display mode of the variation icon h0. It has become difficult to see. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f2), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the blue display mode. The variation icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) that the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 20 are all examples of the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case of the hold icon.

  Moreover, although white, blue, and red were mentioned as an example as an aspect, other colors, patterns, etc. may be sufficient. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes representing the player's advantage and the big hit expectation. For example, the lowest mode is a white or non-patterned mode (Ath mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (Bth mode), a green or rhombus pattern mode (Cth mode), red or The grid pattern mode (D mode), gold color and vertical line pattern mode (E mode) increase in order, and the rainbow and horizontal line pattern mode (F mode) is the highest. . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the change icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. That is, white in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with blue. For example, the variation icon h0 that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the variation icon h0 that was a white display mode may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow color display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which has been displayed in a blue kimono, may be displayed in a white kimono, or may be displayed in a green kimono. The effect image Eh0 that was the display mode may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which was in a display mode wearing a blue kimono, may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, or a display mode wearing a gold kimono, The display image wearing a rainbow-colored kimono may be used, and the effect image Eh0 that was a blue display image may be a red display image, a gold display image, or a rainbow. It may be a color display mode. The modes are roughly classified into green and rhombus pattern modes (Cth mode) and the following modes (A group, B mode, C group first group) and red and The lattice pattern mode (D mode) can be divided into the above modes (D group, E mode, F group, the second group). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to a mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, the modes in the first group may be switched and the modes in the second group may be switched. Further, in addition to the color and pattern, the player's advantage and the big hit expectation may be represented by a difference in size or number. In addition, the player's advantage is that the player is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state and / or a short-time state), a premier effect is easily started, or a jackpot finalizing effect is started. It may be easy. Moreover, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit, it is included that an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit is easily executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear. The matters relating to the aspect described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and the subsequent examples.

  Further, the aspect of each icon may be an aspect of the entire icon (entire area), or may be an aspect of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

  In all the examples described with reference to FIG. 20, the normal notice by the change icon h <b> 0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating several examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action on the change icon h0.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 21 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, and redundant description may be omitted. A navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 21 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture until then, faces the variation icon h0 in the white display mode, It changes to a pose that pulls out the sword and swings. In FIG. 21D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM. In FIG. 21E, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the blue smoke image, and the change is detected. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice with the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a fake notice. It will have been.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21 described above, the B-color (red) A-th effect icon (the icon of Tonosama's navigation character YM) displays the change icon of the default display mode as the A-color ( In this example, the color is changed to the C) frequency (probability).

  Next, the second example from the left in FIG. 21 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end in FIG. 21, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the second example from the left of FIG. 21, the same figure (A) to (D) is the same as the previously described figure (a) to (d), and a blue kimono is used. The displayed display-like navigation character YM changes to the default (white) change icon h0 of the display mode, and the sword is pulled out and swings up, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. ing. In FIG. 21E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to a red display mode. That is, the change icon h0 has changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and has also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the second example from the left in FIG. 21 described above, the A color effect icon (the icon of Tono-sama's navigation character YM) of the B color (red) is the default display mode variation icon. This is an example in which the color (red) is changed at the D-th frequency (probability). Instead of the change icon h0 in the default display mode, for example, the change icon h0 in the green display mode may be used. In this case, the B-th color (red) A-th effect icon (the Tono-sama navigation character YM icon) is the C-th color (green) display mode change icon, and the B-color (red). ) Is changed at the D-th frequency (probability).

  Next, the third example from the left in FIG. 21 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end in FIG. 21, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the third example from the left in FIG. 21 as well, (a) to (d) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and the red kimono is used. The displayed display-like navigation character YM changes to the default (white) change icon h0 of the display mode, and the sword is pulled out and swings up, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. ing. In FIG. 21 (o), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (f), the effect icon Eh0 disappears and the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is a gold display mode that is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the third example from the left in FIG. 21 described above, the A-th effect icon of B color (red) (the icon of Tonosama's navigation character YM) is the default display mode variation icon, This is an example in which the color (gold) is changed at the Eth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the C-th frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, the D-th frequency in the second example from the left in FIG. 21, and the E-th frequency is the D-th frequency. It may be a relation of> Eth frequency> Cth frequency. Alternatively, the Dth frequency <Eth frequency may be satisfied, or the Dth frequency = Eth frequency may be satisfied. Also, the Cth frequency may be zero.

  Further, the frequency D may be the B frequency in the second example from the left in FIG. 20, or the A frequency in the example shown at the left end in FIG. 20> the C frequency. There may be.

  Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 21 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, and redundant description may be omitted. Also in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 21, the same figure (a) to the figure (e) is the same as the above-described figure (a) to the figure (d), and a display wearing a red kimono The navigation character YM in the form changes to a pose in which the change icon h0 in the default (white) display form is turned and is swung over and the sword of the navigation character YM is oscillated. In FIG. 21 (o), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the cover. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (), the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (k), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 21 are examples in which the change icon h0 is the target, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target. Moreover, as an aspect, although white, blue, red, and gold were demonstrated as an example, another color, a pattern, etc. may be sufficient. Further, the modes of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0 that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold color The display mode may be a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which was in a display mode wearing a red kimono, may be a display mode wearing a gold kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may include a white kimono, the display mode including a blue kimono, or the display mode including a green kimono.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 21, the normal notice by the change icon h <b> 0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the icon display mode changes even when the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, first, in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. FIG. 22 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is.

  In FIG. 22 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. Note that in the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22B, the hold number of Special Figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is informed. Note that no icons are displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 22C, the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the blue effect image Eh0, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 22 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, red, etc.).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon of the default display mode changes to the Ath color (blue) at the Fth frequency (probability).

  Next, the second example from the left in FIG. 22 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end in FIG. 22, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 22, (A) to (B) are the same as (a) to (b) described above, and default (white). The display mode variation icon h0 is displayed. In FIG. 22C, an icon change animation is started in a state where no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and an effect image in which at least a part of the variation icon h0 is a red smoke image. Covered by Eh0, the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to visually recognize before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22 (D), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to the aspect. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22E, the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 is a false notice.

  The second example from the left of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon of the default display mode changes to the B color (red) at the Gth frequency (probability).

  Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 22 (B ′), a variation icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 22 (C ′), an icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the variation icon h0 is red. It is covered with the effect image Eh0 which is a smoke image of the above, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22D ′, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was in the blue display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to the red display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice.

  Next, the third example from the left in FIG. 22 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown at the left end in FIG. 22, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the third example from the left in FIG. 22 as well, (a) to (a) are the same as (a) to (b) described above, and default (white). The display mode variation icon h0 is displayed. In FIG. 22C, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is a golden display mode that is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (o), the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 is a false notice.

  The third example from the left of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon of the default display mode changes to the Cth color (gold) at the Hth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the F-th frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, the G-th frequency in the second example from the left in FIG. 22, and the H-th frequency is the F-th frequency. The relationship of> Gth frequency> Hth frequency may be used.

  Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 22 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. In the example shown at the right end of FIG. 22 as well, (a) to (i) are the same as (a) to (c) described above, and the default (white) display mode is shown. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In FIG. 22B, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22E, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed, and the variation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (o), the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 22 are examples in which the change icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case in which the hold icon is targeted. Moreover, as an aspect, although white, blue, red, and gold were demonstrated as an example, another color, a pattern, etc. may be sufficient. Further, the mode of each of the variation icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the fluctuation icon h0 that was a blue display mode may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a golden display mode. The display mode may be a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0, which was a gold display mode, may be a rainbow color display mode. In this case, the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change may be a gold display mode. However, the display mode may be rainbow. Furthermore, the effect image Eh0 that was a gold display mode may be a red display mode, a white display mode, a blue display mode, or a green display mode. It may be.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 22, the normal notice by the change icon h <b> 0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating several examples in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, first, in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (a). It is informed that it is. FIG. 23 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 23 (b), the hold of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three hold icons or the change icon h0, all are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23B, the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 23 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the changing icon h0, and changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 23D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM, and in FIG. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is the red display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode is changed. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 23 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the change icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Note that the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (f), but the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM may have the timing (effect image shown in FIG. 23 (f)). You may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 23 (c) and may be considered to have ended just before (g) in FIG. 23 (g), or while a wave is oscillating (see FIG. 23). (D) to (e)) may be regarded as an animation that is performed only, or may be regarded as an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 4” starts shaking fluctuation. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and a reach state is formed. Subsequently, in the same figure (j), a character display of “reach” is displayed. In other words, the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation at high speed, and the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed on the front side (player). The character display of “reach” is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to see than before the character display of “reach” is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 23 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In FIG. 1L, a wave is oscillated from the sword. In FIG. 23 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was in the red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to a gold display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 of this time. doing. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect (here, red) as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 23 (k) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (o) before returning to the initial posture, or while the wave is oscillating. It may be considered as an animation that is performed only ((l) to (m) in the figure) or an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed. After reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and a display (pseudo continuous symbol) indicating the pseudo continuous effect is displayed. It may be the time, or the timer notice timer may be zero, or the operation means such as the chance button 136 may be operated, or the decorative symbol variation display has ended. It may be the hour (at the time of stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of “reach” is displayed, during the super reach, during the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols, and the operation effect (button effect etc.) using the operation means such as the chance button 136 is started. It may be after, during or after the operation of the stage moving means such as the family crest role 224E, the first large board behavioral role 224Ga to the fourth big board behavioral role 224Gd, and the thousand carton box role 224H. About the start timing of the icon change effect demonstrated here, it is the same also about the icon change effect demonstrated before this, and the same also about the icon change effect demonstrated after this.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, the icon change animation of the first time among the icon change animations of the second time is a successful animation in which the display mode of the icon changes, and the icon change animation of the second time is the same. It was a successful animation in which the icon display style changed. That is, this is an example in which the success animation continues in one variation display of the decorative design.

  Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not once but once. That is, it can be considered that it started from FIG. 23C and ended immediately before (o) before returning to the initial posture. Note that the navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 23 (g) to (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 23 (g), disappears immediately after FIG. 23 (g), and is redisplayed immediately before FIG. 23 (k), or redisplayed in FIG. 23 (k). In this case, the interval between two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 23 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, (A) to (D) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM in the display mode changes to the default (white) display mode variation icon h0 and changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. . In FIG. 23E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23F, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed, and the variation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  From FIG. 23 (H) to FIG. 23 (L), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode, and the same FIG. Same as FIG. (L), after reaching reach state, the display-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono turns to the white display mode variation icon h0 and pulls out the sword. The pose is changed to a waving pose, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 23 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is again covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23N, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but here again, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not changed, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed. However, even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  Both the two icon change animations described above were failure animations in which the icon display mode did not change. In other words, this is an example in which failed animations continue in one variation display of a decorative symbol. Also in this case, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 23 in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. .

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 24 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, the same figures (a) to (d) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM in the display mode changes to a pose in which the change icon h0 in the default (white) display mode is turned, and the sword is pulled out, and the sword of the navigation character YM is oscillated. . In FIG. 24E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed, and the variation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  From FIG. 24 (h) to FIG. 24 (l), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode, and the previously described FIG. Same as FIG. (L), after reaching reach state, the display-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono turns to the white display mode variation icon h0 and pulls out the sword. The pose is changed to a waving pose, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 24 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to a gold display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, blue or red) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failure animation in which the icon display mode does not change, whereas the second icon change animation changes the icon display mode. It was a successful anime. That is, in this example, the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed first in the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol. Also in this case, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 24 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 24, (A) to (D) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM in the display mode changes to a pose in which the change icon h0 in the default (white) display mode is turned, and the sword is pulled out, and the sword of the navigation character YM is oscillated. . In FIG. 24E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to a red display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  24 (H) to FIG. 24 (L) are the same as the above-described FIG. 24 (h) to FIG. 24 (l), and display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state. The nose-like navigation character YM changes to a pose in which the change icon h0 of the red display mode is directed and the sword is pulled out, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. In FIG. 24M, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is again covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24N, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 has not changed, and the variation icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 whose form has changed is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation that changes the icon display mode, whereas the second icon change animation changes the icon display mode. It was a failed anime. That is, in this example, the failure animation is displayed after the successful animation is displayed first in the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol. Also in this case, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, white, red, and gold have been described as examples. However, other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variation icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. For example, the variation icon h0 that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a golden display mode. The display mode may be a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which was in a display mode wearing a red kimono, may be a display mode wearing a gold kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may include a white kimono, the display mode including a blue kimono, or the display mode including a green kimono.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but even if it is a big hit and is a true notice Good. Here, to summarize the examples described using FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, an example of success animations (hereinafter referred to as the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, an example in which failure animation continues (hereinafter referred to as “continuous failure example”), and an example shown in the left half of FIG. Example of success animation displayed after failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. There is an example in which animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “success / failure example”). High, followed by high success cases, followed by successful failure cases High when we, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). When consecutive failure examples are performed, the game may be lost (a big hit probability is 0%) or may be a big hit (a big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Among them, the icon change animation may be performed three times or more.

  Further, when the change of the display mode is unsuccessful, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image which is the default color may always be displayed, and conversely, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image may be displayed. There may be a case where the display mode is successfully changed.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating two examples of icon change effects.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect that is performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect that uses the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. It is an example performed in the change display of times.

  First, in FIG. 25 (a), in the state in which the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 2. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25A, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. FIG. 25 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is.

  In FIG. 25 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the second hold number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25B, the hold number of Special Figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is informed. Note that no icons are displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 25C, the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered with the red effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 25 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white or gold) different from the aspect after the icon change. In this example, no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation character YM is not displayed. However, even when the navigation character YM is displayed, the decoration pattern changes. A certain period during display (for example, a period during super-reach, a period during dark display where the display screen is completely dark, and a period during which the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with another display (notice display or error display) ) May cause the navigation character YM to be hidden or not visible. Even in such a case, an icon change animation as shown in FIG. 25C may be executed.

  In FIG. 25 (e), there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the second hold icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display in the upper right, it is informed that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 2 and the hold number in FIG. 2 is 0.

  In FIG. 25 (g), there is an additional ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is informed that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 3 and the hold number in FIG. 2 is 0. Further, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears according to the number of holds. That is, the navigation character YM appears (display starts) when the number of holds reaches N (N = 3 in this case), and disappears (display ends) when the number of holds reaches M (here M = 2). To do). The relationship between N and M in this condition for the navigation character YM is sufficient if N> M, and N = 4, M = 1, or the like. It should be noted that this condition can be applied to the examples so far, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples. However, this condition may not be applied. In FIG. 25 (h), on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the Tono-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono appears in an initial posture. The navigation character YM is provided with a balloon display of “one more remaining full”. Further, in FIG. 25H, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is performed, and “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. The navigation character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Further, the navigation character YM appears after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols and before reaching the reach state, before the first stop, or after reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. May be. Also, it may appear at the start of variable display of decorative symbols, may appear when a display showing pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-continuous symbols) is displayed, or when the timer notice timer becomes zero It may appear when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or may appear when the decorative symbol variation display is completed (stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of “reach” is displayed, during the super reach, during the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols, and the operation effect (button effect etc.) using the operation means such as the chance button 136 is started. It may appear later, during or after the operation of the stage moving means such as the family crest role 224E, the first large board behavioral role 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral role 224Gd, and the thousand-thousand box role 224H. About the appearance timing of the navigation character YM demonstrated here, it can apply also to the example demonstrated before this, and it can apply also to the example demonstrated after this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed. In the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. Subsequently, in the same figure (j), a character display of “reach” is displayed. In other words, the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation at high speed, and the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed on the front side (player). The character display of “reach” is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to see than before the character display of “reach” is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 25 (k), in the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In FIG. 1 (l), a wave is oscillated from the sword. In FIG. 25 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was in the red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to the gold display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 of this time. doing. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect (here, red) as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  Note that, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect that is performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed is performed only once, but even if a plurality of changes are performed. In addition, even in the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is made, but a plurality of changes may be made.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change animation using the navigation character YM is performed twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the navigation character YM is displayed in the first time and the second time. This is an example in which the display mode is different.

  First, in FIG. 25 (A), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4. Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. Note that a second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25A, the hold number of Special Figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. FIG. 25 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. There is. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 25 (B), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three hold icons or the change icon h0, all are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 25 (C), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts icon change animation, turns to the changing icon h0, and changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 25 (D), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM. In FIG. 25 (E), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is the same blue smoke image as that of the kimono of the navigation character YM. It is covered with the effect image Eh0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is the blue display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode is changed. Note that the change icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, red, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Note that the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25F, but the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image in FIG. 25F). You may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 25C and can be considered to have ended immediately before (G), or while a wave is oscillating (FIG. 25C). (D) to (E)) may be regarded as an animation being performed only, or may be regarded as an animation being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is being displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25H, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is performed, and “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 4” starts shaking fluctuation. In FIG. 25H, the navigation character YM is covered with the effect image EYM that is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that the navigation character YM0 may be partially covered with the effect image EYM or may be entirely covered with the effect image EYM. In FIG. 25 (I), the effect image EYM disappears, and the navigation character YM, which was in the display mode with the blue kimono before being covered with the effect image EYM, is the red display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. The change effect of the navigation character YM, which is an effect icon, may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may be started in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the change effect is started after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before reaching the reach state, before the first stop, or after reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. May be. Moreover, it may be started in accordance with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, may be started when a display indicating a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed, or the timer notice timer has become zero. It may be started at the time, may be started when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or may be started when the variation display of the decorative symbols is ended (at the time of stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of “reach” is displayed, during the super reach, during the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols, and the operation effect (button effect etc.) using the operation means such as the chance button 136 It may be started later or during the operation of the stage movable means such as the family crest role 224E, the first large board behavioral role 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral role 224Gd, and the Senryo box role 224H. The start timing of the change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) described here can be applied to the example described before, and can also be applied to the examples described below.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (I), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and a reach state is formed. In the following figure (J), the character display of “reach” is displayed. In other words, the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation at high speed, and the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed on the front side (player). The character display of “reach” is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to see than before the character display of “reach” is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has been changed to a display style wearing a red kimono is displayed in its initial posture.

  In FIG. 25K, in the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode. In FIG. 9L, a wave is oscillated from the sword. In FIG. 25M, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is the same red smoke image as the changed aspect of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is not covered. It has become more difficult to see. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was in the blue display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to the red display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed. Note that the change icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Even in the second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change (here, blue)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 25 (K) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (O) before the same figure (O), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be viewed as an animation that is only performed ((L) to (M) in the same figure) or an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  It should be noted that when a change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) is performed and the display mode of the effect icon changes, the change effect of the display mode of the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. May be. Furthermore, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as that of the changed effect icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the Ath display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the Bth display mode are performed in one variation display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the Ath display mode is changed only once, but may be changed a plurality of times. Even in the icon change effect by the effect icon of the Bth display mode, only one change is made, but a plurality of changes may be made.

  The example described with reference to FIG. 25 is an example for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case of the hold icon. Moreover, as an aspect, although white, blue, red, and gold were demonstrated as an example, another color, a pattern, etc. may be sufficient. Further, the modes of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0 that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a golden display mode. The display mode may be a rainbow-colored display mode. In addition, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono, may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono, Or the display mode which wore red kimono may be sufficient, the display mode which wore golden kimono may be sufficient, and the display mode which wore rainbow-colored kimono may be sufficient. Furthermore, Tono-sama's navigation character YM, which has been displayed in a red kimono, may be displayed in a golden kimono or in a rainbow-colored kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may include a white kimono, the display mode including a blue kimono, or the display mode including a green kimono.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing several examples in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, first, in FIG. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. FIG. 26 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 26 (b), the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three hold icons or the change icon h0, all are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 26 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts icon change animation, turns to the left side, changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out and swings up. In FIG. 26D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the Tono-sama navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches before the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26 (e), at least a part of the first variation icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 26 (f), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 that is the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh1 is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to a red display mode. The first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (f), the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image shown in FIG. 26 (f). You may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 26C, and may be considered to have ended immediately before (g) before returning to the initial posture, or while a wave is oscillating (FIG. 26). (D) to (e)) may be regarded as an animation that is performed only, or may be viewed as an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 4” starts shaking fluctuation. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed. In the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. Subsequently, in the same figure (j), a character display of “reach” is displayed. In other words, the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation at high speed, and the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed on the front side (player). The character display of “reach” is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to see than before the character display of “reach” is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 26 (k), the icon change animation for the second time is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the left side. The wave is oscillating from the sword. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches before the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1, which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 26 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 that was in a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh1 is a golden display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. Has changed. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect (here, red) as the display aspect of the first hold icon h11 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 26 (k) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (o) before returning to the initial posture, or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation that is performed only ((l) to (m) in the figure) or an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first reservation is digested. There is a case where a big hit is made in the decorative symbol variation display (decoration symbol variation display started next). That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, among the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is the same. It was a successful animation that changed the display mode of the hold icon. That is, this is an example in which the success animation continues in one variation display of the decorative design.

  Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not once but once. That is, it can be considered that the process starts from FIG. 26 (c) and ends immediately before (o) in FIG. 26 (o). The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIG. 26 (g) and FIG. 26 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 26 (g), disappears immediately after FIG. 26 (g), and is displayed again immediately before (k) in the figure, or redisplayed in FIG. 26 (k). In this case, the interval between two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 26 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM of the Tono-sama in the display mode changes to a pose that turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches before the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26E, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 26F, the effect image Eh1 has disappeared. However, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  From FIG. 26 (H) to FIG. 26 (L), the display form of the first hold icon h11 is the white display form instead of the red display form, and the same figure (h) described above. ~ Same as Fig. 1 (l), after reaching the reach state, the display-like Navi character YM wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that turns to the left and pulls out the sword A wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches before the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26M, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 26N, the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but here again, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. Even if the decorative symbol change display (decrease display of the decorative symbol to be started next) performed after the 1-hold is digested, it may be lost or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 is not performed, and in the next variation display of decorative symbols, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. High nature.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. In other words, this is an example in which failed animations continue in one variation display of a decorative symbol. Also in this case, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 26 in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one variation display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 27 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, the same figure (a) to FIG. 27 (d) is the same as FIG. 26 (a) to FIG. The display-like Nada-like navigation character YM turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings up, and passes from the sword of the navigation character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variation icon h0. Waves are oscillating. In FIG. 27E, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 27F, the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  From FIG. 27 (h) to FIG. 27 (l), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not the red display mode but the white display mode as described above, and FIG. ~ Same as Fig. 1 (l), after reaching the reach state, the display-like Navi character YM wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that turns to the left and pulls out the sword A wave extending from the sword of the navigation character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variation icon h0 is oscillated. In FIG. 27 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1, which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 27 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears and the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold in the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to the aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be a mode (for example, blue or red) different from the mode after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first reservation is digested. There is a case where a big hit is made in the decorative symbol variation display (decoration symbol variation display started next). That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failure animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the second icon change animation is a display mode of the hold icon. It was a successful animation that changed. That is, in this example, the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed first in the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol. Also in this case, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 27 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 27, (A) to (D) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The display-like Nada-like navigation character YM turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings up, and passes from the sword of the navigation character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variation icon h0. Waves are oscillating. In FIG. 27E, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1, which is a red smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 27F, the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to the aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27G has returned to the initial posture.

  27 (H) to FIG. 27 (L) are the same as FIG. 11 (h) to FIG. 11 (l) described above, and a display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state. The nose-like navigator character YM turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings up, and the wave extending from the sword of the navigation character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variation icon h0. It is oscillating. In FIG. 27M, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered with the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 27 (N), the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. There is a case where a big hit is made by the decorative symbol variation display (decoration symbol variation display started next) performed after the first reservation is digested. That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the second icon change animation is a display mode of the hold icon. It was a failure animation that did not change. That is, in this example, the failure animation is displayed after the successful animation is displayed first in the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol. Also in this case, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

  As described above, in FIGS. 26 and 27, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. Further, the mode of each of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIGS. For example, the hold icon that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. An aspect may be sufficient and a rainbow-colored display aspect may be sufficient. Further, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which was in a display mode wearing a red kimono, may be a display mode wearing a gold kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may include a white kimono, the display mode including a blue kimono, or the display mode including a green kimono. Furthermore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 is not limited to the first hold icon h11. Furthermore, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the pre-reading notice with the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described using FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, an example of success animations (hereinafter referred to as the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, an example in which failure animation continues (hereinafter referred to as “continuous failure example”), and an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which a success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed on the screen (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. There is an example in which animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “success / failure example”), and the probability of winning a big hit, that is, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the best when a continuous success example is performed. High, followed by high success cases, followed by successful failure cases High when we, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). When consecutive failure examples are performed, the game may be lost (a big hit probability is 0%) or may be a big hit (a big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decoration symbol. However, the one variation display of the decoration symbol is performed once. Among them, the icon change animation may be performed three times or more.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the multiple variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, first, in FIG. 28A, in the state where the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost pattern (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. Note that the second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (a), the hold number of Special Figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. FIG. 28 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 28 (b), the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three hold icons or the change icon h0, all are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 28 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 28D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0, and also passes through the first hold icon h11 and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 28 (e), at least a part of the second variation icon h12 is covered with the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered with the effect image Eh2, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons). In FIG. 28 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears and the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh2, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to a red display mode. Note that the second hold icon h12 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image in FIG. 28 (f)). You may return to the initial posture at the time when Eh2 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 28C and may be considered to have ended immediately before (g) before returning to the initial posture, or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. 28). (D) to (e)) may be regarded as an animation that is performed only, or may be regarded as an animation that is performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 28 (i), the hold of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started changing the decorative symbol display, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two hold icons such as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and a change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second hold number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (i), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. When the number of holds becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  From FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l), the decorative symbol variation display continues, and in FIG. 28 (m), the second icon change animation is displayed while the display of the navigation character YM remains off. Has been started. In FIG. 28 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 that was in a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh1 is a golden display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. Has changed. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect (here, red) as the display aspect of the first hold icon h11 before the change). As shown in FIG. 28 (o), the decorative symbol variation display continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first reservation is digested. There is a case where a big hit is made in the decorative symbol variation display (decoration symbol variation display started next). That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the held icon changes, and the second icon change animation is the same. It was a successful animation that changed the display mode of the hold icon. In other words, this is an example in which the success animation continues in the variable display of the decorative pattern multiple times. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode changes due to the icon change animation is the hold icon representing the same hold, but may be a hold icon representing a different hold (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 28 (m) that is the third hold icon h12 in FIG. 28 (f) may change.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 28 will be described with a focus on differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM of the Tono-sama in the display mode changes to a pose that turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0, and further passes through the first hold icon h11 and reaches the front of the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 28E, at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image Eh2 that is a white smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered with the effect image Eh2, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 28F, the effect image Eh2 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is not changed, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28H, the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 28 (I), the reservation of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In addition, since the number of holds becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  From FIG. 28 (J) to FIG. 28 (L), the display form of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display form but a white display form, and the same figure (j) described above. Same as (l) in FIG. 28, with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing, the decorative symbol variation display continues, and in FIG. The animation has started. In FIG. 28 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28N, the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but here again, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 28 (O), the decorative symbol variation display continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the first hold is digested. Even if the decorative pattern change display (decoration display change display to be started next) is performed, there may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 is not performed, and in the next variation display of decorative symbols, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. High nature.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. In other words, this is an example in which failed animations continue in one variation display of a decorative symbol.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 28 in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the multiple variation display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 29 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 29, (a) to (d) in FIG. 29 are the same as (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The ton-like navigation character YM in the display mode turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings up, and passes from the sword of the navigation character YM through the variation icon h0 and also through the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave extending to just before the hold icon h12 is oscillated. In FIG. 29 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image Eh2 that is a white smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered with the effect image Eh2, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29F, the effect image Eh2 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is not changed, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 29 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In addition, since the number of holds becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  In the following FIG. 29 (j) to FIG. 29 (l), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not the red display mode but the white display mode, and the previously described FIG. ) To (l) in the same manner, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and the decorative symbol variation display continues. In FIG. 29 (m), the second icon is displayed as it is. Change animation has started. In FIG. 29 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears and the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold in the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to the aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be a mode (for example, blue or red) different from the mode after the icon change. As shown in FIG. 29 (o), the decorative symbol variation display continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first reservation is digested. There is a case where a big hit is made in the decorative symbol variation display (decoration symbol variation display started next). That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failure animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the second icon change animation is a display mode of the hold icon. It was a successful animation that changed. That is, in this example, the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed first in the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 29 will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 29, FIGS. 28A to 28D are the same as FIGS. 28A to 28D described above, and a red kimono is worn. The ton-like navigation character YM in the display mode turns to the left side, pulls out the sword and swings up, and passes from the sword of the navigation character YM through the variation icon h0 and also through the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. In FIG. 29E, at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image Eh2 that is a red smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered with the effect image Eh2, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29 (F), the effect image Eh2 disappears and the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. It has changed to the aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29H, the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 29 (I), the reservation of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In addition, since the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  The subsequent FIG. 29 (J) to FIG. 29 (L) are the same as FIG. 28 (i) to FIG. 28 (l) described above. The display continues, and in FIG. 29M, the second icon change animation is started in this state. In FIG. 29M, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29N, the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 29 (O), the decorative symbol variation display continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first reservation is digested. There is a case where a big hit is made in the decorative symbol variation display (decoration symbol variation display started next). That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the second icon change animation is a display mode of the hold icon. It was a failure animation that did not change. That is, in this example, the failure animation is displayed after the successful animation is displayed first in the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol.

  As described above, in FIGS. 28 and 29, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the mode of each of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIGS. For example, the hold icon that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. An aspect may be sufficient and a rainbow-colored display aspect may be sufficient. Further, the Tono-sama navigation character YM, which was in a display mode wearing a red kimono, may be a display mode wearing a gold kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may include a white kimono, the display mode including a blue kimono, or the display mode including a green kimono. Furthermore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 is not limited to the first hold icon h11. Furthermore, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the pre-reading notice with the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the example described using FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, in the variation display of the decorative pattern multiple times, an example of success animation, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 28), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, an example of failure animation continuing (hereinafter referred to as “continuous failure example”), and an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure successful example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. There is an example in which animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “success / failure example”), and the probability of winning a big hit, that is, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the best when a continuous success example is performed. High, then failure success case is high, then success failure case High if done, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). When consecutive failure examples are performed, the game may be lost (a big hit probability is 0%) or may be a big hit (a big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the icon change animation is performed only once in one variation display of the decorative design, but the single variation display of the decorative design is performed. Among them, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times. That is, even if the icon change animation is performed a plurality of times in one variation display of the decorative design, and further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times in the plurality of variation display of the decoration design. Good.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating two examples of icon change animation.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 30 is an example in which an icon that is a change target of the icon change animation is easily recognized.

  First, in FIG. 30 (a), in the state in which the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 4. The four hold icons h11 to h14 shown in FIG. 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. FIG. 30 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 30 (b), the hold of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three hold icons or the change icon h0, all are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG.30 (c), the navigation character YM which was the initial posture starts an icon change animation, changes to the pose which turned to the left side, pulled out the sword, and was held up. In FIG. 30D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave here extends to the front of the second hold icon h12 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11. Furthermore, an arrow also extends from the sword tip toward the second holding icon h12. The wave shown in FIG. 28 (d) passes through the fluctuation icon h0, and also passes through the first hold icon h11. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 is seen as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 is also seen as a change target. . On the other hand, the wave shown in FIG. 30 (d) avoids the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11, and this is not the case, and the second hold icon h12 is changed by the display of the arrow. Something is clearer.

  In FIG. 30 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered with the effect image Eh2, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons).

  In FIG. 30F, the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh2, is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. The display mode is changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, white or gold) different from the aspect after the icon change. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (f), the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image shown in FIG. 30 (f). You may return to the initial posture at the time when Eh2 disappears.

  In FIG. 30 (g), there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and a fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display in the upper right, it is informed that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 4 and the hold number in FIG. 2 is 0. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 30 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be.

  In FIG. 30 (j), the decorative symbol variation display continues, and in FIG. 30 (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM, which was the initial posture, turns to the left and pulls out the sword. It changes to a pose that is shaking. In the subsequent FIG. 30 (l), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave here extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0. Furthermore, an arrow also extends from the sword tip toward the first hold icon h11. Since the fluctuation shown in FIG. 30 (l) also avoids the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is not regarded as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 is a change target due to the display of an arrow. Has become clearer.

  In FIG. 30 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh1, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons).

  In FIG. 30 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 that was in the red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh1 is a golden display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first reservation is digested. There is a case where a big hit is made by the decorative symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display started next). That is, there is a case where the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 30, the effect icon (navigator character YM) of the Ath display mode (display mode wearing a blue kimono) is the Bth display mode (red kimono) shown in FIG. This is an example in which it is easier to recognize an icon to be changed than an effect icon (navigator character YM) in a display mode wearing.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 30 is an example in which the hold icon whose display mode has changed becomes a change icon and the display mode changes again.

  First, in FIG. 30A, the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 4 in a state where the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The four hold icons h11 to h14 shown in FIG. 1 are displayed. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. In addition, the 2nd number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (A), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is. Further, FIG. 30A shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. There is. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 30B, the hold of special figure 1 has been digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three hold icons or the change icon h0, all are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30B, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 30C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, changes to a pose in which the left side is turned and the sword is pulled out and swung. In FIG. 30D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono. The wave here passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches before the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 30E, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered with the effect image Eh2, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap with at least a part of other icons (variation icons and other hold icons).

  In FIG. 30F, the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to a red display mode. The first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (F), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image shown in FIG. 30 (F)). You may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears.

  In FIG. 30 (G), there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display in the upper right, it is informed that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 4 and the hold number in FIG. 2 is 0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 30 (I), the reservation of special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the reserved icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been. The change icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous change has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Will be.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (J), a reach state is formed, and a character display of “reach” is displayed. In other words, the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation at high speed, and the “decoration 4” that is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c are displayed on the front side (player). The character display of “reach” is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to see than before the character display of “reach” is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has been changed to a display style wearing a red kimono is displayed in its initial posture.

  In FIG. 30K, the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In FIG. 9L, a wave is oscillated from the sword. In FIG. 30M, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the variation icon h0 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 30 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0 that was in the red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0 is changed to a gold display mode that is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, white, red, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 30, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the icon change effect is performed only once for the variable icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. That is, after an icon change effect is performed one or more times for a certain hold icon, the hold icon becomes a variable icon, and the icon change effect may be performed one or more times for the variable icon. May be.

  In the above description, the navigation character YM has been described to appear when the number of holds reaches N (N = 3 in this case) and disappears when the number of holds reaches M (here, M = 2). It may be always displayed. However, even if it is always displayed, the navigation character YM may disappear or disappear during a certain period during the decorative symbol variation display. For example, the navigation character YM is displayed during the period of super reach, the period of dark display where the display screen is dark, the period when the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with other displays (notice display and error display), etc. It may disappear or disappear. Further, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Further, when the number of special symbols held is 0 and the symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is completed, a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as “demo display”) is displayed. That is, the demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped. Examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and a moving image demo display in which an animation including a game console title and the like is displayed. Note that a still image demo display may be displayed instead of the video demo display. Also in these demonstration displays, the navigation character YM may be displayed. Further, during the display period of the demonstration display, the navigation characters YM of all display modes may be displayed, or only the navigation characters YM of the display modes belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the navigation character YM in the display mode of white, blue, and green may be displayed. Alternatively, only the navigation character YM in the white display mode may be displayed in the display period of the demonstration display, only the navigation character YM in the blue display mode may be displayed, or the navigation character in the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

  Further, although the description has been given only with respect to the production example using the Tonama character's navigation character YM as the production icon, the production icon is not limited to the navigation character YM of the Tonosama character, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. Furthermore, the icons may be various icon change notice icons shown in FIG. 119 (b).

  In addition, the change target icon may be a change icon or a hold icon. When it is a hold icon, it may be a first hold icon, a second hold icon, a third hold icon, or a fourth hold icon. . Furthermore, the type of change target icon may be the hold icon or the change icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).

In the above description, “display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N”. And a second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a change icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to symbol variation display,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode]
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed [for example, a red display mode] in the second display mode,
When an icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, an icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. It is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form [for example, the expectation level of the jackpot is high]
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a red kimono]
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a kimono region] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],
The certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a region inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],
When the display mode of the certain icon does not change to the second display mode even when the display icon of the fourth display mode is used to change the certain icon of the first display mode [for example, FIG. 20 (f2)] is also provided. Was explained.

  According to this game stand, the player's interest may be improved by displaying a result different from the prediction of the player who expects to change to the second display mode.

  Here, the certain aspect may be only one of color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. Some combinations may be used.

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain mode, or may be a region displayed in the certain mode.

  The certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the region displayed in the certain color, or may be a region displayed entirely in the certain mode.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for always displaying an effect icon. In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Also good.

In the above description, “display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N”. And a second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a change icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to symbol variation display,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode]
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode]
When an icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, an icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. It is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form [for example, the expectation level of the jackpot is high]
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a red kimono]
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a kimono region] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],
The certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a region inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],
When an effect in which a certain icon of the first display mode is changed during a period in which the display icon is not displayed is performed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 22 (D ′)] is a game table characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a certain icon of the second display mode is displayed even if a change effect by the effect icon is not performed, and the interest of the player may be improved.

  Here, the certain aspect may be only one of color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. Some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for always displaying an effect icon. In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Also good. In addition, when an effect in which a certain icon in the first display mode is changed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon is surely changed to the second display mode. Also good.

In addition, “the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a blue kimono]
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, white display mode]
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all display modes of the certain icon.
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the first frequency [for example, , Ath frequency (Ath probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [e.g. , Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ”Was also explained.

  The frequency mentioned here may be a probability (the same applies hereinafter).

In the above description, “display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N”. And a second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a change icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed.
The certain icon is an icon related to symbol variation display,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode]
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode]
When an icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, an icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. It is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form [for example, the expectation level of the jackpot is high]
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a blue kimono]
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a red kimono]
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a kimono region] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],
The certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a region inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by an effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 20 (f1)] is a game table characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to this game stand, when a certain icon in the second display mode may be displayed even from a change effect by the effect icon in the third display mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player There is.

  Further, one aspect may be only one of color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of these, Some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for always displaying an effect icon. In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Also good. In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Also good.

In addition, “the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode]
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all display modes of the certain icon.
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the first frequency [for example, , Ath frequency (Ath probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [e.g. , Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
When an icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed when a certain icon of the fifth display mode [for example, a gold display mode] is displayed. It is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form [for example, the expectation level of the jackpot is high]
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with a third frequency [e.g. , Cth frequency (Cth probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (a) to FIG. 21 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a fourth frequency [e.g. , Dth frequency (Dth probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (A) to FIG. 21 (H)],
When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the fifth display mode at a fifth frequency [e.g. , Eth frequency (Eth probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (a) to FIG.
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The game table, wherein the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming machine, wherein the third frequency is zero. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming machine, wherein the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming machine, wherein the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the certain icon has a sixth frequency [for example, F-th frequency (F-th probability)] from the default display mode to the first display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. ] [For example, FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at the seventh frequency [for example, Gth frequency (Gth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIG. 22 (A) to (E)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at the eighth frequency [for example, the Hth frequency (Hth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The game table, wherein the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] that may be displayed in plurality.
In the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the certain icon is displayed, the display mode of the certain icon to be changed is changed,
An effect in which the certain icon is changed by the effect icon in the third display mode is an object to be changed rather than an effect in which the certain icon is changed by the effect icon in the fourth display mode. It is easy to recognize which icon is one of a plurality of displayed icons [for example, wave and arrow shown in FIG. Α11 (d) or FIG. 1 (l)]. A game table. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the number of certain icons to be changed may be one or plural.

“The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as“ demo display ”) may be displayed.
The demonstration display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and a special symbol display [for example, symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214] is stopped. Is a display that may be
The game table, wherein the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demonstration display. ”Was also explained.

  Here, examples of the demonstration display include a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a title of a game stand is displayed. Note that a still image demo display may be displayed instead of the video demo display.

  Also, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the different lines displayed, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It may not be the difference depending on the presence or absence.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as “demo display”). The demonstration display may be a display that is always displayed in a state where the number of holdings is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed without fail during the display period of the demonstration display.

In addition, the display means may display a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, a meter display MW, an icon of MG, a giant panda, a character of a puppet, and a “navi character changes”. Means that may be displayed,
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed,
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed during the display of the effect icon of the third display mode, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 3-1) -FIG. (6-1), FIG. 76 (6-3-2) -FIG. (6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (1-3-1) -FIG. (1-3-4), meter production shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (2-2-2-1) to FIG. 2 (2-2-3)],
If the second change animation using the change effect display is performed during the display of the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. -1) -FIG. (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (<1-3-1)-><(1-3-3b2)]]. ”Was also explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a change effect display. The change effect display may always be displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

  In addition, during the display of a single variation display of a decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times due to the rendering by the rendering icon of the third display mode, and the variation display is being displayed. In addition, the display mode of the certain icon may change one or more times depending on the effect by the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (P)]. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, during the display of one variation display of a decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon may change a plurality of times due to the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. p)]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, in the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the first and second successful changes in the display mode of the certain icon are performed, and the variation display is performed. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. 23 (p)],
In the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the first change in the display mode of the certain icon has failed and the second success has been achieved. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as “second case”) [for example, FIG. 24 (a) to FIG. 24 (p)],
In the state in which the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative pattern, the change in the display mode of the certain icon succeeds the first time and the second time fails. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as “third case”) [for example, FIG. 24 (A) to FIG. 24 (P)],
In the state where the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the decorative pattern once in the decorative pattern, the change of the display mode of the certain icon has failed both the first time and the second time, and the variable display ends. (Hereinafter referred to as “fourth case”) [for example, FIG. 23 (A) to FIG. 23 (P)],
In the third case, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol pattern than the fourth case [for example, it is easier to make a big hit in the change display or the subsequent change display]
In the second case, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the third case [for example, it is easier to win big hits in the change display or the subsequent change display]
The first case is characterized in that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easier to be determined and displayed than the second case [for example, it is easier to win big hits in the change display or the subsequent change display]. Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  The description of the game table here is that the display mode of the certain icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol. This is a limitation on how easy it is to hit the jackpot.

  In addition, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative pattern, and the display of the variation display A game table characterized in that the display mode of the certain icon may change one or more times in a state where the effect icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (p)]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red],
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in the certain color,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain color. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the region displayed in the certain color, or may be a region displayed entirely in the certain color. Further, the certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be an area displayed entirely in the certain color.

  In addition, “the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 77 (1) to FIG. 12 (12), example shown in FIG. 30, etc.]”. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over the continuous symbol variation display.

Further, “the display means is a means in which a third change animation may be displayed,
The third change animation is an animation that produces an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without the effect of another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. ,
The third change animation is an animation [for example, FIG. 79 (E 2) to FIG. 3 (E 3-2) in which the effect image [eg, smoke image] of the certain aspect [eg, red] is displayed at least. ] A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays the third change animation. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. May be.

In addition, “the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode],
A certain icon of the sixth display mode is changed by an effect icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When the presentation is performed, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode [for example, red display mode] [for example, FIG. 21 (F)], Stand. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon in the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is surely changed to the second display mode. It may change.

Further, “the display means is a means in which a fourth change animation may be displayed,
The fourth change animation is an animation that produces an effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIG. 77 (9) to FIG. 11 (11), FIG. 20 (c) to FIG. FIG. 20C to FIG. 20F, etc.]
The display means is a means in which an invariant animation may be displayed,
The invariant animation is an animation that produces an effect that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIG. 77 (4-1) to FIG. 6 (6), FIG. 20 (c) to FIG. Etc.] A game machine characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays the fourth change animation. The display unit may be a unit that always displays an invariant animation.

Further, “the display means is a means in which a change icon [for example, a change icon h0] may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed,
The game table, wherein the certain icon is the variable icon. ”Was also explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a variation icon.

In addition, “the display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display that is started later,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The gaming table, wherein the certain icon is the hold icon. ”Was also explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a hold icon.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ”Was also explained.

In the above description, “display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N”. And a second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means in which a change icon [for example, a change icon h0] may be displayed.
The display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed,
The hold icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display that is started later,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode]
When the variation icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, the variation icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation level of the jackpot is high]
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed.
The effect icon is an icon different from the variation icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The effect icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a red kimono]
When an effect of changing the variation icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variation icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. (N)]
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a kimono region] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],
The variation icon of the second display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a region inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red].
When an effect of changing the hold icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode is performed, the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode [for example, FIG. 26 (f)]. Was explained.

  According to this gaming machine, after the hold icon is changed, the hold icon of the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the player's interest may be improved. .

  Here, the certain aspect may be only one of color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. Some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a variation icon. The display means may be a means for always displaying a hold icon. Further, the display means may be means for always displaying an effect icon. In addition, when an effect of changing the variation icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variation icon may surely change to the second display mode. . Further, when an effect of changing the hold icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode is performed, even if the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. Good.

In addition, “the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of Tonosama wearing a blue kimono]
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode],
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the variation icon.
When an effect of changing the variation icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variation icon changes to the first display mode with a first frequency [e.g. A frequency (A probability) ”[for example, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing the change icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the change icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [e.g. B frequency (B probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
When the variation icon of the fifth display mode [for example, gold display mode] is displayed, the variation icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation level of the jackpot is high]
When an effect of changing the variation icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variation icon changes to the first display mode with a third frequency [e.g. C frequency (C probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (a) to FIG. 21 (h)],
When an effect of changing the variation icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variation icon changes to the second display mode with a fourth frequency [e.g. D frequency (D probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (A) to FIG. 21 (H)],
When an effect of changing the change icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the change icon is changed to the fifth display mode by the fifth frequency [for example, E frequency (Eth probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (a) to FIG.
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The game table, wherein the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming machine, wherein the third frequency is zero. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming machine, wherein the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming machine, wherein the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the variation icon has a sixth frequency [for example, Fth frequency (Fth probability)] from the default display mode to the first display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e)],
The variation icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [eg, Gth frequency (Gth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIG. 22 (A) to FIG. 22 (E)],
The variation icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at the eighth frequency [for example, the Hth frequency (Hth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIG. 22A to FIG.
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The game table, wherein the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the variable icons are icons that may be displayed in a plurality [for example, hold icons h11 to h14],
In the effect of changing the variation icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the variation icons are displayed, the display mode of the variation icon to be changed is changed,
The effect that the change icon is changed by the effect icon of the third display mode is the change icon to be changed, rather than the effect of changing the change icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. A game table characterized by being easily recognizable as one of a plurality of displayed variation icons [for example, wave and arrow shown in FIG. Α11 (d) and FIG. 11 (l)]. ”Was also explained.

“The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as“ demo display ”) may be displayed.
The demonstration display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and a special symbol display [for example, symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214] is stopped. Is a display that may be
The game table, wherein the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demonstration display. ”Was also explained.

  Here, examples of the demonstration display include a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a title of a game stand is displayed. Note that a still image demo display may be displayed instead of the video demo display.

  Also, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the different lines displayed, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It may not be the difference depending on the presence or absence.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as “demo display”). The demonstration display may be a display that is always displayed in a state where the number of holdings is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed without fail during the display period of the demonstration display.

In addition, the display means may display a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, a meter display MW, an icon of MG, a giant panda, a character of a puppet, and a “navi character changes”. Means that may be displayed,
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed,
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed during the display of the effect icon of the third display mode, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 3-1) -FIG. (6-1), FIG. 76 (6-3-2) -FIG. (6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (1-3-1) -FIG. (1-3-4), meter production shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (2-2-2-1) to FIG. 2 (2-2-3)],
If the second change animation using the change effect display is performed during the display of the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. -1) -FIG. (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (<1-3-1)-><(1-3-3b2)]]. ”Was also explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a change effect display. The change effect display may always be displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

  In addition, during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative pattern, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times due to the effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, and the display of the variation display is being performed. The display mode of the variation icon may change one or more times depending on the effect by the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (P)]. To play. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, during the display of one variation display of a decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon may change a plurality of times due to the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. ]], A game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, while the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative design, the variation display of the variation icon has succeeded for the first time or the second time, and the variation display is completed. (Hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. 23 (p)],
While displaying the effect icon during the display of one variation display of the decorative pattern, the first change in the display mode of the variation icon fails and the second succeeds, and the variation display ends. (For example, “second case”) [for example, FIG. 24 (a) to FIG. 24 (p)],
While displaying the effect icon during the display of one variation display of the decorative pattern, the first change in the display mode of the variation icon succeeds and the second fails, and the variation display ends. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as “third case”) [for example, FIG. 24 (A) to FIG. 24 (P)],
When the decoration icon is displayed once during the display of the decorative pattern, the change of the display state of the variable icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variable display ends ( (Hereinafter referred to as “fourth case”) [for example, FIG. 23 (A) to FIG. 23 (P)],
In the third case, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol pattern than the fourth case [for example, it is easier to make a big hit in the change display or the subsequent change display]
In the second case, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the third case [for example, it is easier to win big hits in the change display or the subsequent change display]
The first case is characterized in that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easier to be determined and displayed than the second case [for example, it is easier to win big hits in the change display or the subsequent change display]. Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  The description of the game table here is a case where the display mode of the variation icon is changed only twice in the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration pattern once. This is a limitation on how easy it is to win.

  In addition, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decoration symbol, and the effect is displayed during the display of the variation display. A game table characterized in that the display mode of the variation icon may change one or more times in a state where no icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (p)]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red],
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in the certain color,
The game table according to claim 2, wherein the variation icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside an edge line] displayed in the certain color. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the region displayed in the certain color, or may be a region displayed entirely in the certain color. Further, the variation icon of the second display mode may be a part of the region displayed in the certain color, or may be a region displayed entirely in the certain color.

  Further, the certain aspect may be a display aspect using a certain character or a display aspect using a certain kind of pattern.

  In addition, “the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 77 (1) to FIG. 12 (12), example shown in FIG. 30, etc.]”. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over the continuous symbol variation display.

Further, “the display means is a means in which a third change animation may be displayed,
The third change animation is an animation that produces an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without the effect of another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. ,
The third change animation is an animation [for example, FIG. 79 (E 2) to FIG. 3 (E 3-2) in which the effect image [eg, smoke image] of the certain aspect [eg, red] is displayed at least. ] A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays the third change animation. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. May be.

In addition, the “variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode],
An effect of changing the variation icon of the sixth display mode by an effect icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When the game is executed, the display mode of the variation icon may change to the second display mode [for example, red display mode] [for example, FIG. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, when the effect that changes the variation icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variation icon always changes to the second display mode. May be.

Further, “the display means is a means in which a fourth change animation may be displayed,
The fourth change animation is an animation that produces an effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon [for example, FIG. 77 (9) to FIG. 11 (11), FIG. 20 (c) to FIG. FIG. 20 (C) to FIG. 20 (F) etc.]
The display means is a means in which an invariant animation may be displayed,
The invariant animation is an animation that produces an effect that does not change the display mode of the variation icon [for example, FIG. 77 (4-1) to FIG. 6 (6), FIG. ] A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays the fourth change animation. The display unit may be a unit that always displays an invariant animation.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ”Was also explained.

  Next, the icon change effect will be further described. The icon change effect here changes not only the hold icon and the change icon but also the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the notice icon, the icon of the mini game, and the icon of the icon change notice. Production.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of decorative symbol variation display executed in the present embodiment. FIG. 31A shows the flow of decorative symbol variation display that is not reached and does not reach a reach state. FIG. 4B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol that becomes a big hit or loses after reaching the reach state.

  In FIG. 31 (a), after the decorative symbol variation display is started (variation start), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped through the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. The flow is shown. In the following description, the stop order of decorative symbols is, in principle, left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol, but is not limited to this. In addition, the first stop and the second stop may be performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the pre-read notice), the mini-game, the pseudo-ream, etc. The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of change to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are respectively “( 11) "in some cases. In the following explanation, “Diagram XX (11) -1”, “Diagram XX (11) -2”... Etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. In addition, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 31A, there are cases where effects that can be combined as various effects can be performed during the period indicated by “(11)” (for example, a gusset notice). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or the period from the third stop to the final stop, pseudo-gap staging, chance notices by the same color (same type) symbol stop (pre-reading notice), etc. There are cases where you can This is a concept that can be applied to each effect example of the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 31 (b) shows that after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (start of variation), the decorative symbol is lost or the big hit through the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the reach effect. It shows the flow from the final stop in the manner of, until the end of the jackpot game. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation until the reach state is formed is represented by the period “(1)”, and the period from the reach state is formed to the transition to the SP reach is represented by the period “(2)”. The period from the transition to SP reach to the time when the reach effect is derived is represented by the period “(3)”, and the period from the time when the reach effect is derived until the final stop is indicated by “(4)”. The period from the final stop to the end of the big hit game may be represented by the period “(5)”. In the following description, “Diagram XX (2) -1”, “Diagram XX (2) -2”, as branch numbers in the drawings, for the effects performed in the example of a big hit or loss after reaching the reach state, "Fig. XX (3) -1", "Fig. XX (3) -2", etc. may be used, and examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. In the description of the present embodiment, during the period “(1)”, various notices including a mini-game, a pre-reading notice, and the like, and effects such as pseudo-reams may be performed, and during the period “(2)”. In some cases, notices or group notices may be given by displaying normal reach or cut-in images, and during the period of “(3)”, chances advance notices during SP reach, notices by displaying cut-in images, etc. In the period of “(4)”, there may be fluctuation fluctuation, revival jackpot effect, wipe display, etc., and in the period of “(5)”, the effect during the jackpot game is performed, There is a case where a probability change notification, a reserved resort notification, or the like is performed during a game. In the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each executed notice and effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice and effect are executed. Moreover, it may be configured such that these notices and effects may be performed in combination. In this case, even if one notice (effect) is overlapped with the other notice (effect). Good. Moreover, in the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the portions described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

  32 to 37 are diagrams showing step-by-step changing effects centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 are effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. Production can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 32 to 37, although the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided, these are not shown, but are shown in FIGS. The effect example may be an effect example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. 32 to 37, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 represent common components when the same reference numerals used so far are used. Even if different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and the technical idea shown in other drawings. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  The description in FIGS. 31 to 37 can be applied to any effect example in this specification, but is preferably applied to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 31.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode is taking action on the hold icon.

  First, in FIG. 32A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 2” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 7”) is displayed. Stop is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Α (a), but may be displayed.

  In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and various displays such as icons and mini items are performed on the right base icon bIr. In FIG. Character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a kind of display of a production icon and a kind of icon change notice display. The navigation character is a display for notifying that one of the icons may change, or one of the icons may actually change due to an animation using the navigation character.

  The Ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32A is displayed in a default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. A plurality of types of display modes are prepared for the Ninja navigation character NJ, and the default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, and may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. In addition, as the above-described plurality of types of display modes, as a mode representing the player's advantage and the expectation degree of jackpot, a white or no pattern mode (A mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode) ), Green or rhombus pattern (C), red or lattice pattern (D), gold or vertical pattern (E), iridescent or horizontal pattern ( Fth aspect) is prepared. Among these modes, the mode in which the player's advantage and the expectation of jackpot are the lowest are the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, the D mode, and the E mode. It becomes higher in order, and the Fth aspect is the aspect where the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit are the highest. Here, the player's advantage is that the player is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, the probability change state and / or the time-short state), the premiere effect is likely to be started, May be easy to start. Moreover, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit, it is included that an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit is easily executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear. Further, in addition to the color and pattern, the player's advantage and the big hit expectation may be represented by a difference in size or number.

  Further, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  In FIG. 32 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the number of holds in FIG. Therefore, the navigation character NJ of the white ninja may be displayed even during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, and may be displayed even when the number of suspensions is zero. is there. Note that even if the navigation character NJ of a ninja in other display modes (for example, a red display mode) is displayed during a period when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, In some cases, it is displayed during a period of zero. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed during a period in which the number of holds is zero. In this case, the ninja navigation character NJ of a display mode other than the default display mode during a period in which the number of holds is 1 or more and the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner (stop display or fixed display period). May also be displayed. In addition, during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, the display may be limited to the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of holds.

  In addition, a second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (0) -1, and the hold number in FIG. 1 and the hold number in FIG. It is reported that there is.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -1, there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed for a moment. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in FIG. In FIG. 32 (11) -2, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the decorative symbol variation display is started from the state where the number of holds is 0, a message display “I welcome” is added to the Ninja navigation character NJ, and the variation start is celebrated. Further, in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the moving animation of the hold icon in FIG. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. This variation icon h0 is also a default (white) display mode.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -3, there is one ball again in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -3, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in FIG. 1 is 1. During the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 continues, and the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 32 (11) -4 is performed. In the device 208L, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and four hold icons (first hold icon h11 to fourth hold icon h14) are displayed. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of FIG. It is four. Further, a message display “pending MAX” is added to the navigation character NJ of the ninja. All of the four hold icons are hold icons in a default (white) display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -5, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 7” starts shaking fluctuation. Note that a white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6, the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed. In the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is In FIG. 11 (11) -7, which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the losing, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (11) -8, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed.

In FIG. 32 (11)-1, the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L has started changing the decorative symbol display, and the movement animation of the reserved icon of special figure 1 is completed. doing. As a result, three hold icons, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the second hold number display in the upper right, it is informed that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 3 and the hold number in FIG. 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and this navigation character is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. The ninja navigation character NJ has been displayed in an initial posture facing front until now, but the ninja navigation character NJ may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats certain actions).

In the following FIG. 32 (11)-2, the message display “Attention to me” is added to the Ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. In other words, the start timing of the icon change effect here is after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, but may be simultaneously with the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Also, it can be said that after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and before the first stop of the decorative symbol variation display, or after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, but before the start of the reach effect. . This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ, and in the next FIG. 32 (11) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ that has been displayed in the effect icon display area DIS until then. However, in the same figure (11) -4, the white ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. The shuriken mode is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (in this case, white). In FIG. 32 (11) -5, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, white). The flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the change icon display area CIS, and even the change icon h0 may be difficult to visually recognize. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0. In FIG. 32 (11) -6, the effect image EHI disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any one of the three hold icons h11 to h13, and the three hold icons h11. All of h13 remain the default (white) display mode. As described above, even if the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, it may not only change but also may not change. Of the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered with the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed. Further, even if the shuriken flies to a completely wrong place, disappears in the middle, or reaches the effect display area 208d, the effect image EHI may not occur. Will also be a failed anime. However, the icon may change even if it is not covered with the effect image EHI, and if the icon changes, a successful animation is obtained.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -7, the white ninja navigation character NJ that has been moved to the upper left corner has returned to the production icon display area DIS and is called “Sumane” on the right base icon bIr. A failure message display has been added. The icon change effect (animation using the navigation character NJ of the white ninja) is an effect performed during the period of FIGS. 32 (11) -2 to 32 (11) -7, but moved from the effect icon display area DIS. It can be regarded as an effect that is performed only during the operation ((11) -3 to (11) -6) in the figure, or until the effect image EHI disappears after the shuriken is thrown (the figure). (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -6 in the figure), or may be regarded as an effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -8, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. 11) -6 is stopped in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 6-6, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (11) -11, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed.

  In FIG. 32 (1)-1, the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L starts the variable display of decorative symbols again. Completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 so far is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. The two hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is informed that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 2 and the hold number in FIG. 2 is 0. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 1) -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and a reach state is formed. The message display “reach” is added to the ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG.

  However, as shown in FIG. 32 (4) -1, in the third stop, “decoration 3” instead of “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and “decoration 2”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing. -"Decoration 2" fluctuates and fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (4) -2, the combination display of the decoration symbol combination “decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2” is performed.

  Here, as with the ninja navigation character NJ, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. It is a display mode. Further, as a plurality of types of display modes in the hold icon, as a display mode of the pre-reading notice, a white or no pattern mode (A mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode), a green or rhombus pattern (C), red or lattice pattern (D), gold or vertical pattern (E), iridescent or horizontal pattern (F) It is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect with the lowest expectation (reliability) of jackpot is the Ath aspect, which increases in the order of the Bth aspect, the Cth aspect, the Dth aspect, and the Eth aspect. As a result, the F-th mode is the mode with the highest degree of expectation for jackpot (for example, the mode for determining jackpot).

  (11) -6 ′ shown at the right end of FIG. 32 is an example different from (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in (11) -5 disappears. Of the two hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the blue display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6 'is an example of a successful animation, but the big hit expectation (reliability) is lower than when the display mode is changed to red.

  32 (11) -6 ″ shown at the right end of FIG. 32 is the same as (11) -6 in FIG. 32 (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in FIG. ) -6 ′ is another example, and among the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ is also an example of a successful animation, and the big hit expectation is higher than the case of changing to a blue display mode (in the case of FIG. 32 (11) -6 ′). Degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

  As described above, in the icon change effect that is an animation using the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode, the icon change may be successful or may fail. The icon change effect that is an animation using the blue (Bth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ is more than the icon change effect that is an animation using the white (Ath aspect) ninja navigation character NJ. In the icon change effect, which is an animation using the green (C-th aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, the probability that the icon change will be successful is increased. The blue (B-th aspect) ninja navigation character NJ is The probability of succeeding in the icon change is higher than the icon change effect that is the animation used.

  Similarly, the variation icons h0 are also provided with a plurality of types of display modes similar to the above-described A-mode to E-mode. Also in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding the big hit in the currently performed variable display, and represents the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit. That is, the mode with the lowest expectation degree (reliability) of jackpot is the A mode, and the B mode, the C mode, the D mode, and the E mode increase in order, The mode of F is the mode with the highest degree of expectation for jackpot (for example, the mode for determining jackpot).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is taking action on the hold icon.

  In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 32 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  33 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in FIG. 33 (0) -1 to (11) in the second column from the left in FIG. 32 (0) -1 to FIG. −3, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are all in the default (white) display mode, and the variation icon h0 is also in the default (white) display mode. Also, in FIG. 33 (11) -2, the message display “Attention to my eyes” is added to the navigation character NJ of the white ninja, and the icon change effect is started. In FIG. Ninja's navigation character NJ has moved to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 33 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered with the effect image EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the entire navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 33 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which was in white display before being covered with the effect image EIH, has changed to a red display. The aspect of the effect image EIH is different from the display aspect of the navigation character NJ after the change, but may be the same aspect (here, red).

  In the following FIG. 33 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. The shuriken mode may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, red). In FIG. 33 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (here, red). The flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the change icon display area CIS, and even the change icon h0 may be difficult to visually recognize. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0. In FIG. 33 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears and only the first hold icon h11 of the three hold icons h11 to h13 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation that always changes one or more of the hold icon and the change icon. Here, the mode to be changed (the mode after the change) may be determined in advance in the same mode as the navigation character NJ, that is, red, or may not be determined in advance until the mode after the change. However, it is changed to a mode in which the reliability of the jackpot increases. Therefore, there may be a case where it is changed to a rainbow-colored form with a big hit. Further, in the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, the animation image may be changed to the same mode as the effect image EHI covering the icon. Note that even an animation using the navigation character NJ of the red ninja may be provided in a case where the animation becomes a failure animation (the icon mode does not change).

  In FIG. 33 (11) -9, the red ninja navigation character NJ that has been moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and “Yayaze” is displayed on the right base icon bIr. The success message display is added. In this example, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect. The icon change effect and the navigation character change effect can also be considered separately. In this case, the navigation character change effect is shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -3 to (11) -5. The icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  33 (11) -10 to FIG. 11 (11) -13, the navigation character NJ of the ninja is in a red display mode, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is also in a red display mode. Except for the above, it is the same as FIG. 32 (11) -8 to FIG. 11 (11) -11 described above, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing "Is fixedly displayed.

  In FIG. 33 (1)-1, the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L has started the variable display of decorative symbols again. Completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the red first hold icon h11 has been displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 33 (1) -1, a red variation icon h0 is displayed. This red variation icon h0 is larger than the variation icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 32 (1) -1. Larger than the hold icon. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in a default (white) display mode. Further, a red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. 11) -3, the second stop is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1 is added with a red message display of “extreme heat” instead of a message display of “reach”.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (2) -2, the savory group notice is started, and at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. , Sabohani is overlapping. Note that the navigation character may not overlap with the navigation character, and the navigation character may overlap with at least part of the navigation character. In addition, Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the message display of “Intense fever”, and conversely, a message display of “Intense heat” may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. In FIG. 33 (2) -3, the red “Ninja” navigation character NJ is added with a red “SP development” message display, and it is informed that it will develop into super reach. In addition, when the savory group notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display. In this example, the hold icon, the change icon, and the navigation character remain without disappearing even when the savory group notice is started. However, when the savory group notice is started, the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4 At the same time, the display of the hold icon disappears, and the change icon h0 may disappear together with the base hs0. The navigation character may also disappear. Furthermore, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (3) -1, the screen is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman face each other. Further, the message display “swordsman reach” is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja. At least a part of the enemy swordsman is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, but at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the enemy swordsman.

  With the development of super reach, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -2, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a deca button image 136ab which is a large image imitating the chance button 136. The decabutton image 136ab overlaps all of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman displayed as the super reach effect display, and the Yoshimune and the swordsman are invisible. The big button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. Furthermore, the big button image 136ab overlaps at least a part of the red variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. In addition, in the decabutton image 136ab, a character “push” that facilitates the operation is displayed in a large size in accordance with the size of the decabutton image 136ab. Further, a message display “Deca button” is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja in place of the message display of “Swordsman Reach”.

  In FIG. 33 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136ab disappears and the display is switched to the display of the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize compared to before the overlap. The red Ninja Navi character NJ has a message display of “Strong Cut-in” instead of a message of “Deca Button”, but a message display of “Swordsman Reach” is added again. Also good.

  Normally, an operation effective period for receiving the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and a response effect (here, display of the strong cut-in image CIs is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. ), Or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation effective period elapses. It may be.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene where the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy swordsman is displayed together with the letters “Win”. At the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, the “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and the symbol display device 208L is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2”. Is notified.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second reserved number display is restored. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a temporarily stopped state due to fluctuations in shaking. . In addition, although no message display is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja, a message display “Big hit” may be added. If the hold icon or the change icon has disappeared, it is returned and displayed at this timing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is fixedly displayed. The red fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display. Note that the red fluctuation icon h0 is a true notice. The red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variable display started in FIG. 33 (1) -1 corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 at the timing of FIG. 33 (11) -8) is ended. The red ninja navigation character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variation display ends and is confirmed, the red ninja navigation character NJ returns to the default display mode.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of icon change notice display selection and mode change.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 34 is an example of selecting the type of icon change notice display during the demonstration display. In FIG. 34 (0) -1, the decorative symbol variation display is performed with the special figure hold number being zero. Is finished, and the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Also, a Tono-sama navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1 is displayed in a default display mode.

  The first decorative symbol display is displayed when a new symbol variation display is not started until a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed symbol suspension symbol is displayed while the special symbol is on hold. A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, the symbol demo display that continues to display the combination of decorative symbols that have been stopped and the symbol variation display that has been stopped, and the combination of decorative symbols that have been stopped disappears. There is an animation demo display in which a dedicated animation is displayed by switching from the background screen. Note that a dedicated background screen may also be displayed in the symbol demo display. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, an animation demo display is displayed, but an animation demo display may be displayed via the symbol demo display, or the symbol demo display. The animation demo display may be displayed without going through. In the animation demo display shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in large size is displayed, and it is informed at the bottom that the menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. Yes.

  In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the chance button 136 is operated, and the menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit red. . In the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  When the down key 137d is operated once while the menu screen is displayed, the cursor icon cs that has been displayed in the effect customization icon so far moves down by one as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -4. This time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is lit red. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, a character selection screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5. Is displayed. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, the Tono-sama character, the Bancho character, and the ninja character are all displayed in the default display mode, and the currently-selected Tosama character is displayed. A selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF moves and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -7, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a character selection determination screen, and FIG. Of these three characters, only the ninja character is displayed in a large size, and a large message message “Let's leave it to me” is added. Thereafter, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L temporarily returns to the screen before the animation demo display is displayed, and is placed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 34 (0) -8. Is displayed with a white ninja navigation character NJ with the message display of “Let me know”.

  In the selection of the character by the player, the type of character can be selected, but the display mode of each character cannot be selected, and the display mode of each character is the default display mode. However, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed. When the character is selected, the character is displayed in a mode different from the default display mode from the beginning. It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, or the default display when the character, which is the default display mode on the character selection screen, is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIG. It may be automatically changed to a character having a different form from the form, and may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the beginning in a form different from the default display form, or the default display until the character selection decision screen. When the character that was the mode is displayed in the production icon display area DIS, the default display mode It may in some cases automatically changes the character of the different aspects. In these cases, the display mode is determined internally by lottery regarding the effects.

  The second example from the left in FIG. 34 is an example in which the type of icon change notice display is selected from the decorative symbol variation display. Even in the case of (0) -1 in the second column from the left in FIG. The decorative symbol variation display is finished in the state where the number of reserved items is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 34, (0) -1 to (11) -2 in the second row are the same as those in FIG. 32 (0) -1 to (11) -2. There is a change display of decorative symbols. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and the navigation character BC having the default display mode is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the navigation character is determined to be the longest character, and a message display of “Yascha” is added to the longest navigation character BC.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -4, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In this example, it is possible to change the character of the navigation character by operating the cross key during the change until the first stop is performed with the change display of the decorative symbol, and until then, the tutorial display is displayed. When the stop is performed, the above tutorial display disappears. Note that the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the change may be possible until the second stop is performed, may be possible until the shift to the reach state, or from the start of the change display. It may be possible for a certain period of time, or it may be possible until the decorative symbol variation display is completed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 34 (11) -7, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 2” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Yes. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. 34 (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 34 to (11) -10 in the fourth column (right end) in FIG. 34, (11) in the second column in FIG. 32 (0) -1 -2 is the same as above, the decorative symbol variation display is performed once, and then the second variation of the decorative symbol variation display is started. All three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 34 (11) -10, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display of “Attention to me” is added. Here, a change effect for the ninja navigation character NJ is started instead of an icon change effect for the hold icon and the change icon.

  In FIG. 34 (11) -11, the white ninja navigation character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, and at least a part of the ninja navigation character NJ on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS Covered by the effect image EIH, the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that the navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 34 (11) -12, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ that was in the white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Thus, the display mode changes to red. It should be noted that the effect image EIH may be the same as the display mode of the navigation character NJ after the change (in this case, red). The navigation character NJ that has been changed to a red display mode is added with a message display such as “Atsuze”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. 11) -14, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed again, and in the following (11) -15, the third stop Stopping is performed, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing, swings and fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 34 (11) -16, the combination display of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed. In this example, in the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon or the change icon is not started.

  In FIG. 34 (1)-1, the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L starts the variable display of decorative symbols again. Completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Whether the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, or the variable icon h0, the display mode is the default (white) display mode. Further, a red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 and still another example of the navigation character change effect.

  In FIG. 35 (1) -2 continuing from FIG. 34 (1) -1, an icon change effect is started. In the next FIG. 33 (11) -3, a red ninja navigation character NJ is displayed in the effect icon display area. Moving from the DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 35 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left is throwing three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. The shuriken mode may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, red). In FIG. 35 (1) -4, three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS is Covered by a flash effect image EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two hold icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0 is covered with the flash effect image EHI, and the icons h11, h12, and h0 are more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of these three icons h11, h12, and h0 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, red). Note that the flash effect image EHI covers only the variable icon display area CIS in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and only the variable icon h0 may be difficult to view. In FIG. 35 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and only the change icon h0 among the three icons h11, h12, h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size also changes. It is getting bigger. It should be noted that the size may be changed as it is, or the color may be changed. Conversely, the color may be the same and the size may be increased. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ here is a successful animation. In FIG. 35 (1) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which has been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and “Yayaze” is displayed on the right base icon bIr. The success message display is added.

  35 (1) 7-10 to FIG. 4 (4) -2 are the same as FIG. 33 (1) -2 to FIG. 4 (4) -2 described above, and reach a savory state. A group announcement was made, and then a super-reach was developed, and a deca button production was performed during the swordsman reach. Eventually, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of jackpot decorations Is fixedly displayed. The Ninja navigation character NJ that was in the red display mode returns to the white display mode at the timing of the final display.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 2” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Yes. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. 35 (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 35 to (11) -4 in the fourth column (right end) in FIG. 35, (11) in the second column in FIG. 33 (0) -1 -4, the decorative symbol variation display is performed once, and the second decorative symbol variation display is started. All three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 35 (11) -2, the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed only on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display “Look at me” is added. Yes. In FIG. 35 (11) -3, the integrated white ninja navigation character NJ moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered with the three effect images EIH, and the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that the navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -5, the three effect images EIH disappear, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which was an integral white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH, has the same white color. Has increased in the body. That is, the same number of white ninja navigation characters NJ as the number of reserved special figures are displayed. The number of effect images EIH is also the same as the number of reserved special drawings.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ throws shurikens one by one toward the effect display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the effect display area 208d. Is going on. The shuriken mode may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, white). In FIG. 35 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, white). The flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the change icon display area CIS, and even the change icon h0 may be difficult to visually recognize. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears and only the first hold icon h11 of the three hold icons h11 to h13 is changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. In FIG. 35 (11) -8, at least a part of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered by three or more effect images EIH, and the three white ninja navigation characters are displayed. Each NJ is more difficult to see than before being covered. Each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappear, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappear, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS includes An integral white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and a success message “Yet's!” Is displayed on the right base icon bIr. Note that only one of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ may be the red ninja navigation character NJ. In addition, the position of the navigation character NJ of the red ninja may be the right end corresponding to the position of the changed hold icon, and by doing so, the icon that is to be changed in the mode and display position of the navigation character NJ The display mode after the change can be suggested (notice) by the navigation character NJ.

  In this example, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect, and the icon change effect and the navigation character change effect can be considered separately. The effects are shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -3 to (11) -5, and the icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -6 to (11) -9. In this example, in FIG. 35 (11) -9, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ return to the integrated white ninja navigation character NJ, but the three white ninja navigation characters NJ. NJ may continue to be displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 and another example of the effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (11) -10 following FIG. 35 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is performed. In the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 7 Is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 11 (11) -11, the second stop is performed. In the right symbol display area 208c, “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed again, and the same figure continues. In (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of losing, swings and fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 36 (11) -13, the combination display of the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed. In this example, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the change icon is also performed within the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed.

  The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 36 (11) -4 ′ is an example different from FIG. 35 (11) -4 continued from FIG. 35 (11) -3, and at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is shown. The navigation character is covered with a plurality of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the entire navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -5 ', all of the plurality of effect images EIH disappear, and a navigation character that is changed to a red display mode and has a larger display size is displayed. Here, a plurality of modes (color and size) change at the same time, but a plurality of modes (color and size) may change at different timings. Further, only the display size of the ninja navigation character NJ may change greatly while remaining white. The size of the display corresponds to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot, and the larger the display size, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot.

  In the following FIG. 36 (11) -6 ', the red big Ninja navigation character NJ throws a shuriken toward the effect display area 208d. The shuriken mode may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, red). In FIG. 36 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only part of the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (in this case, red).

  In FIG. 36 (11) -8 ', the effect image EHI disappears and only the first hold icon h11 out of the three hold icons h11 to h13 is displayed from the default (white) display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ. The display mode changes to the same red as the mode. In FIG. 36 (11) -8, the large red ninja navigation character NJ is covered with a large number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the red big ninja navigation character NJ may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the whole may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -9 ′, a large number of effect images EIH disappear, the red large ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappears, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS A white ninja navigation character NJ that has been returned to the size of is displayed, and a success message “Yataze” is added on the right base icon bIr.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a notice animation using a navigation character. In the third column from the left in FIG. 36 to (11) -1 to (1) -3 in FIG. 36, the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3, but decreases from 3 to 2. Except for the point, it is the same as (11) -8 at the lower end of the third row in FIG. 35 to (11) -2 in the fourth row in FIG. 35, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. In the display device 208L, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and two hold icons h11 and h12 having a default (white) display mode are displayed. Also, in FIG. 36 (1) -2, a white ninja navigation character NJ with a message display “Look at me” is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. .

  In the following FIG. 36 (1) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 36 (1) -4, the mini game is started. That is, a large message display is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner, indicating that if the chance button 136 is pressed and the third roll of the dice comes out, the probability of a big hit is high. Subsequently, in FIG. 36 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect is started. . In addition, the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 36 (1) -5 is added with a “press” message display prompting the user to press the chance button 136. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 36 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (1) -7, an image of the third eye of the dice is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the navigation character NJ of the white ninja displays “Yashua”. A message display is added first, followed by a “high heat” message display (FIG. 36 (1) -8). In this example, it is a mini game. In FIG. 36 (11) -9, the third eye image of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner returns to the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. . A message of “Intense heat” is added to the navigation character NJ of the ninja who has returned to the production icon display area DIS. The animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIGS. 36 (1) -4 to (1) -9 described above is not an animation for changing an icon, but a decoration pattern currently being performed. It is a notice animation about the big hit in the variable display. Here, it is predicted that the possibility of a big hit is high because the third image of the dice is displayed, and this is a notice animation by a mini game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L indicated by 11-11, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (2) -2, the savory group notice is started. Before the start of the Sabohani group notice, or at the same time as the start of the Sabohani group notice, and after the start of the Sabohani group notice, a change effect of the navigation character is performed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. The ninja navigation character NJ, which has been in a white display mode, has changed to a red display mode. The change of the navigation character may be performed when a mini game is won or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini game. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0, which was the default display mode until then, has also changed, and the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. The display mode is changed to a combination. The change of the display mode of the variation icon may be performed when a mini game is won or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini game. In FIG. 36 (2) -2, a red “icon change” message display is added on the right base icon bIr. The change timing of the display mode of the variation icon h0 is after the end of the change effect of the navigation character, but may be before the start of the change effect of the navigation character, or even during the execution of the change effect of the navigation character. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (2) -2, at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is overlapped with sabotani. Note that the navigation character may not overlap with the navigation character, and the navigation character may overlap with at least part of the navigation character. Further, the message display of “icon change” overlaps at least part of the savory, but conversely, the savohani may overlap at least part of message display of the “icon change”. In addition, although the change icon h0 and the savohani whose display mode has changed are not overlapped, the savohani may overlap at least a part of the change icon h0. May overlap. When the savory group notice is started, the decorative symbol display is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

  In FIG. 36 (2) -3, a red “Premier” message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, thereby informing that the premier effect is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -1, the super reach (swordsman reach) effect is started before the premier effect, and the screen where the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed. Yes. Further, the message display “swordsman reach” is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja. At least a part of the enemy swordsman is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, but at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the enemy swordsman. Further, at least a part of the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is overlapped with the enemy swordsman, but at least a part of the enemy swordsman may be overlapped with the variation icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -2, the premier effect is started in the middle of the swordsman reach effect. The premier effect here is an effect in which the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an image in which a character V is on a motorcycle and a red letter V is displayed in the center of the screen. The main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman meet each other, and the images overlap, making the display of the swordsman reach production more difficult to see than before the overlap. With the premiere performance, the jackpot is confirmed or almost confirmed.

  When the premier effect ends, the image that has been displayed large in the center of the screen so far is reduced and redisplayed as a variation icon h0 (FIG. 36 (3) -5). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene where the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy swordsman is displayed together with the letters “win”, and the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208L “Decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2”. At least a part of the redisplayed variation icon h0 overlaps the display of “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -1 following FIG. 36 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second reserved number display is restored. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a temporarily stopped state due to fluctuations in shaking. . In addition, although no message display is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja, a message display “Big hit” may be added. A variation icon h0 is also displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -2, the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed. The change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display. The red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  In FIG. 36 (1) -4 to FIG. 36 (1) -9, while the white ninja navigation character NJ is used, not the animation for changing the icon but the notice animation by the mini game is executed. Even with animations that change icons, mini-games that may succeed or fail may be performed. That is, if the mini game succeeds, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game fails, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ. The white ninja navigation character NJ remains the same as the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  Here, to summarize the animation that can be executed, it is an animation using the navigation character NJ of the white ninja, the animation that may change the change icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode (No. A Anime) and anime that have nothing to do with the change of mode (for example, a preview animation) in the first place, and as a result, the animation that does not change from the default mode to the notification mode (B-th anime) can do. Also, the animation using the red Ninja navigation character NJ, which always changes the change icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode (C-th animation), and is completely related to the mode change in the first place. It is also possible to classify the animation into animations (D animation) that are animations that do not change from the default mode to the notification mode as a result. Furthermore, changing the display mode of the navigation character can be classified into a successful animation (Eth animation) and a failed animation (Fth animation). In addition, even for the same announcement animation, the announcement animation (Gth animation) that does not change the display mode of the navigation character and the announcement animation (No. H) that does not change the display mode of the fluctuation icon or the hold icon Can also be classified. Further, there is an animation (first animation) that may change the change icon or the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode without using the navigation character. Examples of the first animation include the animation shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E, the animation shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E, and FIGS. 22A to 22E. Like the animation shown in (e), an animation in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes corresponds.

  Here, the G-th animation and the E-th animation may be the same in that the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used, or a part (for example, the first part). (Including a part) may be an animation performed in the same manner. The Gth animation may be an animation that does not change the change icon or the hold icon from the default mode to the notification mode.

  In addition, the animations of the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be the same in that the navigation character NJ of the red ninja is used. In addition, background images and some scenes may be used. The display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ may have the same type, color, shape, or size.

  The Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. Further, the C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner, including the first part, and may be performed in different ways from the middle.

  In addition, the Ath animation and the Cth animation may be the same in that the navigation character is used, or the background image and some scenes may be shared. Alternatively, the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the navigation character may have the same type, color, shape, and size.

  Further, the Ath animation and the Cth animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. In addition, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in different manners from the middle.

  Further, the D-th animation and the H-th animation may be animations in which a certain matter is common. That is, at least a navigation character may be displayed in common. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the display (for example, character and icon) displayed separately from the navigation character has the same type, color, shape, and size. It may be.

  Further, the D-th animation and the H-th animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the D-th animation and the H-th animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in a different manner from the middle.

  Furthermore, the example of changing the hold icon in FIGS. 32 to 37 may change the change icon instead of the hold icon, and the example of changing the change icon in FIGS. 32 to 37 may be changed to the change icon. The hold icon may be changed.

  Also, none of the examples shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 is an example of changing the mini-item icon or the like displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, but instead of the hold icon or the change icon, the mini-item icon For example, various icons may be changed.

In the above description, “a game machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) change icon h0, or a white meter rising item UpI icon]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (pre-reading notice mode) hold icon h11, a red fluctuation icon h0, or a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] of the first aspect [for example, white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect],
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game]
The first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ to (11) -7 icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9 icon change animation]
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9, 35 (1) -2 to icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -6]
The game table characterized in that the certain display is a display [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -5 to FIG. 34 (0) -8] selected by a player from a plurality of types of displays. Was explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the player can be entertained by the advance notice given by the display selected by the player.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. The animation always changes the icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be means for always displaying the first animation, or means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

In addition, the “first aspect is a default aspect,
The first aspect is an aspect that is most likely to be displayed in the certain display as compared to other aspects including the second aspect.
When the player selects the certain display, the first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -6 to FIG. 34 (0) -8]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the certain display is a display that may be selected even during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is performed [for example, FIG. 34 (11) -2 to FIG. ], A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  For example, although it can always be selected in the period before the reach state after the decorative symbol variation display is started, it may not be selectable in the period after the reach state.

  Further, the certain display may be a display that can be selected even during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. That is, it may be possible to select at any time over the entire period during which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be a display that is always selectable.

  The certain display may be a display that is always selected during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

In addition, “the certain display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain condition is a condition that a demonstration display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -2]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, a plurality of conditions may be prepared as the certain condition. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that the game is in a big hit game (for example, a big hit game with probability change, a big hit game without probability change, a round, or an interval between rounds) It may be a condition that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without a big hit game. It may be the condition.

  Further, only one condition may be prepared as the certain condition. This one condition may be a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is being played, or the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be a condition that it has reached the number of times that the game has been performed, or a condition that the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without hitting the big hit game.

  Further, the demonstration display is a display that is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. More specifically, it is a display that starts when a predetermined time elapses after the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where there is no special symbol hold, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Examples include a demo display and a moving image demo display in which an animation including a game console title is displayed. Note that a still image demo display may be displayed instead of the video demo display.

  The certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description, “a game machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) change icon h0, or a white meter rising item UpI icon]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (pre-reading notice mode) hold icon h11, a red fluctuation icon h0, or a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] of the first aspect [for example, white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means uses the second display [for example, the red display] (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) [for example, the second navigation character NJ of a red ninja]. It is a means that can display animation,
The display means is a third animation for changing the first display to the second display [for example, the character change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -4 to (11) -5, FIG. 11) -11 to character change animation shown in FIG. 11 (11) -12, FIG. 35 (11) -4 to character change animation shown in FIG. 11 (5), FIG. 36 (11) -4 ′ to FIG. (11) -5 'is a means capable of displaying the character change animation]
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game]
The first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ to (11) -7 icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9 icon change animation]
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9, Icon change animations shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6, icon change animations shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9, and FIGS. 36 (11) -4 ′. ~ (11) -9 'icon change animation shown in FIG.
The second animation may be an animation that may be displayed after the display of the third animation [for example, the icons shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6]. A game stand characterized by a change animation]. Was explained.

  According to this game table, attention can be paid to the certain display.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. The animation always changes the icon to the second icon.

  Further, the second display may be displayed from the beginning in addition to a case where the second display is changed from the first display by the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (start display) in the second mode.

  Further, the second animation may be an animation that always starts to be displayed after the display of the third animation is started.

  Further, the display of the second animation may be started before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the third animation is displayed on the second display different from the second display of the second animation that has been displayed first. The first display may be changed.

  The first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, after the first display is displayed, a scene for changing the first display to the second display is displayed. Further, the first display may be displayed at the same time as the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. There may be.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. Further, the display means may be means for always displaying the first animation, or means for always displaying the second animation. Furthermore, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

  Further, the third animation is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -1 to (11) -13, Decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -1 to 36 (11) -13 and Decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 36 (11) -4 ′ to (11) -9 ′. A game table characterized in that display may be started in display. ”Was also explained.

  The display of the third animation may always be started in the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

  In addition, the third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 34 (1) -1 to 35 (4) -2]. A game table characterized in that display may be started in a different decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 34 (11) -9 to (11) -16]. ”Was also explained.

  For example, the third animation may be displayed in a decorative symbol variation display prior to the decorative symbol variation display in which the second animation display is started. The scene to be changed to the second display and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative design variation display, or may be displayed in different decorative design variation display. Good.

  The display of the third animation may always be started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

In addition, the third animation is an animation in which a mini-game with success or failure may be performed and the first display is changed to the second display by succeeding in the mini-game. ,
The display means is means capable of displaying a fourth animation,
The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the fourth animation is an animation in which the mini-game is performed, the mini-game fails, and the first display does not change to the second display. ”Was also explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying the fourth animation.

In addition, “the display means is means capable of displaying a fifth animation,
The fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display,
The fifth animation is an animation related to the notice [for example, the animation shown in FIG. 36 (1) -2 to (1) -9].
The fifth animation and the third animation are animations in which a certain item [for example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used] is a common animation. . ”Was also explained.

  Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon.

  Also, examples of “certain matters” include characters that appear, background images, some scenes, and displays that have the same color, shape, and size.

  The fifth animation and the third animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in different manners from the middle.

  Further, the “notice” mentioned here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Moreover, even if it does not connect directly to the big hit, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. The “production” here may be a SP reach production with a high degree of reliability. That is, the “notice” mentioned here may be a notice of a notice regarding a big hit.

  The display means may be means for always displaying the fifth animation.

In the above description, “a game machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) change icon h0, or a white meter rising item UpI icon]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (pre-reading notice mode) hold icon h11, a red fluctuation icon h0, or a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] of the first aspect [for example, white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means uses the second display [for example, the red display] (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) [for example, the second navigation character NJ of a red ninja]. It is a means that can display animation,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game]
The first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ to (11) -7 icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9 icon change animation]
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9, 35 (1) -2 to icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -6]
The display means is means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display,
The sixth animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon,
The game machine characterized in that the sixth animation is an animation relating to a notice [for example, the animation shown in FIG. 36 (1) -2 to FIG. 36 (1) -9]. Was explained.

  Here, although the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, the first display may be an animation in which the first display does not change to the second display.

  Further, the “notice” mentioned here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Moreover, even if it does not connect directly to the big hit, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. The “production” here may be a SP reach production with a high degree of reliability. That is, the “notice” mentioned here may be a notice of a notice regarding a big hit.

  The sixth animation may be an animation related to a tutorial instead of an animation related to a notice. For example, it may be an animation explaining the production, or an animation explaining an operation method (for example, how to make a left strike or a right strike).

  In addition, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations that share certain matters. That is, at least “first display” is displayed in common. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the “first display” may be of type, color, shape or size. May be common.

  The sixth animation and the first animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in a different manner from the middle.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be means for always displaying the first animation, or means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be means for surely displaying a sixth animation using the first display.

The display means is means capable of displaying a seventh animation using the second display,
The seventh animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon,
The seventh animation is an animation related to a notice,
The game table, wherein the seventh animation is easier to display than the sixth animation. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which a certain matter is common. That is, at least “second display” is displayed in common. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, or the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the “second display”, such as type, color, shape, or size. May be common.

  The seventh animation and the second animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in a different manner from the middle.

  The first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least “common display” is displayed in common. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the type (color, shape, size, etc.) of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from the “certain display” May be common.

  The first animation and the second animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. In addition, the first animation and the second animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner including the first part, and may be animations that are performed differently from the middle.

  In addition, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations that share certain matters. That is, at least “common display” is displayed in common. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the type (color, shape, size, etc.) of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from the “certain display” May be common.

  The sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations that are partly performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in different manners from the middle.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a seventh animation using the second display.

In the above description, “a game machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11, a white (default) change icon h0, or a white meter rising item UpI icon]. And
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (pre-reading notice mode) hold icon h11, a red fluctuation icon h0, or a red meter rising item UpIr icon]. ,
The display means displays a certain display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] of the first aspect [for example, white (default) aspect]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect],
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game]
The first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ to (11) -7 icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9 icon change animation]
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9, 35 (1) -2 to icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -6]
The display means is means capable of displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display.
The eighth animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E or FIG. 22A. A game table characterized by being an animation shown in FIG. (E) or an animation shown in FIG. 22 (A) to (O). Was explained.

  Here, the eighth animation is an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the second icon. However, the eighth animation is displayed on the first icon. It may be an animation in which there is a case where is changed to the second icon and a case where it is not changed.

  The display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be means for always displaying the first animation, or means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be means for surely displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display.

In addition, “one or more icons may be displayed as the first icon,
One or more icons may be displayed as the second icon,
The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second icon is an icon having higher reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change the plurality of displayed first icons to the second icon, and the second animation is displayed. There may be an animation in which a plurality of the first icons are changed to the second icons.

  Note that one or more icons may be displayed as the first icon, and one or more icons may be displayed as the second icon.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon [for example, a blue (pre-read notice mode) hold icon h11, a blue fluctuation icon h0, or a blue meter rising item UpIb icon. ],
One or more icons may be displayed as the third icon,
The third icon is an icon having higher reliability as a notice regarding the jackpot than the first icon,
The second icon is an icon having higher reliability as a notice regarding the jackpot than the third icon,
The first animation may be an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the third icon [e.g., FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. The game stand, which is the icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7]. ”Was also explained.

  Note that one or more icons may be displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the third icon.

  In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the third icon. ”Was also explained.

The display means is means capable of displaying a first unchanged animation using the first display,
The first invariant animation is an animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon although the first display is displayed [for example, FIG. ) -2 to (11) -6 to (11) -7 shown in FIG. 11 (11) -7]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is , An animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be means for always displaying the first invariant animation using the first display.

  In addition, the first invariant animation is halfway [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to (11) -5] is the same animation as the first animation. Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the display means is means capable of displaying a second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation is displayed with the second display, It may be an animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon. Still further, the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second animation halfway.

  Alternatively, on the contrary, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon.

  Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. May be.

  Further, the failed animation may be an animation in which an effect display is displayed, and an animation in which the display mode has not changed even though the effect display is displayed. That is, the animation in which the first icon does not change to the second icon without displaying the effect display may be excluded. However, the failed animation may include an animation in which the effect icon is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon. Also explained.

In addition, “the display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The first icon is a first hold icon [for example, white (default) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1],
The game table characterized in that the second icon is a second hold icon [for example, a red (pre-reading notice mode) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 33 (11) -8]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the display means is a means in which a fluctuation icon may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon related to a decorative pattern variation display being executed,
The first icon is a first variation icon [for example, a white (default) variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2, etc.]
The game table characterized in that the second icon is a second variation icon [for example, a red variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 35 (1) -5, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. A game stand characterized in that a big hit symbol pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. The big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, “the first display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 32 (0) -1 to FIG. 32 (4) -2]. A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays, or the predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays. Even during the period, the display may disappear temporarily.

  Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. The second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays, or the predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays. Even if it is between, the display which may disappear temporarily may be sufficient.

  Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. The certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays, or between the predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays. Even a display that may disappear temporarily may be used.

  The first display may be a display that is always displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of holds is 0 [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -1, FIG. (0) -8]. To play. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed in a certain period, and the certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of holds is zero. Good.

  In the certain period, the first display may be displayed without fail.

  In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first aspect and the second aspect are different from each other in color, pattern, size, and shape. ”Was also explained.

  Therefore, it may be an aspect in which only one of color, pattern, size and shape is different, an aspect in which all are different, or an aspect in which two or three combinations are different. Also good.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ”Was also explained.

  Here, it is provided with operation means provided at a position that can be operated by the player, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display relating to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, When the operation means is operated, the first display may change to the second display.

  Further, it may be notified that the displayed first icon is in a state of being easily changed before the display of the first animation is started.

  One of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is a display mode icon that suggests that the icon may change, and the fourth icon The icon may change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or another animation.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, and the fifth icon is an icon of a display mode indicating that the fourth icon has failed to change, The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or another animation.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation is a display that displays the second display. The animation which fails to change the said 1st icon made into the said 2nd icon may be sufficient.

  Here, on the contrary, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon.

  Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. May be.

  Further, the second unchanged animation may be the same animation as the second animation until halfway.

  Furthermore, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 38 to 57 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 38 to 57 in principle, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. The reference numerals 38 to 57 are given priority.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 4 aa2 figure, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure aa4, and a general figure hold number aa5. The normal 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The special figure 1 hold number aa1 is a display that expresses the hold number of the special figure 1 with a number, the special figure 2 hold number aa3 is a display that shows the hold number of the special figure 2 with a number, and the general figure hold number aa5 is a normal figure. It is the display which shows the number of hold of the number. Further, a variation icon display area c capable of displaying a variation icon is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area c is a hold icon display area. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (1), the special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1, b2, b3. Are displayed side by side in this order so as to alternate from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order variation machine in which a mechanism for alternately winning game balls is provided in the special figure 1 starting opening and the special figure 2 starting opening in the game board, and the suspension is digested in the winning order. . In addition, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area d, tutorial display, message display, and the like are displayed. When there is no content to be displayed in particular, a character string image of “in preparation” is displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 38 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 8”, which is the off symbol mode, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 38 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol are started in accordance with the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) being started. Yes. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the change icon c1 and moves to the change icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icons a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 38 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 38 (4) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 38 (5) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation notice display is started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be started, or the conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability.

  FIG. 38 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, a character image (2) (hereinafter referred to as “爺”) g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 38 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2.

  FIG. 38 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image “Tono” is started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the shrine g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the shrine g1.

  FIG. 38 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the gutter g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (17), a character string image of “AM” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (18), a character string image “Morning in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (19) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of “morning weather” and a symbol of “sun mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 38 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating the operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 38 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 38 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 38 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 38 (24) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (25) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  FIG. 38 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 38 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i2 has been displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 38 (30) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 38 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 38 (32) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above 爺 g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 38 (33) shows a state in which the display of the speech display, which is the speech (diagram) of 爺 g2, is started in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (33), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (34), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (35), a character string image “Noon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 38 (37) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a after the conversation notice display is completed.

  FIG. 38 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the subsequent illustration is omitted, in this example, the reach effect at “decoration 7” is started thereafter. Note that the reach effect may not be started after the end of the conversation notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example includes a first display (first line notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)) and a second display (second line shown in FIG. 38 (36)). (Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the gutter g1, the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 38 (19). The second display includes 爺 g2, the balloon display i2, the dialogue display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 38 (36). The first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display and the second display in this example are the notices of the change. In this example, the first display is displayed after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 38 (6) to (8).爺 g2 may be displayed before the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including 爺 g2 is displayed, There are cases where the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (1) to (38). 39 (1) to 39 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 39 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 39 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 39 (7) to 39 (10) show the state in which the gutter g1 is moving to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 39 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, before the dialogue display of Tono in FIG. 39 (19) is displayed, Tono g1 is displayed from the beginning, and other characters such as 爺 g2 are not displayed. As described above, 爺 g2 may not be displayed before the display of the first display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (1) to 40 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 40 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (22), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 40 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 40 (24) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 40 (25) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 40 (26) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to 爺 g2 while the princess g3 is moving rightward.爺 g2 has moved to the right.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 40 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (27) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by performing the gusset notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 40 (36). In some cases, the player's intention can be struck and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 (1) to 41 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 41 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 41 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 41 (7) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 41 (8) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 41 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 41 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by performing a gusset notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10). In some cases, the player's intention can be struck and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 42 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (25), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 42 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 42 (27) shows a state where the princess g3 has stopped.

  FIG. 42 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h3 including the character image “Princess” has started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 42 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 42 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 42 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 42 (32) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 42 (33) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 42 (33), the character image “PM” is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (34), the character string image “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (35), the character string image “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a text image of “afternoon weather” and a symbol of “rain mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 42 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38), description thereof is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example includes a first display (first line notice display shown in FIG. 42 (19)) and a second display (second line shown in FIG. 42 (36)). (Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the gutter g1, the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 42 (19). The second display includes the princess g3, the balloon display i3, the dialogue display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3 displayed in FIG. The first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display and the second display in this example are the notices of the change. In this example, 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 42 (23) to (25) after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 42 (6) to (8). ) Is a Gase notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, it is possible to poke the player's intention by changing the character when the conversation notice display is displayed by performing the gasse notice that displays 爺 g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (1) to 43 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 43 (1) to 43 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 43 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is first displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 43 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 43 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 43 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 43 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during the movement animation (moving display) of the character, and the moving display of the three character images is displayed. In this example, 爺 g2, princess g3, and lord g1 are displayed in this order, but may be displayed in the order of princess g3, 姫 g2, and lord g1. Further, four or more character images may be displayed during the moving display of the character image.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 44 (7) shows a state in which the gutter g1 is changed to 爺 g2 while the gutter g1 is moving to the left.爺 g2 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 44 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 44 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 44 (6) to (10), during the character's moving animation display, the character image makes a round of three characters in the order of lord g1, fox g2, princess g3, and lord g1. Is displayed. It should be noted that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one round or half of the movement animation display of the character. Also, a plurality of character images may be displayed in a circle during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 44 (23) to (27).

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 45 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (7) shows a state where the gutter g1 is changed to 爺 g2 while the gutter g1 is moving to the left.爺 g2 has moved to the left. Note that the gutter g1 may change to 爺 g2 at the time when the entire gutter g1 shown in FIG. 45 (6) is not displayed.

  FIG. 45 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 45 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to 爺 g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 45 (10) shows a state in which the gutter g1 stops after the gutter g2 changes to the gutter g1 while the gutter g2 moves to the left. It should be noted that it may be changed to g1 after heel g2 stops or simultaneously with the stop.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 45 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (38), description thereof is omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to (10), during the character movement animation display, the character image is a round of three characters in the order of lord g1, 爺 g2, princess g3, 爺 g2, and lord g1. Is displayed. The character may change in the reverse order, like princess g3, 爺 g2, and lord g1, after changing in the order of lord g1, 爺 g2, and princess g3. In addition, during the character movement animation display, four or more characters may make a round and may be displayed so as to change in the reverse direction. Further, during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 45 (23) to (27), a display in which the characters change as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 (1) to (38). 46 (1) to 46 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 46 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is first displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 46 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the lord g1 changes while the lord g1 is moving to the left is displayed. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (10) shows a state in which the gutter g1 stops after the expression of the gutter g1 changes. It should be noted that an animation in which the facial expression of the glute g1 changes after the glaze g1 stops or at the same time as the stop may be displayed. In this example, in the character movement animation, the display period of the gutter g1 displayed in the conversation notice shown in FIG. 46 (19) is longer than the display period of 爺 g2. Thus, in the character movement animation, the character display period displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (22), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped. An animation in which the facial expression of 爺 g2 changes after 表示 g2 stops or simultaneously with the stop may be displayed.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (38) to (38), description thereof is omitted. As in this example, a display in which the character aspect (for example, facial expression) changes may be displayed during the display of the movement animation of the character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 47 (1) to (40). 47 (1) to 47 (40) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the state shown in FIG. 47 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 41 (36), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 47 (2) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 47 (3) shows a state where “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 47 (4) shows a state in which pseudo-decoration decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The pseudo-ream decorative pattern is displayed when the pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing pseudo-variation as if the decorative symbol variation display was performed a plurality of times during one special figure variation game, and is a notice effect of the variation. After the decoration pattern of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second display of the variable display of the decoration ream (second time of the pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 47 (5) shows a state in which the second pseudo-ream is started. Further, the movable body 700 has moved upward and stopped. In addition, during the second execution of the pseudo-continuous, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d to notify that the second time of the pseudo-continuous is being executed.

  FIG. 47 (6) shows a state where a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 47 (7) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 47 (8) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is displayed. Note that the first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display may be displayed, or the second conversation notice display is not started with a predetermined probability. May be.

  FIG. 47 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 47 (10) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (11) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (12) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (13) shows a state where the princess g3 is stopped. 47 (9) to (13) are illustrated in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10), FIGS. 40 (6) to (10), FIGS. 41 (6) to (10), and FIG. 42 (6) to (10), FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), FIGS. 44 (6) to (10), FIGS. 45 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 46 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 47 (14) shows a state where the display of the character name display h3 is started. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (15) shows a state where the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (16) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (17) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (18) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 47 (19) shows a state in which the display of the line display that is the line (dialogue) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (19), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (20) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), a character string image of “afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (21) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), a character string image of “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (22) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of “afternoon weather is” and a symbol of “rain mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 47 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 47 (24) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 47 (25) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 47 (26) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 47 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (28) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (29) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (30) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  FIG. 47 (31) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 47 (32) shows a state where the balloon display i2 has been displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 47 (33) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 47 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 47 (35) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above 爺 g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 47 (36) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (diagram) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (36), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (37) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (37), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (38) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (38), a character string image of “noon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (39) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display. In addition, the mode of the balloon display i2 changes from white to blue, and the mode of the character name display h2 changes from white to blue. The big hit reliability is set higher in blue than in white. In this way, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 47 (40) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display ends. Although the subsequent illustration is omitted, in this example, the reach effect at “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 47 (1) is displayed, the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display shown in FIG. 47 (39)) is displayed. (Conversation notice display) is displayed. As described above, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure variable game. Note that the greater the number of conversation announcements displayed, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (1) to (38). 48 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (1) to 48 (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (15), description thereof is omitted.

  48 (16) to 48 (18) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display moves from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left balloon display h1. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  FIG. 48 (19) shows a state where the speech display is stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (32), description thereof will be omitted.

  48 (33) to 48 (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left balloon display h2. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  FIG. 48 (36) shows a state where the speech display is stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38), the description thereof is omitted. In this example, a moving animation with a dialogue display is displayed. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 (1) to (38). 49 (1) to 49 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 49 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 is changed to a character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 49 (6) to 49 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2.

  FIG. 49 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image “Tono” is started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the shrine g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the shrine g1.

  FIG. 49 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the gutter g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 49 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (17), a character string image of “AM” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (18) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (18), a character string image of “Morning in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (19) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of “morning weather” and a symbol of “sun mark” are displayed as a speech display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 38 (19), the shrine g 1, the character name display h 1, the balloon display h 1, and the speech display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 49 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 49 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 49 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 49 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation is displayed in which the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 49 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap part of the gutter g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 49 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 49 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 has moved to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display have moved upward.

  FIG. 49 (27) shows a state in which 爺 g2 is stopped, and lord g1, character name display h1, speech balloon display h1, and speech display are stopped.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 49 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the first display of the shrine j1 etc. moves at the start of the display of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation preview display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 50 (1) to 50 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (22), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation is displayed in which the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 50 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and lord g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap part of the gutter g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 50 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 50 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.

  FIG. 50 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 50 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed as in the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display. In the present example, the moving animation of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation notice display is displayed overlapping the first display such as the shrine j1.

  50 (32) to (35) show a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 38 (32) to (35).

  FIG. 50 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display. In this example, the speech balloon display h2 and the speech display in the speech balloon display h2 are displayed overlapping the speech balloon display h1 and the speech display in the speech balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and (38), description thereof is omitted. In this example, the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation notice display is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the shrine j1.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 51 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), description thereof is omitted.

  51 (6) to (10) show a state in which a character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10). In this example, the display size of 爺 g2 and 殿 g1 is larger than the example shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  51 (11) to (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed as in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the serif display is larger than the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 51 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating the operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 51 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 51 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 51 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 51 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the size of the display g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 51 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 51 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of shrine g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 51 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped and the animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is finished. The display sizes of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (36).

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 51 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the gutter g1 etc. in the conversation preview display is enlarged until the second display such as 爺 g2 starts to be displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 51 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display. The display size may be overlapped with a part of h2.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 52 (1) to (38). 52 (1) to 52 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 52 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.

  FIG. 52 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 52 (2) shows a state in which the timer notice display j has been displayed. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, operation of a movable body or a predetermined notice display) is performed. Before the countdown starts, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

  FIGS. 52 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

  FIG. 52 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  FIG. 52 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started as in FIG. 49 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started with the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIGS. 52 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as FIGS. 49 (6) to (19). In this example, a countdown display of a timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to (19), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap the characters g1 and g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 52 (14) and after, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

  FIGS. 52 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

  FIG. 52 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  FIG. 52 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 49 (23). In FIG. 49 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

  In FIGS. 52 (24) to (36), a conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 49 (24) to (36). In this example, a countdown display of a timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (24) to (36), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap the character of ２g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 52 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  FIGS. 52 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. Thus, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, other displays (ball removal error display, door opening error display, other notice display, change icon display of hold icon), and the like may be displayed. Further, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to 52 (10) is the length of the character g1 shown in FIGS. 52 (19) to (36). It is shorter than the display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech notice display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 53 (1) to (38). 53 (1) to 53 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 52 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.

  FIG. 53 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 53 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may reciprocate up and down, left and right in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

  53 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In FIGS. 52 (3) and 52 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

  FIG. 53 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  In FIGS. 53 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (6) to (19). In this example, the characters g1 and 爺 g2 and character names are displayed by the movable body k. At least a part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display becomes invisible to the player.

  FIGS. 53 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In FIGS. 53 (20) and 53 (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

  FIG. 53 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (22).

  FIG. 53 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 49 (23). 53 (24) to (36) display the conversation notice display in the same manner as FIGS. 49 (24) to (36). In this example, the characters g1 and 爺 g2 and the character names are displayed by the movable body k. At least a part of h1, h2, balloon display i1, i2, and line display is invisible to the player.

  FIG. 53 (37) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (37) except that the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. Thus, the moving effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (1) to (38). 54 (1) to 54 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 54 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.

  FIG. 54 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 54 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a light guide plate is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern display m can be displayed by light emission of the light guide plate. As shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to (37), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (36), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the gutter g1 and the second display such as 爺 g2.

  FIG. 54 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect starts, the pattern display m is deleted. Thus, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 55 (1) to (38). 55 (1) to 55 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 55 (1) to 55 (5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in descending order of the big hit reliability. In FIG. 55 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white. The conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 except that the character is displayed in a square frame.

  FIG. 55 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 55 (9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left. The square frame surrounding the shrine g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 56 (6) to 56 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2. The square frame surrounding the shrine g1 is displayed in white. Thus, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of the color change can be arbitrarily set. This color change is performed during the animation of character movement.

  The states shown in FIGS. 55 (11) to (21) are shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (21) except that the gutter g1 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is white. ), The description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 55 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The square frame surrounding 正方形 g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 55 (24) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (25) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 55 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  The states shown in FIGS. 55 (28) to (36) are shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (36) except that 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is blue. ), The description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 55 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). In this example, a conversation notice display character is displayed in a frame, and the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The big hit reliability is set by the color in the frame.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (a1) to (a20). 56 (a1) to (a20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 56 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (a6), 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 56 (a7) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moving to the left. Further, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 56 (a8) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Tono g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 have moved to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a10) shows a state in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  56 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 56 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (a12), 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a15) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 56 (a16) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. Also, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed.

  FIG. 56 (a17) shows a state in which 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 56 (a18) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation preview display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  56 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). As in this example, during the character movement animation, a movement animation of character name display or balloon display may be displayed. The balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a line display from the beginning of display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b20). 56 (b1) to (b20) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 56 (b1) to 56 (b5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (b6), 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. In this example, three square images are displayed in the horizontal direction below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b6), the left square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The left square image is white and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left along with the character.

  FIG. 56 (b7) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moving leftward. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b7), the left square image, the middle square image, and a part of the right square image are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b8) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 56 (b9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Tono g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 have moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

  FIG. 56 (b10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The gutter g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame display. As described above, in the conversation preview display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in any one of the three squares displayed during the character movement animation. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in descending order of jackpot reliability.

  56 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 56 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (b12), 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moved to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. In this example, three square images are displayed in the horizontal direction below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b14), the square image on the right side and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The square image on the right is green and the square image in the middle is white. These square images also move to the right along with the character.

  FIG. 56 (b15) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b7), the square image on the right, the square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left are displayed. The square image on the right is white, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the left is blue. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b16) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. Also, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b16), the right square image is blue, the middle square image is white, and the left square image is green. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b17) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b17), the right square image is green, the middle square image is blue, and the left square image is white.

  FIG. 56 (b18) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. Further, 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a blue frame display. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green in descending order of jackpot reliability.

  56 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as the state shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the character movement animation are display color candidate displays within a frame surrounded after the character stops. As in this example, display color candidates in a frame surrounded after the character stops may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 57 (a1) to (a5). FIGS. 57A1 to 57A5 show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (a1) to (a5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (a1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started.爺 g2 appears and moves to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a2) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. During the movement of 爺 g2 to the left, lord g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 is displayed on the left side of the gutter g2, and a part of the gutter g1 overlaps with the gutter g2. Further, the gutter g1 is displayed with a transmittance of 50%, for example. Both lord g1 and 爺 g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. A part of 爺 g2 is overlapped and displayed on g1. Further, 爺 g2 is displayed with a transmittance of 50%, for example. Both lord g1 and 爺 g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, the number of characters may increase during the movement animation of the character. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but may be two or more. In addition, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Further, one character may be displayed so as to overlap the other characters.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (b1) to (b5). 57 (b1) to (b5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 57 (b1) to (b5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (b1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1 and 爺 g2 appear and move to the left. The gutter g1 is displayed on the left side of the gutter g2, and a part of the gutter g1 overlaps with the gutter g2.

  FIG. 57 (b2) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with the gutter g1.

  FIG. 57 (b3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of the shrine g1 is displayed overlapping the gutter g2.

  FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with the gutter g1.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. The overlapping characters may change alternately between one character and another character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (c1) to (c5). 57 (c1) to 57 (c5) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 57 (c1) to (c5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (c1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1, 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (c2) shows a state in which the character movement animation is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

  FIG. 57 (c3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 is erased.

  FIG. 57 (c4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, one character may be deleted one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (d1) to (d5). 57 (d1) to (d5) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 57 (d1) to (d5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (d1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1, 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (d2) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. A chibi princess g4 is displayed in place of the lord g1, and a ninja g5 is displayed in place of the princess g3. Note that the character may be entirely changed from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 57 (d3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. Ninja g4 has been erased.

  FIG. 57 (d4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 is erased.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, then the characters are sequentially deleted, and the last One character may be left on the screen. A plurality of characters may be erased at a time.

  FIG. 57 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display executed in the effect control process. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 is “conversation notice 1”, and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 39 is “conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as “conversation notice 1” and “conversation notice 2” can be executed in combination. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can display a serif notice display during the conversation notice display of this example, and can display a combination of the conversation notice display and the serif notice display of this example.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. It is possible to display any one of the balloon displays from FIG. 38 to FIG. 57 as the second balloon display after displaying any one of the balloon displays from FIG. 38 to FIG. 57 as the first balloon display. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. After displaying a balloon display combining a plurality of elements of any one of the balloon displays shown in FIGS. 38 to 57 as the first balloon display, any one of FIGS. 38 to 57 is used as the second balloon display. It is possible to display a balloon display in which a plurality of balloon display elements are combined. Further, the pachinko machine 100 has three or more as one conversation notice when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 57 (e) is selected. Can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays a single symbol variation display when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 57 (e) is selected. Two or more conversation notices can be displayed during the period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays the display when the other execution display or error display described in the embodiment or the drawing or the execution condition of the movable body display operation is satisfied during the display of the balloon display or the execution of the conversation notice. Or the operation can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a serif notice display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute a preliminary notice effect during preparation and a timer notice effect. For example, a preliminary notice effect or a timer notice effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in the form of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, like the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 120 (k), the balloons have different display sizes (small display size and large display size) from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and 120 (e). A display may be displayed and a conversation notice display may be displayed. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in the form of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120B to 120F, in the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the movement distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the movement distance of the balloon display f2. The conversation notice display may be displayed. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in the form of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is ended at the time shown in FIG. 120 (e), and the conversation announcement is made so that a part of the balloon display f2 is overlapped with another display. An indication may be displayed. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38 at a position where it overlaps with another display and displays the notice of conversation.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in the form of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120B to 120F, at the start of the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed. As shown in (t), when the display of the balloon display f1, f2 ends, the balloon display f1, f2 starts moving and the display ends so as to perform a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1, f2 move toward the right. The moving direction of the balloon display may be different depending on the case. The pachinko machine 100 may change the moving direction at the start of display and at the end of display of at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57 again. (B1)
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 (36)),
The first display is a display including a first line (for example, the morning weather is a “sunny mark”),
The first display is a display including a first character (for example, lord g1),
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, “daytime weather is“ cloudy mark ””),
The second display is a display including a second character (for example, 爺 g2),
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The gaming table, wherein the second character may be displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the gaming table having such a configuration, by notifying that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. May improve the interest of the player. (B2)
The game stand according to B1 above,
A game table, wherein a third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, by performing a gusset notice to display a character that does not appear in the first display, it is possible to change the character when the first display is displayed and strike the player's intention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved. (B3)
The game stand according to B2 above,
One display of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 47 ()),
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is “rain mark”),
The third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3),
The game table is characterized in that the third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 47 (9)). By making the third character appear in the third display instead of the second display, the player's intention can be struck, and the player's interest can be improved. (B4)
The game stand according to B3 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 47 (1)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 47 (39)),
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display,
The game table, wherein the second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display can appear in the second conversation notice display, and the player's intention can be struck. May be improved. (B5)
The game stand according to B4 above,
A gaming machine, wherein the second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed during a period in which one certain symbol variation display is displayed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display can appear in the second conversation notice display, and the player's intention can be struck. May be improved. (B6)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B5,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a moving animation of a character),
The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, the player can expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. There are cases where you can (B7)
The game stand according to B6 above,
The game table, wherein the first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be able to entertain and entertain which character the first display is displayed on. (B8)
The game stand according to B6 or B7 above,
In the first animation display, the game table is characterized in that the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the first display is displayed by the second character, the player may be able to entertain and entertain. (B9)
The game stand according to any one of B6 to B8 above,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, a moving animation of a character),
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The game table characterized in that the second animation display is a display not including the first character.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there is a case where the character appearing in the first display can appear and the player can play without being awakened. (B10)
The game table according to B9 above,
The gaming table characterized in that the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, there are cases where the player can be entertained by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display so as to increase the hit probability of the character expected by the player. (B11)
The game stand according to B9 or B10 above,
The game table characterized in that the first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first character displayed in the first animation display. By reducing the number of character candidates in the second display, the player may be able to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy of the player's expectation of the character. (B12)
The game stand according to any one of B9 to B11 above,
The game table characterized in that the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the display period of the first display. (B13)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B12,
The first display is a display including a first color (for example, white),
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue),
The reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color,
The game table, wherein a display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the reliability of the second display can be expected by notifying the reliability of the second display, and the interest of the player is improved. May be possible. (B14)
The game stand according to B13 above,
The game machine characterized in that the reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be expected to display the second display by increasing the reliability of the second display to be displayed later. (B15)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B14,
The game table, wherein the first line is displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first line. There are cases where it is possible. (B16)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B15 above,
The first display is a display including a first name (for example, “dono”),
The first name is the name of the first character,
The game table, wherein the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first name. There are cases where it is possible. (B17)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B16,
An operation means (for example, chance button 136) that can be operated by the player is provided,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is displayed when the operation means is operated during the display of the first display. (B18)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B17,
The game table, wherein the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed. (B19)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B18,
A movable body (for example, a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The game table, wherein the movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display. (B20)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B19,
A gaming table, wherein a display may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display. (B21)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B20 above,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100). (B22)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B20 above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).

  The first display may be overlapped by another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is such that the first display is overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, during the second animation, it is possible to make the second animation notice by greatly overlapping the first display, and during the second display, the relevance with the first display is ensured. There are cases where it is possible.

  The area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second display. In this case, during the second animation, the second animation can be noticed by greatly overlapping the first dialogue, and the relevance with the first dialogue is ensured while the second display is being displayed. There are cases where it is possible.

  There may be cases where the dialogue notice dialogue does not match.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and the order may make a round in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in order in the first animation, and the order may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and each character may animate in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and a certain character may change in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the number of characters has decreased by one or more in the first animation.

  You may transfer to the reach | attainment effect corresponding to a 2nd character after the display of a 2nd display.

  A conversation notice display is performed for each pseudo-variable display, the first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo-variable display, and the second conversation is displayed in the second pseudo-variable display after the first pseudo-variable display. An advance notice may be displayed.

  The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variable display, a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body.

  A part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 58 to 82 in principle, and even if the overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 58 to 82 are given priority.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has will be described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a generic term for privileges, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100. Can be separated. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. Further, the non-custom item cannot be remodeled (customized) on the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100, but is a item that gives a predetermined profit to the player.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give an item to a player when an item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is given, the player performs display operation of the pachinko machine 100 by performing setting operation of the given custom item using an effect customization screen (see FIG. 67 (q) or the like) described later. It is possible to modify (customize) the voice, function, various probabilities, etc. according to one's preference. In addition, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a pre-read notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is given. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 according to his / her preference. In addition, when the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is established and the item is given, a pachinko machine A part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) can be modified (customized) according to his / her preference.

  In addition, when the item granting condition of “heat” is established and the item is given, a notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)” is performed, so that the player Can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a win or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of “Intense heat” is established and the item is assigned, the notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is “Intense heat (expectation is extremely high)” is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a big hit or a possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in association with the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gauges ( A meter having a scale) is displayed, and one sphere is displayed at the meter increase entrance 227, and each meter gauge is turned off (reduced) one by one (details will be described later).

    By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether the meter gauge is full (predetermined in the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not several (10 in this example) balls have entered. The aspect of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example. For example, even if a ball is lit at the meter increase entrance 227 and a meter gauge is lit (increased) each time it enters, the display is increased. Good.

  Further, the item granting effect is an effect executed in relation to the item granting. In this embodiment, when the meter gauge is full (a predetermined number (in this example, the meter increasing entrance 227). In the case of 10 balls), it is determined that the item granting condition has been established, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been given, the type of the item, etc. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item provision effect, the player can grasp that the item has been imparted, the type of the item, and the like. Note that the item granting conditions and item granting effects are not limited to this example. For example, the number and type of items already acquired may be displayed, and the item must be special (for rare items). May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  Example 1 is an example in which an item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol variation (the meter gauge is full). The game state shown in FIG. 59 (a) is a state in which a special-type variable game is being executed (during symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a special figure variable game held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 3. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. In addition, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of hold of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 by displaying six hold icons PI. 9 gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball is If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 59 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 59 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 59 (e) to FIG. 59 (g) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 59 (i), the item name (item A in this example) IN and the item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 59 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, the button for the period shown in FIG. 59 (j) to FIG. 59 (m) is triggered by the display of information about the item (in this example, item name and item description) in the item granting effect. Produce.

  In this example, the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the item effect and the change display of the decorative design, so that at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item grant effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and also the decorative display variation item and item There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the provided production.

In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG that allows specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, whether or not to set an acquired item) and the appearance of a chance button 136 that is valid for accepting operations are simulated. The button image BG1 including the displayed image and a character string that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 (PUSH in this example), and the left and right direction keys (not shown) that can accept operations are simulated. The button image BG2 and the operation effective period display TG including the meter display indicating the period during which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is effective are displayed.

When the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during such a button production, as shown in FIG. 59 (l), when a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 59 (m). , By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is notified that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  The state shown in FIG. 59 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item granting effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 59 (n) to FIG. 59 (p) are triggered by a specific selection (in this example, selection for setting the acquired item) from a plurality of options in the button effect. After displaying the animation including moving the image including the item name step by step from the center of the decorative design display device 208 to the lower display area over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1, it is indicated that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the SP (super) reach variation (the meter gauge is full). In the second embodiment, over the period shown in FIG. 60 (a) to FIG. 60 (b), the special game variation game develops from normal symbol variation to SP reach variation, and continues to FIG. 60 (c) to FIG. The SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach variation over the period shown in FIG.

  During such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 60 (e). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), a character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since subsequent meter increase production, item provision production, and production mode of button production are the same as the above-mentioned Example 1 except being in SP reach variation, while attaching the same numerals in Drawing 60, Although explanation thereof is omitted, item granting is performed by displaying a display related to the item granting effect in front of the display and meter related to the SP reach effect over the period shown in FIGS. 60 (h) to (q). At least a part of the display related to the effect overlaps the display related to the SP reach effect and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and also the SP reach effect and meter visibility. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  Moreover, over the period shown in FIG. 60 (k) to FIG. 60 (o), the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed in front of the display regarding the item provision effect, so that at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variation display of the decorative symbol is not hindered, the progress of the variation game can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the effect.

  Further, over the period shown in FIG. 60 (l) to FIG. 60 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decoration pattern are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. In this way, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative design is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item giving effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of decorative symbols and button effects are not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time. In addition, there may be a case where the effect of the presentation can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach production or the item provision production.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 3 in time series.

  The third embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during non-symbol fluctuation (during symbol stop display). The gaming state shown in FIG. 61 (a) is a state in which the special-game variable game is not being executed (during non-design variation). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such non-design fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 61 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), a character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since subsequent meter increase production, item provision production, and production mode of button production are the same as the above-mentioned Example 1 except being in SP reach change, while attaching the same numerals in Drawing 61, Although description thereof is omitted, item display is performed by displaying the display related to the item providing effect over the period shown in FIGS. 61 (j) to 61 (m) before the stop display of the decorative symbol. At least a part of the display related to the performance is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the stoppage of the decorative pattern change is also ensured. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol fluctuation based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge gauge is full) while the symbol is not changing (while the symbol is stopped). This is an example. During the non-design variation shown in FIG. 62 (a), as shown in FIG. 62 (b), one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in FIG. 62 (c), it was lit. A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 62 (c), as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). Then, in the subsequent FIG. 62 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 62 (f), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 62 (g). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 62 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 62 (i) to (k) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation display for moving from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center is performed, and as shown in FIG. After performing the animation display, the item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed as shown in FIG. In this item image IG, the item granting condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is “hot (high expectation)” (the winning result of the special figure variable game is It is a win, or the possibility of a win is high).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  In the state shown in FIG. 62 (n), the item granting effect is finished and SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of SP reach, the visibility of SP reach will not be hindered. You may be able to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increasing mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increasing entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the meter gauge is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 63 (a) is a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed (during symbol fluctuation). In this example, there is a special figure variable game on hold, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 4, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Also, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of seven hold icons PI. 6 gauges are extinguished and 4 gauges GG are turned on, and 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 by the meter increase effect (4 more balls have been added). If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 63 (c). A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 63 (c), as shown in FIG. 63 (d), a ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special figure starting opening 230), and the following FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has been increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the lower display area, the number of holdings of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable games and special figure 2 variable games) is increased from 7 to 8 due to the display of the eight hold icons PI. It has been shown.

  In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is composed. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase production is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) every time one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 63 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the three lights that have been lit as shown in FIG. 63 (h) continue. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (i), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 63 (j), one lit gauge is turned off. By doing so, while performing the meter increase production in which all 10 gauges are turned off, the right to erase another gauge can be carried over from the next game onward. The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effect effects are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode). A reference numeral is attached and a description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. When the above condition is satisfied, the mode may be shifted to the increase mode, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item granting conditions are met (when the meter gauge is full), the right to erase the meter gauge is carried over after the next game, but it is configured not to carry over. The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 6 in time series.

    The sixth embodiment starts an item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) Then, two types of custom items) are given. The meter increase effect, item provision effect, and button effect effect modes are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are given in the item grant effect, and thus the same reference numerals are given in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), after performing animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 64 (i) As shown in the figure, item information (in this example, item A, item B) IN1, IN2 display and item description (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure) Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. In addition, the item provided in an item provision effect may be three or more types.

  The state shown in FIG. 64 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button production according to this example, a selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set the acquired item A or item B) and operation reception are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the acceptance of the operation is valid. A button image BG2 simulating the appearance of the left and right keys, and an operation valid period display TG including a meter display indicating a period during which the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid. .

  When the option of “item A” is temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (l), when a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 64 (m). In addition, the selection of “item A” is confirmed by highlighting the selection of “item A” (the selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B has been made). To do.

  The state shown in FIG. 64 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item provision effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 64 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effecting (in this example, selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B). (N) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image including the item name over the period shown in FIG. After that, by performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1 of “item not set”, it is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 7 in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) In this example, a custom item and a non-custom item are given. In addition, since the production | generation aspect of a meter increase production, an item provision production, and a button production is the same as the said Example 1 except giving a several item in an item provision production, it attaches | subjects the same code | symbol in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 65 (h), after performing an animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 65 (i) As shown in the figure, as information on two types of items, an item name (in this example, item A) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display, The item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. Note that the non-custom item to be given in the item granting effect may be another non-custom item (for example, pending change, model descriptions 1 to 3, lost, etc.) described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 65 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. Since the subsequent item provision effects and the button effect effects are the same as in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are used in FIG.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transitions in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions in time series, and FIG. 68 shows various menus selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 66A using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen that is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has been detected during non-design variation, and in this example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or a brightness adjustment. Displays a top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen from which various menus can be selected is started.

  Also, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) or the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like is started, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the up key) or the fifth volume is displayed while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When an operation of the operating means (down key in this example) is received, display of a brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of the various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

  When the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume has been increased by one level and that the volume has been increased by one level is displayed. When the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is lowered by one step Execute. When the operation of the fourth operating means (in this example, the up key) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display is executed to increase the brightness by one level and suggest that the brightness has increased by one level. When the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the down key) is accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the meter display that indicates that the brightness has decreased by one step and the brightness has decreased by one step is executed. To do.

  Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during the display of the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demo screen is started, and the symbol variation display is started. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / menu screen>
FIG. 66B is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: production customization, mobile terminal linked service, initialization, and return to the demonstration screen. When each menu is selected, the production customization screen, mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67, since the elapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 67 (a), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) is accepted as shown in FIG. 67 (c) during the display of the demonstration screen, FIG. 67 (d) The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), the operation of the fifth operation means (the lower key 161d in this example) is accepted. As shown in the figure, a meter display is executed to indicate that the brightness has decreased by one level and the brightness has decreased by one level, and as shown in FIG. 67 (g), the fourth operation means (in this example, the up key 161c). ) Is received, as shown in FIG. 67 (h), the luminance is increased by one level and the meter display suggesting that the luminance has increased by one level is executed.

  Subsequently, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), the operation of the second operation means (the right key 161a in this example) is accepted. The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (j) is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (k), since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, it is shown in FIG. 67 (l). As described above, the meter display is executed to suggest that the volume is increased by one level and the volume is decreased by one level.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (l) is displayed, the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 67 (m) is started. During the display of this demonstration screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (n), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) has been accepted, so the menu screen shown in FIG. 67 (o). Is starting to display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (p), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted with the effect customization menu temporarily selected on this menu screen. The display of the production customization screen has started. In addition, during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 67 (q), as shown in FIG. 67 (r), the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. As shown in FIG. 67 (t), the light display is moved to the next selectable item (in this example, item P), and the item P is temporarily selected. Since the operation of the means (the chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is validated, and the character display “setting item P” is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile device linked service screen>
FIG. 66C is a transition diagram illustrating an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal linked service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal linked service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 68 (b), the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1) starts to be displayed. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-1) is started, and then new registration is selected on the trial play screen. Then, the display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-2) is started.

  Further, when the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b2), the passwords as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1) and FIG. 68 (b2-1-1). Display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is entered on this password input screen, a screen for notifying an input error of the password as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when a correct password is input, display of a screen for notifying completion of password input as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-3) is started.

  In addition, in the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b3), when the data saving menu is selected, the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-1) starts to be displayed. When “yes” is selected in FIG. 68, display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2) is started, and “end” is selected during display of the two-dimensional code display screen. In such a case, display of a confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2-1) is started.

  When the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1) starts to be displayed. When “Yes” is selected in FIG. 68, display of a completion screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b 4-1-1) is started. In addition, when the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b5), display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b5-1) is started, and FIG. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 8>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 8 in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed (the meter gauge is full). The gaming state shown in FIG. 69 (a) is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-design variation. Also, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  When one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 69 (b) while such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 69 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by extinguishing one gauge that has been lit, as shown in FIG. By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and notifies that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effect effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and therefore the same in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIGS. 69 (e) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demonstration effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demonstration screen (top menu screen).

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment operation), operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) To receive the operation) for priority.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example) In FIG. 69 (n), the timing (the button menu is not displayed and the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when () is displayed), an operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) As a result of accepting, the corresponding processing is performed. It should be noted that even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. ) (In this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) may be accepted and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 9>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 9 in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. It is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described embodiment 8 except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIG. 70 (e) to FIG. At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. In some cases, the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

  Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. Prioritizes operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for selecting menus such as mobile terminal linked services). It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) 70 (n), the timing shown in FIG. 70 (n) (the timing when the menu screen is displayed without the button effect) When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to the menu screen (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal link service) is accepted, and corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that an operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal linked service or the like has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 10 in time series.

  In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described embodiment 8 except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item grant effect over the period shown in FIG. 71 (e) to FIG. At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment. An operation related to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) 71 (n), the timing shown in FIG. 71 (n) (the timing at which the volume adjustment is displayed without the button effect displayed) is performed. When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to volume adjustment (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted and corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for adjusting the volume) has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 11>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 11 in time series.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 68 is displayed (the meter gauge is full). It is an example. The meter increase effect, item provision effect, and button effect effects are the same as in Example 8 except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed. In addition, although description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIGS. 72 (g) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the operation related to the two-dimensional code is performed. Prioritize operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). It is composed.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the two-dimensional code), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) The corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the person has received the operation for setting the item acquired by the person, but the timing shown in FIG. 72 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), a corresponding process is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), In this example, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 12 in time series.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item using an effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item granting effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 8 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals in FIG. Although description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIGS. 73 (e) to (o). Thus, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the production customization screen.

  Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customize screen, the operation related to the effect customize screen is displayed. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) The corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the person has received the operation for setting the item acquired by the person, but the timing shown in FIG. 73 (n) (the button customization is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), an operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen) is received, and corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example) Then, on the effect customization screen, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for determining an item to be set is accepted.

  Further, in this example, in the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 73 (l), an operation of pressing the chance button 136 is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 73 (m). Even if the “Yes” option is highlighted, the process for setting the acquired item immediately is not performed, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 73 (q) to FIG. 73 (u). When the mobile terminal linked service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (v), the item acquired in the item grant effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 13>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 13 in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example in which an item is immediately set by an operation in a button effect.

  Since the meter increase effect, the item provision effect, and the button effect effect are the same as in the above-described Example 12, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 74 and the description thereof is omitted, but in this example, FIG. j) to button (k) shown in FIG. 74, when the “Yes” option is temporarily selected and a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), the “Yes” option is highlighted to notify that the selection of “Yes” is confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 74 (i), the item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the display effect customization screen.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 14 in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. After that, the point that the item is set using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 73. However, in this example, the effect customization screen is displayed in front of the display related to the item provision effect. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily In some cases, the effect can be enhanced. In addition, you may comprise so that at least one part of an effect customization screen may not overlap with at least one part of the display regarding an item provision effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 15>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 15 in time series.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example in which the item giving effect is continued even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals in FIG. The description is omitted.

  In this example, during the item granting effect shown in FIG. 76 (k), as shown in FIG. 76 (l), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). In FIG. 76 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 16>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 16 in time series.

  Example 16 is that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), as described with reference to FIG. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, an item is displayed across two fluctuations of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

  Specifically, after the change ends during execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 77 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Based on this, a new floating game has started. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol variation following the symbol variation in which the item granting condition is satisfied, and the button effect is generated based on accepting the pressing operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 77 (m). , The item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If the item can be displayed across multiple symbol variations as in this example, the item granting effect will not be interrupted with the stop or start of symbol variation, and the player's willingness to play Can be sustained. In addition, the symbol fluctuation | variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient and it may not be a continuous symbol fluctuation | variation.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 17>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 in time series.

  Example 17 is that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol variation (the meter gauge is full). 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increasing effect is executed. ing.

  More specifically, during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 77 (j), as shown in FIG. 77 (k), the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227 is detected, so that FIG. As shown in (2), during the display of the item by the item granting effect, the meter increasing effect for advancing the meter gauge is started. If the meter can be increased during the display of items as in this example, the player's willingness to play may be further enhanced. In addition to allowing the meter to increase while the item is displayed, the item granting condition may be met (the meter gauge may be full) In this case, you may comprise so that the right of item provision can be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 18>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 18 in time series.

  In Example 18, a mini game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini game ends. To do. FIG. 79 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and the Amida lottery is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the Amida lottery in this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or the player's selection operation Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of “X” in the result of Amidaku is out of place, the image imitating the capsule means that the item has been acquired, and the letter E means that the item E has been acquired. Is configured to notify the item to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image imitating the capsule is different from the usual, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be multiple types of mini games. Depending on the type of mini game, Ease of acquisition and appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Amidakuji) was an image simulating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and items acquired by the player are displayed. With the configuration as in this example, there are cases where the player can be entertained without getting bored of the period from when the item granting condition is satisfied until the item is displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / variation 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the trigger for the meter increasing production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of the ball” may be used as triggers for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80A to 80B, when the ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during non-design fluctuation, the meter increases. An effect may be executed, and as shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (e), a ball has entered the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during symbol variation. In this case, a meter increase effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the prefetch result of the variable game. In this case, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 80 (i) to (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (m) to FIG. 80 (o), even when the operation by the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, the meter increase effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 80 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed when the reach is executed, or when the SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (in this example, the display of the princess character image) is executed as shown in FIG. .

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 in time series.

  The point of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed (the meter gauge is full) is that FIG. In this example, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, even if the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect). The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is received with priority over the operation for adjusting the volume.

  More specifically, when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 81 (d) during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 81 (c), the following FIG. 81 ( As shown in FIG. 81 (f), after executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one lit gauge as shown in FIG. Instead, by executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank”, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and the item granting condition is satisfied. Is notified.

  The state shown in FIG. 81 (g) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to this example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 81 (g) to FIG. 81 (i) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 81 (j), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. 81 (k), item information (in this example, item A) IN and item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (Contents omitted)) is displayed.

  In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at the back side of the display of the volume control screen, so that at least part of the display of the volume control screen is at least part of the display related to the item granting effect. It overlaps with a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information related to the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering.

  Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 81 (n), the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation is received, the display for switching between “Yes” and “No” during the button production is executed without performing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example) Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is received, a display for switching between “Yes” and “No” temporarily selected during the button production is executed without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

  In the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 81 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, after the button production is ended, FIG. s) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a reduced scale over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD1 “item not set”, the character display CD3 “item A is being set” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 3>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entrance of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the condition for establishing the item provision, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of a ball” may be used as the conditions for establishing item grant. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82A to 82C, the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls acquired in the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example, When the number exceeds 10,000 balls, an item may be given, or when a specific operation is accepted by the operation means as shown in FIGS. Items may be assigned to the keys 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means is The effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 73, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 71, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67) can be displayed. It is a display including setting (for example, setting of the item shown in FIG. 73, setting of the volume shown in FIG. 70, setting of the brightness shown in FIG. 67). In addition to the setting display, a display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIG. 71 or 73). For example, the item shown in FIG. Indicates that it has been granted Can be displayed on the display means displays the (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) that it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the display of the effect setting display, the first display including one setting can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. In some cases, the player can be entertained even during display.

  In addition, there is provided count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 59 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or quantity increases or decreases. , “First count display”, for example, a display in which all ten gauges shown in FIG. 59 (c) etc. are turned off, or a character display CD2 of “full” shown in FIG. In this case, the first display may be displayed on the display unit, and the display by the count display unit may be a display that can be changed during a non-design variation display period.

  With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so there are cases where the player can be made to play without getting bored. In addition, there is a case where the player is not aroused even if the floating game is no longer held.

  In addition, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means. (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 62 (m), etc.).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after a mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 79) is executed. May be.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to be entertained for a period until the first display is displayed.

  Further, an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 59 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) during the display of the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 59 (j) etc., and the first operation display is an effective period display (for example, FIG. 59 (j) etc.). The display including the operation valid period display TG) shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, when the player can participate by operating the operation means even during the display of the first display, can increase the degree of intervention of the player, and can improve the interest of the player There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the first display, the effect setting display may be deleted.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, when the first display is displayed on the display unit, settings that can be selected in the effect setting display (for example, item settings shown in FIG. 73) may be increased.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of options by the player can be increased and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 82 (o) to (r), when a ball enters a predetermined game area during display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for meter increase) When the ball enters the entrance, or when the ball enters the start opening or the winning opening), the first display (for example, the player selects item A separately from the effect setting display being displayed). Display indicating that it has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting corresponding to the first display (for example, item A) is added to one or a plurality of settings in the effect setting display It may be displayable on the display means.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the symbol variation starts during the display of the item that appears during the non-design variation. Even in this case, it is not necessary to delete the item. Further, even when the change of the symbol starts while displaying the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Moreover, even if the meter is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) during the display of the custom display, an item may appear when the meter is full. In addition, the item may appear after the meter becomes full during non-symbol fluctuation.

  In addition, an item indicating reliability may appear after a meter that has been partially stored during non-design variation becomes full during the design variation. In addition, the item indicating the reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may be easier to appear when the symbol changes than when the symbol is not changing, or may not appear when the symbol is changed. Further, a button effective meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-design variation. In addition, you can cancel the display of the demo screen (or without canceling), display the item, cancel the menu display (or without canceling), display the item, The item may be displayed by canceling the display of the two-dimensional code (or without canceling).

  Moreover, a meter may accumulate | store by opportunity other than ball passing. Further, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase of the meter is increased from the normal time. In this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the reserve is full or the electric support is completed. Also, the item may appear after the mini game when the meter is full. Moreover, you may perform the effect that an item appears even during SP reach. Further, the reach button production period may overlap with the customizable button production period, and the button may be effective for the other production rather than one. Further, the appearing item may change depending on the gaming state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed (additional items are displayed), or the customization screen is displayed again without changing In addition, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed. Further, a notice of an appearing item may be given, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. In addition, the items may be displayed over a plurality of variations, the meter may be stored during the display of the items, or the meter may be filled up with one kind of trigger.

  Other display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or a plurality of single-color or full-color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, Meter display may be performed only with a reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, or projector), or meter display may be performed with the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, When the ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative design display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device are increased by the same increase amount). It is good also as a count display means which performs a meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 136. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 83 to 136 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 83 to 136 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 83 to 136 are given priority.

  Next, an effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85.

  FIG. 83 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 83A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 83A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 83 to 85, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emit light, the light emitting means is shown in light black, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is shown in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 83 (b) following FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting unit emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 83 (c) following FIG. 83 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, the portion of the fourth symbol aa6 of the common symbol, and the button notice display h110. , Part of the ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and part of the advance notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 1 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 83 (d) following FIG. 83 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 83 (e) following FIG. 83 (d) shows a state where the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display The other part of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 83 (f) following FIG. 83 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

  Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls forward of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which a deforming operation is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.

  FIG. 84 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 84A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 84A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 84 (b) following FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting unit emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 84 (c) following FIG. 84 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and a button notice. It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 2 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 84 (d) following FIG. 84 (c) shows a state where the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 84 (e) following FIG. 84 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Due to the deformation of the movable body 2, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and the other part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 84 (f) following FIG. 84 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

  Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are located at positions that overlap in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the production example shown in FIG. 83 is performed. 83 may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed when the example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 is performed.

  FIG. 85 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 85A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 85A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 85 (b) following FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the respective light emitting means emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 85 (c) following FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 start to move from the initial position at the same time and are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are part of the decorative symbol, part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, 4 symbols aa4, ordinary figure holding number aa5, part of ordinary symbol 4th symbol aa6, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be a case where the display does not overlap any one of the above. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, there may be cases where the timing of the end of movement is different.

  FIG. 85 (d) following FIG. 85 (c) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 is moved. Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. The start timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 85 (e) following FIG. 85 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operations are completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 moves downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. The display may not overlap with any one of the displays. Note that the end timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 85 (f) following FIG. 85 (e) shows that the movable bodies 1 and 2 start moving to the initial position and finish moving at the same time after simultaneously performing the operation of returning the movable bodies 1 and 2 to the shape before deformation. 2 shows a state in which the respective light emitting means 2 are turned off simultaneously. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before a deformation | transformation may be started at a separate timing, and may be complete | finished at a separate timing. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the shape before deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even when the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is made the same, the end timing may be different. In addition, the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, and the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. Also good. Further, even if the timings of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the timing of the movement end may be the same, or to the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting units of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the overlapping position in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the effect example is performed, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed. In addition, the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the present effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 to FIG. 94, a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90 will be described.

  The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90. FIG.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotating shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotating shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-like horizontally-long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, the LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. 90c3.

  The LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a is provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2nd row, 1st column, 3rd row, 1st column, 2nd row, 6th column). , And the third row and the sixth column are not provided with a light emitting diode). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diode c1 along the outer periphery of the arc portion. -C4 are provided. All of the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different color), or a part of the light emitting diodes may be a single color light emitting diode and the other part may be a full color LED. All may be composed of full-color LEDs. Moreover, you may use light sources other than a light emitting diode for the light emitting diode (a11-c4) mounted in the movable body 90a.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 87A to 87G show the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed step by step when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIGS. 87 to 93, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is expressed in white, and the case where the light emitting diode is turned on is expressed in light ink. 87 to 93, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. You may arrange | position the cable connected to the movable body 90 behind a arm part so that a player cannot visually recognize. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string “in preparation”.

  In FIG. 87 (b) following FIG. 87 (a), all of the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the movable body 90 moves. The state where the light emitting diode is lit is shown. Further, the display of the character string “in preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 87 (c) following FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 87 (d) following FIG. 87 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 87 (e) following FIG. 87 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each rotated back to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d).

  FIG. 87 (f) following FIG. 87 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d).

  FIG. 87 (g) following FIG. 87 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a) to 88 (n) show an example of effects using the movable body 90 step by step.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  88 (b) following FIG. 88 (a), all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 88 (c) following FIG. 88 (b) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 88 (d) following FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11-a35 mounted in the movable body 90a can be visually recognized because the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate.

  In FIG. 88 (e) following FIG. 88 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each rotated back to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d).

  88 (f) following FIG. 88 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d).

  FIG. 88 (g) following FIG. 88 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 88 (h) following FIG. 88 (g) shows all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 88 (i) following FIG. 88 (h), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 88 (j) following FIG. 88 (i), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 88 (k) following FIG. 88 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 88 (l) following FIG. 88 (k), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

  FIG. 88 (m) following FIG. 88 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (l). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original postures so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 88 (i) to 88 (l) are returned.

  88 (n) following FIG. 88 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 89, an example of an effect example using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described. 89 (a) to 89 (n) show step-by-step production examples using modifications of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction on the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 89A shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  89 (b) following FIG. 89 (a), all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 89 (c) following FIG. 89 (b) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is moved upward simultaneously. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 89 (d) following FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 89 (e) following FIG. 89 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are simultaneously moving downward. Yes. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 89 (f) following FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c are simultaneously returned to their original positions. Each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position at different timings.

  FIG. 89 (g) following FIG. 89 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 89 (h) following FIG. 89 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is shown in FIG. 89 (h). The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 89 (i) following FIG. 89 (h) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90 b by moving only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 upward. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 89 (j) following FIG. 89 (i) shows a state where only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light from the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  In FIG. 89 (k) following FIG. 89 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward, so that part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 89 (l) following FIG. 89 (k) shows a state where only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light from the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 89 (m) following FIG. 89 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 89 (i) to 89 (l) are returned.

  89 (n) following FIG. 89 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position, and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when one of the productions shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  An example of an effect example using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (a) to 90 (n) show step-by-step production examples using modifications of the movable body 90. FIG. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 90A shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 90 (b) following FIG. 90 (a), all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 90 (c) subsequent to FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1, and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (d) following FIG. 90 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted in the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c.

  In FIG. 90 (e) following FIG. 90 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each rotated back to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 90 (d).

  FIG. 90 (f) following FIG. 90 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 90 (d).

  FIG. 90 (g) following FIG. 90 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 90 (h), which is subsequent to FIG. 90 (g), shows that all of the light emitting elements mounted on the movable body 90 are located approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the movable body 90 moves from the initial position. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 90 (i) following FIG. 90 (h), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 90 (j) following FIG. 90 (i), only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1-b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 90 (k) following FIG. 90 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 90 (l) following FIG. 90 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible by rotating the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 90 (m) following FIG. 90 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 90 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 90 (d). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 90 (i) to 90 (l) are returned.

  FIG. 90 (n) following FIG. 90 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when one of the productions shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  A description will be given of an effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 with reference to FIG. 91 (a) to 91 (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  FIG. 91A shows a decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative design, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the prefetch notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (b) following FIG. 91 (a), a confirmation display of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (c) following FIG. 91 (b) shows a decorative symbol variation display by digestion of the hold icon a 2 in the pre-reading notice mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, A button notice display h110, and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a button operation notice effect is performed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, the movable body 90 includes a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the change icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112. It is overlapped.

  FIG. 91 (d) following FIG. 91 (c) shows that “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. An image is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design, a part of the merchant character mode variation icon ad1, and a part of the sun image are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (e) following FIG. 91 (d) shows that “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. Has been started. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design and a part of the merchant character-like variation icon ad <b> 1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (f) following FIG. 91 (e) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the SP reach effect display by the character display displaying the character string “game is!” Is started, and the decorative symbol display device On the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of Tono is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (g) following FIG. 91 (f), the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and displayed as a temporary stop. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the character string “Win” and the confrontation scene between the character and the enemy character ends and the character of the character wins is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the effect display won by the Tono character is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (h) following FIG. 91 (g), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the decorative design is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (i) following FIG. 91 (h) shows the 1R big hit game effect display of the 15R special big hit game on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7”, which is a big hit stop symbol, is displayed, and on the upper right, a character string “1R” indicating the number of rounds is displayed. A character string “80 balls” indicating the total number of numbers and a character string “number of jackpots: 1” indicating the number of jackpots are displayed on the lower right. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the 1R big hit game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (j) following FIG. 91 (i), the 15R special big hit game is ended and the character string “Dito” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the character string “Dito” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (k) following FIG. 91 (j) is shifted to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string “Right-handed!”, A pattern that clearly indicates right-handedness, a variation icon ad4, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern change display, a part of the character string “Please do right-handed!”, A part of the pattern that clearly shows that right-handing is made, a part of the change icon ad4, and the special figure 2 hold A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (l) following FIG. 91 (k), the electric support state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of “door opening error”, a character string of “sphere full error”, a variation icon ad5, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac2 of a pre-reading notice mode are displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Also, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of “door opening error”, a part of the character string of “sphere full error”, a part of the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  As shown in this example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. All of the above-described displays may be overlapped by the movable body 90, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not be overlapped.

  A production example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92A shows a state in which a notice effect is performed by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button button notice effect. Show. Note that even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 may be performed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends. . Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 92A may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is not performed. May be. When this production example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when one of the productions shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  FIG. 92B shows a state in which the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is completed. Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 92B may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is not performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared to the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed. You may comprise so that it may be displayed easily. When this production example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when one of the productions shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  A modification of how the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 looks at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 90 is located behind the game board 125 having game nails.

  FIG. 93A shows an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate-like shape and includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 93B is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate-like shape, and includes a vertically long rectangular cutout at a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are provided via the notch portion of the structure 30b. Visible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 93C shows an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structure 30c is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is not visible to the player because it is overlapped with the structure 30c. Note that a transmissive liquid crystal device may be arranged in the structure 30c so that the movable body 90 positioned behind the structure 30c is more easily visible during non-display than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  94, a modified example of the position and moving operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described.

  FIG. 94A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light-emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. Note that the liquid crystal display device a208 and the light-emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, and may be rotatable.

  FIG. 94B is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. Note that the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The left diagram in FIG. 94C shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state where the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. The diagram on the right side in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. Note that the movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, an effect example using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. The structure 247 used in the production examples in FIGS. 95 to 105 is a structure having a substantially circular front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface, and can be moved in the vertical direction. 95 to 104, the left diagram shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle diagram shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left diagram and the structure 247. The case of seeing through is shown. The diagram on the right side is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, the Sabohani character display SB or the sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the figure, the line of sight that the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight that the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. Note that the shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 of the present example are determined such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined eye angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. The decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 95 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 95A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 95 (b) following FIG. 95 (a) shows that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from below. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In the description of the player's line of sight in this example and the example shown below, “substantially front” defines that the angle of the line of sight is within about ± 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper direction defines an angle of the eyeline of about + 20 ° or more as substantially obliquely upward, and the substantially obliquely downward direction defines the angle of the eyeline of −about 20 ° or less as an approximately obliquely downward direction. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the description of the player's line of sight, it is only necessary that the position of the line of sight is higher than that of the front in the substantially oblique direction, and the position of the line of sight is lower than that in the substantially front direction.

  FIG. 95 (c) following FIG. 95 (b) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 95 (d) following FIG. 95 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper body portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 95 (e) following FIG. 95 (d) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the movement display is performed from the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 96 to 104 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and at least one of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, and rotation is displayed. One or a plurality of movements may be made so that a player viewing from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB, or may be overlapped with the structure 247. While the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position is moved and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved in at least one of the upward direction, the downward direction, the left direction, the right direction, and the rotation, or a plurality of movements. Thus, there may be a case where a player who is viewing from substantially the front can visually recognize at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 96 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 96A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 96 (b) following FIG. 96 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 96 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 96 (c) following FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 96 (d) following FIG. 96 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from approximately the upper side is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 96 (e) following FIG. 96 (d) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (e), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, the structure 247 is overlapped again. This is an example in which moving display is performed at the position to be displayed. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed.

  FIG. 97 shows staged examples using the structure 247 and the structure 50t step by step. The structure 50t is a structure formed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 97A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 97 (b) following FIG. 97 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 97 (c) following FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 97 (d) following FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 97 (e) following FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol. In the state of FIG. 97 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique bottom is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlapped with the structure 50t. It is an example which performs a movement display to a position. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 98 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 98A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 98 (b) following FIG. 98 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the bottom left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 98 (c) following FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247.

  FIG. 98 (d) following FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 98 (e) following FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  Thus, in this example, the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is not overlapped with the structure 247 after being moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example of moving display. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 99A shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 99 (b) following FIG. 99 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. Further, the Sabohani character display SB of this example is larger than the Sabohani character display SB shown in FIG.

  FIG. 99 (c) following FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247, and the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 99 (d) following FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A substantially lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 99 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize approximately the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 99 (e) following FIG. 99 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  In this way, in this example, the movement display is performed from a position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change does not overlap the structure 247 to a position where a part of the Sabohani character display SB overlaps. This is an example in which a movement display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 later, and a part of the Sabohani character display SB is an example of an effect that is always visible from a player with a substantially frontal eye. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 100 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 100A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 100A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 100 (b) following FIG. 100 (a) shows that the entire sabotani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 100 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 100C, which is subsequent to FIG. 100B, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The sun display su1 is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 100 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1 and the Sabohani character display SB, while the player is viewing from substantially above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 100 (d) following FIG. 100 (c) shows an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB throws the sun display su 1 up on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su 1 moves upward. This shows a state where an animated display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3.

  FIG. 100 (e) following FIG. 100 (d) shows the sun display su <b> 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed in the structure 247. It is an example which performs a movement display to the position which is not overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 101A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 101 (b) following FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohani character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 101 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1, whereas the player is viewing from substantially above. Can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and at least part of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 101 (c) following FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su 1 move upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  FIG. 101 (d) following FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su 1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon a3. In the state of FIG. 101 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the sun display su1. The whole is visible.

  FIG. 101 (e) following FIG. 101 (d) shows that the sun display su <b> 1 is further lowered on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position not overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely above can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1. .

  In this way, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display are displayed after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are overlapped with the structure 247. In this example, su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap the structure 247, and then only the sun display su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 102 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 102A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. In FIG. 102A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude radially from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the Sabohani character display SB used as a notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 102 (b) following FIG. 102 (a) is an approximately upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Are displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, whereas the player sees the structure 247 from substantially obliquely above. The watching player can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and part of the effect image ef1.

  In FIG. 102 (c) following FIG. 102 (b), the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef 1 is displayed on the screen. It is moved and displayed so as to appear from below. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 102 (d) subsequent to FIG. 102 (c) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef <b> 1 move upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body part of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 102 (e) following FIG. 102 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef 1 move further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247 and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the display of the Sabohani character display SB used for the change notice is moved from the position where the Sabohani character display SB overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Is displayed at a position where the effect image ef1 associated with the Sabohani character display SB is not overlapped with the structure 247 before being displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 103 shows three examples of effects using the structure 247. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 103 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 103 (a) shows a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display h113 and the balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance when you find a character!” It is displayed so as to overlap a part. The balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance when a character is found!” Is a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB appears, and the Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 103 (b) following FIG. 103 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character appears!” Is displayed. The character string “character appears!” May be displayed before the appearance of the Sabohani character display SB, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 103 (c) following FIG. 103 (b) is an enlarged display of the sabotani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character expanding!” Is displayed. The character string “Character expanding!” May be displayed before the start of the expansion of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of expansion, or may be displayed after the start of expansion. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  Thus, in this example, before displaying the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed. After the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed is performed, and the position overlapping the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example in which the Sabohani character display SB displayed on the screen is enlarged and displayed to notify that the Sabohani character display SB is enlarged. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good. Further, it may be configured such that the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohan character display SB, the easier it is to finally display the big hit symbol.

  The left diagram in FIG. 103A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 103 (A) shows the character display SB1 and the savohani 2 of the savohani 1 that are displayed in advance as a notice of the change at a position where the decorative symbol variability display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlapped with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 103 (A), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed substantially obliquely from above. The player who is present can visually recognize at least part of the character display SB1 of Sabohani and at least part of the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at positions overlapping the structure 247. is there. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the easier it may be to finally display the big hit symbol.

  The left side of FIG. 103A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. In FIG. 103 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display, and the character display SB1 of the sabotani 1 serving as the advance notice display of the variation is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A character display SB2 of the savory 2 serving as a notice display of the change is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (a), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed from obliquely above. The player who is viewing can view at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely below can view at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

  In this way, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. It is an example displayed at a position overlapping with the body 50t. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping with the plurality of structures, the easier it is to make the big hit symbol finally displayed.

  FIG. 104 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 104A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 104 (b) following FIG. 104 (a) shows that the entire sabotani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 104 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 104 (c) following FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 104 (d) following FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned so as to overlap the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the approximate center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 104 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, but the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally below is the Sabohani character display SB. At least a portion is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, the display is moved to a position not overlapping the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the body 247 is moved and the Sabohani character display SB is overlapped by the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Also good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved behind the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is a notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB may be delayed.

  FIG. 105 shows an example effect using the structure 247. FIG. 105A shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the Sabohani character display SB are displayed at positions where they overlap with the structure 247. FIG. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 105B, the structure 247 is visually recognized from the upper left to the lower right. A player who is viewing the structure 247 from the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, although a part of the effect image ef1 is visible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from the upper left side to the lower right side can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire Sabohani character display SB. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is viewing from the front. In addition, the production in this example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115, examples of effects using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. The arrows in FIGS. 106 to 115 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the hold icon and the variation icon, but the locus and movement of the hold icon and the variation icon are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display showing the direction of.

  FIG. 106 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 106 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g), and FIG. 106 (j) after FIGS. 106 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 106A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 106 (b) following FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 106 (c) following FIG. 106 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 106 (d) following FIG. 106 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 106 (e) following FIG. 106 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 106 (f) following FIG. 106 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display informing that the operation effect display is performed, or may be a notice display informing that the SP reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 106 (g) subsequent to FIG. 106 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 106 (h) following FIG. 106 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 106 (i) following FIG. 106 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  106 (j) following FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m 1 shown in FIG. 106 (g) ends and the notice display m 1 is erased. The hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 106 (k) following FIG. 106 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 ends on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol It is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 107 shows two examples of effects using hold icons in stages. FIG. 107 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 107 (h) to (j) after FIGS. 107 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 107 (k) to (g) after FIGS. 107 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (j). FIG. 107 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 107 (b) following FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the increased animation of the hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (c) following FIG. 107 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 of the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 107 (d) following FIG. 107 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (e) following FIG. 107 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (f) following FIG. 107 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal that has been displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter referred to as the "going out hold icon" with the character string "going out" displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Is sometimes displayed.) Is displayed. Instead of the on-the-go hold icon, a hold icon having a default shape with a lighter color may be used.

  FIG. 107 (g) subsequent to FIG. 107 (f) shows a notice symbol m 1 indicating a middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 107 (h) following FIG. 107 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the pedestal where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 107 (i) following FIG. 107 (h) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the pedestal before the movement ends. The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the on-going hold icon.

  In FIG. 107 (j) following FIG. 107 (i), the on-going on-hold icon is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (k) to (m).

  107 (k) following FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 107 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 is erased. Is done. On the pedestal on which the on-the-go hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed in which the hold icon in the notice display m1 (default form) overlaps the on-the-go hold icon and reappears. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of the disappearance of the advance notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the advance of the advance notice display m1. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  In FIG. 107 (l) following FIG. 107 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode has not yet moved. The state displayed on the pedestal is shown. FIG. 107 (m) shows a state in which the on-the-going hold icon is deleted.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol In FIG. 5, an example of temporarily displaying a hold icon in another mode instead of the hold icon being moved is shown. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

FIG. 108 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 108 shows an example of pattern 1 that performs the effects of FIGS. 108 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 108 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 108 (j) and 108 (g) after FIGS. 108 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown. <Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 holding number aa3, the special figure 2 holding figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 108A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 108 (b) following FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (c) following FIG. 108 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 108 (d) following FIG. 108 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (e) following FIG. 108 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (f) following FIG. 108 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a hold icon temporary movement animation is displayed in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal displayed by the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, and used as a notice of the change. Display may be used.

  FIG. 108 (g) subsequent to FIG. 108 (f) is a display of the intermediate symbol display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed most recently. Is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 108 (h) following FIG. 108 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m 1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 108 (i) following FIG. 108 (h) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m 1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends. The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  108 (j) following FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 finishes the collision animation of the notice display m 1 shown in FIG. 108 (g), and the notice display m 1 is erased. The reserved icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed, and the hold icon in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 moves toward the original pedestal A temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. However, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation. You may display so that it may overlap. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 108 (k) following FIG. 108 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 ends on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the holding icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol Is a temporary display of the hold icon on the right instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 109 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 109 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g), and FIG. 106 (j) after FIGS. The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (i). 109 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 a4 symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 reserve symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 109A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 109 (b) subsequent to FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (c) following FIG. 109 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 109 (d) following FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (e) following FIG. 109 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (f) following FIG. 109 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of gas.

  FIG. 109 (g) following FIG. 109 (f) shows that the notice display m <b> 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 109 (h) following FIG. 109 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m 1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed.

  FIG. 109 (i) following FIG. 109 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (j) and 109 (k).

  109 (j) following FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 109 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, a hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed, and the character string “in preparation” remains displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  FIG. 109 (k) following FIG. 109 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 ends on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

  Thus, in this example, a pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a gusset notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol. There is no example.

  FIG. 110 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  110 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 110A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 110 (b) following FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (c) following FIG. 110 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 of the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 110 (d) following FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (e) following FIG. 110 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (f) following FIG. 110 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 110 (g) subsequent to FIG. 110 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 110 (h) following FIG. 110 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 110 (i) following FIG. 110 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 110 (j) following FIG. 110 (i) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (k) following FIG. 110 (j) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 110 (l) following FIG. 110 (k) shows a notice symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornament symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 110 (m) following FIG. 110 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 110 (n) following FIG. 110 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

  In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a warning display, and the pseudo continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies continuously continues multiple times. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 111 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  111 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 111 (b) subsequent to FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (c) following FIG. 111 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 of the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 111 (d) following FIG. 111 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (e) following FIG. 111 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (f) following FIG. 111 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 111 (g) subsequent to FIG. 111 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 displays the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 111 (h) following FIG. 111 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 111 (i) following FIG. 111 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 111 (j) following FIG. 111 (i) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (k) following FIG. 111 (j) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 111 (l) following FIG. 111 (k) shows a notice display m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 111 (m) following FIG. 111 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 holding icon b3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 111 (n) following FIG. 111 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed a plurality of times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. If there are not enough hold icons used for the pseudo-continuous notice, a change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 112 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  112 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 112 (b) following FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (c) subsequent to FIG. 112 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (d) following FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (e) following FIG. 112 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (f) following FIG. 112 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 112 (g) subsequent to FIG. 112 (f) shows the notice symbol m 1 being the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 112 (h) following FIG. 112 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m 1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 112 (i) following FIG. 112 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  In FIG. 112 (j) following FIG. 112 (i), a reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “reach!” Is displayed.

  In this way, in this example, the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, so that the decorative symbol variation display is changed again and the reach effect is started. It is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 113 shows step-by-step examples using variation icons.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which a decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 113 (b) subsequent to FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (c) following FIG. 113 (b) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 113 (d) following FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (e) following FIG. 113 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (f) following FIG. 113 (e) shows that the variation icon ad 1 is displayed from the variation icon display area 280 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out and moves as a notice display m2. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, no variation icon is displayed on the base of the variation icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or may be a display used as a pre-reading notice. May be.

  FIG. 113 (g) subsequent to FIG. 113 (f) shows a notice symbol m 2 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  In FIG. 113 (h) following FIG. 113 (g), a moving animation of a notice display m2 that returns to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “Decoration 5” is finished and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2.

  FIG. 113 (i) following FIG. 113 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is completed with the notice display m 2 as the fluctuation icon ad 1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice that the decoration symbol variation display is re-variable is performed when the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decoration symbol as a notice display during temporary stop display of the off symbol. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. Note that not only the variation icon in the default mode but also a variation icon in a mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 in this example. FIG. 114 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon step by step. Show.

  114 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 114 (b) following FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (c) following FIG. 114 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (d) following FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (e) following FIG. 114 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (f) following FIG. 114 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 114 (g) following FIG. 114 (f) shows that the notice display m <b> 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 114 (h) following FIG. 114 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m 1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (i) following FIG. 114 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m 1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 114 (j) following FIG. 114 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon move animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. .

  FIG. 114 (k) following FIG. 114 (j) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (l) following FIG. 114 (k) shows a special figure 1 holding icon a3 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (m) following FIG. 114 (l) shows a notice symbol m 1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 2” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 3” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 114 (n) following FIG. 114 (m) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (o) following FIG. 114 (n) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 114 (p) following FIG. 114 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. Yes.

  FIG. 114 (q) subsequent to FIG. 114 (p) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (r) following FIG. 114 (q) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (s) subsequent to FIG. 114 (r) shows a preliminary display m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 7” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Note that the notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 8” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 114 (t) following FIG. 114 (s) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is finished, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (u) following FIG. 114 (t) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m 1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a 3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends, and “decoration 7”. Reach production will be performed.

  As described above, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon is used as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, and a continuous notice that collides with the middle design of the decorative design is performed over a plurality of fluctuations, thereby developing a reach effect. is there. In this example, the notice display that appears for the first time and the second time is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears for the third time is used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 115 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of a character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 115 (b) following FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which an increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the form of a character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (c) subsequent to FIG. 115 (b) is a special figure 2 in the form of a character of Tono in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which an increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 115 (d) following FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (e) following FIG. 115 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (f) following FIG. 115 (e) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special map 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 are all in the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice or suggest that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used in combination with a prefetch notice.

  115 (g) following FIG. 115 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 is changed to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 is changed to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 is changed. The notice display c3 ′ shows a changed state. The notice displays c1 'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and have a display mode in which a large-sized character of Tono is fighting by pulling out a Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display c1 ′ fights against “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, A battle animation in which the notice display c2 ′ fights “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208b and the battle animation fights “decoration 5” in which the notice display c3 ′ temporarily stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

  FIG. 115 (h), following FIG. 115 (g), shows a notice in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the notice display c1 ′ changes to c1, the notice display c2 ′ changes to c2, and the notice display c3 ′ changes to c3. The notice c3 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, the notice display c2 was showing the special figure 1 hold icon a3 The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again.

  FIG. 115 (i) following FIG. 115 (h) shows that the notice display c1 returns to the position before movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation is returned to the position before the movement, and the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect of “decoration 7” is executed.

  In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays, so that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 114 is performed. In addition, when the number of the hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the notice display.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 136.

  116 (a) to 116 (c) show examples of effects using balloon display step by step.

  116 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 116 (a), a balloon display f1 is displayed at the center of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  In FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed above the balloon display f1. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. The horizontal width of the balloon display f1 and the horizontal width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but the width and height are different from each other. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon indications f1 and f2 in the following description.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  117A to 117I show step-by-step examples using balloon display.

  117 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a) is displayed so that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). Then, after stopping and displaying at the approximate center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed all at once. Good. The same configuration may be used for other balloon display.

  FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark in the balloon display f1 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 117 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation of moving upward is performed on the balloon display f1 due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is performed simultaneously with a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left.

  117 (f) following FIG. 117 (e), a balloon animation f2 that appears from the right end of the screen is moved to the left, and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f1 moves upward. The moving animation to be performed is shown in a state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

  FIG. 117 (g) following FIG. 117 (f) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 117 (h) following FIG. 117 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string in the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap the balloon display f3. The horizontal width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the horizontal width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the horizontal width and height are different. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  Also, FIG. 117 (h) shows a state where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and the movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed simultaneously.

  117 (i) following FIG. 117 (h), a balloon animation f3 that appears from the left end of the screen is moved to the right, and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The moving animation is performed and is displayed at the substantially upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 indicates a state where it is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, the balloon display f2 of the samurai character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may be deleted after the balloon display f2 is deleted, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. The balloon display f2 may be erased at the same time or after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth (n is an arbitrary number) of pseudo continuous display ) May be deleted before starting, or may be deleted before displaying the temporary stop display. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot, or the same as the balloon display f1 of the character. After displaying the moving animation that moves upward, the animation may be erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, or may be erased so as to exit from the direction of each appearance. The same applies to the balloon display described in the subsequent drawings.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Note that the balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes each component of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) pattern, character string display, frame, character name display, character In each face image), at least a part of each component may be displayed as an animation, only a part thereof may be displayed as an animation, or all may be displayed as an animation. For example, an animation display in which the symbol of the clear mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the character string display blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character kisses may be displayed. The whole balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of an animation display in which the pattern of the clear mark rotates, an animation display in which the character string display blinks, and an animation display in which the character kisses. Alternatively, the character string display may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character pokes up during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing may be displayed. The animation display of each component of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original animation display after moving the position One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Moreover, a part of at least one animation display of each component of the balloon display may overlap a part of another animation of each component of the balloon display. In addition, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each component of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  118 (a) to 118 (m) show an example of effect using balloon display step by step.

  118 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  118 (b) following FIG. 118 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 118 (c) following FIG. 118 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 118 (d) following FIG. 118 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208, above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  118 (e) following FIG. 118 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. Then, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 118 (f) following FIG. 118 (e), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f 1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f 1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  118 (g) following FIG. 118 (f) is displayed such that the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 118 (h) following FIG. 118 (g) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  FIG. 118 (i) following FIG. 118 (h) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  118 (j) following FIG. 118 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112. The balloon display f1, f2 shows a state where a moving animation is performed in which the balloons move upward at the same speed. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (k) following FIG. 118 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 stops at the top of the screen. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 118 (l) following FIG. 118 (k), a balloon display f3 by the princess character appears so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 118 (m) following FIG. 118 (l) shows a state where a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  119 (a) to 119 (m) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  119 (b) following FIG. 119 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  119 (c) following FIG. 119 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 119 (d) following FIG. 119 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 119 (e) following FIG. 119 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 119 (f) following FIG. 119 (e) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps the balloon part of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, and therefore, the character string of “Morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character and the character image of “don” are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 119 (g) following FIG. 119 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started after the movement animation moving toward the left of the balloon display f2 is completed. In FIG. 119 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string “Amorous weather is” hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the symbol of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. The upper half of is visible. It should be noted that at a certain timing between FIG. 119 (f) and FIG. 119 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 is in a state in which a part of the fine mark pattern is displayed and no character string is displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 119 (h) following FIG. 119 (g), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 119 (i) following FIG. 119 (h) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 119 (j) following FIG. 119 (i) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 119 (k) following FIG. 119 (j) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f3 is exactly overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the character string “morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a cloudy mark pattern, and a frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the frog character and the character image of “爺” are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 119 (l) following FIG. 119 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 119 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, a character string of “the weather in the morning” and a cloudy mark pattern and a frame part of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3. The upper half of is visible. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (m) following FIG. 119 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen. Has been.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described. 120 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 120 (n) to (q) after FIGS. 120 (a) to (m), and FIGS. 120 (r) to (m) after FIGS. 120 (a) to (m). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
120 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 120A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 120 (b) following FIG. 120 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 120 (c) following FIG. 120 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 120 (d) following FIG. 120 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 120 (e) following FIG. 120 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 120 (g) following FIG. 120 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 120 (h), which follows FIG. 120 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 120 (i) following FIG. 120 (h) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 120 (j) following FIG. 120 (i) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f 2 and the balloon display f 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 120 (k) following FIG. 120 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of “honey” displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of “Lance when reach” are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. In addition, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 120 (l) following FIG. 120 (k) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that has appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has appeared, and the movement above the balloon display f3 is also temporarily stopped and displayed. The substantially lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 120 (m) following FIG. 120 (l), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 120 (n) following FIG. 120 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon section in which a face image of a gale character, a character image of “gaze” displayed on the face image of a gale character, a character string and a pattern of “hot” are displayed. It is a display including. Further, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the balloon part such as the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 120 (o) following FIG. 120 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 120 (p) following FIG. 120 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scrolled, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 120 (q) following FIG. 120 (p) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. <Example of pattern 2>
120 (r) following FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (m), the balloon display f2 is displayed so that the balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and the balloon display f2 which has been stopped in FIG. 120 (m). A moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is shown. That is, this example is an example in which an effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward.

  In FIG. 120 (s) following FIG. 120 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out simultaneously from the right end of the screen. .

  FIG. 120 (t) following FIG. 120 (s) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described. 121 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 121 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (j) and FIG. 121 (m) after FIGS. 121 (a) to (j). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
121 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 121 (b) following FIG. 121 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 121 (e) following FIG. 121 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 121 (f) following FIG. 121 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 121 (g) following FIG. 121 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 121 (h) following FIG. 121 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 121 (i) following FIG. 121 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 121 (j) following FIG. 121 (i) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at a position overlapping the balloon display f 2 and the balloon display f 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 121 (k) following FIG. 121 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled and displayed downward.

  FIG. 121 (l) following FIG. 121 (k) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
121 (m) following FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 ′ appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 ′, f2, and f3 are scrolled and displayed downward. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 121 (n) following FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantial center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon indications f1 ′ and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Good.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  122A to 122I show step-by-step examples using balloon display.

  122 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 122 (b) following FIG. 122 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 122 (c) following FIG. 122 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 ′ appearing from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208 and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 122 (d) following FIG. 122 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 ′ on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 122 (e) following FIG. 122 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 122 (f) following FIG. 122 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 ′ moves upward and a balloon animation f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f1 'was stopped before. In addition, the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 122 (g) following FIG. 122 (f) shows that the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2. A button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 122 (h) following FIG. 122 (g) deletes the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. While the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped, a moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is erased without being displayed above the position where the balloon display f1 'is displayed. Further, by displaying the speech balloon display f1 ′ with priority over the speech balloon display f2, when the speech balloon display f2 is moving behind the speech balloon display f1 by scroll display, the speech balloon display f1 of the speech balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured not to display a portion where 'is overlapped. In this case, the face image of the frog character and the character image of the heel in the balloon display f2 are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ', and are thus scroll-displayed to the upper end of the screen. Thus, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with higher reliability is prioritized and deleted, so that a balloon display with high reliability remains on the screen. It is configured.

  FIG. 122 (i) following FIG. 122 (h) shows a balloon display in which a balloon animation f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward while the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed. f3 shows a state in which it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  123 (a) to 123 (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 123 (b) following FIG. 123 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 123 (d) following FIG. 123 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 123 (e) following FIG. 123 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. After the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 is displayed so that it appears from the lower part of the screen and the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. It appears to overlap in half.

  FIG. 123 (f) following FIG. 123 (e) shows a moving animation in which the lower half of the balloon display f 1 is overlapped with the balloon display f 2 and both move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 123 (g) following FIG. 123 (f) shows the chance that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily suspends the scroll display of the balloon displays f 1 and f 2, and takes a chance to overlap the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 123 (h), following FIG. 123 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Also, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the substantially lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (a character string “Today's weather is”, a fine mark pattern or a frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 (“Today's weather is” It overlaps with a part of the character string, cloudy mark pattern and balloon part), and the balloon part of the balloon display 2 ("Today's weather" character string, cloudy mark picture and balloon part frame part) ) Overlaps with a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 ("Today's weather is a character string", a rain mark pattern, or a part of the balloon part frame). There may be cases. For example, the face images of each character may overlap, the character images of each character's name may overlap, or the character's face image overlaps the balloon There may be a case where the balloon part overlaps the face image of the character, or there may be a case where the character image of the character name overlaps the balloon part.

  FIG. 123 (i) following FIG. 123 (h) is a position where the moving animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed, and the upper end of the balloon part f1 and the lower end of the balloon part f3 fit on the screen. The state where the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or terminated is shown. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, two balloon displays are overlapped. However, two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the greater the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping state of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping state of each balloon display may be configured not to be equal. For example, the area where the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap may be smaller or larger than the area where the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  124 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  124 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 124 (c) following FIG. 124 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  124 (d) following FIG. 124 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player is displayed. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  124 (e) following FIG. 124 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation that moves upward after the balloon display f1 is reduced is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. In addition, the reduction degree of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each of the balloon display components (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced, Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction rate may be different for each configuration.

  FIG. 124 (f) following FIG. 124 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 124 (g) following FIG. 124 (f) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f 1 and f 2, and has a chance at a position where it overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 124 (h) following FIG. 124 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced and displayed before moving upward, but the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon indications f1 and f2 may be reduced larger or smaller than the other, and the configuration of reducing one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 124 (i) following FIG. 124 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and stopped. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  125 (a) to (k) show step-by-step examples using balloon display.

  125 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 125 (b) following FIG. 125 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 125 (c) following FIG. 125 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 125 (d) following FIG. 125 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 125 (e) following FIG. 125 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 ′ by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 125 (f) following FIG. 125 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and the balloon display f 1 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ indicates a state where it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 'are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 125 (g) following FIG. 125 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon displays f 1 and f 1 ′ is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 1 ′. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 125 (h), following FIG. 125 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, an animation in which the balloon display f1 'is changed to the balloon display f1a is performed. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'expands, and the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a floats instead as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears. . The balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying a character image of “Tono”, a character image of “SP reach” displayed on the face image of the character, and a character string and a pattern of “SP reach confirmation”. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1 ′. Or may be overlapped by the changed balloon display f1a without moving, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  FIG. 125 (i) following FIG. 125 (h) is stopped and displayed so that the balloon display f1a fits within the frame of the screen.

  FIG. 125 (j) following FIG. 125 (i) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 in a position overlapping the balloon display f 1 a in the decorative symbol display device 208. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 125 (k) following FIG. 125 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The character string “SP reach confirmation” is deleted and the character string “all rotation reach confirmation” is displayed. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” includes a decorative pattern, a character image of the shrine, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure The display may be overlapped with the display of the second 4th symbol aa4, the number of common figure hold aa5, the 4th symbol aa6 of the normal diagram, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the like.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  126 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 126 (b) following FIG. 126 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a princess character display m3 is displayed from the left end of the screen. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the 4th symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the universal figure hold number aa5, and the 4th figure aa6 of the normal figure. Yes.

  FIG. 126 (c) following FIG. 126 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. The princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 126 (d) following FIG. 126 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps with substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of “dono”. It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  FIG. 126 (e) following FIG. 126 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

  FIG. 126 (f) following FIG. 126 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

  FIG. 126 (g) following FIG. 126 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 includes a character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a pattern part of a clear mark, and a balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. The princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

  126 (h) following FIG. 126 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby erasing the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 has a rain mark on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and a cloudy mark pattern part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern portion of the mark and a part of the face image of the frog character.

  FIG. 126 (i) following FIG. 126 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. The princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right and is erased so as to exit from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the samurai character. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  127 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  127 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 127 (b) following FIG. 127 (a), a balloon display f 1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative design display apparatus 208 is shown. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 127 (c) following FIG. 127 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

FIG. 127 (d) following FIG. 127 (c) shows that a button notice display h 110 simulating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 are displayed above the balloon display f 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 127 (e), following FIG. 127 (d), shows a state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is shown. FIG. 127 (e) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. When the button is pressed, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears from the bottom of the screen. It is displayed to do. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  FIG. 127 (f) following FIG. 127 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 127 (g) following FIG. 127 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon indications f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 127 (h) following FIG. 127 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame part of the balloon display f2, the character string part, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and the part of the frame part of the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 127 (i) following FIG. 127 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, the character string portions, the cloudy marks, and the rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position. In other words, the balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be moved while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  128 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  128 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 128 (b) following FIG. 128 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a smiling character is displayed on the light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the clear mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  FIG. 128 (f) following FIG. 128 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  FIG. 128 (g) following FIG. 128 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 128 (h) following FIG. 128 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame parts of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string part, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 128 (i) following FIG. 128 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, cloudy marks, and rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emission display is performed by the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 reserved symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 129 (b) following FIG. 129 (a), a balloon display f 1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 129 (c) following FIG. 129 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  FIG. 129 (d) following FIG. 129 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  FIG. 129 (e) following FIG. 129 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the lord character, part of the character “dono”, and part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 129 (f) following FIG. 129 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a part of the face image of the character, the substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, and the face of the samurai character. It overlaps part of the image.

  FIG. 129 (g) following FIG. 129 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display includes a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the frog character, and a button notice display. h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 all overlap.

  FIG. 129 (h), which follows FIG. 129 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, part of the face image of the frog character, part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and part of the character image of “princess”. Yes.

  FIG. 129 (i) following FIG. 129 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloud mark pattern, a part of the face image of the frog character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the entire character string, the rain mark A part of the picture of the princess character and a part of the face image of the princess character overlap all the character images of the “princess”.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, change icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative design, 4th design, mini decorative design, notice display, pre-reading notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, consecutive game count display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 130A to 130H show an example of effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 130 (b) following FIG. 130 (a), a balloon display f 1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. In the balloon display f1 ′, the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, and the character string and the pattern of “Pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 ′ appearing from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Also, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and hold icon display area 280ab.

  FIG. 130 (d) subsequent to FIG. 130 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1 ′. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 130 (e) following FIG. 130 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby deleting the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The balloon display f2 ′ by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, the face image of the moth character, the character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the moth character, the character string “Holding change” and the cloudy mark pattern are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 130 (f) following FIG. 130 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f 1 ′ moves upward, and a movement in which the balloon display f 2 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 ′ is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1' was stopped before. The movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 130 (g) following FIG. 130 (f) shows a state in which the cloudy mark image displayed in the balloon display f 2 ′ is moving toward the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 280 ab. Yes.

  In FIG. 130 (h) following FIG. 130 (g), the cloudy mark image displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is displayed as a special figure 1 hold icon a4 in place of the default figure special hold icon a4. Has been. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Also good.

  The effect in this example is an example in which a continuous notice is given by the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1 'is used for the advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for the prefetch notice. Also, in this example, the cloudy mark image that was displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon, but the fluctuation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part is also an example. The notice icon used may be moved and displayed inside the balloon part, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  131A to 131I show step-by-step examples using balloon display. 131 to 133, a sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative design display device 208, and a sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows a sub-liquid crystal a208 with a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure hold number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 131 (b) following FIG. 131 (a) is a balloon display by the character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, a balloon is blown out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Another part of the display f1 is displayed so as to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string “Morning is in the morning” and a pattern of a fine mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a face image of the character and the temple. This corresponds to the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 131 (c) following FIG. 131 (b) shows a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 simultaneously facing upward. The moving animation which moves is displayed and it has shown the state stopped and displayed in the screen center of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208.

  FIG. 131 (d) following FIG. 131 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 131 (e) following FIG. 131 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h 110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a part of the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string “morning weather is” and a cloudy mark pattern are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image of the frog character The character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the speech balloon correspond to this.

  In FIG. 131 (f) following FIG. 131 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen. A part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal b208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 131 (g) following FIG. 131 (f) shows that the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are displayed at the position overlapping the part of the balloon display f 1 and part of f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 131 (h) following FIG. 131 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation validity are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part displaying a character string “Afternoon weather is” and a rain mark pattern, and another part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of the princess character and the princess. This corresponds to the character image of “Princess” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  In FIG. 131 (i) following FIG. 131 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen. A part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal a208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 132 (a) to (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows a sub-liquid crystal a208 with a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure hold number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (a) is a balloon display by a character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that f1 appears. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 132 (c) following FIG. 132 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 132 (e) following FIG. 132 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (f) following FIG. 132 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen is displayed upward. The moving animation which moves toward is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 subsequent to FIG. 132 (f), FIG. 132 (g) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and then displays the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping each other, indicating a state in which a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 132 (h) following FIG. 132 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the already erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear reduced in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 132 (i) following FIG. 132 (h) shows an animation in which the moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is moved downward, and a balloon display is displayed in the lower part of the sub liquid crystal b208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is filled with the balloon display, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may make it erase a half balloon display.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. In this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. You may comprise so that it may become larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display apparatus 208, and you may comprise so that it may become the same magnitude | size.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  133 (a) to (m) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows that the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure hold number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 133 (b) following FIG. 133 (a) is based on the character from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b 208 (the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 133 (c) following FIG. 133 (b) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b 208.

  FIG. 133 (d) following FIG. 133 (c) shows a state where “decoration 3—decoration 8—decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Further, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 133 (e) following FIG. 133 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In FIG. 133 (f) following FIG. 133 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen faces upward. A moving animation that moves is performed. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 133 (g) following FIG. 133 (f), the balloon displays f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 133 (h) following FIG. 133 (g), the balloon displays f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 133 (i) following FIG. 133 (h) shows a state where “decoration 2—decoration 8—decoration 9” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In FIG. 133 (h), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208 even when the decorative symbol is stopped, and the balloon display f3 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. .

  In FIG. 133 (j) following FIG. 133 (i), the next change is started, the decorative design change display is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is ongoing.

  In FIG. 133 (k) following FIG. 133 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon displays f1 to f3 are continuously scrolled and displayed so that the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen. Yes. The balloon display f6 is a character image of “Chibi princess” displayed on the face image of the Chibi princess character and the face image of the Chibi princess character, and a character string of “evening weather” and “reach?” It is a display including a balloon part on which a pattern of clear marks is displayed. The balloon display f6 in this example is a display used as a notice that the reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

  In FIG. 133 (l) following FIG. 133 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is displayed. The scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated at the stage where the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (m) following FIG. 133 (l) shows a state where the reach effect of “decoration 4” is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of variations. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-liquid crystal may continue to produce the balloon display effect.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  FIG. 134 shows two examples of effects using hold icons in stages. FIG. 134 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 134 (i) to (k) after FIGS. 134 (a) to (h), and FIG. 134 (i ′) after FIGS. 134 (a) to (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs production | production of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (k).

  FIG. 134 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 134 (b) following FIG. 134 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 134 (d) following FIG. 134 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 134 (e) following FIG. 134 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more of the same balloon display may continue.

  In FIG. 134 (f) following FIG. 134 (e), a moving animation is performed in which both balloon displays f 1 move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 134 (g) following FIG. 134 (f) shows the chance button 136 in a position where the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the two balloon displays f 1 and overlaps the both balloon displays f 1. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 134 (h), following FIG. 134 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and immediately before the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Also, a balloon display f1b appears from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f1b includes the face image of the Tono character and the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character. It is a display that includes a speech balloon that displays a character string and a pattern that are visible and below are wisdom but foolish. The balloon portion of the balloon display f1b is a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h) shows a state where the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 134 (j) following FIG. 134 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is being scrolled.

  FIG. 134 (k) following FIG. 134 (j) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (i ′) to (l ′).

  FIG. 134 (i ′) following FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (h) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon part f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon part f1b may stop once or a plurality of times.

  FIG. 134 (j ′) following FIG. 134 (i ′) shows a button notice display h110 simulating the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation expiration date display indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state where h112 is displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 134 (k ′) following FIG. 134 (j ′), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon part f1b is resumed. The

  FIG. 134 (l ′) following FIG. 134 (k ′) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scrolling display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings “when all are placed on a person look stupid but wisdom and what is below is wisdom but stupidly look.” There may be a case where is scroll-displayed and a case where all are not scroll-displayed. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  135 (a) to (g) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special pattern 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 135 (b) following FIG. 135 (a) is displayed so that two balloon displays f1 appear simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is displayed. . The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  FIG. 135 (c) following FIG. 135 (b) is an animation in which balloon displays f 2 and f 3 appear simultaneously from the right end of the screen on the decorative symbol display device 208 and move to the left at the same speed. It is displayed. Two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In the upper and lower balloon displays f1, an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is started.

  FIG. 135 (d) following FIG. 135 (c) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f <b> 1 to f <b> 3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (e) following FIG. 135 (d) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 135 (f) following FIG. 135 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f 1 to f 3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state immediately before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves in a different direction at a different speed may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the change notice or the prefetch notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice that is not used for the change notice or the prefetch notice, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  FIG. 135 (g) following FIG. 135 (f) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f 1 to f 3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exits from the left end in the order of appearance. The state after being erased is shown. Thereafter, an SP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that have started to be displayed at the same time have ended simultaneously, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at the end, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. In addition, the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that have started to be displayed at the same time are ended simultaneously. However, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be ended before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be faster than the other.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, two examples of balloon display effects will be described.

  FIG. 136 (a) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, it is impossible to visually recognize the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 136 (b) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, there may be a case where the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2 can be simultaneously viewed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.

(E1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 86),
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A game table comprising second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)),
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and (d)),
The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and (d)). Amusement stand.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(E2)
The game table according to e1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(E3)
The game table according to e1 or e2,
The game table characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, see FIG. 93 (c)).

(E4)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e3,
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(E5)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to (d)). To play.

(E6)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)),

(E7)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(E8)
A gaming machine according to e7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(E9)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e8,
The first movable means is means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(E10)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).

(E11)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e10,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, see FIGS. 87 (c) to (e)).

(E12)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
The game table characterized in that the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

(E13)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 93).

(E14)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e13,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(E15)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition,
The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover. In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. -The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit. -A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED. A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(F1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 86),
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A game table comprising second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)),
The first light emitting means is a means covered with a first cover (for example, the cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
The game table characterized in that the second light emitting means is means covered by the first cover (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(F2)
A gaming machine according to f1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(F3)
A gaming machine according to f1 or f2,
The game table characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, see FIG. 93 (c)).

(F4)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f3,
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(F5)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to (d)). To play.

(F6)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)),

(F7)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(F8)
A gaming table according to f7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(F9)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f8,
The first movable means is means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
A gaming table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second cover (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(F10)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).

(F11)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f10,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, see FIGS. 87 (c) to (e)).

(F12)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
The game table characterized in that the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

(F13)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 93).

(F14)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f13,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(F15)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit is the same as that of the first state and the first state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover. In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. -The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit. -A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED. A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(G1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A game machine comprising second movable means (for example, movable body 1),
The first movable means is means capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 83 (c)),
The second movable unit is a unit capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 84 (c)),
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 83 (a)),
The position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that has performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)). A characteristic game stand.

  In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(G2)
a gaming table according to g1,
The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)). A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the appearance of the second movable means can be changed during execution of the second operation.

(G3)
A gaming machine according to g1 or g2,
In a state where at least a part of the first movable unit and a part of the second movable unit overlap in the front-rear direction, the other part of the second movable unit is visible from the front. A characteristic game stand.

  In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed.

(G4)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g3,
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
A position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the display means can be changed.

(G5)
a gaming table according to g4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string “please remove the sphere”) (see, for example, FIG. 85B),
At least a part of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 85 (c)). A game stand.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first error display can be changed.

(G6)
a gaming table according to g5,
The game table characterized in that the first error display is a ball removal display (see, for example, FIG. 85B).

  In some cases, the appearance of the ball-free display can be changed.

(G7)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g6,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(G8)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  Note that the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first operation may be a drop, a component in the front-rear direction, The orientation may include at least one of a horizontal component and a vertical component. The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first operation may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component. -Both a 1st operation | movement and a 2nd operation | movement may be performed simultaneously, the other may be performed after one is performed, and only one or the other may be performed. After both the first operation and the second operation are performed, both the first movable means and the second movable means may return to the initial position at the same time, and after one returns, the other returns Also good. -While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate. -During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means. -During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means. -Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or even if it performs the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means Good.

(H1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 86),
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A game table comprising second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)),
In an initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30a) (for example, see FIG. 93 (a)). , A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(H2)
The game table according to h1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).

(H3)
A gaming machine according to h1 or h2,
The game table characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, see FIG. 93 (c)).

(H4)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h3,
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(H5)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to (d)). To play.

(H6)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)),

(H7)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 86),
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(H8)
The game table according to h7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).

(H9)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h8,
The first movable means is means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3),
A gaming table, characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).

(H10)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).

(H11)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h10,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, see FIGS. 87 (c) to (e)).

(H12)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
The game table characterized in that the first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

(H13)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 93).

(H14)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h13,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(H15)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit is the same as that of the first state and the first state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover. In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure. -The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission. -A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover. The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit. -A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED. A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. -At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object. The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(I1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine comprising a structure (e.g., structure 247),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display (for example, Sabohani character display SB) at a first position (for example, lower center of the display area) (see, for example, FIG. 95 (c)).
At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (for example, see FIG. 95),
The gaming table characterized in that the first display displayed at the first position is a display that may overlap the structure (for example, see FIG. 95 (c)).

  In some cases, the player can be provided with the pleasure of playing by changing the direction of viewing the game platform, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I2)
A gaming machine according to i1,
The structure is a movable structure (for example, see FIG. 104),
The gaming table, wherein the first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap the structure after the structure is moved.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I3)
A gaming machine according to i1 or i2,
The display means is a movable display means,
The gaming table, wherein the first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap the structure after the display means is moved.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I4)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i3,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, the center of the display area),
The game table characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap the structure (for example, see FIG. 95 (e)).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I5)
The game table according to i4,
The gaming table may be displayed in the second position after the first display is displayed in the first position (see, for example, FIG. 95).

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I6)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i5,
The game table characterized in that the first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 95).

  In some cases, the appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I7)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i6,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(I8)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i6,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition, the first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable It may be an icon display, a character display, or an error display. The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure. The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the display means is moved. -A structure may be provided with a display means, may be provided with a LED board, and may be movable. -The display means may be movable. The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the display of the transmissive liquid crystal display. -The light emitting panel may be sufficient as a structure, and a 1st display may be performed back during the light emission display of a light emission panel. (Drawing) ・ Example where the notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps with the structure to the second position where it does not overlap ・ No notice where the notice display overlaps with the structure from the first position Example of moving to the first position again after moving to the second position-The notice display overlaps with the other structure after moving from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap Example of moving to the third position and moving to the fifth position that does not overlap after moving from the fourth position to the first position where it overlaps from the fourth position Visible example-Announcement display is displayed at the first position where it overlaps the structure, and other advance notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap-Announcement The indication is displayed at the second position and the other notice display moves to the first position.The notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, An example where the effect display can be seen first ・ An example where the advance notice is displayed before the advance notice is displayed at the first position where it overlaps the structure ・ An example where the advance notice appears enlarged ・ The second notice display (J1) An example in which the notice display of the second position is hidden by moving the structure or the display means
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation” (for example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)) may be displayed.
A gaming table, wherein a first effect display (for example, a pseudo continuous variation effect) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the first animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 106).

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2)
A gaming machine according to j1,
The game machine characterized in that the display means is means for displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3)
A gaming machine according to j1 or j2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 115 (f) and 115 (g)).

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j3,
The game machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including a moving display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (f) to (i)).

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j4,
The game machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icons (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (f) and (g)).

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j5,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first animation is an animation including an increased display of the icons (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (j) and (k)).

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7)
A gaming table according to j6,
A game table characterized in that an increase display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (for example, see FIG. 110).

  There are cases where the behavior of one icon can be more enjoyed.

(J8)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j7,
The gaming table characterized in that the first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 106 (h)).

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J9)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j8,
The gaming table characterized in that the first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 112 (j)).

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j9,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J11)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j10,
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, special figure 1, hold icon display area 208ab) (for example, see FIG. 107 (f)),
In at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, an icon displaying a character string “in preparation”) may be displayed in the icon display area (for example, FIG. 107 (g)).

  In some cases, the player's attention can be gathered in the display of the icon display area.

(J12)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j11,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by two or more icons (hereinafter referred to as “second animation”) may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 115 (f)).
The game table, wherein the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the second animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 115 (h)).

  There are cases where the behavior of two or more icons can be more enjoyed.

(J13)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j12,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  In addition, the icon may move and nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons may be moved (packed) May be displayed. -When the icon is moved and displayed again (returned display) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or another icon display May be displayed to dismiss.・ The decorative design may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), the display may change from shaking display to change display, or the special design is temporarily stopped on the middle design. Also good. -The 1st production display does not need to be performed after the 1st animation. -The first animation may be performed a plurality of times during one decoration symbol variation display. -A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays. -An icon with high expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with low expectation, or vice versa. The first animation may be easier in the case of the reserved full tank than in the case of the reserved non-full tank, or vice versa. -A notice display may be made to suggest that the first animation will be performed. -A count notice display (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed. The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is digested. The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

  (Drawing) FIG. 106 to FIG. 115 are examples in which the hold icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variation display is re-variable (pseudo-continuous) during fluctuation variation of the off symbol. FIG. 107 is an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on a holding base while the holding icon is moving. FIG. 108 is an example of returning to the original position when the back hold icon is packed back while the hold icon is moving. FIG. 109 is an example of a gaze effect that does not develop even if the hold icon hits. FIG. 110 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation a plurality of times with one change. FIG. 111 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation with a single change. FIG. 112 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon. FIG. 113 is an example in which the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. FIG. 114 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with a plurality of variations and develops to reach. FIG. 115 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative symbol at the same time and reach.

(K1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)),
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
There is a case where at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display overlap (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing his / her line of sight, the player can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2)
a gaming table according to k1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d). ), (E))
The first moving animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)). A game stand.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3)
a gaming table according to k2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left)).
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, refer to FIG. 117 (f)), the gaming table.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4)
A gaming table according to k2 or k3,
After displaying another movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “third movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. A display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (b) and (c)),
The gaming machine characterized in that the first moving animation and the third moving animation may have different moving directions of the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117).

  There are cases in which the player's expectation can be enhanced by changing the direction of movement by moving animation.

(K5)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k4,
There is a case where at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k5,
At least a part of the first balloon display may be overlapped with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

  There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(K7)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k6,
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, Tono character),
The game table characterized in that the first balloon display character and the second balloon display character may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(K8)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k7,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(K9)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k8,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(K10)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence. The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half. -It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation). When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially. A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display. -A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. -A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display. The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  (Drawing) FIG. 116 is an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 117 is an example of a conversation notice. The animation appears horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is vertical movement (new balloon animation and old balloon animation simultaneously). FIG. 118 is an example of a conversation notice. • An appearance animation moves horizontally, and an animation when a new speech balloon appears is a vertical movement (a variation of timing • an animation of a new speech balloon after an animation of an old speech balloon). FIG. 119 is an example of a conversation notice. • An animation that appears is moved horizontally, and an animation that appears when a new balloon appears. The animation is a vertical movement (an example of timing variation. FIG. 120 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which the appearance animation moves vertically, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double. FIG. 121 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, and an example in which the content changes after returning. FIG. 122 is an example in which a specific notice balloon (for example, a balloon with high expectation) is not deleted. FIG. 123 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example where speech balloons overlap. FIG. 124 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which an old speech balloon is reduced. FIG. 125 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which speech balloons of the same character continue, an example in which the speech balloon expands, and an example in which the content of the speech balloon protrudes from the speech balloon. FIG. 126 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a balloon moves while the notice character is moving. FIG. 127 shows an example of a conversation notice. In this example, the balloon moves while the movable body is operating. 128 is an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a balloon moves in a state where a light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light. FIG. 129 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a balloon moves while the first display is displayed. FIG. 130 is an example of a conversation notice. An example of a balloon is a prefetch notice (the hold icon is changed to a prefetch icon). 131 is an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on different display means. FIG. 132 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves to another display means. FIG. 133 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which speech balloons are displayed over a plurality of variations.

(L1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)),
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
While the second balloon display is displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (for example, see FIGS. 117 (e) and (f)). Amusement stand.

  By displaying the first balloon display in a separate display area while the second balloon display is displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that he can concentrate on the game, Can be improved.

(L2)
The gaming table according to l1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d). ), (E))
The first moving animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)). A game stand.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3)
A gaming machine according to l1 or l2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left)).
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, refer to FIG. 117 (f)), the gaming table.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l3,
There is a case where at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l4,
At least a part of the first balloon display may be overlapped with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

  There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(L6)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l5,
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, Tono character),
The game table characterized in that the first balloon display character and the second balloon display character may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(L7)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l6,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(L8)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l7,
One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, see FIG. 120 (q)),
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 120 (n)).
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,
The gaming table characterized in that the width of the first balloon display is different from the width of the third balloon display (for example, see FIG. 120 (q)).

  In some cases, the player's expectation can be enhanced by varying the width of the balloon display.

(L9)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l8,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(L10)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence. The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half. -It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation). When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially. A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display. -A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. -A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display. The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  Each event (each production) may be executed in series or in parallel.

  Each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or all of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or all of another event (an other effect).

  Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

  Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.

  Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.

  Here, serial execution means that an event (an effect) starts after an event (an effect) ends, and execution in parallel means an event (or an effect) And other events (other effects) may be performed at the same time, the start timing and end timing of an event (certain effect), the start timing of another event (other effects) A combination of the end timing and the end timing is possible as appropriate.

  In addition, each event (each production) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serial only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without being distinguished by the state. .

  The certain state may be a state that is shifted by a player operation, or may be a state that is shifted regardless of the player operation (for example, the transition is performed regardless of the player operation after the player operation). In this case, it may be a final opportunity or an initial opportunity.)

  Here, “transition without player operation” may be a transition based on a lottery, a transition state corresponding to a control state, or a combination of both. It may be.

  Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the advantage to the player or may be a lottery not related to the advantage to the player.

  Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the advantage for the player or a state not related to the advantage for the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). And the player's advantage may be different or not different.)

  The state where the advantage for the player is different will be described in detail. In the case where there are the control state 1 and the control state 2, if the advantage is different due to staying in the control state N, staying itself In, there is no difference in advantage, there may be a difference in advantage in the state after stay, any of which may be.

  The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation. Of course, other images may be used, for example, an image of Tono-sama (male character). It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character).

  In addition, even if an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, the image explaining the other effect is replaced with another image, It is also possible to perform other effects in parallel and / or in series.

  In addition, when an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute them in parallel and / or in series, but as an alternative. Also good.

  In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super reach production) and the location is the same (for example, both are on hold display areas).

  Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, the first half and the second half of super reach may be executed in series, and even if the locations are the same, they may be executed in parallel at different locations. Or in series with the first half of Super Reach at the same location.

  Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means).

  A certain means (production means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (plural production devices).

  Each event (each effect) performed by each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device).

  Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

  In addition, as a device (production device), a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, a movable body 700, 702, or the like. The movable body is mentioned.

  In addition, each event (each production) may be described by taking one device (production device) as an example. For example, if it is a notification, it is applied to another device (a production device) capable of notification. Is possible.

  Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be configured to be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

  Further, in a case where it can be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices), part or all of a certain notification characteristic may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

  Each configuration in each event (each production) may only be illustrated, and even if only one of each event (each production) has a configuration, the other configuration May be combined with each other, or may be combined after deleting a configuration provided only on one side.

  Further, the combination may be denied due to the difference in configuration.

  FIG. 137 to FIG. 158 are diagrams showing staged effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. In FIGS. 137 to 158, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 137 to 158, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but may include a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. In the present embodiment, the transparent light guide plate IL described above is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the family crest member 224E is disposed. A POV display or the like may be arranged.

  FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing stepwise examples of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and these three hold icons h11, h12, All of h13 are displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, this is because the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) is a non-electric support state (non-short-time state). Therefore, it is difficult for the electric chew to open, and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold of FIG. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the special symbol display of the special figure 1 is started. The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the object of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -4), the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak savory group notice is performed in which the number of savory SBHNs is smaller than the strong savory group notice described above. Has been. The weak savohani group notice is more reliable than when the savohani group notice is not made, but is less reliable than when the strong savohani group notice is made. Further, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the development will be super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. . At this time, the character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2), a button image 136a which is a default display mode is displayed, and a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. It is informing that the advance notice by the production (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “normal button production”) has started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a speech balloon image in which the characters “game” are arranged in the speech balloon is displayed together with the up image. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the head is not decorated around the characters “game” in the balloon, and is a larger hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. This suggests that the reliability of is low. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with a character of “chance”, which gives a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -5), the family crest character 224E rises so that the upper end portion overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves up and down to determine whether or not it is a big hit. It shows a state where the front character swearing performance is being performed. In the present embodiment, the effect by the effect movable body using the family crest actor 224E is performed as the effect of turning before the judge, but the effect of turning before the judge is displayed by the display effect by the decorative symbol display device 208. Also good.

  However, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and is defeated. In the center, “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect production effect by the family crest character 224E is finished, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, as a result of operating the effect button 136 in the button effect by the effect button 136, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed, and then the effect movable body (family crest character 224E). This shows how a combination of out-of-the-box decorative symbols is displayed without a jackpot finalizing judgment effect.

  FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4). A state in which a new button production is started is shown. This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which a super protruding button image 136aS is displayed. In the button effects in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3), the effect button 136 It is another button effect that is started when operated. This super-protruding button image 136aS is a button image that schematically represents a state in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, and is displayed in a manner in which a character display of “Please push” is added to the lower side together with the character of a spear. is there. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, it is suggested that when this super protruding button effect is performed, it is easier to win a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. The effect button 136 may vibrate when the effect button 136 protrudes, or may vibrate and rotate. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the super protruding button effect is performed by the display of the super protruding button image 136aS and the protruding operation of the effect button 136 is shown. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the character string is different between the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the normal button effect and the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the super protruding button effect. It should be noted that the language may be different from the language directly instructing to “press” the effect button 136. For example, in the first button effect, the character display of “press” is displayed and executed thereafter. In the second button effect, a character display of “super press” may be displayed, a character display of “super press” may be displayed, or a character display of “hit” may be displayed. In addition, when a super projection button effect is performed, you may make it be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is a position different from the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, and when the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. It may be the same display position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started in the first button effect, but the first button is displayed. When the production button 136 is operated in the production, the projection operation of the production button 136 is started, and then the super projection button production may be started, or the super projection button production is started and the super projection button image is started. The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown. For the judge effect, there are prepared a jackpot effect judgment effect indicating that the jackpot effect is confirmed and an outlier judge effect indicating that the effect is lost. Note that the out-of-judge judgment effect may be an effect in which it is determined that the loss occurs, or may be an effect that may be a big hit by a reverse effect thereafter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the judge effect is an effect that produces an effect as to whether or not it is a big hit. In this jackpot finalizing judgment effect, the family crest actor 224E rises to a position that overlaps the center of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light and an image that imitates the face of the lord is displayed as a decorative design. An effect that appears on the display device 208 is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. In addition, this judge production is not limited to the one that is started by the button operation in the button production, and may be executed after, for example, the judge predecessor effect production. Further, the judge effect may be performed following the other types of effects listed in the present embodiment, or the judge effect may be suddenly started without any prior notice. In addition, the judgment effect is performed before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, but may be started at a timing other than before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, for example, a decorative symbol variation display. You may perform at the timing immediately after the start of. In addition, the judgment effect may be performed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. For example, it is informed that the game state after the big hit game becomes a probable change state when executed during the big hit game. You may make it carry out, and you may make it alert | report that a reservation continuous change generate | occur | produces.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuations of fluctuation is performed for the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when there is an operation of the effect button 136 in the first button effect, the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed and the new button effect in which the effect button 136 protrudes (super protruding button effect). When a project button 136 that protrudes in this button effect is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest member 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols is displayed and a big hit is displayed It is shown.

  In addition, in this example, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the second button is operated, compared to the case where the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It is shown that when the production starts, the big hit symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (3) -2) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (3) -2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing during the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -4) shows a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is just before the operation effective period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with a character of “chance”, which gives a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -6), a judge foreplaying material effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and is defeated. In the center, “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect production effect by the family crest character 224E is finished, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the button effect by the effect button 136, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed, and then the effect is movable. A state is shown in which a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols is displayed without performing a jackpot finalizing effect by the body (family crest member 224E).

  FIG. 138 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 138 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (B (3) -4) are the same as FIGS. 138 (A (1) -1) to 138 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the operation effective period in the first button effect starts, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -5), any effect is performed. The production of super reach continues without being interrupted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -6), a judge-prediction effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and is defeated. In the center, “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect production effect by the family crest character 224E is finished, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated in the button effect by the effect button 136, the operation response effect by the effect button 136 is not executed. And after that, the combination of the unsatisfactory decoration symbol is displayed without performing the judgment effect of the big hit decision by the effect movable body (family crest character 224E).

  FIG. 139 (A (1) -1) to FIG. (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 139 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -4). A state in which a new button production is started is shown. This button effect is a deca button effect in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 139 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). It is another button effect that starts with the trigger. The large button image 136aL is a button image that is larger in size than the default-state button image 136a and is displayed over the entire display screen. When this big button effect is performed, it is suggested that it is easier to win a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). In the present embodiment, the case where the super protruding button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the deca button effect is performed, but the case where the deca button effect is performed is likely to be a big hit. You may do it. In addition, when a big button effect is performed, it may be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at a position that overlaps the approximate center of the deca button image 136aL, which may make it easier to focus on the remaining time display meter MT. . It may be the same display position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -5), the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The start is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -7) On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, a new button effect (deca button effect) in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed is started, and the effect button 136 is displayed in this button effect. Is operated, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decoration symbols is displayed to show a big hit.

  FIG. 139 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 139 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4). The state where the lever production is started is shown. That is, a state is shown in which an effect requesting operation of an operation means (effect lever 136V) different from the effect button 136 is performed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, suggesting that the reliability is high. That is, this lever effect is a lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). This is an effect using another operation means that is triggered by this. This lever image 136Va is an image imitating the effect lever 136V. When this lever effect is performed, it is suggested that it is easier to win a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big win symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). In this embodiment, the case where the lever effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the super protruding button effect is performed, but the case where the super protruding button effect is performed is a big hit. You may make it easy to become. Further, when a lever button effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -5), the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The start is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -1), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a lever effect using another operation means is newly started. When the effect lever 136V is operated, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols is displayed to show a big win.

  FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, the effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) are the same as FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (3) -2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing during the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -4) shows a state during the operation effective period of the effect button 136 and immediately before the operation effective period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -5), the effect of super reach continues without any effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -6), a judge's pre-rendering effect is performed.

  In this production example, since the production pattern is scheduled to be judged, the judgment effect of the big hit is confirmed as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -7) after the pre-judgment effect making effect is performed. Is started.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the face of Tono-sama is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -8) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -1), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when there is no operation of the effect button 136 in the first button effect and the operation valid period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E). ) Is operated, and then a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is displayed and a state where the jackpot may be shown is shown. In the case of this production example, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation effective period of the first button production, FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5). The super protruding button effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The production examples shown in FIGS. 140 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, another effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (3) -4) are the same as FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, after the operation effective period in the first button effect starts, if the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5), The decorative design display device 208 displays a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters “game is a match” are arranged in a balloon together with an up image of the Tono-sama character. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine) of face-length faces are arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed, and it is informed that the strong cut-in image CI1a having higher reliability than the weak cut-in is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -6), a judge's pre-rendering effect is performed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “hot” character is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  In this production example, since the production pattern is scheduled to be judged, the judgment effect of the big hit is confirmed, as shown in FIG. Is started.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -8) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -1), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is shown by the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when there is no operation of the effect button 136 in the first button effect and the operation valid period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but instead, the cut-in image is displayed. The displayed effect is performed. Then, after that, a judgment effect in which the effect movable body (family crest character 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed and a state where the big hit may be shown is shown. In the case of this production example, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation effective period of the first button production, FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5). The super protruding button effect shown in FIG. In this example, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the operation button 136 being operated in the first button effect, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. May be displayed.

  141 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 141 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, another effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. 141 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (A (3) -4) are the same as FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, after the operation effective period in the first button effect starts, if the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -5), The state that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT becomes full again and the button effect is started again is shown. That is, it is shown that the second button effect may be started when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated in the first button effect. At this time, the button image 136a which is the default mode is continuously displayed, and further, the word “One more chance” is displayed at the upper part of the display screen to notify that the second button effect has been started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character, a “must press” character is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is strongly promoted. Thereafter, the second operation valid period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -6), as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -7), the judgment effect for determining the big hit is started. It is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -8) On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when there is no operation of the effect button 136 in the first button effect and the operation valid period elapses, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT becomes full again, and the button effect is started again. It is shown. That is, it is shown that the second button effect may be started when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated in the first button effect. Then, when the production button 136 is operated in the second button production, a judgment production in which the production movable body (family crest member 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols is displayed and a big win is displayed. It is shown.

  141 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 141 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (B (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -1), after developing into super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, the protruding button effect is displayed in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode. The protruding button image 136aP1 schematically represents a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward. Unlike the super protruding button image 136aS, the protruding button image 136aP1 has a mode in which no samurai character is added. This suggests that when the projecting button effect is performed, it is easier to win a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). In addition, the case where the super-protruding button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the prominent button effect is performed, but the case where the protruding button effect is performed is likely to be a big hit. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be the same. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. Thus, in this effect example, the appearance of the protruding button effect is shown by the display of the protruding button image 136aP1 and the protruding operation of the effect button 136. Note that when a projecting button effect is performed, a big hit may be made. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is a position different from the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed or the case where the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, When the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. It may be the same display position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting button 136 starts the projecting operation at the timing when the projecting button effect 136 is started and the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed. However, after the projecting button 136 starts projecting. The protruding button effect may be started, or the protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the protruding button effect is started and the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the push operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which a super protruding button image 136aS is displayed. In the protruding button effects in FIGS. 141 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3), the effect button 136 is displayed. It is another button effect that starts when the button is operated. At this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, the effect button 136 protrudes upward again, thereby urging the player to operate the effect button 136. In this example, when the effect button 136 protrudes in the projecting button effect as the first button effect, the effect button 136 does not vibrate, and the effect button 136 in the super protruding button effect as the second button effect. When the button protrudes, the effect button 136 may vibrate. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started in the first button effect, but the first button is displayed. When the production button 136 is operated in the production, the projection operation of the production button 136 is started, and then the super projection button production may be started, or the super projection button production is started and the super projection button image is started. The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -6), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -1), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, in the first button effect, not the default button image 136 but the protruding button image 136aP1 in which the effect button protrudes is displayed and the effect button 136 protrudes. If a button effect is performed, and if the effect button 136 is pressed during the execution of the projecting button effect, a super protruding button image 136aS is displayed and a new button effect in which the effect button 136 protrudes again (super protruding button effect) ) Is started, and when the effect button 136 that protrudes in this button effect is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed and the big hit The situation is shown.

  142 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 142 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -1), after developing to super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, the super protruding button effect is displayed in which the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the super protruding button effect is performed by the display of the super protruding button image 136aS and the protruding operation of the effect button 136 is shown. In addition, when a super projection button effect is performed, you may make it be a big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the super projecting button effect is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. After that, the super projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the push operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button in the super protruding button effect in FIGS. 142 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). This is another button effect that starts when 136 is operated. That is, it is shown that the super protruding button effect is performed again as the second button effect in response to the operation button being operated in the super protruding button effect as the first button effect. At this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, the effect button 136 protrudes upward again, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In this embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the super protruding button effect and the effect button 136 is operated while the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the projecting button effect. In the case where the button effect is performed again, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the super protruding button effect and the super display is performed. It is easier to finally determine and display the big hit symbol form when the production button 136 is operated and the super projection button production is started during the execution of the projection button production than when the projection button production is performed again. It is also possible that when the production button 136 is operated and the super projection button production is performed again during execution of the super projection button production, Performance button 136 during the execution of the output button effect is operated in the case of super-protruding button effect is started, it may be a reliability of jackpot are the same.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started in the first button effect, but the first button is displayed. When the production button 136 is operated in the production, the projection operation of the production button 136 is started, and then the super projection button production may be started, or the super projection button production is started and the super projection button image is started. The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the push operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -6), the judgment effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -7) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, in the first button effect, not the button effect by the button image 136 which is the default mode, but the super protruding button effect in which the super protruding button 136aS is displayed is performed. If there is an operation of pushing the effect button 136 while the effect is being executed, a super protruding button image 136aS is displayed and a new super projecting button effect in which the effect button 136 protrudes again is started. When 136 is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is displayed to show a big hit.

  142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (B (3) -1) are similar to FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -1), after being developed into super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2), the decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a weakly protruding button effect in which a weakly protruding button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. The weakly protruding button image 136aP2 schematically represents an aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, but has a smaller size than the protruding button image 136aP1. When this weak projecting button effect is performed, it is easier to win than the normal button effect, but it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than when the projecting button effect is performed. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the weak protrusion button effect is performed is shown by the display of the weak protrusion button image 136aP2 and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when a weakly projecting button effect is performed, a big hit may always be made. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is the same position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, but may be displayed at a different position.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the weak projecting button effect is started and the display of the weak projecting button image 136aP2 is started. However, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. After that, the weak projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the weak projecting button effect is started and the weak projecting button image 136aP2 is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the push operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button in the weak protruding button effect in FIGS. 142 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). This is another button effect that starts when 136 is operated. At this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, the effect button 136 protrudes upward again, thereby urging the player to operate the effect button 136. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started in the first button effect, but the first button is displayed. When the production button 136 is operated in the production, the projection operation of the production button 136 is started, and then the super projection button production may be started, or the super projection button production is started and the super projection button image is started. The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started. In this embodiment, the effect button 136 is not vibrated in the weak projecting button effect, and the effect button 136 is vibrated in the super projecting button effect. However, the effect button 136 is also vibrated in the weak projecting button effect. You may make it perform, and you may make it not vibrate the production | presentation button 136 in a super projection button effect.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -6), the judgment effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -7) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (B (4) -1), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, in the first button effect, not the button image 136 which is the default mode but the weakly projected button image 136aP2 in which the effect button protrudes is displayed and the effect button 136 protrudes. If a weakly projecting button effect is performed and the effect button 136 is pressed during the execution of the weakly projecting button effect, a super-protruding button image 136aS is displayed and a new button effect in which the effect button 136 protrudes again (super When a projecting button 136 that is projected in this button effect is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is displayed. A big hit is shown.

  FIG. 143 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 143 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -1), after developing to super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a weakly protruding button effect in which a weakly protruding button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. In the weakly projecting button effect in this example, the blue effect EFB in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 emits blue light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in blue. In this respect, the aspect is different from the weak projecting button effect shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2). At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the push operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed. In the weak protruding button effect in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3), the effect button 136 It is another button effect that is started when operated. In the projecting button production in this production example, the red effect EFR in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the projecting button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. 141, the aspect differs from the protruding button effect shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2). At this time, although the effect button 136 has been pushed once, the effect button 136 protrudes upward again, thereby urging the player to operate the effect button 136. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated and the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed in the first button effect. When the effect button 136 is operated, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting button effect is started and the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed. After that, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -6), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, in the first button effect, the weakly projected button image 136aP2 in which the effect button protrudes and emits light with the blue effect is displayed instead of the default button image 136. When a weakly projecting button effect in which the button 136 protrudes is performed and the effect button 136 is pressed during execution of the weakly projecting button effect, a projecting button image 136aP1 that emits light with a red effect is displayed and the effect button 136 is displayed. A new button effect (protruding button effect) that protrudes again is started, and when the effect button 136 that protrudes in this button effect is pushed in, the effect effector (family crest role 224E) is operated, and then the big hit A combination of decorative symbols is displayed and a big win is shown.

  FIG. 143 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). The effect pattern is different from the effect pattern, and the button effect is not started even when the first button effect is started, and the button effect is started after being delayed for a predetermined time. Yes. Note that FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -1), after developing to super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -2), the first button A state in which the button effect is not started even when the effect is started is shown. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, creating an uncomfortable feeling that the first button effect is not started.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -3), if the first button effect is started, the operation valid period is shown. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question is displayed together with “button”. A mark is displayed, indicating that the first button effect has not started.

  Thereafter, the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -4). This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which a super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, and the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect is started. A state in which the “protrusion button effect” may be started is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Kitter” is displayed, and it is shown that the user is waiting for the button effect to start. In this effect example, the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect is started, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved by delaying the predetermined time and starting the button effect. In addition, when the button effect is started with a delay as in this effect example, the super projecting button effect may always be started, and in this case, it may be a big hit.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -6), the judgment effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -7) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuations of fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, the button effect is not started even when the first button effect is started, and then the button effect (super protruding button effect) is performed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed (delayed). When an effect button 136 that is projected in this button effect is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols is displayed and a big win is displayed. It is shown.

  FIG. 144 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 144 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, when the button operation is performed in the first button effect and the second button effect is started, an animation in which the button image gradually changes is performed. Note that FIG. 144 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -3) is the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , “Attention” is displayed and button animation is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -6), after the animation in a mode in which the button image 136a gradually protrudes is displayed, the protrusion A state in which the button image 136aP1 is deformed is shown. At this time, a red effect EFR that emits red light is displayed around the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1. Further, the remaining time display meter MT also shows a state where the gauge portion changes to red and the remaining amount of the gauge increases and becomes full at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6). . As a result, the second button effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -7), the projecting button effect as the second button effect is started. This projecting button effect is another button effect that starts when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). is there. In the projecting button production in this production example, the red effect EFR in the form in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the projecting button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a protruding state, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect to start the button animation, and the effect button 136 protrudes at the timing when the button animation ends and the protruding button effect as the second button effect starts. Although the operation is started, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started at the timing when the button animation starts, or after the projecting button effect as the second button effect starts, the projecting button 136 projects. The operation may be started.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -8), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -9), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -10) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the button animation starts and the button image changes, and when the change of the button image is completed, the second button effect (protruding button) (Direction) starts. Then, when the projecting button 136 that is projected in the projecting button effect as the second button effect is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest accessory 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is displayed. It shows a big hit. In addition, the button animation mentioned above is not limited to what is performed only in this production example, You may perform it also in another production example.

  In the present embodiment, the two states of the normal button state and the protruding state of the button have been described as the button mode. For example, as shown in FIG. In contrast to the default state, as another state, the production button 136 may vibrate as shown in (b) of FIG. The effect button 136 as shown in (c) may vibrate and further rotate. That is, when the state of the effect button 136 shown in (a) of FIG. 144 (B) is set to the first state, the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. The state of the effect button 136 shown in (c) of FIG. 14 can also be referred to as the second state, and when the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. The state of the effect button 136 shown in (B) of (c) can also be called a second state.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 145 ((1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and these three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. Are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. It is because it is in a state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of FIG. Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 is started. The symbol variation display at is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the object of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -3), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a reduced manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that some kind of presentation is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4) shows a state in which a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, is started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “mini game” is displayed to notify the start of the mini game. When the “dice slot game” is started, an explanation display of “shake the dice with the button” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times during the operation valid period, and the result of the dice is displayed. It is shown that the mission is to make a combination of (symbols) a specific combination, and when the mission is achieved, a notice effect according to the combination of the dice rolls is started. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4), when the combination of the rolls of “4-5-6” is displayed, the pre-reading notice changes that the display mode of the hold icon changes. When the combination of dice rolls “5-5-5” is displayed, the stock of the button icon for notifying that the button effect will be started is performed. When the combination of dice rolls is displayed, it is informed that it is a notice of intense heat. Note that there may be a case where a combination of other dice rolls is displayed and another type of notice (for example, a hidden notice) is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -5), the change display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice being changed. In addition, a character “3 consecutive strokes” is displayed at the top of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation effective period elapses. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “start” character is displayed to notify that the mini game has started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol of is stopped and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three consecutive hits” to “two consecutive hits”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol of is stopped and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “two consecutive hits” to “last”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 once more.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -11) is variably displayed in the right column. The dice symbol of “2” is stopped and displayed, “5” is displayed, and the combination of the dice of “5-5-5” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -12), the characters “button stock confirmed!” Are displayed at the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. A character and a “standby” character are displayed, and a notice that the button effect is started at least once is notified.

  After that, when the mini game is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves and displays it at the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the weak scallop group notice is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -2), the character “Activate!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -3) to ((3) -4), a button effect start animation is displayed in which the button icon BTN moves to the center of the display screen while expanding. When the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -5), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed. At the same time, a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b. Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with a character of “chance”, which gives a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -8), the crest character 224E rises and the upper end portion overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and before the judge that moves up and down and makes a big hit. A role-playing effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and is defeated. Displays “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and notifies that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect production effect by the family crest character 224E is finished, and the family crest character 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. It is shown. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, a button icon for notifying that the button effect is to be performed is stocked, and thereafter, one stocked button icon is digested. This shows how button production is performed.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the symbol is stopped and displayed, so the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 146 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 146 ((1) -1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and these three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. Are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. It is because it is in a state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of FIG. Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good.

  Further, in this effect example, the “× 1” character and the “standby” character are displayed together with the button icon BTN on the right side of the navigation character YM, and a notice that the button effect is started at least once is notified. The That is, it is shown that the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, and the pre-reading notice is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -2), the reservation of the special figure 1 (first hold) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. The symbol variation display at is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the object of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the center lower part of 208 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is also started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -3), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a reduced manner at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4) shows a state in which a “dice slot game” which is one of the mini games is started. When the “dice slot game” is started, an explanation display of “shake the dice with the button” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times during the operation valid period, and the result of the dice is displayed. It is shown that the mission is to make a combination of (symbols) a specific combination, and when the mission is achieved, a notice effect according to the combination of the dice rolls is started. Specifically, in the production example shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4), when the combination of the rolls of “4-5-6” is displayed, the pre-reading notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is displayed. When the combination of dice rolls “5-5-5” is displayed, the stock of the button icon for notifying that the button effect will be started is performed. When the combination of dice rolls is displayed, it is informed that it is a notice of intense heat. Note that there may be a case where a combination of other dice rolls is displayed and another type of notice (for example, a hidden notice) is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -5), the change display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice being changed. In addition, a character “3 consecutive strokes” is displayed at the top of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation effective period elapses.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -7) is variably displayed in the left column. The dice symbol of is stopped and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three consecutive hits” to “two consecutive hits”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol of is stopped and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “two consecutive hits” to “last”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 once more.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -11) is variably displayed in the right column. The dice symbol of “2” is stopped and displayed, “5” is displayed, and the combination of the dice of “5-5-5” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -12), the character “button stock confirmed!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM is 1. The display of the character “× 1” indicating that the two are stocked changes to “× 2”, and the button effect is notified at least twice.

  After that, when the mini game is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves it to the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the weak scallop group notice is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2), “X!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and “× 2” indicating the stock number of the button icon BTN is displayed. "Is changed to" × 1 ", and it is notified that one button icon BTN is consumed and the button effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 146 ((3) -3) to ((3) -4), a button effect start animation is displayed in which the button icon BTN moves to the center of the display screen while expanding. When the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -5), a button image 136a which is a default display mode is displayed. At the same time, a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, a character “press” is displayed above the button image 136 a to prompt the user to operate the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -7), instead of displaying the cut-in image, a new button effect is produced. Is shown. This button effect is a deca button effect in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed, and that the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 146 ((3) -5) to (A (3) -6) in FIG. It is another button production that starts as an opportunity. At this time, the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light changes, for example, the light emitted in blue in the first button effect is red when the second button effect is started. Emits light.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -8), the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -10) is displayed. In the device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “× 1” and a character “standby” are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -1), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. ing. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the effect EF1 is displayed so as to cover the entire button icon BTN, and a state in which the effect that the button icon BTN is deleted is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the stock of the button icon BTN is erased, but the stock of the button icon BTN is displayed without being erased. Also good. Further, as described above, the timing at which the button icon BTN is deleted is not limited to the one performed during the fluctuation of shaking, and may be, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or after the big hit game ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the button icon BTN for notifying that the button effect is to be performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon BTN is obtained. It shows how buttons are produced after being digested. Also, in this effect example, a new button effect (deca button effect) is started by operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the effect movable body A judgment effect in which the (family crest character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols is displayed to show a big hit. Further, in this effect example, although the button effect is performed twice, only one button icon BTN is digested. Note that each time a button effect is performed, one button icon BTN may be digested one by one.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 147 ((1) -1) to FIG. ((3) -6) is the same as FIG. 146 ((1) -1) to FIG. Omitted. Further, as shown in FIG. 147 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. A state in which BTN stock display is performed is shown.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -6), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -7). It is shown. This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 147 ((3) -5) to (3) -6 in FIG. This is another button effect that starts when this happens. This suggests that when the super protruding button effect is performed, it is easier to win a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed) than when the normal button effect or the big button effect is performed. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the super protruding button effect is performed by the display of the super protruding button image 136aS and the protruding operation of the effect button 136 is shown. In addition, when a super projection button effect is performed, you may make it be a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started in the first button effect, but the first button is displayed. When the production button 136 is operated in the production, the projection operation of the production button 136 is started, and then the super projection button production may be started, or the super projection button production is started and the super projection button image is started. The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the push operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -8), as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -9), the judgment effect for determining the big hit is started. It is shown. In this judgment effect, the crest character 224E rises to a position that overlaps the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image that imitates the face of the Tonama-like face is emitted from the light guide plate IL. An effect that appears in layers is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -10) is displayed. In the device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “× 1” and a character “standby” are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -1), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. ing. In this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this production example, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that a pre-reading notice is given for the symbol variation display started after the big hit game. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the button icon BTN for notifying that the button effect is to be performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon BTN is obtained. It shows how buttons are produced after being digested. Further, in this effect example, a new button effect (super protruding button effect) is started by operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the effect A judgment effect in which the movable body (family crest member 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed to show a big hit. Further, in this effect example, although the button effect is performed twice, only one button icon BTN is digested.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing step by step about another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. 146 ((1) -3) is the same as FIG. 146 ((1) -1) to FIG. Omitted. Further, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. A state in which BTN stock display is performed is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4), a state where a “dice slot game” which is one of mini-games is started is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4), when the combination of the dice roll of “4-5-6” is displayed, a prefetching notice in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed is started. When the combination of dice rolls of “5-5-5” is displayed, a stock of button icons for notifying that the button effect will be started is performed, and the roll rolls of “1-1-1” are made. When the combination is displayed, it suggests that some kind of notice starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -5), the change display of the three dice is started, and button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice being changed. In addition, a character “3 consecutive strokes” is displayed at the top of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation effective period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -7) is variably displayed in the left column. The dice symbol of is stopped and “1” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three consecutive hits” to “two consecutive hits”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol of is stopped and “1” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “two consecutive hits” to “last”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 once more.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -11) is variably displayed in the right column. The dice symbol of “2” is stopped and displayed, “1” is displayed, and the combination of the dice of “1-1-1” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -12), the characters “Deca button stock confirmed!” Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the default mode buttons displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM are displayed. The protruding button icon BTP is displayed above the icon BTN, and a notice is given that the protruding button effect or the super protruding button effect is started.

  After that, when the mini game is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves it to the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In this production example, the protruding button icon BTP that is stocked is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the decorative symbol. Here, the protruding button icon BTP may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the weak scallop group notice is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -2), it is shown that super reach is continued. In this effect example, the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is displayed. There is no notification of starting. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -3), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed without digesting the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP, and below the button image 136a. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, a character “press” is displayed above the button image 136 a to prompt the user to operate the effect button 136.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -5), “ It is notified that the display of “× 1” is changed to the characters “invoking” and the protruding button icon BTP is digested. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -6) to FIG. 148 ((3) -7), a button effect start animation is displayed in which the protruding button icon BTP is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. At this time, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed below the button image 136a becomes “0” and the display moves to the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, after the protruding button icon BTP becomes the protruding button image 136aP1 as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -7), as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -8), the character of “爺” The character “ja” is added to change to the super protruding button image 136aS to notify that the super protruding button effect as a new button effect has started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing at which the display of the button effect start animation is completed, the timing before the display of the button effect start animation is started, or the button effect start. It may be a timing after the animation display is started and before the completion, or after the button effect start animation display is completed, the timing may be changed to the super protruding button image 136aS. The timing after changing to the protruding button image 136aS may be used. Note that the effect start animation may not be displayed, and may or may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -9), the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The state of being done is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -11) In the device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “× 1” and a character “standby” are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -1), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. ing. In this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this production example, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that a pre-reading notice is given for the symbol variation display started after the big hit game. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game performed by operating the effect button 136, the protruding button icon BTP for notifying that the protruding button effect or the super protruding button effect is performed is stocked, and then the button icon When the production button 136 is operated in the button production that is started without being digested, the stocked projecting button icon BTP is digested and a new button production (super projecting button production) is performed. ing. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest actor 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big win decorative symbols is displayed to show a big win. Has been. Moreover, in this effect example, although button effect is performed twice, only the protrusion button icon BTP of the protrusion button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested is shown.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 149 ((1) -1) to FIG. ((3) -1) are the same as FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. Omitted. Further, as shown in FIG. 149 ((1) -1), also in this production example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon spans a plurality of symbol variation displays. A state in which BTN stock display is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -2), after the super reach is started, the display of “× 1” displayed in the vicinity of the button icon BTN is “activated” on the decorative symbol display device 208. It changes to a character and is notified that the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -3), the button icon BTN is deleted without executing the button effect start animation, and the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed. At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, the character “press” is displayed above the button image 136a to prompt the user to operate the effect button 136. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 149 ((3) -4) to ((3) -10) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 149 ((3) -4) to ((3) -10) are the same as those shown in FIG. 148 ((3) except that there is no display in which the button icon BTN is stocked. ) -4) to the same effect ((3) -10) shown in FIG.

  After the judge effect shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -10) is finished, the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -11), a screen in which the main character Tono defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. “Decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -1), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. ing. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game performed by operating the effect button 136, the protruding button icon BTP for notifying that the protruding button effect or the super protruding button effect is performed is stocked, and then the button icon One BTN is digested and the first button effect is started without the button effect start animation being performed. When the production button 136 is operated in this button production, the stocked protruding button icon BTP is digested and a button production start animation is performed, and then a new button production (super projecting button production) is performed. . Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest actor 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big win decorative symbols is displayed to show a big win. Has been. That is, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, and the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP are digested and executed. Also, in this effect example, when the first button effect that starts after the button icon BTN is digested is started, the button effect start animation is not executed, and the protruding button icon BTP is digested and started 2 When the button effect starts, the button effect start animation is shown. Thereby, it may be possible to draw attention to a more expected effect among button effects executed a plurality of times. In this effect example, when the first button effect is started, a button effect start animation by the button icon BTN may be performed.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 150 ((1) -1) to FIG. 150 ((2) -1) are the same as FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. Omitted. As shown in FIG. 150 ((1) -1), also in this effect example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon straddles a plurality of symbol variation displays. A state in which BTN stock display is performed is shown.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -1), a weak savory group announcement is made on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -2). The situation is shown. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the state where the timer notice is started is shown. In the timer notice display TM1, “30:00” is displayed as a timer display, and a notice that a certain notice effect will be started after 30 seconds is announced.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other. In the timer advance notice TM1, the countdown continues, and “28:32” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -2), it is shown that the super reach is continued, but in this effect example, the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. Is not notified. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed without digesting the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP, and below the button image 136a. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, a character “press” is displayed above the button image 136 a to prompt the user to operate the effect button 136. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “17:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3).

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -5), “ It is notified that the display of “× 1” is changed to the characters “invoking” and the protruding button icon BTP is digested. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -6) to FIG. 150 ((3) -7), a button effect start animation is displayed in which the protruding button icon BTP expands and moves to the center of the display screen. At this time, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed below the button image 136a becomes “0” and the display moves to the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, after the protruding button icon BTP becomes the protruding button image 136aL as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -7), the character of the heel is added as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8). It changes to super protruding button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super protruding button effect as a new button effect has been started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing at which the display of the button effect start animation is completed, the timing before the display of the button effect start animation is started, or the button effect start. It may be a timing after the animation display is started and before the completion, or after the button effect start animation display is completed, the timing may be changed to the super protruding button image 136aS. It may be the timing after changing to the protruding button image 136aS, or may be the timing when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and becomes “00:00”. Also, in this effect example, the super protruding button effect has been started as the second button effect, but the operation valid period has not started, and on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues. In the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8), “04:17” is displayed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, a notice that the effect button 136 is operable in the super protruding button effect that is the second button effect is provided. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9), the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, the center notice is moved from the upper left corner of the display screen, and the timer notice is displayed for the second time. It is suggested that this corresponds to the button production. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues the countdown of the timer display, and “02:26” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9). Thereby, it may be easy to grasp the timing at which a certain notice effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -10) and “00:00” is displayed on the timer display, the super projected button image 136aS is displayed below. The character “Press me” is added, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the super protruding button effect as the second button effect is started. The timer notice display TM1 is subsequently erased.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -11), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The state of being done is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the face of Tono-sama is deleted, and after the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -13) is displayed. In the device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “× 1” and a character “standby” are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -1), a state is shown in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. ing. In this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this production example, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that a pre-reading notice is given for the symbol variation display started after the big hit game. After that, as shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game by the operation of the effect button 136, the projecting button icon BTP for notifying that the projecting button effect or the super projecting button effect is performed is stocked. When is started, a timer notice is made. After that, when the production button 136 is operated in the button production started without digesting the button icon, the stocked projection button icon BTP is digested and a new button production (super projection button production) is performed. The situation is shown. Thereafter, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the effect button 136 can be operated in the second button effect. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest actor 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the big win decorative symbols is displayed to show a big win. Has been. Moreover, in this effect example, although button effect is performed twice, only the protrusion button icon BTP of the protrusion button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested is shown.

  FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step an example of a selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -1), after the super reach effect is started, the selection effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -2). The situation is shown. When the selection effect is started, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect explanation display MS1 “Emergency notification! The final judge effect is determined by the button effect”, and notifies that the selection effect is started. Note that the effect explanation display MS1 is overlapped with the decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -3), the option display SL1 is displayed. In the option display SL1, the button image 136a in the default mode and the protruding button image 136aP1 are displayed side by side, and the button image 136a is surrounded by the cursor CSL represented by a blue broken line in a square shape. Has been done.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -4), in the option display SL1, display of a mode in which the protruding button image 136aP is surrounded by the cursor CSL is performed. At this time, the cursor CSL changes its display mode to a red broken line, and the characters “heat” are displayed on the left and right, and as a result of performing the selection effect, the protruding button is displayed as compared with the case where the button image 136a is selected. It is reported that the case where the image 136aP1 is selected tends to be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -5), a state in which the button operation display BT1 is displayed so as to overlap the option display SL1 is shown. In the button operation display BT1, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the characters “push!” Are displayed below the remaining time display meter MT to prompt the operation of the effect button 136. In this selection effect, any one of the button image 163a and the protruding button image 137aP1 in the option display SL1 is selected by operating the effect button 136.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -6) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -7) is displayed. In the device 208, the button operation display BT1 is deleted, and in the option display SL1, the cursor CSL surrounds the protruding button image 136aP1 to notify that the protruding button image 136aP1 has been selected. That is, it is shown that the protruding button effect is predicted to start. Thus, in this effect example, a state where the selection effect is performed as the first button effect is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this effect example, as the button effect, the protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 selected in the selection effect is displayed is started. In this projecting button effect, the red effect EFR is displayed in a mode in which the periphery of the projecting button image 136aP1 emits red light, and the gauge color of the remaining time display meter MT displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is displayed. It is represented in red. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Thus, in this effect example, the appearance of the protruding button effect is shown by the display of the protruding button image 136aP1 and the protruding operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the protruding button effect on which the protruding button image 136aP1 selected in the selection effect as the first button effect is displayed is performed as the second button effect is shown. In addition, when this projecting button effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting button 136 starts the projecting operation at the timing when the projecting button effect 136 is started and the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed. However, after the projecting button 136 starts projecting. The protruding button effect may be started, or the protruding operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the protruding button effect is started and the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -11), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -12) On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this way, in this effect example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and the button effect using the button image selected in the selection effect is shown as the second button effect. Yes.

  Note that the button images that can be selected on the option display SL1 displayed in the selection effect in the present embodiment are not limited to those described above, and a different type of option display SL1 may be displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 151 (I), a selection effect may be performed in which an option display SL1 including a button image 136a and a deca button 136aL in the default mode is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 151 (II). In addition, a selection effect may be performed in which an option display SL1 including a button image 136a and a lever image 136Va in the default mode is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 151 (III), the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. And a projecting button image 136aP1 and a lever image 136Va, and a selection effect in which an option display SL1 for selecting from three or more button images may be displayed. As shown in FIG. The remaining time display meter MT and the button image 136a of the aspect, and the gauge in which the image imitating the face of the Bancho is arranged are shown And a time display meter MTa and Dekabotan image 136AL, selection effect that alternative display SL1 which is adapted to vary the reliability of the big hit by the display mode of at least remaining time display meter is displayed may be performed.

  FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step regarding another effect pattern of selection effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2). In the production pattern in which the production shown is scheduled to be executed, the production executed when the production button 136 is not operated in the selection production is shown. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (3) -5) are the same as FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -5). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -6), the operation of the effect button 136 is in effect, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases. The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 being operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -7) displays the effect EF2 so as to overlap the option display SL1. Then, it is shown that the selection effect is completed and the option display SL1 is deleted without selecting any button image due to time out.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this effect example, as a button effect, a normal button effect in which a button image 136a in a default mode is displayed is started. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, and an operation of the effect button 136 is prompted. It is. That is, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected and the projecting button effect is scheduled to start, but in the selection effect, the effect button 136 is operated. Since no button image is selected, a normal button effect having a lower degree of reliability than the projecting button effect is started. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and any button image is not selected, if the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the effect pattern in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is selected is executed. In the case of being performed, the projecting button effect in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed as the second button effect may be started as scheduled. Thus, in this effect example, when the button image is not selected without operating the effect button 136 in the selection effect as the first button effect, the projecting button effect is not started and the projecting button effect is more effective than the projecting button effect. A state in which a button effect with a low hit reliability is started is shown.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -11), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started. The situation is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -12) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -1), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and the button image is not selected without operating the effect button 136 in the selection effect, the button effect with low jackpot reliability is obtained. It is shown that the (normal button effect in which the default button image 136a is displayed) is performed as the second button effect.

  152 (C (1) -1) to 153 (C (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 152 (C (1) -1) to 153 (C (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2). In the effect pattern in which the effect shown is to be executed, another effect example is shown that is executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selected effect. 152 (C (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (C (3) -8) are the same as FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (3) -8). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the choice display SL1 is erased and the selection effect ends, and the display returns to the super reach effect, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -9), the button effect is not started and a strong cut-in is performed. An image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “strong cut-in” character is displayed, notifying that a strong cut-in image CI1a having a high jackpot reliability is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected and the projecting button effect is scheduled to start, but in the selection effect, the effect button 136 is operated. Since no button image is selected, the second button effect is not started, and a cut-in image is displayed instead. Even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and any button image is not selected, if the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the effect pattern in which the protruding button image 136aP1 is selected is executed. In the case of being performed, the projecting button effect in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed as the second button effect may be started as scheduled. Thus, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the button effect is not started, and other notice effects ( A state in which the display of the cut-in image) is started is shown.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -10), a judge-pre-spotting effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -11), the jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 153 (C (3) -12) On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuations of fluctuation is performed for the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect, the second button effect is started. Instead, another notice effect (display of cut-in image) is shown.

  FIG. 153 (D (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (D (4) -2) are diagrams showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of a continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 153 (D (1) -1) to (D (3) -2) are the same as FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (D (3) -2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is displayed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3), the effect lever 136V is used instead of the option display SL1. Meter image VC imitating the shape of the screen, and the face icon TDR of the chief face is displayed on the heel of the meter image, and on the right side of the display screen, the text “Raise the meter with repeated strikes!” Is displayed. Has been informed that has started. The meter image VC is composed of 10 levels of meters. The three meters from the bottom are displayed in blue, the three meters displayed above the blue meter are displayed in green, and above the green meter. The three meters displayed are displayed in red. In addition, above the red meter, a final point that is formed in a hexagonal shape and is represented by a letter “V” is displayed. In this repeated operation effect, the Banchou face icon TDR rises according to the number of operations of the production button 136, and the position of the Banchou face icon TDR at the time when the operation valid period has passed suggests the reliability of the big hit Is done. That is, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the face-length icon TDR is on the green meter than when it is on the blue meter, and is on the red meter than when it is on the green meter. The reliability of the jackpot is higher in the case. In addition, when the face length icon TDR reaches the final point of the meter image VC, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is not a display of the explanation of the selection effect but a display of the explanation of the repeated operation effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -4), the characters “READY” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hitting operation reception is not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -5), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the letters “GO” are displayed, and the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation is started. Informed. A player who sees this may attempt to raise the icon TDR of the longest face to the position of the meter with higher reliability by operating the effect button 136 repeatedly.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -6), it is shown that the player has repeatedly operated the effect button 136, and the face-length icon TDR of the bancho face is positioned on the blue meter. ing. In addition, the operation valid period is continuing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  FIG. 153 (D (3) -7) shows how the operation valid period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT is displayed as “0”, and the face-length icon TDR of the watch face is positioned on the red meter. . After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -8), the watch face icon TDR is enlarged to notify that the position has been fixed, and corresponds to the red meter in the meter image VC. The letters "It's intense heat!" Are displayed, suggesting that the announcement effect with high reliability of the jackpot will be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -9), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a state where a lever effect with a high degree of reliability is started is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high, and the characters “Leave lever!” Are displayed on the left side of the display screen. The operation of the lever 136V is urged. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed in response to the fact that the face icon TDR of the longest face has reached the red meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hitting operation effect is started. The As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect depending on the position where the face icon TDR of the bancho face has arrived. The situation is shown. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit. Further, not a lever effect but a button effect (for example, a super protruding button effect or a protruding button effect) in which a button image is displayed may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -11), as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -12), the judgment effect for determining the big hit is started. It is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13) is displayed. On the display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -1), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Has been. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, according to the position where the face-length icon TDR of the face length in the meter image VC has reached, A state in which a lever effect is started as a second button effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is started when the longest face icon TDR in the meter image VC reaches the red meter in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the repeated operation effect as the first button effect is different from the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect. It can also be said.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ′) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ′). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ′) to (D (4) -2 ′) show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). The effects shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4 ′) to (D (3) -6 ′) are shown in FIGS. 153 (D (3) -4) to (D (3) -6). ), The description is omitted.

  FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 ′) shows a state where the operation valid period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT is displayed as “0”, and the face-length icon TDR of the longest face is shown being positioned on the green meter. . After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8 ′), the face length icon TDR is displayed in an enlarged manner to notify that the position has been determined, and it corresponds to the green meter in the meter image VC. , “Chance” is displayed, and the big hit reliability is higher than when the blue face meter icon TDR stops, but the red meter shows a big hit than when the face icon TDR stops. It is suggested that a notice effect with low reliability is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 ′), when the meter image VC is deleted and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -10 ′), the deca button image 136aL is displayed, and the reliability is lower than the lever effect, but the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. A state is shown in which a big button production having a higher hit reliability than a button production is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “chance” character is displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a deca button effect in which the deca button image 136aL is displayed in response to the fact that the face icon TDR of the longest face has reached the green meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hit operation effect is started. The Thus, in this effect example, as a result of performing the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect, the deca button effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position where the face-length icon TDR has reached. The situation is shown. In addition, when this big button effect is performed, you may make it be a big hit.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -12 ′) determines the jackpot decision. A state in which the production starts is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and after the family crest member 224E descends to the initial position, the decoration shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -13 ′) In the symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1 ′), there is a state in which a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is shown. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 '), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, according to the position where the face-length icon TDR of the face length in the meter image VC has reached, A state in which the deca button effect is started as the second button effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that the big button face icon TDR in the meter image VC in the continuous hitting operation effect has reached the green meter, suggesting that the deca button effect is started. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the repeated operation effect as the first button effect is the same as the operation means (effect button 136) used in the deca button effect as the second button effect. However, in this case, the mode of the effect button 136 is different between the first button effect (normal mode) and the second button effect (protruding mode or vibrated mode). It may be different.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″) show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). . The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to FIG. 153 (D (3) -6 ″) are shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -4) to FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in -6), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 ″) shows a state in which the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT is displayed as “0”, and the face-length icon TDR of the longest face is positioned on the blue meter because the number of operations of the effect button is small. The state of doing is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8 ″), the face length icon TDR is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position has been determined, and it corresponds to the blue meter in the meter image VC. However, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a notice effect with a very high jackpot reliability may be started, with the word “how” displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 ″), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -10 ″), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a state where the lever effect with high reliability of the big hit is started is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high, and the characters “Leave lever!” Are displayed on the left side of the display screen. The operation of the lever 136V is urged. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a lever effect is displayed in which the lever image 136Va is displayed even though the face icon TDR of the longest face is a blue meter in the meter image VC in the repeated hitting operation effect. The situation is shown. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of performing the repeated operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect which is an effect different from the effect corresponding to the position where the face icon TDR of the bancho arrived is the second effect. It is shown that a so-called law breaking effect is performed as a button effect. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit. Further, not a lever effect but a button effect in which a button image is displayed (for example, a button effect in which a super protruding button effect, a protruding button effect, or a default button image 136a is displayed) may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11 ″), as shown in FIG. The start is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the face of Tono-sama is erased, and the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, and then shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13 ″). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed. It is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1 ″), a temporary stop due to fluctuation of fluctuation is performed by a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is shown. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with the combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the repeated hit operation in the continuous hit operation effect, it does not correspond to the position where the face-length icon TDR of the longest face reached in the meter image VC. A state in which a lever effect is started as a second button effect is shown. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the repeated operation effect as the first button effect is different from the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect. It can also be said. In addition, as described above, an effect that breaks down the law may be performed in advance, or an effect corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be started as the second button effect. When the watch face icon TDR is a blue meter, the normal button effect in which the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed may be performed as the second button effect.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″). The effects shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ″) show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). ing. In this production example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) is given some pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ″). There is no plain display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 "'), the letters" READY "are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that it is before the start of continuous hitting operation acceptance.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -5 ′ ″), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the letters “GO” are displayed, and the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation is started. It has been reported. A player who sees this may be able to improve the willingness to operate the effect button 136 repeatedly to reach the final face icon TDR to the final point.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -6 ′ ″), the player has repeatedly operated the effect button 136, and the face-length icon TDR of the bancho face is positioned at the lower position of the meter image VC. The situation is shown. In a state where the face-length icon TDR is at the lower position of the meter image VC, the meter portion corresponding to the position changes to blue. In addition, the operation valid period is continuing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -7 ′ ″), the player has repeatedly operated the effect button 136, and the face icon TDR of the bancho face has reached the upper position of the meter image VC. It is shown. In a state in which the watch face icon TDR reaches the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter portion at the middle position changes to green corresponding to the position, and the meter that the watch face icon TDR at the upper position has reached. The part turns red. In addition, the operation valid period is continuing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8 ′ ″), the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times before the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, and the face-length face icon TDR reaches the final point. The appearance is shown. At this time, the meter image VC informs that all meter portions are colored and the continuous hitting operation effect is successful.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 ′ ″), the lever icon VLV is stocked in the upper right part of the navigation character YM, and it is predicted that the lever effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -10 ′ ″), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hitting operation effect is completed, the super reach effect is restored.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 ′ ″), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a state where the lever effect with high reliability of the big hit is started is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high, and the characters “Leave lever!” Are displayed on the left side of the display screen. The operation of the lever 136V is urged. In this effect example, as the second button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed in response to the fact that the face icon TDR of the longest face reaches the final point in the meter image VC and the lever icon VLV is stocked in the repeated operation effect. The lever production is started. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect depending on the position where the face icon TDR of the bancho face has arrived. The situation is shown. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12 ′ ″), as shown in FIG. A state in which the production starts is shown.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, the image imitating the Tono-sama's face is erased, and the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, and then in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13 ′ ″). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “Yataze” is displayed, congratulating that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1 ′ ″), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, a “big hit” character is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ″), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display with a combination of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hit operation in the continuous hit operation effect, the face-length icon TDR in the meter image VC has reached the final point. Accordingly, a state where the lever effect is started as the second button effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is started when the longest face icon TDR in the meter image VC reaches the final point in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the repeated operation effect as the first button effect is different from the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect. It can also be said.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hit operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″)). The effect shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″) is another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). Is shown. In this production example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) is given some pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″). It is not a plain display mode. In addition, the effects shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (3) -7 ″ ″) are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in the figure (D (3) -7 ′ ″), the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8 ″ ″), the player performs a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and the face-length icon TDR of the longest face is at the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC. It shows how it was approaching. In a state in which the longest face icon TDR has reached the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter portion at the middle position changes to green corresponding to the position, and the longest face icon TDR at the upper position has reached. The meter part turned red. In addition, the operation valid period is continuing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses before the face-length face icon TDR reaches the final point, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 ″ ″) The Banchou face icon TDR slides down to the heel of the meter image VC, and a letter of “sorry” is displayed to notify that the repeated hitting operation effect has failed. As a result, no notice icon such as a lever icon or a button icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -10 ′ ″ ″), when the meter image VC is erased and the repeated operation effect is finished, the super reach effect is restored.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 ″ ″), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed, and the remaining time display meter is displayed below the button image 136a. MT is displayed to notify that the notice of the normal button effect has started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a normal button effect as a second button effect is started instead of a lever effect in response to failure of the continuous hit operation effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12 ″ ″), the big hit is confirmed as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13 ″ ″). Judgment production is not started, and the screen where the main character was defeated by the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed, and “decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”. In this production example, the screen that was defeated without the start of the judge's predecessor tribute effect by the family crest actor 224E is displayed. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1 ″ ″), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. It shows what is happening. At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hit operation in the continuous hit operation effect, the face length icon TDR in the meter image VC does not reach the final point. Accordingly, a state in which a button effect (normal button effect) in which a button image 136a in a default mode is displayed as a second button effect is started is shown. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is not started due to the fact that the face-length icon TDR in the meter image VC does not reach the final point in the continuous hit operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the repeated operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are the same. It has become. Further, in this effect example, the state that the lever icon and the button icon as the reward for success are not displayed because the repeated hit operation effect has failed is shown.

  FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) to FIG. 156 (E (5) -18) are diagrams showing step by step an example of the big hit effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the combination of the big decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is the non-electric support state (non-short-time state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open. This is because winning in the mouth 232 is difficult.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold in FIG. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -1), a state where a big hit start effect is performed is shown. When the jackpot start effect is started, the character MCK of the teacher Machiko (wedding teacher Machiko) in the wedding dress celebrates the jackpot together with the four copandas. When the big hit start effect is started, a right-handed display for promoting the right-handedness to the player is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -2) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect of introducing the effect is performed during the big hit game, and in the first round, the characters “Introducing the effect from the next round” are displayed together with the copanda character, and this is notified.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -3) shows a state of shifting to the second round. When the second round is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character “when it appears” along with the Sabohani icon, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -4), Along with the demonstration display of the strong savohani group notice, the text “Expect the group notice!” Is displayed to explain the sabohani group notice.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -5) shows a state of shifting to the third round. When the third round is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “when it appears ...” together with the bomb icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -6), Along with the demonstration display of the timer notice effect, the text “Timer notice will be activated” is displayed to explain the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -7) shows a state of shifting to the fourth round. In this production example, when the 4th round is entered, the character KGG with a cane appears, and the letters “Emergency notification!” And “Win the button PUSH!” Are displayed. It shows how a “dice game” has started. In this dice game, by operating the effect button 136 within the effective operation period after the change display of one dice is started, the outcome of the dice is displayed, and depending on the outcome of the displayed dice, An effect suggesting a later gaming state is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8), explanation display of the dice game is performed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8), “4 When the dice roll of "" is displayed, it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is 100 times short (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), and the dice roll of "5" is displayed. The game state after the big hit game is informed that the game state is a probable change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability), and when the "6" dice roll is displayed, the game state after the big hit game is displayed Is informed that the probability setting in the pachinko machine 100 is the highest setting “setting 6”. Note that there may be cases where other dice rolls are displayed and other types of notices (for example, pre-reading notices for reserved continuous channels, etc.) are started. In the present embodiment, for example, a probability setting switch is provided in the main control unit 300, and the probability setting switch can be set in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6. Each setting differs in jackpot probability and specifications, and an arbitrary setting can be selected by a game hall manager. In addition, the main board 156 is provided with a setting display unit, which can display the setting set by the administrator of the game hall. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the variation time of the symbol variation display is set according to the setting, and the setting can be estimated by the execution frequency of the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol determined by the variation time. is there. The main board 156 may be provided with an accessory ratio display unit for displaying an accessory ratio. Although the setting display part and the accessory ratio display part are comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, it is not limited to this. In addition, you may not have a probability setting function.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -9) shows a state of shifting to the fifth round. In this production example, when the fifth round is entered, one dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed as “1”, and the letter “READY” is displayed, so that the change display of the dice symbol DC is started. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -10), after the change display of the dice symbol DC is started, a button is displayed on the right side of the display screen as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -11). The remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the image 136a, and the operation valid period is started.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -12), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs weak cut-in as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -13). The image CI1b is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation for the result of the dice game is low.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -14) shows a state of shifting to the sixth round. Note that the change display of the dice symbol DC is still performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -15), the dice symbol DC is stopped and “4” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -16), the characters “GET TIME 100 times” are displayed above the dice symbol DC of “4” and the dice symbol DC is displayed. In the lower part, a character “I will not give up” is displayed, it is informed that the game state after the big hit game will be in a short-time state, and a state where an effect of comforting the player is shown.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -17) shows a state of shifting to the 16th round. When the 16th round is entered, the Tono-sama character appears and the letter “Final R” is displayed to inform the player that the final round is being played.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -18), the 16th round is finished and the big hit end effect is started. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “100 times shorter” are displayed, and it is informed that the state will be in a time-saving state until the special figure change display is performed 100 times after the big hit game ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the jackpot game, and the state of the game after the jackpot game and the setting are suggested according to the result. That is, a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in an effect other than the judgment effect of whether or not the big hit is shown.

  FIG. 156 (F (4) -2) to FIG. 157 (F (5) -20) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 156 (F (4) -2) to 157 (F (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 156 (E (4) -2) to (E (5) -12). Since it is the same as the effect shown, description is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image or a dice. The outcome of the symbol DC is not displayed, the replay symbol is displayed, the character “one more time” is displayed, and it is notified that the variation display of the dice symbol DC is started again.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -14), the replay symbol is displayed in a reduced size and the character “READY” is displayed, and the re-variation of the dice symbol DC is started. Informed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -15), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the super protruding button image 136aS on the right side of the display screen after the re-variable display of the dice symbol DC is started. The operation valid period is started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, as a result of operating the effect button 136 in the dice game as the first button effect, the replay symbol is displayed, and accordingly, the re-variable display of the dice game as the second button effect is started. The state of being done is shown. In addition, in this effect example, it is suggested that the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed in the re-variable display of the dice game, so that it is highly likely that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the dice game.

  In this embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-variable display of the dice game is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. After the start, the re-change display of the dice game may be started, or after the re-change display of the dice game is started and the display of the super protruding button image 136aS is started, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. May be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -16), the dice symbol DC is stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -17). The result of “6” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -18), the character “probability change GET” is displayed above the dice symbol DC of “6” and the lower side of the dice symbol DC. Is displayed with the letters “setting 6 may”, and it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is in a probable change state, and there is a high possibility that the setting of the pachinko machine 100 is “setting 6”. Has been suggested.

  FIG. 157 (F (5) -19) shows a state of shifting to the 16th round. When the 16th round is entered, the Tono-sama character appears and the letter “Final R” is displayed to inform the player that the final round is being played.

  In FIG. 157 (F (5) -20), the 16th round is finished, and the big hit end effect is started. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the rider riding the motorcycle gets on board, and the character “probability change” is displayed, and it is notified that the probable change state is reached after the end of the big hit game. In addition, a question mark is displayed together with the characters “6”, which suggests that there is a high possibility of “setting 6”.

  As described above, in this effect example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the jackpot game, and the state of the game after the jackpot game and the setting are suggested according to the result. That is, a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in an effect other than the judgment effect of whether or not the big hit is shown. Also, in this production example, a dice game is performed as the first button production. When the production button 136 is operated in this dice game, a replay symbol is displayed, and the second button is displayed according to the display of the replay symbol. A state in which re-variable display of the dice symbol DC as an effect is performed is shown.

  FIG. 157 (G (4) -1) to FIG. 158 (G (4) -20) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. . Note that FIGS. 157 (G (4) -1) to (G (4) -3) are the same as FIGS. 145 ((1) -1) to ((1) -3). Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -3), after the decorative pattern being variably displayed is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen, the decoration shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4) is displayed. The symbol display device 208 shows that a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, is started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “mini game” is displayed to notify the start of the mini game. When the “dice slot game” is started, an explanation display of “shake the dice with the button” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times during the operation valid period, and the result of the dice is displayed. It is shown that the mission is to make a combination of (symbols) a specific combination, and when the mission is achieved, a notice effect according to the combination of the dice rolls is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4), when the combination of the dice roll of “4-5-6” is displayed, it is a notice that super reach will be performed, and “5-5 When a combination of dice rolls of “−5” is displayed, a hold change notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes is performed, and when a roll combination of “1-1-1” rolls is displayed. It is shown that a super-holding change notice having higher reliability than the hold-change notice that is executed when a combination of dice rolls “5-5-5” is displayed is performed. Note that there may be a case where a combination of other dice rolls is displayed and another type of notice (for example, a hidden notice) is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -5), the change display of the three dice is started, and button images 136a1 to 136a3 are respectively displayed below the three dice being changed. In addition, a character “3 consecutive strokes” is displayed at the top of the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation effective period elapses. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a “start” character is displayed to notify that the mini game has started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -7) changes in the left column. The dice symbol being displayed is stopped and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three consecutive hits” to “two consecutive hits”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -9) changes in the middle row. The dice symbol being displayed is stopped and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “two consecutive hits” to “last”, and prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 once more.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -11) has a strong cut-in image. CI1a is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -12), the dice symbols that are being displayed in the right column are stopped and displayed as “5”, and “5-5-5”. The combination of dice rolls is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -13), the word “hold change confirmed” is displayed at the center of the display screen to notify that the hold change is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -14), a hold change animation in which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed is started, and thereafter, FIG. 157 (G (4) − As shown in 15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice expressed in blue. The symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon in the blue display mode is easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol than the symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon in the default display mode.

  After that, when the mini game is ended, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -16) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves and displays it at the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -19) following FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Temporary stop is performed due to fluctuations in the swing, and then, as shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -20), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 5”. Press to confirm. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state in which a pre-reading notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the mini game by the operation of the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 158 (H (4) -1) to FIG. 158 (H (4) -26) are diagrams showing step by step about another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. . Note that FIGS. 158 (H (4) -1) to (H (4) -10) are the same as FIGS. 158 (G (4) -1) to (G (4) -10). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -10), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -11). In the right column, the symbol of the dice that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed, “5” is displayed, and the dice roll combination of “5-5-5” is displayed. However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -13), after that, the design of the three dice starts to change again and the second button effect is started. ing.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -14), the super-projection button image 136aS and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed so as to overlap with the symbol of the dice being changed. At the same time, the characters “one blow!” Are displayed on the right side of the super protruding button image 136aS, and the operation valid period is started again. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the protruding operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, as a result of operating the production button 136 in the dice slot game as the first button production, a combination of dice symbols is displayed. The state of starting is shown. In addition, in this effect example, it is suggested that the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed in the re-variable display of the dice slot game, so that it is highly likely that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the dice slot game. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-variable display of the dice slot game is started and the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed. After the start of the dice slot game, the re-change display of the dice slot game may be started, or after the re-change display of the dice slot game is started and the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, the effect button 136 is displayed. The protruding operation may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -16) has three dice symbols. Are stopped at the same time, and a combination of dice rolls of “1-1-1” is derived. Then, in the center of the display screen, a character of “super hold change confirmation” is displayed, which suggests that the hold icon changes to a highly reliable display mode.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -17), a hold change animation in which the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes is started, and thereafter, FIG. 158 (H (4) − As shown in 18), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice expressed in red. The symbol variation display that is executed by digesting the hold icon in the red display mode is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol than the symbol variation display that is executed by digesting the hold icon in the blue display mode.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -19), the characters “still still” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may further change. Informed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -20), the hold change animation is started again at the second hold icon h12, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 further changes. It is shown.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -21), when the hold change animation is completed, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the red display mode to the display mode of the ninja character, A state is shown in which a premier pre-reading notice, which is a pre-fetching notice of the fact that the symbol variation display of jackpot determination is performed, is being performed. In addition, in the symbol variation display executed by digesting the hold icon of the display mode of the ninja character, the symbol pattern may be displayed in a definite manner.

  After that, when the mini game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -22) enlarges the decorative symbol and moves it to the center of the display screen to continue the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -24), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -25), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of shaking. As shown in 158 (H (4) -26), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In this way, in this effect example, as a first button effect, a mini-game is performed by operating the effect button 136, and after the combination of dice rolls is displayed once, the design of the dice re-varies, During the execution of the change, an operation of the effect button 136 as the second button effect is required. As a result, a state is shown in which a pre-reading notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a display mode with high jackpot reliability. Moreover, in this production example, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by two stages in one hold change animation, and the hold change animation is further performed on the same hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon is further ranked. The state of being up is shown.

  In addition, although the embodiment described above, that is, the effect by the two button effects, was applied to the judgment effect of the jackpot decision and the notice effect of the game state after the big hit game during the big hit, it is applied to other notice effects. For example, it can also be applied to other types of notice effects as a result of two button effects, such as pre-reading notices such as pending changes and other types of change notices. It is.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V have been described as operation means. However, other devices may be used. For example, in addition to buttons and levers, touch sensors, infrared sensors, and ultrasonic waves may be used. For example, a non-contact type sensor that can be detected may be used.

  In addition, although the example in which the operation request display described above is the same as the operation unit that receives the operation is the same as the operation unit that receives the operation, the operation request display may be different, for example, the operation button 136 is requested to operate. Although the display is performed, the operation of the effect lever 136V may be received.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in a button effect that requires a single operation of the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 may be requested a plurality of times, or a repeated operation may be required. There may be cases where a long press is required.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example of an effect in which the second button effect is sometimes performed as the operation response effect in the first button effect has been described, but the third operation response effect in the second button effect is further illustrated. There may be a case where the button effect is performed. In this case, the operation request mode of the effect button 136 may be changed for each button effect. For example, in the first button effect, an operation of the effect button 136 is requested once, but in the second button effect. May request a continuous operation of the effect button 136, and may request an operation of the effect button 136 once in the third button effect. Also, a plurality of types of operation request modes of the effect button 136 may be prepared in one button effect. For example, in the first button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is requested once, and the second button is displayed. In the production, an operation may be performed such that a continuous hitting operation is first requested, and for example, a single operation of the production button 136 is requested in response to the continuous hitting gauge becoming full. Furthermore, a fourth button effect, a fifth button effect, etc. may be performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the big hit reliability is improved in the button image mode in the second button effect than in the button image mode in the first button effect. That is, it can be said that a step-up effect in which a button image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed each time the number of button effects is repeated is performed.

In the above description, “an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an effect lever 136V, etc.]
A game table provided with production means capable of executing a plurality of productions (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest member 224E, etc.);
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2) to FIG.
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) or the image shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5). Production etc. in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a super protruding button effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. (B (3) -5), etc.). ,
The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to operate [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 136, etc.]
The second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect [for example, an effect in which the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed is an effect. Etc., which are effects performed in response to the operation of the button 136],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect [for example, a super protrusion shown in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to A (3) -5) The button effect is an effect executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, etc.]
The third effect is an effect urging the operation of the operation means [for example, the super protruding button effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. Etc.]
The execution of the first effect is started more than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). After that, when the execution of the third effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “the second case”), the jackpot symbol form is more easily finalized and displayed finally. . Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be made to expect which of a 2nd effect and a 3rd effect is started by performing a 1st effect.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

  Further, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production, the second production, and the third production, or production other than the first production, the second production, and the third production. May also be executable. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production, the second production, and the third production, or when the first production, the second production, and the third production are not executed. There may be.

  Further, the first effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation means to operate, or may include effects other than effects that prompt the operation means to operate. Further, the first effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means.

  The second effect may include only the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may include effects other than the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. Also good. Further, the second effect may necessarily include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. May be.

  Further, the second effect may not include only an effect that prompts the operation means to operate, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation means to operate. In addition, the second effect may not necessarily include an effect that prompts the operation means to operate, or may include an effect that prompts the operation means to operate.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or in a case other than in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect. May also be started. In addition, the second effect may be always started in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect. It may be.

  The third effect may include only the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may include effects other than the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. Also good. The third effect may necessarily include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. May be.

  Further, the third effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation means to operate, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation means to operate. Further, the third effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means.

  In addition, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or in a case other than in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect. May also be started. In addition, the third effect may be always started in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect. It may be.

  In addition, when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the off symbol may be definitely displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in a fixed manner. May be. In addition, when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the big hit symbol pattern may be displayed in a definite manner, or the off-set symbol may be determined and displayed. May be.

  Further, the execution of the first effect is performed more than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). When the execution of the third effect is started after the start of the event (hereinafter referred to as the “second case”), the big-hit symbol pattern is easier to be finalized and displayed ” The execution of the first effect was started more than when the execution of the second effect was started after the execution of the first effect was started (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). If the execution of the third effect is started later (hereinafter referred to as “second case”), an advantageous state may be easily given ”.

In addition, “One of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [e.g., a jackpot finalizing judgment effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6), etc.],
The fourth effect is an effect that may be started when the operation means is operated during execution of the third effect [for example, FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) to FIG. As shown in B (3) -6), when the effect button 136 is pushed in during execution of the super protruding button effect, a jackpot effect for determining the big hit is started, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the expectation when the third effect is executed can be enhanced.

  Here, the fourth effect may be started only when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or may be operated during the execution of the third effect. It may be started even when the means is not operated. Further, the fourth effect may be started when the operation means is operated during execution of the third effect, or the operation means is operated during execution of the third effect. In some cases, it may not start.

  In addition, the fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed [for example, FIG. 140 (B (3) -5) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6-6, after the display of the cut-in image (strong cut-in image CI1a), the jackpot effect of determining the big hit is started, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where expectation can be expected even if the second performance is executed.

  Here, the fourth effect may be started only after the second effect is executed, or may be started even in a case other than after the second effect is executed. There may be cases. In addition, the fourth effect may be started after the second effect is executed, or may not be started after the second effect is executed. .

  In addition, the game stand according to the fourth aspect, wherein the fourth effect is a judge effect for a big hit. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where a sense of expectation for execution of the fourth effect can be enhanced.

In addition, “the second effect may be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in (A (3) -5), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the normal button effect, etc.),
If the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the third effect is not started [for example, FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 3) As shown in 5-5), the button stage is not started when the operation valid period has passed without the stage button 136 being operated in the normal button stage, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to increase the willingness to perform an operation on the operation means during the execution of the first effect.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second effect is started when the operation unit is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation unit is operated during the execution of the first effect. There may be a case where an effect other than the second effect is started when there is no such effect. In addition, the second presentation may always be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first presentation, or the first presentation is performed when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first presentation. There may be cases where the second performance is not started.

  In addition, the second presentation may be started only when the operation unit is not operated during execution of the first presentation, or the operation unit is not operated during execution of the first presentation. There may be a case where the second effect is started even in a case other than the case where the event has occurred. Further, the second presentation may be started when the operation means is not operated only during the execution of the first presentation, or the operation means is operated by the operation means other than during the execution of the first presentation. If not, the second effect may be started.

  If the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, and if the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect, the third effect is not started. There is a case where the production of

  In addition, “the first effect may be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 141 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in (A (3) -5), a normal button effect is started again when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the normal button effect, etc.)] . ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect is started again even if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, so that it may be possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first effect is started when the operation device is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation device is operated during the execution of the first effect. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is started when there is no such effect. The first presentation may always be started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first presentation, or the first presentation is performed when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first presentation. There may be a case where an effect is not started.

  In addition, the first effect may be started only when the operation unit is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation unit is not operated during the execution of the first effect. There may be a case where the first performance is started even in a case other than the case where it is not. Further, the first presentation may be started when the operation means is not operated only during the execution of the first presentation, or the operation means is operated by the operation means other than during the execution of the first presentation. If it is not done, the first performance may be started.

In addition, the operation means is a means that can be in a plurality of states.
One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, an aspect in which the production button 136 does not protrude, etc.]
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, an aspect in which the production button 136 protrudes, etc.]
The aspect of the first effect is an aspect that prompts the operation of the operation means in the first state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) is in a state of not protruding. Including a display of a button image 136a simulating the production button 136],
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect that prompts the operation of the operation means in the second state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) is an effect in a protruding state. A display of a super-projection button image 136aS simulating a button 136, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, attention may be paid to the appearance of the operation effect of the operation means in the second state.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being in only the first state and the second state, or may be in a state other than the first state and the second state. It may be a thing. Further, the operation means may be able to be surely in the first state and the second state, or may not be in the first state and the second state. .

The first state and the second state may be a state where the operating means does not protrude and a state where the operating means protrudes, or a state where the operating means does not vibrate and a state where the operating means vibrates. The operating means may be in a vibrating state and in a vibrating and rotating state, the operating means may be in a non-rotating state and in a rotating state, or the operating means may be vibrated and rotated. It may be a state where it is not rotating, a state where it is vibrating and rotating, a state where the operating means is not emitting light or a state where it is emitting light, or the operating means emits light in a certain color. It may be a state in which light is emitted in a certain color different from a certain state,
“One of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect [for example, a weakly projecting button effect shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. ],
The aspect of the fifth effect is an aspect that prompts the operation of the operation means in the second state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) is an effect in a protruding state. Including display of weakly protruding button image 136aP2 simulating button 136],
The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. ), After the weak projecting button effect is started, if the operation button 136 is pressed during the weak projecting button effect, the projecting button effect is started, etc.]
The gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the fifth effect and the aspect of the third effect are different aspects. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there may be a case where the first operation effect is expected.

  Here, the aspect of the fifth effect may be an aspect in which only the operation of the operation means in the second state is prompted, or an aspect in which an operation other than the operation of the operation means in the second state is prompted. Good. Further, the aspect of the fifth effect may be an aspect that always urges the operation of the operation means in the second state, or an aspect that may not prompt the operation of the operation means in the second state. Good.

  In addition, after the execution of the fifth effect is started, only the execution of the third effect may be started, or after the execution of the fifth effect is started, There may be a case where execution of effects other than execution is started. In addition, the execution of the third effect may always be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or the execution of the third effect is not started after the execution of the fifth effect is started. There may be cases.

  In addition, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or the third effect is performed even after the execution of the fifth effect is started. May be started.

  In addition, the aspect of the fifth effect and the aspect of the third effect may be partially different or all different.

“The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter referred to as“ third display [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4) ”). The projecting button image 136aP1 etc. imitating the form of projecting] ") display [for example, the projecting shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -4) to (A (3) -5) Button production etc.]
The fifth effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display [e.g., the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2)]. Weak projecting button image 136aP2 etc. imitating an aspect] ") display [for example, weak projecting button shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) Production etc.]
In the third display and the fifth display, the third display is larger [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) than the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2)). 4), the protruding button image 136aP1 is larger, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be expected by clarifying the development of the button display.

  Here, the third effect may include only a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or display other than the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be included. In addition, the third effect may necessarily include a display imitating the second state operation means, or may not include a display imitating the second state operation means. There may be something.

  In addition, the fifth effect may include only a display that simulates the operation means in the second state, or includes a display other than the display that simulates the operation means in the second state. It may be a thing. In addition, the fifth effect may necessarily include a display that imitates the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display that imitates the operation means in the second state. There may be something.

  In the third display and the fifth display, the fifth display may be larger or the same size.

“The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter referred to as“ third display [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4) ”). The projecting button image 136aP1 etc. imitating the form of projecting] ") display [for example, the projecting shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -4) to (A (3) -5) Button production etc.]
The fifth effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display [e.g., the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2)]. Weak projecting button image 136aP2 etc. imitating an aspect] ") display [for example, weak projecting button shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) Production etc.]
At least one of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display [for example, the display of the red effect EFR added to the protruding button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)]. One display is displayed in a third color [eg red, etc.]
Of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display [for example, the display of the blue effect EFB added to the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2), etc.] At least one display is displayed in a fifth color [e.g., blue, etc.]
The gaming table, wherein the third color and the fifth color are different colors. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be expected by clarifying the development of the button display.

  Here, the third effect may include only a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or display other than the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be included. In addition, the third effect may necessarily include a display imitating the second state operation means, or may not include a display imitating the second state operation means. There may be something.

  In addition, the fifth effect may include only a display that simulates the operation means in the second state, or includes a display other than the display that simulates the operation means in the second state. It may be a thing. In addition, the fifth effect may necessarily include a display that imitates the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display that imitates the operation means in the second state. There may be something.

  Further, only the third display of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed. Only the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or both the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color. . In addition, a part of at least one of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the effect display surrounding the third display and the third display. All of at least one of them may be displayed in the third color.

  Of the effect display surrounding the fifth display and the fifth display, only the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the effect display surrounding the fifth display and the fifth display. Only the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or both the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color. . A part of at least one of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the effect display surrounding the fifth display and the fifth display. All of at least one of them may be displayed in the fifth color.

  Further, the third color and the fifth color may be partially different colors, or may be all different colors.

In addition, the “first state is a state in which the operating means is not vibrating,
The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the second state is a state in which the operation means is vibrating. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be easy to grasp the first state and the second state.

“The first effect is a display imitating the operation means in the first state (hereinafter referred to as“ first display [eg, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2)] ”. ] ”Is displayed [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -3)],
The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “third display [for example, protruding button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6)]”. It is a production including the display of
In the second case, a change animation that changes from the first display to the third display after the execution of the first effect is started and before the execution of the third effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -7), the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect (normal button effect)). Then, when the second button effect (protruding button effect) is started, an animation in which the button image 136a changes to the protruding button image 136aP1 when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect is displayed], A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, the change in production may be easy to understand.

  Here, the first effect may include only a display imitating the operation means in the first state, or display other than the display imitating the operation means in the first state. It may be included. In addition, the first effect may necessarily include a display that imitates the operation means in the first state, or may not include a display that imitates the operation means in the first state. There may be something.

  In addition, the third effect may include only a display imitating the operation device in the second state, or may include a display other than the display imitating the operation device in the second state. It may be a thing. In addition, the third effect may necessarily include a display imitating the second state operation means, or may not include a display imitating the second state operation means. There may be something.

The operation means is an operation means constituted by a plurality of operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an effect lever 136V, etc.]
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect lever 136V, etc.]
The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means [for example, the normal button effects shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) shown in FIG. , And the like that prompts the operation of the production button 136],
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, the lever effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5) in FIG. A game stand characterized by, for example, an effect prompting an operation of the effect lever 136V. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, according to this game table, there is a case where it can be expected that the second operating means can be operated.

  Here, the plurality of operation means may be only the first operation means and the second operation means, or may include operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Further, the first effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. . In addition, the first effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means. Good.

  Further, the third effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means. . Further, the third effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means. Good.

In addition, “the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol change display with a certain change pattern [for example, FIG. (3) -2) to the same figure (B (3) -4), as shown in (B) (3) -4), after the normal button effect is started, the super protruding button effect is started, etc.]
During the execution of the symbol variation display with the certain variation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then the execution of the third effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 143 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -4), the normal button effect is not started and the super protruding button is delayed after a predetermined time delay. A game stand characterized by the fact that production has started. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be given a sense of incongruity with respect to the delay in the start of the production, which may give rise to expectations.

  Here, while the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, only the execution of the third effect may be started, or a certain variation There may be a case where the execution of effects other than the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in the pattern. Further, the execution of the third effect may always be started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with the certain variation pattern, or the symbol variation with the certain variation pattern may be started. There may be a case where the execution of the third effect is not started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the display.

  Further, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with the certain variation pattern, or the certain variation pattern The execution of the third effect may be started other than after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, or the certain variation pattern may be started. Even when the symbol variation display is not being executed, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started.

  In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then only the execution of the third effect is started. The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, and then the third There may be a case where the execution of an effect other than the execution of the effect is started. In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then the execution of the third effect is always started. The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, and then the execution of the third effect is performed. It may not start.

  Also, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, and then the execution of the third effect is started. There is a case where the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started even when the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern is not being performed. The execution of the third effect may be started.

The first effect is an effect including an operation request display [for example, a display including a character display of “press” shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2)].
The third effect is an effect including a display of an operation request display [for example, a display including a character display of “push me” shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4), etc.]
A gaming machine, wherein a character string included in an operation request display displayed in the first effect is different from a character string included in an operation request display displayed in the third effect. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the expectation can be changed due to the difference in character strings.

  Here, the first effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include a display other than the display of the operation request display. The first effect may necessarily include an operation request display display, or may not include an operation request display display.

  In addition, the third effect may include only an operation request display, or may include a display other than the operation request display. Further, the third effect may necessarily include an operation request display, or may not include an operation request display.

  In addition, the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the first effect may be partially different from the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the third effect, or all May be different.

In addition, “One of the plurality of effects is a sixth effect [for example, a normal button effect executed as a second button effect, etc.]
The sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The execution of the sixth effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started [for example, FIG. 151 (A (3) -3) to FIG. When the button image 136a is selected in the selection effect as the first button effect shown in FIG. 6), the normal button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.]
The first effect is an effect of selecting whether the execution of the third effect is started or the execution of the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed. [For example, in the selection effects shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -3) to FIG. 151 (A (3) -7), a button image is selected from a plurality of types of button images (button image 136a and protruding button image 136aP1). To select whether the normal button effect is started or the protruding button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player's willingness to operate can be improved by determining the contents of the effect by the subsequent operation means according to the selection effect.

  Here, there may be a case where only the execution of the sixth effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the sixth effect after the execution of the first effect is started. There may be cases where the execution of effects other than the execution of is started. In addition, the execution of the sixth effect may always be started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the execution of the sixth effect is not started after the execution of the first effect is started. There may be cases.

  In addition, the execution of the sixth effect may be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 151 (B (3) -3) to As shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the selection effect as the first button effect, the normal button effect as the second button effect. Is started, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the willingness to operate the operation means can be improved in order to perform the third effect.

  Here, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, there may be a case where only the execution of the sixth effect is started, or the operation means is operated during the execution of the first effect. There may be a case where execution of an effect other than the execution of the sixth effect is started when the operation is not performed. In addition, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the sixth effect may be always started, or when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The execution of the sixth effect may not be started.

  In addition, the execution of the sixth effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is operated during the execution of the first effect. The execution of the sixth effect may be started in addition to the case where it is not performed.

In addition, “the production means is the dice roll of“ 5-5-5 ”in the dice slot game shown in the stock production [eg, FIG. 146 ((1) -4) to (1) -12]”). It is a means capable of executing an effect such as a button icon BTN being stocked by displaying the combination,
The stock effect is an effect that suggests an effect that prompts one or more operations of the operation means by an icon stock,
In the first case, one of the icons is digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -2) to (3) -7), one button icon BTN is digested. After the normal button effect is performed, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 136],
Even in the second case, one button icon BTN is digested as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2) to (3) -7). After the normal button effect is performed, the deca button effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, although the effect by the operating means is actually performed twice, since the consumption of the icon stock can be suppressed to one, it may be possible to make the player feel the feeling.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where expectation can be given to the start of the production by the operation means even when the stock of the icon in the stock production is one.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the stock effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the stock effect. Further, the production means may always execute the stock production, or may not execute the stock production.

  In addition, the stock effect may suggest an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated once by the icon stock, or an effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means multiple times is indicated by the icon stock. It may be a thing.

  In the first case, only one icon may be digested, or two or more icons may be digested.

  In the second case, only one icon may be digested, or two or more icons may be digested.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect that prompts one operation of the operation means [for example, a normal button shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) to FIG. The game stage is characterized by the fact that the production is prompting a single operation by the production button 136, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is a repetitive hit effect that requires a plurality of operations of the operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) to FIG. A game table characterized by, for example, a repetitive hitting operation effect that is an effect of requesting a repetitive operation of the effect button 136]. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the operation effective period of the operation unit in the first effect and the operation effective period of the operation unit in the third effect are different periods [for example, FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) ~ As shown in the figure (B (3) -5), the operation effective period in the normal button effect as the first button effect and the operation effective period in the super protruding button effect as the second button effect are different. Etc.], and the game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  It should be noted that the operation effective period of the operation means in the first effect and the operation effective period of the operation means in the third effect may be partially overlapped, may be partially overlapped, It doesn't have to overlap.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “a plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an effect lever 136V, etc.]
A game table provided with production means capable of executing a plurality of productions (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest member 224E, etc.);
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG.
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) or the image shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5). Production etc. in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a lever shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4), etc.]
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect lever 136V, etc.]
The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. , And the like that prompts the operation of the production button 136],
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [for example, an effect in which the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed. Is an effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 136],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [for example, FIG. 139 (B (3) -4) to FIG. (A (3) -5)] The lever effect shown is an effect that is executed when there is an operation of the effect button 136 in the normal button effect, etc.]
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, the lever effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5) is It is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 136V],
The execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, rather than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. A game stand characterized in that, in the case of being played, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  In addition, according to this game table, there is a case where it can be expected that the second operating means can be operated.

  Here, the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. The plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

  Further, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production, the second production, and the third production, or production other than the first production, the second production, and the third production. May also be executable. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production, the second production, and the third production, or when the first production, the second production, and the third production are not executed. There may be.

  Further, the plurality of operation means may be only the first operation means and the second operation means, or may include operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Further, the first effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. . In addition, the first effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means. Good.

  The second effect may include only the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or does not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. There may be cases.

  In addition, the second effect may not include only the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, or does not include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. Also good. In addition, the second effect may not necessarily include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, or may include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. Good.

  The second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operation means in the first effect. Depending on the case, it may be started in other cases. The second effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect. It may be something that may not start.

  The third effect may include only the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. The third effect may necessarily include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or does not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. There may be cases.

  Further, the third effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means. . Further, the third effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means. Good.

  The third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operation means in the first effect. Depending on the case, it may be started in other cases. Further, the third effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect. It may be something that may not start.

  In addition, when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the off symbol may be definitely displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in a fixed manner. May be. In addition, when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the big hit symbol pattern may be displayed in a definite manner, or the off-set symbol may be determined and displayed. May be.

  Further, “the execution of the third effect after the execution of the first effect is started rather than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started”. When the execution is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end ”is“ when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started ” Rather than being able to give an advantageous state when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started ".

  FIG. 159 to FIG. 174 are diagrams showing step-by-step changing effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 is an example of the effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the example of effect shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 is shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be executed. Further, in FIGS. 159 to 174, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 159 to 174, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 represent common components when the same reference numerals used so far are used. Even if different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical idea shown in other drawings. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  The description in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to any effect example in this specification, but is preferably applied to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 158.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating several examples in which both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. .

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8), first, in FIG. 159 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 finishes the variation display of the decorative symbols, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lose (“decoration” 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. Note that a second decorative symbol having a size smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1).

  In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1). The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The variation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed in the base hs0. In this effect example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is shown surrounded by a broken line for the sake of convenience, but it is actually invisible. Further, the icon display area HN1 is an area where the change icon can execute the standby animation, and the same applies to the icon display area HN1 in FIGS. 151 to 174. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the navigator character's navigation character YM may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 159 (A1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 in the special figure 1 are displayed. ing. Any hold icon is a default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), the second hold number display is displayed, the hold number of Special Figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is.

  Further, FIG. 159 (A1) shows a state in which the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (A2), the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of decorative symbols, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, the three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that has been the first hold icon h11 until then is displayed as the first variation icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variation icon h01 are in the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A2), the hold number of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is informed.

  FIG. 159 (A3) shows a state in which a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears from the upper center end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. . The second variation icon h02 in this production example is the same size as the first variation icon h01, but has a different color and a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (A4) to (A6), the second variation icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps with a part of the first variation icon h01. As shown in FIG. 159 (A6), when all of the second variation icons H02 overlap with all of the first variation icons h01, the first variation icon h01 is deleted as shown in FIG. 159 (A7). The second variation icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variation icon is shown changing from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode).

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 159 (A3) and can be considered to have ended immediately before (A7) in FIG. 159, or while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (A3 in FIG. ) To (A6)) in FIG. During the display of the icon change animation, the first decorative symbol may be deleted and the variable display may be performed only on the second decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol may be deleted and the variable display may be performed only on the first decorative symbol. May be performed. Further, the period during which the decorative symbols are erased may be all of the period during which the icon change animation is displayed, or may be a part of the period.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, a big hit announcement (ordinary advance notice) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A8). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159A1 to A8 described above, the second variation icon h02 appears separately from the first variation icon h01, and the variation icon of the default display mode is changed to the A color. This is an example of changing at the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the example shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B8) will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8), and redundant description will be omitted. There is. In the following description, descriptions overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the descriptions in the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) are omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIG. 159 (B1) to FIG. (B8), FIG. (B1) to FIG. (B4) are the same as FIG. 159 (A1) to FIG. A state in which the second fluctuation icon h02 falls is shown. In FIG. 159 (B5), after all of the second variation icons h02 overlap with all of the first variation icons 01, the display screen is further dropped in the vertical direction without remaining in the icon display area HN1. The state of starting frame out from the lower end of is shown. Thereafter, in FIGS. 159 (B6) to (B7), the second variation icon h02 is completely out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen, and the state in which the display mode of the variation icon does not change is shown. If the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, the confirmation is displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the pending change effect has failed is shown. In this example, the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed due to failure of the pending change effect. However, there may be cases where the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), first, in FIG. 159 (C1), the decorative symbol display device 208 finishes displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lose (“decoration” 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. Note that a second decorative symbol having a size smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1).

  In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1). The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The variation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed in the base hs0. In this effect example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is shown surrounded by a broken line for the sake of convenience, but it is actually invisible. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and the navigator character's navigation character YM may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 159 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 4, and the first hold icon h11, second hold icon h12, third hold icon h13, and fourth hold icon h14 in special figure 1 are displayed. ing. In this production example, only the second hold icon h12 of the four hold icons is displayed in blue, and the prefetch notice display mode is displayed, but the other hold icons are all displayed as default (white). It is an aspect. Note that the second hold number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It is informed that it is.

  Further, FIG. 159 (C1) shows a state in which the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss (“decoration 2” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 2”) is determined and displayed, and the variation icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (C2), the hold of special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started changing the decorative symbol display, and the movement animation of the hold icon of special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, the three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that has been the first hold icon h11 until then is displayed as the first variation icon h01. In this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the prefetch notice, but the other hold icons h12 and h13 and the first variation icon h01 are the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C2), the reserved number of special figure 1 is 3, and the reserved number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed.

  FIG. 159 (C3) shows a state in which a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears from the upper center end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. . The second variation icon h02 in this effect example has a larger size than the first variation icon h01, and has a different color and a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (C4) to (C6), the second variation icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps with a part of the first variation icon h01. As shown in FIG. 159 (C6), when a part of the second fluctuation icon H02 overlaps with the entire first fluctuation icon h01, the second fluctuation icon h02 is reduced as shown in FIG. 159 (C7). It is displayed and has the same size as the first variation icon h01, the first variation icon h01 is deleted, the second variation icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variation icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode. A state of changing to (blue display mode) is shown. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the second variation icon h02 is displayed in a large size and overlaps the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. In this effect example, it can also be said that the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 that is the display mode of the notice, and the second change icon h02 overlaps the notice display.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 159 (C3) and can be considered to have ended immediately before (C7) in FIG. 159, or while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (C3 in FIG. ) To (C6)) in FIG.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, a big hit announcement (normal announcement) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C8). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this production example, the hold change production in which the display mode of the variation icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing is confirmed and displayed. Also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8) described above, the second variation icon h02 appears separately from the first variation icon h01, and the variation icon of the default display mode is changed to the A color. This is an example of changing at the Ath frequency (probability).

  Next, the example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) will be described with a focus on the differences from the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and redundant description will be omitted. There is. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), some of the hold icons are in the notice display mode, but in the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8). All the hold icons are set as the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 159 (D1) to FIG. (D8), FIG. (D1) to FIG. (D4) are the same as FIG. 159 (C1) to FIG. A state in which the second variation icon h02 having a size larger than that of the first variation icon h01 falls is shown. In FIG. 159 (D5), after the second variation icon h02 partially overlaps the entire first variation icon h01, the animation in which the second variation icon h02 is reduced and displayed is not performed. A state in which the frame is further dropped and frame out starts from the lower end of the display screen is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 159 (D6) to (D7), the second variation icon h02 is completely out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen, and the variation icon display mode is not changed. Yes. If the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. Further, after a part of the second variation icon h02 overlaps the entire first variation icon h01, an animation in which the second variation icon h02 is displayed in a reduced size is performed, and then the second variation icon h02 is displayed at the lower end of the display screen. You may frame out from. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (D8), the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, the confirmation is displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the pending change effect has failed is shown.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 159 are examples for the variable icon, but may be performed for the hold icon.

  In addition, as an example of the second variation icon h02, blue has been described as an example, but other colors such as green and red may be used, and other patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes representing the player's advantage and the big hit expectation. For example, the lowest mode is a white or non-patterned mode (Ath mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (Bth mode), a green or rhombus pattern mode (Cth mode), red or The grid pattern mode (D mode), gold color and vertical line pattern mode (E mode) increase in order, and the rainbow and horizontal line pattern mode (F mode) is the highest. . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variation icon and the hold icon, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. That is, white in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with blue. For example, the first variation icon h01 that was a white display mode may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the first variation icon h01 that has been in a white display mode may be in a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with white or green. The modes are roughly classified into green and rhombus pattern modes (Cth mode) and the following modes (A group, B mode, C group first group) and red and The lattice pattern mode (D mode) can be divided into the above modes (D group, E mode, F group, the second group). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to a mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, the modes in the first group may be switched and the modes in the second group may be switched. Further, in addition to the color and pattern, the player's advantage and the big hit expectation may be represented by a difference in size or number. In addition, the player's advantage is that the player is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state and / or a short-time state), a premier effect is easily started, or a jackpot finalizing effect is started. It may be easy. Moreover, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit, it is included that an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit is easily executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear. The matters relating to the aspect described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and the subsequent examples.

  Further, the aspect of each icon may be an aspect of the entire icon (entire area), or may be an aspect of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 159, the normal notice by the change icon whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and may be a true notice. Further, even when the on-hold change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes is failed, it may be a big hit, or it may be lost.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating some other examples in which both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is. 160 (A1) to FIG. 160 (A8), examples shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), examples shown in FIGS. 160 (C1) to (C8), and 160 (D1) to FIG. 160 (D8) are examples in which the aspect of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the player can display the icon display area. HN2 is visible. 160 (A1) to FIG. 160 (A8), examples shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), examples shown in FIGS. 160 (C1) to (C8), and FIG. The production examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the same as the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8), and FIG. 159 (B1) to FIG. The effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) are the same. Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 160 (D5), when the pending change effect fails, the second variation icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating another example in which both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display region HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed.

  First, examples of effects shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) will be described. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2) are the same as those shown in FIG. 159 (A1) except that the navigation character YM in the display mode with the blue kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. ) Is the same as the production shown in FIG. Here, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2) is displayed in a display form wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least a part is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later. The navigation character YM is displayed in an initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain action).

  In FIG. 161 (A3), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts icon change animation, faces the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword, and shakes it. Changes to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears on the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation showing a state of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variation icon h02 in this production example is the same size as the first variation icon h01, but has a different color and a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 161 (A4) to (A6), the second variation icon h02 continues to move to the icon display area HN1, and overlaps with a part of the first variation icon h01. It is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (A6), when all of the second change icons H02 overlap with all of the first change icons h01, the first change icon h01 is deleted as shown in FIG. 161 (A7). The second variation icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variation icon is shown changing from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, a state is shown in which the first variation icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variation icon h02 which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 161 (A3) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (A7) in FIG. 161, or while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (A3 in FIG. ) To (A6)) in FIG.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, a big hit announcement (normal announcement) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (A8). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second variation icon h02 appears in addition to the first variation icon h01, and the variation icon of the default display mode is changed to the A color. This is an example of changing at the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the example illustrated in FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B8) will be described with a focus on differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8), and redundant description will be omitted. There is. In the following description, descriptions overlapping with the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B8), FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B4) are the same as FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A4) described above, A state in which the second variation icon h02 moves to the icon display area HN1 is shown. In FIG. 161 (B5), after all of the second variation icons h02 overlap with all of the first variation icons h01, the second variation icons h02 fall down without remaining in the icon display area HN1, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen. The state of starting is shown. Thereafter, in FIGS. 161 (B6) to (B7), the second variation icon h02 is completely out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen, and the state in which the variation icon display mode is not changed is shown. If the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (B8), the decorative symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, the confirmation is displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the pending change effect has failed is shown. In this example, the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed due to failure of the pending change effect. However, there may be cases where the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  Next, examples of effects shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8) will be described. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 161 (C3), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts icon change animation, faces the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword and shakes it. Changes to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears on the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation showing a state of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variation icon h02 in this production example is larger than the first variation icon h01, has a different color, and has a blue display mode. Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (C4) to FIG. 161 (C6), when a part of the second variation icon h02 overlaps the entire first variation icon h01, as shown in FIG. 161 (C7), The second variation icon h02 is reduced in size and becomes the same size as the first variation icon h01, the first variation icon h01 is deleted, the second variation icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variation icon is the default. The display mode is changed from the display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, a state is shown in which the first variation icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variation icon h02 which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 161 (C6), the second variation icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in the notice display form, the hold icon in the notice display form may overlap the second variation icon h02.

  The icon change animation described above starts from FIG. 161 (C3) and can be considered to have ended immediately before (C7) in FIG. 161, or while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (C3 in FIG. ) To (C6)) in FIG.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, a big hit announcement (normal announcement) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (C8). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this production example, the hold change production in which the display mode of the variation icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing is confirmed and displayed. Also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8) described above, the second variation icon h02 appears separately from the first variation icon h01, and the variation icon of the default display mode is changed to the A color. This is an example of changing at the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the example illustrated in FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D8) will be described with a focus on differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8), and redundant description will be omitted. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (D1) to FIG. (D8), FIG. (D1) to FIG. (D4) are the same as FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. A state is shown in which the second variation icon h02 having a size larger than that of the first variation icon h01 moves toward the icon display area HN1. In FIG. 161 (D5), after a part of the second variation icon h02 overlaps the entire first variation icon h01, the second variation icon h02 falls downward without performing an animation for reducing display. The state of starting frame out from the lower end of the display screen is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D6) to (D7), the second variation icon h02 is completely out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen, and the variation icon display mode is not changed. Yes. If the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. Further, after a part of the second variation icon h02 overlaps the entire first variation icon h01, an animation in which the second variation icon h02 is displayed in a reduced size is performed, and then the second variation icon h02 is displayed at the lower end of the display screen. You may frame out from. Further, in this effect example, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture after the second variation icon h02 is out of the frame. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (D8), the decorative symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, the confirmation is displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the pending change effect has failed is shown.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 161 are examples that target the variable icon, but may be performed on the hold icon.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 161, the normal notice using the change icon whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and may be a true notice. Further, even when the on-hold change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes is failed, it may be a big hit, or it may be lost.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing some other examples in which both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is. 162 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A8), examples shown in FIG. 162 (B1) to FIG. (B8), examples shown in FIG. 162 (C1) to FIG. 162 (D1) to FIG. 162 (D8) are examples in which the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is formed in a square frame, and the player can display the icon display area. HN2 is visible. 162 (A1) to FIG. 162 (A8), examples shown in FIG. 162 (B1) to FIG. (B8), examples shown in FIG. 162 (C1) to FIG. The production examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8), and FIG. 161 (B1) to FIG. The production example shown in (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D8) are the same, and the description thereof will be omitted. . Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 162 (D5), when the hold change effect fails, the second variation icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  In FIG. 163 (A1) to FIG. 163 (A16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A3), the frame change animation is started, and the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. ing. As shown in FIGS. 163 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced in size. In this example, in the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased and the variable display is performed only in the second decorative symbol, but the second decorative symbol is erased and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Fluctuation display may be performed only on the symbol. Further, the period during which the decorative symbols are erased may be all of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed, or may be a part of the period. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variation icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy variation icon h01 ′ as a copy of the first variation icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the holding frame UI. In addition, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. The copy variation icon h01 'may or may not execute the standby animation in the variation icon display area HN1. The first variation icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the frame change animation is displayed. The first variation icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period during which the reduced display after the frame change animation is executed. The same applies to the frame change animation in FIGS. 159 to 174 during and after the execution.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving leftward as shown in FIG. 163 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A7), a state is shown in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23). However, the second frame image FL2 includes a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1, and the display mode is also a blue display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. To do. At this time, a period in which both the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed occurs. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until the second frame image FL2 is positioned adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it moves at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. The second variation icon h02 may or may not execute the standby animation in at least a part of the period during which the reduced display is displayed. Further, both or one of the variation icons of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 may or may not perform the standby animation. The same applies to the display of the reduced display in FIGS. 159 to 174.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A11) to (A12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A13), the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started. Thereafter, the decorative image display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy variation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown to overlap with the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variation icon in the icon display region HN1 is changed from the first variation icon h01 to the second variation icon h01. The state is changed to the change icon h02 and the change icon is changed from the default display form to the notice display form (blue display form). That is, in this effect example, a state in which the pending change notice is successful is shown by switching the frame images.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, a big hit announcement (normal announcement) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A16). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the first frame image FL1 is translated and displayed out of the frame, and the second frame image FL2 is translated and displayed in the frame. The first frame image FL1 rotates leftward and disappears in the left depth direction, and the second frame image FL2 appears from the right depth direction and moves leftward. It may be a display of a mode of rotating in a straight line. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 163 (B1) to FIG. 163 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A9), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In this effect example, after the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are displayed side by side in FIG. 163 (B9), each moves to the left of the display screen, but FIG. 163 (B9) to FIG. As shown in B10), the third frame image FL3 different from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 is framed in from the right side of the display screen so as to be adjacent to the right side of the second frame image FL2. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (third change icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, in the third frame image FL3, a third variation icon h03 different from the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is included. The display mode is the same default display mode as the first variation icon h01. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B10) to (B12), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the display screen. Move towards the center of the. At this time, a period in which both the first fluctuation icon h01 and the second fluctuation icon h02 are displayed occurs, and a period in which both the second fluctuation icon h02 and the third fluctuation icon h03 are displayed occurs. The third variation icon h03 may or may not execute the standby animation in at least a part of the period during which the reduced display is displayed. Further, both or one of the variation icons of the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 may or may not perform the standby animation. The same applies to the display of the reduced display in FIGS. 159 to 174.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B11) to (B12), the movement of the third frame image FL3 to the center of the display screen is completed, while the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 continue to the left. Move in the direction and out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B13), the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started. Thereafter, the decorative image display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy variation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown to overlap with the third frame image FL3 and become difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B15), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variation icon h01 to the third variation icon h01. The state is changed to the change icon h03 and the change icon is changed from the default display form to the default display form.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B16), the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, the confirmation is displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the third variation icon h03 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the pending change effect has failed is shown. In this example, the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed due to failure of the pending change effect. However, there may be cases where the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 164 (A1) to FIG. 164 (A16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 164 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (A1) to (A16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16).

  In FIG. 164 (B1) to FIG. 164 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 164 (B1) to FIG. 16 (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (B1) to (B16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B16).

  In FIG. 165 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 165 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16) are examples in which the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is formed in a square frame, and the player is given an icon. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16) except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

  In FIG. 165 (B1) to FIG. 165 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 165 (B1) to FIG. 165 (B16) are examples in which the aspect of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a square frame, and the player is given an icon. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B16) except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

  166 (A1) to FIG. 166 (A16) both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 166 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 165 (A1) to (A16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is different in that it is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 165A1 to A16.

  In FIG. 166 (B1) to FIG. 166 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 166 (B1) to FIG. 166 (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16).

  167 (A1) to FIG. 167 (A16) both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A2) except that the display mode of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is a display mode with a white kimono. 161 (A1) to (A2), the description is omitted. Note that the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a white kimono is the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced in size. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variation icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Is done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy variation icon h01 ′ as a copy of the first variation icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the holding frame UI. In addition, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 167 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A7), a state is shown in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similar to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. In this production example, the display mode of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 is the default display mode (with a white kimono), but even in the display mode with a blue kimono. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. At this time, a period in which both the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed occurs. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until the second frame image FL2 is positioned adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it moves at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, the navigation included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture is displayed. The navigation character YM included in the character YM and the second frame image FL2 starts an icon change animation, changes to a pose in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are directed and the sword is pulled out. To do. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM, and at least a part of the first fluctuation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and at least a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 The first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are each covered with the smoke effect image Eh0, and are more difficult to see than before being covered with the effect image Eh0. Note that only a part of the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. Thereafter, the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02, which are the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, are respectively the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode is changed to blue. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Note that the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the aspect after the icon change. In this case, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 is the display aspect of the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 after the change. It is suggested (notice).

  When the effect image Eh0 is deleted and the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image are displayed. FL2 resumes moving to the left. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Note that the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (A10), but the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM is initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to posture.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 continues to move to the left and is displayed. Frame out from the screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy variation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown to overlap with the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variation icon in the icon display region HN1 is changed from the first variation icon h01 to the second variation icon h01. The change is changed to the change icon h02, and the change icon is changed from the default display form to the notice display form (blue display form). That is, in this effect example, a state in which the pending change notice is successful is shown by switching the frame images.

  Since the change mode of the change icon display has changed, a big hit notice (ordinary notice) in the change display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A16). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 167 (B1) to FIG. 167 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A9), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 167 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 disappears and the first variation icon h01 is displayed. Although the second variation icon h02 appears, neither the first variation icon h01 nor the second variation icon h02 has changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, when the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 167 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move leftward. Resume moving. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is deleted. You may return to posture.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 continues to move to the left and is displayed. Frame out from the screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy variation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown to overlap with the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variation icon in the icon display region HN1 is changed from the first variation icon h01 to the second variation icon h01. The state is changed to the change icon h02 and the change icon is changed from the default display form to the default display form.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B16), the variation display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, the confirmation is displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the second variation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the pending change effect has failed is shown. In this example, the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed due to failure of the pending change effect. However, there may be cases where the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 168 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 168 (A1) to FIG. 16 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A1) to (A16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A16).

  In FIG. 168 (B1) to FIG. 168 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 168 (B1) to FIG. 168 (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (B1) to (B16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B16).

  169 (A1) to FIG. 169 (A16) display both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A8), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture. Among the navigation characters YM and the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 start icon change animation, face the second variation icon h02, It changes to a pose that is swinging out. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image. The change icon h02 is more difficult to visually recognize before being covered with the effect image Eh0. Note that only a part of the second variation icon h02 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the second change icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a blue display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Note that the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the aspect after the icon change. In this case, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display aspect of the second variation icon h02 after the change. It will be a thing.

  When the effect image Eh0 is deleted and the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 169 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are moved leftward. Resume movement. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Note that the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (A10), but the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is deleted. You may return to posture. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A11) to (A16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A11) to (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 169 (B1) to FIG. 168 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B8), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 169 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0. Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 169 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume moving in the left direction. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Note that the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (B10), but the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is deleted. You may return to posture. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B11) to (B16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B11) to (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  170 (A1) to FIG. 170 (A16) both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 170 (A1) to FIG. 170 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A16), and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is different in that it is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A16).

  170B1 to FIG. 170B16, both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. 170 (B1) to FIG. 170 (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B16) and the reserved frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. Except that the UI copy is not displayed, it is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B16).

  In FIG. 171 (A1) to FIG. 17 (A16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 171 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the reservation of the special symbol 1 is digested, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the movement animation of the reserved icon of the special symbol 1 is completed. As a result, the three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that has been the first hold icon h11 until then is displayed as the first variation icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variation icon h01 are in the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. Further, in this effect example, a timer notice display TM is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the timer notice display TM is displayed with the word “attention!” To notify that the timer display countdown starts. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 171 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced in size. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variation icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Is done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy variation icon h01 ′ as a copy of the first variation icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the holding frame UI. In addition, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 171 (A4), a timer display is displayed in the timer notice display TM, and a state in which the countdown of the timer display is started is shown. In other words, this timer notice effect produces that a certain notice effect starts after 40 seconds. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM is “39.99”, and the timer display is continuously counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1, but may be displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving leftward as shown in FIG. 171 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A7), a state is shown in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similar to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. At this time, the first change icon h01 and the hold icons h11 to h13 included in the first frame image FL1 are overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and are more visible than the state where the timer notice display TM is not displayed. It is considered difficult. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until the second frame image FL2 is positioned adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it moves at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture. Among the navigation characters YM and the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 start icon change animation, face the second variation icon h02, It changes to a pose that is swinging out. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and is difficult to view, but the icon change animation is not started with the initial posture. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image. The change icon h02 is more difficult to visually recognize before being covered with the effect image Eh0. Note that only a part of the second variation icon h02 may be covered with the effect image Eh0, or the whole may be covered with the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the second change icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a blue display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notifies) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Note that the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the aspect after the icon change. In this case, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display aspect of the second variation icon h02 after the change. It will be a thing.

  When the effect image Eh0 is deleted and the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are moved leftward. Resume movement. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to posture. In addition, when the second frame image FL2 moves to the left, the second frame image FL2 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the timer preview display TM, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the timer preview display TM. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the timer notice display TM and are difficult to view. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM shows “35.00”. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16) except that the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as that, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display. When the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect starts. . In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM shows “32.00”.

  In FIG. 171 (B1) to FIG. 171 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A1) to (A9), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 171 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0. Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume to move leftward as shown in FIGS. 171 (B9) to (B10). Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave disappears from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to posture. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16) except that the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice display TM. Since it is the same as that, the description is omitted.

  172 (A1) to FIG. 172 (A16) display both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the reservation of the special symbol 1 has been digested, the decorative symbol variation display has been started, and the movement animation of the reserved icon of the special symbol 1 has been completed. As a result, the three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that has been the first hold icon h11 until then is displayed as the first variation icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variation icon h01 are in the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. Is informed. Further, in this effect example, a timer notice display TM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the timer notice display TM is displayed with the characters “attention!” To notify that the timer display countdown starts. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 172 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variation icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Is done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy variation icon h01 ′ as a copy of the first variation icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the holding frame UI. In addition, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display is displayed in the timer notice display TM, and the state in which the countdown of the timer display is started is shown. In other words, this timer notice effect produces that a certain notice effect starts after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM is “39.99”, and the timer display is continuously counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1, but may be displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 172 (A4) to 172 (A5), the navigation character YM is shown overlapped with the timer notice display TM.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A7), a state is shown in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similar to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Note that the second variation icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and are more difficult to see than when the timer notice display TM is not displayed. ing. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move in the left direction. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until the second frame image FL2 is positioned adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it moves at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture. Among the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts an icon change animation, but is overlapped with the timer notice display TM. The situation is considered difficult to see. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. In this production example, the icon change animation that is overlapped with the timer notice display TM and is performed in the second frame image FL2 cannot be visually recognized. However, when the icon change animation is completed, it is the default (white) display mode. The second variation icon h02 changes to a blue display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume to move leftward. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the second variation icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are visible. Note that the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and cannot be visually recognized. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM shows “35.00”. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16) except that the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is continued. Since it is the same as that, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display. When the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect starts. . In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM shows “32.00”.

  In FIG. 172 (B1) to FIG. 17 (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In FIG. 172 (B9) in this effect example, the icon change animation is performed in the second frame image FL2, and it is overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. The icon h02 is not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume moving in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the second variation icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are visible. Note that the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and cannot be visually recognized. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM shows “35.00”. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16) except that the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as that, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display. When the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect starts. . In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM shows “32.00”.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating another effect pattern in which both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. . Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (A1) to (A12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A12), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A13) is different from the second frame image FL2. The third frame image FL3 is shown in the frame and moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similar to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL2 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (third change icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a third variation icon h03 different from the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2, and the display mode is also a red display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2. It has become. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start to move in the left direction. As shown in FIGS. 173 (A14) to (A15), the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen. The third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period in which both the second variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03 are displayed occurs.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 173 (A15) to (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped when reaching the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is left. Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A18), the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 173 (A18) to (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variation icon h01 to the third variation icon h01. The state is changed to the change icon h03, and the change icon is changed from the default display form to the notice display form (red display form). That is, in this effect example, a state in which the pending change notice is successful is shown by switching the frame images.

  Since the display mode of the variation icon has changed, the jackpot notice (ordinary notice) in the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Then, the decorative symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) whose display mode has changed is deleted. Note that the change icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice. In this example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating another effect pattern in which both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. . Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A6), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed and the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 174 (A6), the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A7) A state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. The second frame image FL2 in this effect example includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23). The second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the frame image FL2 are all in the default display mode as in the first frame image FL1. On the other hand, in the second frame image FL2 in this production example, the background color is not the default background color (for example, white) as in the first frame image FL1, but the background color for notification (for example, blue), It functions as a jackpot notice. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a notice effect is performed by changing elements other than the change icon is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. To do. At this time, a period in which both the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed occurs. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until the second frame image FL2 is positioned adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it moves at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A11) to (A12), when the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, only the first frame image FL1 continues to move to the left, Frame out from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A13), a third frame image different from the second frame image FL2 is displayed. A state is shown in which FL3 has entered the frame and moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similar to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (third change icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). The third variation icon h03 and the hold icons h31, h32, h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all in the default display mode. On the other hand, the third frame image FL3 in this effect example has a different background color from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, and has a red background color. The red background color in the third frame image FL3 is the background color of the notice, and is a background color with a higher degree of reliability than the blue background color. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a notice effect is performed by changing elements other than the change icon is shown. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving in the left direction, and the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen as shown in FIGS. The third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period in which both the second variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03 are displayed occurs.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A15) to (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped when reaching the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is left. Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A18), the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started. Thereafter, the decorative image display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A18) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variation icon in the icon display region HN1 is changed from the first variation icon h01 to the third variation icon h01. A change icon h03 is shown. Further, in this effect example, the background color is changed by switching the frame image, and a state in which the notice is performed is shown. In this production example, the notice is performed by changing the display mode other than the change icon, but the display mode of the change icon may be changed.

  In this production example, the change in the background color means that a big hit notice (ordinary notice) has been made in the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display, but the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 174 (A21). In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) is deleted. In the case where the background color has changed, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon may be deleted and the background color may be returned to the default display mode. In this production example, the background color is changed and the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the decorative symbols for the jackpot may be confirmed and displayed.

In the above description, “a game machine equipped with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The display means can display an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter referred to as “variation icons [eg, first variation icon h01, second variation icon h02, etc. shown in FIG. 159 (A3)]”). Means,
The display means is means capable of displaying the variable icon in a certain display area [for example, the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)] of the display area [for example, FIG. As shown in (A3), the first variation icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying the two fluctuation icons (hereinafter referred to as “two fluctuation icons”),
One of the two fluctuation icons is a first fluctuation icon [for example, the first fluctuation icon h01 shown in FIG. 159 (A3), etc.]
One of the two fluctuation icons is a second fluctuation icon [for example, the second fluctuation icon h02 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)],
The second fluctuation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 159 (A3), the second fluctuation icon h02 is displayed in an area other than the icon display area HN1. A game stand characterized by being displayed. Was explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to produce various effects with variation icons and to expect that the variation may be a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variation icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variation icon. Further, the display means may always display the fluctuation icon or may not display the fluctuation icon.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the variation icon in a certain display area of the display means in the display means, or other than the variation icon in a certain display area of the display means in the display means. Can also be displayed. Further, the display means may always display a variation icon in a certain display area of the display means in the display means, or display a variation icon in a certain display area of the display means in the display means. You may not do it.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying the variation icon only in a certain display area of the display area in the display means, or a display area other than a certain display area in the display area of the display means. In addition, a variable icon may be displayed.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only two variation icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the two variation icons. In addition, the display means may always display two variation icons, or may not display two variation icons.

  The display means may be capable of displaying three or more variation icons.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first variation icon and the second variation icon, or capable of displaying a variation icon other than the first variation icon and the second variation icon. It may be. The display means may always display the first variation icon and the second variation icon, or may not display the first variation icon and the second variation icon. Also good.

  Further, the second variation icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. It may be anything. The second variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or may not be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area. There may be.

  The second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area.

  In addition, “animation in which the second variation icon moves during the period in which the first variation icon is displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ second movement animation [eg, FIG. 159 (A3) to FIG. The icon change animation shown in FIG. 164 or the movement display of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A15)] may be displayed. Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there can be a variety of effects produced by the variation icon by the moving animation of the second variation icon, and it may be possible to improve a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or an animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. In addition, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  In addition, there is a case where the second variation icon is displayed in the certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, FIG. (A3) to (A6), after the icon change animation is displayed, the second variation icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the second variation icon is displayed in a certain display area, so that the effect by the variation icon can be varied, and the expectation for the big hit can be further improved.

  Here, the second variation icon may be displayed only in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variation icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. The icon may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. In addition, the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area after the second movement animation is displayed, or the second variation icon is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed. It may not be displayed in the area.

  Further, only the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variation icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. There may be a case where a variation icon other than is displayed in a certain display area.

  In addition, the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area only after the second moving animation is displayed, and the second moving icon may be displayed in a display area other than after the second moving animation is displayed. May be displayed in a certain display area.

  In addition, in the first case, the size of the second variation icon displayed in the certain display area is the second variable icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. The size of the second variation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is different from the size of the variation icon [For example, the size of the second variation icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIGS. Etc.], a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, by changing the size of the second variable icon, the effects by the variable icon can be varied, and the expectation for the big hit can be further enhanced.

  The size of the second variation icon displayed in a certain display area may be smaller than the size of the second variation icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, It can be large.

  In addition, “the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIG. 159 (A4) to As shown in FIG. (A6), the second variation icon h02 overlaps the first variation icon h01 while the icon change animation is displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there can be a variety of effects produced by the variation icons by overlapping the variation icons, and it can be expected that the variation may be a big hit.

  Here, there may be a case where the second variation icon overlaps only the first variation icon during at least a part of the period in which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second variation icon overlaps with other than the first variation icon during at least a part of the period. Also, the second variation icon may necessarily overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second variation icon does not overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period.

  In addition, only the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement animation may be displayed. There may be a case where a variation icon other than the second variation icon overlaps with the first variation icon during at least a part of the period.

  In addition, the second fluctuation icon may overlap the first fluctuation icon only during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement animation may be displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during a period other than at least a part of the period during which the first variation icon is present.

  The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during the entire period.

  In addition, “the second variation icon may overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the icon The second variation icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 in the pre-reading notice display mode while the change animation is being displayed]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the second variation icon and the notice display may overlap to produce various effects by the variation icon, and it may be expected that the variation may be a big hit.

  Here, there may be a case where the second variation icon overlaps only the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or during the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second variation icon overlaps with a display other than the notice display during at least a part of the period. In addition, the second variation icon may be overlapped with the notice display during at least part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least part of the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second variation icon does not overlap the notice display during the period.

  Further, there may be a case where only the second variable icon overlaps the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where a variation icon other than the second variation icon overlaps the notice display during some period.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the notice display during a period other than a part of the period.

  The second variation icon may overlap the notice display during a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the entire period during which the second animation is displayed. In some cases, the second variation icon may overlap the notice display.

  In addition, “the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIG. 159 (C6 ), The second variation icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first variation icon h01 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice while the icon change animation is displayed]. Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, the second variation icon overlaps the first variation icon and the notice display, so that the variation icon can be produced in various ways, and it can be expected that the variation may be a big hit. is there.

  Here, the second variation icon may overlap only with the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement The second variation icon may overlap with the display other than the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the animation is displayed. In addition, the second variation icon may be overlapped with the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second variation icon does not overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period.

  In addition, only the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed. There may be a case where a variation icon other than the second variation icon overlaps the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display also in a period other than at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

  Note that the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the second movement animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during the entire period.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display [for example, the first decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 164 (A2), etc.] in accordance with the execution of the symbol variation display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, the second decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 164 (A2), etc.] according to the execution of the symbol variation display,
The first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays,
Only one decorative symbol variation display of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A15), during the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is deleted and only the variable display by the second decorative symbol is displayed. Etc.], a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during the period of the variation icon movement animation, thereby concentrating the player on the movement animation. May be possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. Other displays may also be displayable. The display means may always display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. You may not do it.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or other than the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. The display may also be displayable. The display means may always display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. You may not do it.

  Further, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed only during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases, and one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is also included in a period other than at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. Only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. In addition, during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is always displayed. It is also possible that only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is not displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, only one decorative symbol variation display of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be displayed during a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be only one decoration symbol variation display of the first decoration symbol variation display and the second decoration symbol variation display during the entire period in which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, “animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter referred to as“ first moving animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A12) ”). Etc.] ") may be displayed,
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A15), the first frame A game machine characterized in that the movement display of the second frame image FL2 is started after the movement display of the image FL1 is started. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, by displaying a plurality of moving icons moving animations, it is possible to produce a variety of effects based on the changing icons, and it can be expected that the fluctuations may be a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or an animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Also, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the second movement may be performed after the display of the first moving animation is started. Display other than the display of the animation may be started. In addition, the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation is displayed after the display of the first moving animation is started. It may not start.

  In addition, “animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIGS. 164A3 to A12 ”) Etc.] ”) may be displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there can be a variety of effects produced by the variation icon by the moving animation of the first variation icon, and it can be expected that the variation may be a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or an animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Also, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

“The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168, etc.]
The certain display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 168 (A1), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 161 (A1), etc.]
The moving display of the certain display in the first display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed,
The game table, wherein the moving display of the certain display in the second display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, it is possible to produce a variety of effects by changing icons by displaying the indication of the big hit expectation during the period of the moving animation of the changing icons, and it can be expected that the fluctuation may hit a big hit. is there.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a certain display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a certain display. Further, the display means may always display a certain display or may not display a certain display.

  A certain display may be capable of being displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, a certain display may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, a certain display may be capable of displaying only the first display mode and the second display mode, or may display a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be. In addition, a certain display may be always displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. May be.

  The moving display of a certain display in the first display mode may be displayed during a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, or the period in which the first moving animation is displayed. A moving display of a certain display in the first display mode may be displayed during the entire period.

  In addition, a moving display of a certain display in the second display mode may be displayed in a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or a period in which the second moving animation is displayed. A moving display of a certain display in the second display mode may be displayed during the entire period.

  In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, FIG. 164 (A2) to FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first variation icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area different from the icon display area HN1, etc.] A game table that features ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, by displaying the first fluctuation icon in a display area different from a certain display area, it is possible to produce various effects with the fluctuation icon, and to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. After that, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area other than a display area different from a certain display area. Further, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. There may be a case where the first variation icon is not displayed in a display area different from a certain display area later.

  Further, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area only after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the first moving animation is started. Besides the later, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area.

In addition, “in the case of one symbol variation display, after changing from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state (hereinafter“ second case ”) There is)
The first state is a state in which only the first variation icon of the two variation icons is displayed [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 164 (A5), the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon. The state where only the first variation icon h01 of the icons h02 is displayed, etc.]
The second state is a state in which both of the two variation icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A9), both the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed. State etc.]
The third state is a state in which only the second variation icon of the two variation icons is displayed [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 164 (A12), the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon. The game stand characterized by the fact that only the second variation icon h02 of the icons h02 is displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there can be a variety of effects produced by changing icons by changing the number of changing icons, and it can be expected that the changes may be a big hit.

  Here, during the execution of the one time symbol variation display, after changing from the first state to the second state, the second state may be changed to the third state. During the execution of the symbol variation display, the second state may not be changed to the third state after changing from the first state to the second state. In addition, during the execution of one symbol variation display, there may be a case where the second state is changed to the third state only after the first state is changed to the second state. During execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the second state is changed to the third state other than after the first state is changed to the second state. Also, only during the execution of one symbol variation display, after changing from the first state to the second state, the second state may be changed to the third state. Even when the symbol variation display is not being executed, the second state may be changed to the third state after the first state is changed to the second state.

“The display means is a means capable of displaying a third variation icon [for example, the third variation icon h03 shown in FIG. 173 (A17)].
The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the first variation icon,
The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the second variation icon,
After becoming the second case, after becoming the fourth state from the third state, it may become the fifth state from the fourth state,
The fourth state is a state in which the second variation icon and the third variation icon are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A14), the second variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03. Etc., both of which are displayed]
The fifth state is a state in which only the third variation icon of the second variation icon and the third variation icon is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), A game table characterized in that only the third variation icon h03 of the two variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03 is displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there can be a variety of effects produced by changing icons by changing the number of changing icons, and it can be expected that the changes may be a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third variation icon, or may be capable of displaying variation icons other than the third variation icon. Further, the display means may always display the third variation icon, or may not display the third variation icon.

  Further, the third variation icon may be partially different from the first variation icon, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the third variation icon may be partially different from the second variation icon, or may be entirely different.

  In addition, after becoming the second case, after changing from the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state. Then, after changing from the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state may not change to the fifth state. In addition, after the second case, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state only after the third state is changed to the fourth state. In addition to the above, there may be a case where the fourth state is changed to the fifth state after the third state is changed to the fourth state. In addition, only after the second case is reached, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state after the third state is changed to the fourth state. Other than after the case, there may be a case where the fourth state is changed to the fifth state after the third state is changed to the fourth state.

  Further, “at least part of the period in which the two variation icons are displayed includes a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in the certain display area [for example, FIG. 164 (A9)]. As shown, no variation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 during the period in which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed, and the like]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game machine, there is a case where a variation icon is not displayed in a certain display area, thereby providing various effects by the variation icon, and it can be expected that the variation may be a big hit.

  Here, in a part of the period in which the two fluctuation icons are displayed, there may be a period in which neither of the two fluctuation icons is displayed in a certain display area, or two fluctuation icons are displayed. There may be a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in a certain display area in the entire period.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to the hold of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A2)] ”). Yes,
In a period in which the two fluctuation icons are displayed [for example, a period in which the first fluctuation icon h01 and the second fluctuation icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10)]. The number of the hold icons [e.g., six, etc.] is the number of the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 before the two change icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6). The number of the hold icons in the period etc. during which only the first variation icon h01 is displayed] is larger than the number of the held icons [for example, 3 etc.]. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the effects can be varied by changing the number of the hold icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. The display means may always display the hold icon, or may not display the hold icon.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to the hold of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A2)] ”). Yes,
The display means is capable of displaying a display for displaying the number of retained symbols in the symbol variation display in numbers (hereinafter referred to as “number retained display [for example, the second number of retained displays shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]”). And
Number of holds indicated by the number hold display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10), in the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, the second hold number. The number of holds in the special figure 1 in the display indicates “3” etc.] is the number of the hold icons in the period in which the two variable icons are displayed [for example, FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. ), The game table is characterized in that there are fewer than six hold icons displayed during the period in which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the effects can be varied by changing the number of the hold icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. The display means may always display the hold icon, or may not display the hold icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the numeric hold display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the numeric hold display. Further, the display means may always display a numeric hold display or may not display a numeric hold display.

In addition, the movement display of the hold icon is displayed in at least a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed,
The game table, wherein the hold icon movement display is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases in which a variety of effects using the hold icon can be achieved.

  Here, in a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed, or in the entire period in which the first moving animation is displayed. A moving display of the hold icon may be displayed.

  In addition, during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed, or during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed, A moving display of the hold icon may be displayed.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]. ”Was also explained.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described above.

(Appendix 1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain performance is performed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that may notify that the time until the certain effect is started changes,
The game table, wherein the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.

  Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect moving means (including image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versatile lighter, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
A gaming table, wherein, when the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed.

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Moreover, the display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
A game table, wherein the second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The gaming table, wherein the first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means on which the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The gaming machine characterized in that the time notified by the first display is advanced even when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
A game table, wherein after the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
A game table characterized in that a player who has displayed the second display is more likely to win a big hit than a case where the second display is not displayed.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
One type of display of multiple types is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The game stand characterized in that the display of the substitute sign is an effect display.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of the plurality of types of operations is a production operation,
The game table characterized in that the certain effect is an effect operation by effect moving means.

  Here, an operation other than the presentation operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the presentation operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to that provided on the game board, and may be provided on a frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
A gaming machine characterized in that a case where the certain effect occurs is easier to hit than a case where the certain effect does not occur.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
A game table in which a hot effect display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix 14)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
The game table, wherein the period display may be erased before the first timing.

  Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or during big hit. Even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,
The timing at which the third effect display is displayed by the period display may not be notified,
The game table, wherein the period display is not displayed during the display of the third effect display.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a prepaid card removal forgetting prevention notification, light emission by an LED, an effect operation by an accessory May be performed. Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 3rd display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation in which the result of the determination of success or failure is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “big hit symbol variation”).

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation”) in which the result of the determination of success or failure is out of place.
The game table, wherein the jackpot symbol variation is configured to display the third effect display more frequently than the lose symbol variation.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
The game stand, wherein the power output movable means may perform the effect operation during display of the third effect display.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
A game table, wherein after the period display is not displayed, the period display is easily visible.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The game table, wherein the period display is not displayed until a certain period in the reach ends.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The game table, wherein the period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period in the reach.

(Appendix 22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter referred to as “second timing”) for displaying a second effect display.

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance increase is notified may be fixed in correspondence with the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. In such a case, the location where the chance up is notified may be changed such that the notification is made three times and the notification is made only once. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, or may be easier to miss. Also, the likelihood of being a big hit does not have to vary depending on the number of timing notifications. Also, the larger the number of chance ups, the more likely it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances up, the easier it will be to win.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display;
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation,
The game table characterized in that at least part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 25)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing is reached, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed,
A gaming table, wherein the first speed and the second speed are different.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to appendix 26,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which a display mode of at least a part of the time display changes with the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 26 or 27,
The game table, wherein the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.

(Appendix 29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display whose display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display whose display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
A gaming table, wherein a fourth display is displayed when the second time has elapsed.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. In addition, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
The game table characterized in that the first type of display includes the first display and the second display.

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The game stand, wherein the timer notice display is a display for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
With operating means,
The first type of display is an operation valid period display.
The game stand characterized in that the operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
The game table characterized in that the first timing is notified between the start of the first period and the end of the first period.

(Appendix 34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 33,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
The game stand, wherein the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode when the time notification is executed by the count gown display.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to attachment 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size.
The gaming table, wherein the second display size is larger than the first display size.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming machine according to appendix 35 or 36,
The game table, wherein when the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
A game table, wherein when the countdown display is displayed, the first display mode always changes to the second display mode.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
A game table characterized in that, in the event that the display mode is changed to the second display mode, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol when it is changed to the second display mode.

(Appendix 40)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 39,
A game machine, wherein the countdown display is started and ended within a single symbol variation display period.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 40,
The game table, wherein the countdown display moves when the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to appendix 41,
The game machine characterized in that the time notification by the countdown display is continued even during the movement of the countdown display.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to appendix 41,
The game table characterized by interrupting the time notification by the countdown display while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The game table is configured so that the countdown display is erased after a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is zero.

(Appendix 45)
The game stand according to appendix 44,
A game table, wherein when the time until the certain performance is performed becomes zero, the specific display is displayed and then the non-display is performed.

(Appendix 46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 45,
The game table characterized by that the display may not change to the second display mode.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 46,
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The game table, wherein the first display means may display the countdown display of the first display mode.

(Appendix 48)
An amusement machine according to appendix 47,
The game table, wherein the second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.

(Appendix 49)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix 51)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display;
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed,
A gaming table, wherein the first display may be erased before the first timing after the first display is started.

(Appendix 52)
The gaming machine according to appendix 51, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display starts to be displayed,
The game table, wherein the first display is erased during the display of the third display.

(Appendix 53)
A gaming machine according to appendix 52,
The game table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a notice display.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine according to appendix 53,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the event that the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the third display is not displayed.

(Appendix 55)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 52 to 54,
Providing production movable means that can perform multiple types of actions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The game table, wherein the first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,
A gaming table, wherein the first display is displayed again after the first display is erased.

(Appendix 57)
A gaming machine according to appendices 51 to 55,
The gaming table is configured so that the first display is not displayed until the certain period has elapsed after the first display is erased.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,
A gaming table, wherein the first display is displayed again after the first display is erased until the certain period elapses.

(Appendix 59)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 58, wherein
The game table characterized in that the certain period is a period during which super reach is being executed.

(Appendix 60)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 59, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The gaming table is characterized in that the second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 60,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 62)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at a timing when a certain effect is performed,
The game table, wherein the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to appendix 62,
The gaming table characterized in that the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.

(Appendix 64)
The gaming machine according to appendix 63, wherein
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size.
The gaming table, wherein the second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.

(Appendix 65)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 64,
The game table, wherein the first display is displayed in the first display mode when the display of the countdown display is started.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,
The game table, wherein the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The game stand is characterized in that, in the end, the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed.

(Appendix 68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 67,
A game machine characterized in that display of the first display is started and ended during execution of one symbol variation display.

(Appendix 69)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 68,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first display is a display in which a display position may change.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming machine according to appendix 69,
A gaming table, wherein when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a gaming table.

(Appendix 71)
The game stand according to appendix 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
The gaming table, wherein the display position of the first display is changed by the moving display.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The game machine characterized by continuing the update display of the countdown display during the display of the movement display.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The game machine, wherein the update display of the countdown display is interrupted during the display of the movement display.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 73,
The game table, wherein the countdown display is a time countdown display.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming machine according to appendix 74,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the timing notification is a notification notifying that the timing for performing the certain effect has been reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to appendix 74 or 75,
A game table, wherein the countdown display is erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming machine according to appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
A gaming machine, wherein when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
A gaming table, wherein when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.

(Appendix 79)
A gaming machine according to appendix 78,
The gaming table, wherein the first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.

(Appendix 80)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 81)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and one state of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state, and the first meter display One of the plurality of types of states is a third state, the first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. The expectation of jackpot is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. A game stand characterized by high expectations for jackpots.

(Appendix A2)
In the game stand described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. A game stand characterized by being expensive.

(Appendix A3)
A gaming table according to appendix A1 or A2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decoration symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the fourth meter display is a display that starts displaying in the fourth state.

(Appendix A5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4,
One state of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation of jackpot is higher when the display of the first meter is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state.

(Appendix A6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state when the first icon is displayed a first time,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state when the first icon is displayed a second time.
The game machine characterized in that the second number of times is less than the first number of times.

(Appendix A7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6,
One display of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed. Amusement stand.

(Appendix A8)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed,
The game table, wherein the jackpot display is more easily displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.

(Appendix A9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The game stand, wherein the pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.

(Appendix A10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The game stand, wherein the operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.

(Appendix A11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A10,
The display means can display a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The game table is characterized in that the certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.

(Appendix A12)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The period display is a display for informing the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
The notice display is a notice for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display,
The game table, wherein the notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.

(Appendix A13)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display moves from the second position (start position) through the first position to the third position (end position), so that the start to end of the first period is notified. Configured,
The second position is a position before the first position;
The first position is a position before the third position;
The gaming table is characterized in that the first timing is notified when the cursor display reaches the first position.

(Appendix A14)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed.
The chance-up display is a display notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing,
The game stand, wherein when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position.

(Appendix A15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A14,
The game table is characterized in that the period display is a display that may be moved.

(Appendix A16)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A15,
The game table, wherein the moving display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.

(Appendix A17)
A gaming table according to appendix A15 or A16,
The game stand, wherein the display position of the period display changes when the movement display is performed.

(Appendix A18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, it is finally a big hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when it is displayed in the first display mode. A game stand characterized in that the symbol pattern is easily displayed.

(Appendix A19)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A18,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached rather than the display in the first display mode. A game table that is easy to start.

(Appendix A20)
A gaming table according to appendix A18 or A19,
The game table, wherein the notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.

(Appendix A21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A20,
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer),
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
A game in which the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Stand.

(Appendix A22)
A game machine according to appendix A21,
The game table, wherein the display mode of the period display does not know whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

(Appendix A23)
The game stand according to appendix A21 or A22,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display form, the period display is more easily displayed in the fourth display form than when the notice display is displayed in the first display form. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A23,
When the notice display is displayed in the first display form, the period display is more easily displayed in the third display form than when the notice display is displayed in the second display form. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A24,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display,
The notice display is a first notice display,
The gaming machine, wherein the second notice display may give a notice that the first notice display is displayed.

(Appendix A26)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A25,
The game table, wherein the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed is likely to be a big hit, compared to the case where the first notice display is not notified by the second notice display.

(Appendix A27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A26,
In the case where the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed more definitely than the case where the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A28)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The game table, wherein the notice display is a display different from the period display.

(Appendix A30)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A29,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is announced in advance that the reach indication is displayed by the advance notice display, so that the period display is displayed.

(Appendix A31)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A30,
The game table characterized in that the notice display may be performed by the same symbol variation display as the period display.

(Appendix A32)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A31,
The game table may be characterized in that the notice display may be performed in a symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed.

(Appendix A33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A32,
The game table, wherein the notice display is also displayed during a period when the symbol stop display is performed.

(Appendix A34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A32,
The game table is characterized in that the notice display is not displayed during a period in which the symbol stop display is performed.

(Appendix A35)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A34,
The game table, wherein the notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display.

(Appendix A36)
The game table, wherein the notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.

(Appendix A37)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display,
Said 1st display is a display which alert | reports the timing which a certain production may be started,
The display means is a means in which the A-th display may be displayed as a certain effect,
In the timing at which the A-th display is started (hereinafter referred to as “A-th timing”), the A-th display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display. A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the certain effect may be the A-th display. Further, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A37,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the A-th display may be displayed in a certain period,
The display mode of at least part of the period display changes with the passage of time of a certain period,
A game table in which a timing at which the A-th display is started is notified during a change in display mode of at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A39)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A38,
The period display is a display in which the B-th display may be displayed.
The gaming table, wherein when the Ath display is displayed at the Ath timing, the Bth display is displayed.

(Appendix A40)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A37,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the A-th display is displayed,
As time passes, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
The gaming table, wherein the A-th display is displayed when a change in display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed.

(Appendix A41)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A40,
When the A timing comes, the A display may be displayed.
The gaming table, wherein the A-th display may not be displayed when the A-th timing is reached.

(Appendix A42)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A40,
The gaming table, wherein the A-th display is always displayed when the A-th timing is reached.

(Appendix A43)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A42,
The display means is a means that may display a second display,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed.

(Appendix A44)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A43,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
A gaming table, wherein the display position of the first display changes when the moving display is performed.

  Here, the movement display may be performed without fail, or the movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A45)
A game machine according to appendix A44,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed,
A gaming table in which the moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. .

(Appendix A46)
A game machine according to appendix A44,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed,
The game table, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A47)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A46,
When the A display is displayed at the A timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the A display.

(Appendix A48)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A47,
When the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, the first display is not displayed, and the first display is hidden in an area overlapping at least a part of the area where the first display was displayed. A game table characterized in that the display of A is displayed.

(Appendix A49)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A48,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is a means provided in front of the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means,
The gaming table, wherein the A-th display is displayed by the second image display means.

(Appendix A50)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A49,
The second image display means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
When the first display is being displayed by the first image display means, the second image display means may perform the previous stage effect operation at the Ath timing. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A51)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A50,
With operating means,
The gaming table characterized in that the A-th display is a display related to the operation means.

(Appendix A52)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A51,
The display means is means for displaying the C-th display as a certain effect.
A gaming machine, wherein the C-th display may be displayed at a timing at which the C-th display is started (hereinafter referred to as “C-th timing”).

(Appendix A53)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A52,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A54)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A52,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A55)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display,
Said 1st display is a display which alert | reports the timing which a certain production is started,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(Appendix A56)
A game machine according to appendix A55,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”) at which a certain effect may start in a certain period.
The display mode of at least part of the period display changes with the passage of time of a certain period,
A game table in which a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified during a change in display mode of at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A57)
A gaming machine according to appendix A56,
The period display is a display in which the B-th display may be displayed.
The gaming table is characterized in that the B display is displayed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A58)
A game machine according to appendix A55,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
As time passes, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the certain effect is started when the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends.

(Appendix A59)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
The game table, wherein the certain presentation may not be started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A60)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
The game table characterized in that the certain performance is always started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A61)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A60,
The display means is a means that may display a second display,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed.

(Appendix A62)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A61,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
A gaming table, wherein the display position of the first display changes when the moving display is performed.

  Here, the movement display may be performed without fail, or the movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A63)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A62,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed,
A gaming table in which the moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. .

(Appendix A64)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A62,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed,
The game table, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A65)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A55 to A64,
In the first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays, the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display.

(Appendix A66)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed with the passage of time in a certain period,
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol variation display, the gaming table is configured such that the display mode of the first display does not change.

(Appendix A67)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed with the passage of time in a certain period,
The game table according to the first symbol variation display, wherein the certain period is started.

(Appendix A68)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A67,
The display mode of the first display is not changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. To play.

(Appendix A68)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A67,
There may be a case where at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. There is a game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A69)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A65,
The display means is a means that may display a second display,
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. The second display may be displayed without fail in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A71)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A72)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display,
Said 1st display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth "a certain timing") when a certain production may be started,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started,
A notice display may be performed by the first display before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A73)
A game machine according to appendix A72,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
The display mode of at least part of the period display changes with the passage of time of a certain period,
The game table, wherein the certain timing is notified during a change in display mode of at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A74)
A gaming machine according to appendix A73,
The period display is a display in which the B-th display may be displayed.
The gaming table is characterized in that the B display is displayed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A75)
A game machine according to appendix A72,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
As time passes, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the certain effect is started when the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends.

(Appendix A76)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A75,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
The game table, wherein the certain presentation may not be started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A75,
The game table characterized in that the certain performance is always started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A78)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A77,
The display means is a means that may display a second display,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed.

(Appendix A79)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A78,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
A gaming table, wherein the display position of the first display changes when the moving display is performed.

  Here, the movement display may be performed without fail, or the movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A80)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A79,
A gaming table in which the moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. .

(Appendix A81)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A79,
The game table, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A82)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A81,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started.

(Appendix A83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A82,
With operating means,
The game table, wherein the notice display is a display related to the operation means.

(Appendix A84)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A83,
The game table characterized in that after the notice display is performed, a time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display.

(Appendix A85)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A84,
The notice display is always performed by the first display before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed in accordance with the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game table that features

(Appendix A86)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A85,
When the first display is displayed, a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display is started according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. To play.

(Appendix A87)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A88)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A89)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means in which a first display may be displayed,
The first display is a display for informing a timing at which a certain effect may start (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”).
The display means is a means in which a second display may be displayed,
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized in that a plurality of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of second displays”) may be displayed.

(Appendix A90)
A gaming machine according to appendix A89,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period,
The display mode of at least part of the period display changes with the passage of time of a certain period,
The game table, wherein the certain timing is notified during a change in display mode of at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A91)
A gaming machine according to appendix A90,
The period display is a display in which the B-th display may be displayed.
The gaming table is characterized in that the B display is displayed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A91)
A gaming machine according to appendix A89,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
As time passes, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the certain effect is started when the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends.

(Appendix A92)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A89 to A91,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
The game table, wherein the certain presentation may not be started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A93)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A89 to A91,
The game table characterized in that the certain performance is always started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A94)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A89 to A93,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
A gaming table, wherein the display position of the first display changes when the moving display is performed.

  Here, the movement display may be performed without fail, or the movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A95)
A gaming machine according to appendix A94,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed,
A gaming table in which the moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. .

(Appendix A96)
A gaming machine according to appendix A94,
According to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed,
The game table, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A97)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A96,
The game table, wherein the first display is always displayed when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A98)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A96,
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed.

(Appendix A99)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A98,
The second display is a display in preparation,
The display of the plurality of brothers is a display in preparation of a plurality of preparations,
One display of the plurality of preparing displays is a first preparing display,
One of the plurality of preparation displays is a second preparation display,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first preparation display is a display displayed before the second preparation display.

(Appendix A100)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A99,
After the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”) is displayed.
After the second preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second preparation display (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display”) is displayed.
A gaming table, wherein the first timer display is configured to be displayed before the second timer display.

  Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation indications.

(Appendix A101)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A99,
After the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”) is displayed.
After the second preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second preparation display (hereinafter referred to as “second timer display”) is displayed.
The gaming table, wherein the first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display.

(Appendix A102)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A103)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A104)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display,
Said 1st display is a display which alert | reports the timing which a certain production is started,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started,
A notice may be given before a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain presentation is started,
The gaming table is characterized in that the advance notice is an advance notice in advance that a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.

(Appendix A105)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A104,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter referred to as “certain timing”) at which the certain presentation may start in a certain period.
A game table in which a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified during a change in display mode of at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A106)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A105,
The period display is a display in which the B-th display may be displayed.
The gaming table is characterized in that the B display is displayed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A107)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A104,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for informing a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “certain timing”),
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the certain effect is started when the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends.

(Appendix A108)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A107,
When the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started.
The game table, wherein the certain presentation may not be started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A109)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A107,
The game table characterized in that the certain performance is always started when the certain timing comes.

(Appendix A110)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A109,
The display means is a means that may display a second display,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed.

(Appendix A111)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A110,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
A gaming table, wherein the display position of the first display changes when the moving display is performed.

  Here, the movement display may be performed without fail, or the movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A112)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A111,
A gaming table in which the moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. .

(Appendix A113)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A111,
The game table, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A114)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A113,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notice is a notice display by the first display.

(Appendix A115)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to A114,
There may be a case where a false notice is performed before a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain presentation is started,
A gaming table, wherein even if the false notice is made, a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started.

(Appendix A116)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to A115,
A notice is made before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game stand.

(Appendix A117)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A118)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A119)
A game machine equipped with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
A gaming table, wherein at least a part of the timer effect is performed during execution of a big hit game.

(Appendix A120)
A gaming machine according to appendix A119,
The jackpot game is configured by a plurality of round games,
The game stand characterized in that the timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game.

(Appendix A121)
A gaming machine according to appendix A119,
The jackpot game is configured by a plurality of round games,
The game stand, wherein the timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games.

(Appendix A122)
A gaming table according to appendix A120 or A121,
The timer display is a display configured to display the initial value and then subtract from the initial value to indicate the certain time.
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0,
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer effect”) indicates a first time as the initial value,
The first timer effect may be executed across a first number of round games,
The first timer performance may be executed across a second number of round games,
The second number of times is a number greater than the first number of times,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of times is one or more times.

(Appendix A123)
A gaming table according to appendix A120 or A121,
A round game is configured to end when the first time has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to display the initial value and then subtract from the initial value to indicate the certain time.
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0,
A second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The gaming table, wherein the second time is shorter than the first time.

(Appendix A124)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A123,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The certain effect is an effect in which the timer display starts with a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first mode (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”),
The certain effect in the second case is an effect (hereinafter referred to as “second effect”) that may be executed in the second mode.
The game machine characterized in that the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.

(Appendix A125)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A124,
A game table, wherein a timing at which the second production can be started is likely to be earlier than a timing at which the first production can be started.

(Appendix A126)
The game stand according to appendix A124 or A125,
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case,
In the second case, the game table is characterized in that the timing at which the first effect is executed is different from the timing at which the second effect is executed.

(Appendix A127)
A gaming table according to appendices A119 to A126,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the certain effect is a confirmed effect for notifying that a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

(Appendix A128)
The game stand according to appendix A127, which cites any one of appendices A124 to A126,
The finalized effect is an effect that informs that a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold,
When the number of symbol variation display that is a big hit included in the hold is one, it is configured so that one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
When the number of symbol variation displays that are jackpots included in the hold is two or more, it is configured to perform both effects of the first effect and the second effect. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A129)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A124 to A126,
The certain effect is an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to a player may be given,
There is a high possibility that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the second production than the first production,
The first effect may be performed as a confirmed effect for notifying that a privilege advantageous to the player is given (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first effect may not be the final effect (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The second effect is a confirmed effect informing that a privilege advantageous to the player is given,
The gaming table is configured such that the second effect is more easily executed in the second case than in the first case.

(Appendix A130)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A129,
The timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the jackpot game. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A131)
A gaming machine according to appendix A130,
The timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third case”),
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the certain effect in the third case is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed.

(Appendix A132)
A gaming machine according to appendix A119,
The timer display is configured to be displayed during execution of the jackpot game, and may be a display indicating the certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is ended. A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A133)
A gaming machine according to appendix A132,
The timer display is configured to initiate a display change to indicate the certain time when certain conditions relating to the game are achieved;
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the jackpot game is ended,
A game table configured to display a certain time during execution of the jackpot game according to a timing at which the certain condition is achieved.

(Appendix A134)
A gaming machine according to appendix A119, A132 or A133,
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a gaming state after the jackpot game is ended (hereinafter referred to as “eleventh effect”) may be executed.
As the certain effect, there is a case where an effect (hereinafter referred to as “the twelfth effect”) for notifying that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold is executed.
The certain performance is configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time.
The eleventh effect is configured to be executed more easily than the twelfth effect when the timer display does not indicate the certain time during the jackpot game. A characteristic game stand.

(Appendix A135)
A game machine equipped with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game,
During execution of the jackpot game, an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is granted (hereinafter referred to as “fourth effect”) may be executed.
The game table according to claim 4, wherein the fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once.

(Appendix A136)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A135,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is a display means.

(Appendix A137)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A136,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A138)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A137,
The game table characterized in that the certain time is a time in which the remaining time of the timer indicates zero.

(Appendix A139)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A138,
The game stand characterized in that the certain effect is an effect that can be executed even in an interval during the execution of the jackpot game.

(Appendix A140)
A game machine equipped with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Production
A timer effect is performed at least during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the certain effect may be performed in a period in which the new symbol variation display is not performed after the symbol variation display is completed. To play.

(Appendix A141)
Display means;
A game machine comprising operating means,
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display related to the operation means,
The display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed,
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing when the operation display is displayed,
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the timer display changes with the passage of time until the operation display is displayed,
The game table, wherein the operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed.

(Appendix A142)
A gaming machine according to appendix A141,
As the timer display, a first timer display may be displayed,
When the first time elapses as a certain time from the start of the change of the display of at least a part of the first timer display, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed,
As the timer display, a second timer display may be displayed,
When the second time has elapsed as a certain time since the start of the change of at least a part of the second timer display, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed.
The game table, wherein the second time is longer than the first time.

(Appendix A143)
The game stand according to appendix A141 or A142,
Comprising a second operating means;
The operating means is a first operating means,
The operation display is a first operation display,
The display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed,
The second operation display is a display related to the second operation means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second operation display may be displayed when a certain time elapses until the operation display is displayed during the display of the timer display.

(Appendix A144)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A143,
A game table, wherein the display mode of the timer display may change when the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display.

(Appendix A145)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A144,
The display mode of the timer display may change when the display mode changes according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display by the timer display is displayed. To play.

(Appendix A146)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A145,
The display means is a means in which a notice display may be displayed,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notice display is a notice for notifying that the timer notice is displayed.

(Appendix A147)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to 146,
Whether or not the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed in the final display or finally the lost symbol pattern is determined and displayed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the time of starting the variation of the pattern.
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to a result of a jackpot lottery using a random number acquired when a game ball enters a start port provided in the game board,
The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the jackpot lottery (hereinafter referred to as “big hit probability”) is predetermined,
The game table characterized in that the jackpot probability does not change depending on a display mode of the operation display.

(Appendix B1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine comprising a production means capable of performing a plurality of productions,
The operation means is a means capable of being in a plurality of states,
One state of the plurality of states is a first state;
One state of the plurality of states is a second state;
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means in the first state,
The second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The second effect is not an effect prompting the operation of the operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means in the second state,
An effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern including that the second effect is started after the first effect is started,
The second pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the first effect is started,
A game in which a jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed when the certain effect by the second pattern is executed than when the certain effect by the first pattern is executed. Stand.

(Appendix B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be an operation response effect of the operation means in the third effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed,
The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the fourth effect is a suggestion effect regarding whether or not the symbol variation display being executed is correct.

(Appendix B3)
A gaming machine according to appendix B1 or B2,
In the first pattern, the second effect is started even when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect.
The gaming machine, wherein the third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

(Appendix B4)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect is started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

(Appendix B5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B4,
One of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a third pattern,
The third pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the fifth effect is started,
The fifth effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means in the second state,
The gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the fifth effect and the aspect of the third effect are different aspects.

(Appendix B6)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B5,
The third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”) is displayed,
The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display”) is displayed.
The game table characterized in that the fifth display is larger in the third display and the fifth display.

(Appendix B7)
A gaming table according to appendix B5 or B6,
The third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the thirteenth display”) is displayed.
The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fifteenth display”) is displayed,
At least one of the thirteenth display and the effect display surrounding the thirteenth display is displayed in a thirteenth color;
At least one of the fifteenth display and the effect display surrounding the fifteenth display is displayed in a fifteenth color;
The gaming table, wherein the thirteenth color and the fifteenth color are different colors.

(Appendix B8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B7,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern,
The fourth pattern is a pattern in which the production is not started at the timing when the first production is started in the second pattern,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the fourth pattern is a pattern in which the third effect is started at a timing when the third effect is started in the second pattern.

(Appendix B9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B7,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern,
The fourth pattern is a pattern including a pattern in which a sixth effect is started after the first effect is started,
The sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The first effect is an effect of selecting whether the third effect or the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed. A game stand.

(Appendix B10)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B9,
The game table according to claim 6, wherein the sixth effect is an effect of prompting an operation of the operation means in the first state.

(Appendix B11)
A gaming table according to appendix B9 or B10,
A gaming table characterized in that, when the operation means is not operated in the first effect, the sixth effect is started after the first effect is ended (Appendix B12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B11,
The effect means is a means capable of executing an effect (hereinafter referred to as “stock effect”) that suggests that an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means is stocked,
The stock effect is an effect capable of stocking an effect that prompts one or more operations of the operation means,
The stock effect is an effect that the stock decreases in relation to the execution of the effect that prompts the operation of the operation means,
The first pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock production,
The game machine characterized in that the second pattern is a pattern in which one stock decreases in the stock production.

(Appendix B13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B12,
The gaming machine characterized in that, when the operation means is not operated in the first production, the second production is started after the first production is finished.

(Appendix B14)
A plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
A game machine comprising a production means capable of performing a plurality of productions,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The second effect is not an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect urging the operation of the second operation means,
An effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern,
One pattern of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern including that the second effect is started after the first effect is started,
The second pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the first effect is started,
A game in which a jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed when the certain effect by the second pattern is executed than when the certain effect by the first pattern is executed. Stand.

(Appendix B14-1)
A plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
A game machine comprising a production means capable of performing a plurality of productions,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
One operating means of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One operating means of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect urging the operation of the second operation means,
The execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, rather than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. A game stand characterized in that, in the case of being played, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed.

(Appendix B15)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to a symbol change display being executed (hereinafter referred to as “change icon”),
The display means is means capable of displaying the variation icon in a first display area of display areas in the display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the two fluctuation icons (hereinafter referred to as “two fluctuation icons”),
One of the two variation icons is a first variation icon,
One of the two variation icons is a second variation icon,
The gaming table, wherein the second variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the first display area.

(Appendix B16)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B15,
A game machine characterized in that a movement animation of the second fluctuation icon (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation”) may be displayed during the display period of the first fluctuation icon.

(Appendix B17)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B16,
The game table, wherein the second variation icon may be displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation.

(Appendix B18)
The game stand according to appendix B16 or B17,
The size of the second variation icon displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation is equal to the size of the second variation icon in at least a part of the period of the movement animation. A game stand characterized by different.

(Appendix B19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B18,
The gaming table, wherein the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B19,
The gaming table, wherein the second variation icon may overlap with the notice display during at least a part of the second moving animation period.

(Appendix B21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B20,
The gaming table, wherein the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the second moving animation period.

(Appendix B22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B21,
Only one of the decorative symbol variation displays is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B22,
Only one mini decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B24)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B23,
A gaming table, wherein only one of the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B24,
A game table, wherein a moving animation of the first variation icon (hereinafter referred to as “first moving animation”) may be displayed.

(Appendix B26)
The game stand according to appendix B25, which cites any one of appendices B16 to B24,
The game machine, wherein the second movement animation may be started after the first movement animation is started.

(Appendix B27)
The game stand according to Supplementary Notes B25 or B26 that cites any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B24,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display indicating a first jackpot expectation degree,
The moving display of the first display is performed during at least a part of the period of the first moving animation,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second display indicating a second jackpot expectation degree,
The game table, wherein the moving display of the second display is performed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

(Appendix B28)
The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes B25 to B27, which cites any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B24,
The movement display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation,
The game table, wherein the hold icon is moved and displayed during at least a part of the second moving animation period.

(Appendix B29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B25 to B28,
The gaming table, wherein the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from the first display area after the first moving animation is started.

(Appendix B30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B29,
The gaming table, wherein the variation icon is not displayed in the first display area during at least a part of a display period of the two variation icons.

(Appendix B31)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B30,
1. The game table, wherein the number of the variable icons may increase from 1 to 2 and then decrease to 1 in a period of 1 decorative symbol variation display.

(Appendix B32)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B31,
In one decorative symbol variation display period, the number of the variation icons may increase from 1 to 2 and then decrease to 1, and may increase to 2 and then decrease to 1 after the decrease. To play.

(Appendix B33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B32,
The display means is means capable of displaying a hold icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the number of the held icons in the display period of the two variable icons is larger than the number of the held icons before the display of the two variable icons.

(Appendix B34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B33,
The display means is means capable of displaying a number hold display,
The gaming machine characterized in that the number of holdings indicated by the number holding display is smaller than the number of the holding icons in the display period of the two variable icons.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In the above description, the description has been focused on the example of the presentation during the symbol variation display before the big hit game. Hereinafter, an example of an effect after the big hit game is started and an example of an effect during the symbol variation display that starts after the big hit game is ended will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 described so far, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is provided, but a right-handed machine board may be provided. That is, the present invention can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a so-called right-handed game board, and therefore the right-handed game board will be described below.

  FIG. 175 is a schematic front view of a so-called right-handed gaming board viewed from the front.

  Here, the description will focus on the configuration different from the configuration described so far, and in order to avoid redundant description, the same configuration as the configuration described so far will be denoted by the same reference numeral in the drawings, and the description thereof. May be omitted. Moreover, even if the overlapping code | symbol is shown by another drawing, in the following description, the code | symbol shown in FIGS. 175-200 is given priority.

  A game board 200 of a right handed machine shown in FIG. 175 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230 can be divided. Specifically, a game that rolls in the first area (the left area in the game area) that is a route to enter the first special figure starting port 230 by arranging the game nail 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124. A game in which the ball is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and vice versa, the game rolls in the second region (the right region in the gaming region) in which the general drawing starting port 228 is provided. The ball is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 230.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 124 of the game board 200. A first movable accessory 2231 is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208. A first luminous body 2251 in the shape of a letter “Yoshi” is arranged on the left side, and a letter “Muna” is arranged on the right side. A second light emitting means 2252 shaped like is arranged. Further, a second movable accessory 2232 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208. The first movable combination 2231 corresponds to the thousand-thousand box combination 224H shown in FIG. 14, and the second movable combination 2232 corresponds to the family crest combination 224E shown in FIG.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 175, four general winning holes 2261 to 2264 are provided in the left area, and two general winning holes 2265 and 2266 are provided in the right area. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when winning in the general winning opening 226), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. For example, three balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and is provided on the right side of the game board 200. It has been. The usual start port 228 is a start port that is expected to enter by making a right stroke. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Further, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 and in the approximate center of the game area 124, and winning is expected by left-handed. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Directly below the first special figure starting port 230 is provided variable starting means called an electric tulip (electric Chu) DC. This electric Chu DC has a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid, and the back (inside) of the pair of blade members 2321 is a second special figure starting port 232. The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entry of a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the right-handed approach is required to enter the game ball into the general-purpose start opening 228, the second special figure start opening 232 is also expected to win a prize by making a right-hand hit.

  An attacker unit 2340 is provided in an area between the normal start port 228 and the electric Chu DC in the right area.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the front of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 177 is a diagram of the attacker unit 2340 as viewed from the back.

  The attacker unit 2340 includes a first variable winning opening 234a and a second variable winning opening 235a, and is attached to the lower right of the game area 124 in the game board 200.

  The attacker unit 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and includes an attachment base 2340a for attaching to the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b attached to the front surface of the attachment base 2340a with a predetermined interval. .

  In the mounting base 2340a, a rectangular opening is formed in the approximate center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The first door member 2341a has a lower end pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid SOL1 shown in FIG. 177 attached to the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. Yes. A solenoid SOL1 shown in FIG. 177 is included in the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable prize opening 234a is configured as described above.

  Further, a second variable prize opening 235a described later is formed between the attachment base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b. Hereinafter, the configuration of the second variable winning opening 235a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 178 (a) and (b).

  FIG. 178 is a view for explaining the internal structure of the second variable prize winning opening 235a. FIG. 178 shows that the V shutter 2352a is in a closed state, and FIG. These are figures which show that the V shutter 2352a is an open state. In FIGS. 178 (a) and (b), the decorative member 2340b is shown in a transparent manner in order to easily describe the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a. 179 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 176. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in a closed state, and FIG. It is a figure which shows that 2352a is an open state. In FIG. 179, the right side of the figure is the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (b), the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decoration member 2340b is formed with a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which a game ball can roll by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-like shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open part. The shutter member 2351a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. A solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 177 is also included in the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In other words, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the shutter member 2351a is in the forwardly advanced state (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is When it is blocked and the game ball is prevented from entering the first rolling region SP1 and is in a backwardly retracted state (open state) as shown in FIG. The moving area SP1 is released, and the game ball is allowed to enter the first rolling area SP1.

  At a position where the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2 are communicated with each other, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passing of the game ball is disposed, and the first rolling area SP1 is entered. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW 1 is included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects a winning to the second variable winning opening 235a and pays out a winning ball based on the winning. Process.

  The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2 shown in FIG. The second rolling region SP2 is configured such that a V passage 2340g and a general passage 2340h are juxtaposed in the left-right direction, and the received game ball is guided to one of the passages and discharged downward. . The V passage 2340g is provided with a V passage switch SW2, and the game ball guided by the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V passage switch SW2. The V pass switch SW2 is also included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340g. A plate-like V shutter 2352a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the upper portion of the V passage 2340g. The V shutter 23521a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL3 shown in FIG. A solenoid SOL3 shown in FIG. 177 is also included in the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 179 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being advanced forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, V The game ball that has been prevented from entering the passage 2340g and has entered the second rolling region SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 178 (b) and 179 (b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being retracted backward (opened) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, a game to the V passage 2340g is performed. The game ball that is allowed to enter the ball and enters the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340g. Further, as shown in FIG. 178, a discharge ball detection switch SW3 is disposed in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW. ing. The discharged ball detection switch SW3 is also included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the second variable of the game ball is determined by the number of passes of the game ball of the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passes of the V pass switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3. By monitoring in / out to the winning opening 235a, it is possible to monitor illegally passing a game ball to the V passage 2340g. Examples of the illegal act include an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a regulation (so-called decaball).

  As shown in FIG. 178, a partition wall 2340i is provided between the V passage 2340g and the general passage 2340h. The partition wall 2340i is provided with an inclined surface so that it can be easily guided to either the V passage 2340g or the general passage 2340h when the ball engagement occurs. Further, the inclined surface on the V passage 2340g side is steeper than the inclined surface on the general passage 2340h side. This is because the V shutter 2352a is provided above the V passage 2340g, and by making the inclined surface on the V passage 2340g side steep, it is difficult for the game ball to stay on the inclined surface, and the game ball is placed in the V passage 2340g. Can be guided immediately.

  Further, FIG. 176 to FIG. 179 show the general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. Unlike the other general winning ports 2261 to 2265, this general winning port 2266 is the only general winning port provided in the attacker unit 2340. Of the six general winning ports 2261 to 2266 shown in FIG. It is the general prize opening 2266 closest to the one variable prize opening 234a, the general prize opening 2266 closest to the second variable prize opening 235a, and the general prize opening 2266 closest to the V passage 2340g. Hereinafter, this general winning port 2266 is referred to as a unit general winning port 2266 in order to distinguish it from the other general winning ports 2261 to 2265. Even if the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a is defeated, the winning ball is paid out by winning the unit general winning opening 2266, and the winning ball here is a big hit game. It corresponds to a prize ball added as a bonus.

  Subsequently, the first variable winning port 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning port 235a (second) from the start to the end of one round of the big hit game of the pachinko machine equipped with the above-described attacker unit 2340 The operation timing of the attacker and the V shutter 2352a will be described.

  The jackpot game is started when the final display of the jackpot symbol is completed. In this jackpot game, a jackpot game start effect may be performed. When the jackpot game start effect ends, one round is started. In the big hit game, when the final round ends, a big hit game end effect may be performed, and when the big hit game end effect ends, the big hit game ends. Alternatively, when the special symbol variation display is started, it can be seen that the big hit game is ended.

  In the round in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) opens and closes, when the round starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on and the first door member 2341a changes from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, when the round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF and the first door member 2341a is changed from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a closing time after the round (first closing time: for example, 1.5 seconds) is set, and the round ends when the closing time after the round elapses. Since the first variable prize winning opening 234a is not provided with a V shutter, no operation relating to the V shutter is performed.

  Next, a round in which the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes, and the second variable prize opening 235a is opened for a long time (for example, a maximum of 25 seconds is opened: long is opened) ( For example, the operation timings of the second variable winning opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the 8th round in the 16R special big hit) will be described. When this round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on to change the shutter member 2351a from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on to change the V shutter 2352a from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set. When the first V opening time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned off and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. When the first V closing time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned on again, and the V shutter 2352a changes from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, when the round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set and a post-round closing time (first closing time) is set. When the first V opening time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned off and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state. Thereafter, when the closing time elapses after the round, the round ends. The above-described opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data stored in the ROM 406 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  Next, in the round in which the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened and closed, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened for a short time (for example, maximum 0.1 second opening: short opening). The operation timings of the second variable prize opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the round (for example, the eighth round in the 16R big hit described above) will be described. When this round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on to change the shutter member 2351a from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on to change the V shutter 2352a from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time is set. When the first V opening time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned off and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state, but the opening time of the second variable prize opening 235a is also 0.1 seconds. The solenoid SOL2 is also turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a closing time after the round (first closing time) is set, and the round ends when the closing time after the round elapses. Also in this case, the opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data. However, since the round ends before the V shutter 2352a is opened again, the chance for the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is only a very short period of the first V opening time immediately after the start of the round. In this way, even if the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235a in the round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, the gaming ball to the V passage 2340g as described above. Is difficult to pass, and the transition to an unintended control state is suppressed. On the other hand, even when the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, the V shutter 2352a is opened, so that an opportunity for the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g is secured. In addition, the same opening pattern data is used as data for determining the opening / closing pattern of the V shutter 2352a regardless of whether the second variable winning opening 235a is a round that opens long or short round. For example, the control burden such as switching the data to be used is reduced depending on whether or not it is a special big hit.

  In addition, although the example applied to the pachinko machine provided with two variable winning openings has been described, for example, in a pachinko machine provided with only one variable winning opening having a V passage like the second variable winning opening 235a. There may be.

  Hereinafter, in FIG. 180 to FIG. 200, examples of effects including effects during the big hit game will be described. The liquid crystal display device shown in each figure is the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Alternatively, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 may be used. That is, even if the configuration of the game board 200 is different, the present invention can be applied as long as it has the configuration of a current general pachinko machine such as a liquid crystal display device, an attacker, a general winning opening, and an electric chew. . Therefore, in FIGS. 180 to 200, description will be made using an example in which the configuration of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 175 is combined with the configuration around the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. That is, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. In place of the first movable accessory 2231 shown in FIG. 175, a thousand-thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 is provided. In place of the second movable accessory 2232 shown in FIG. 175, a family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. It has been. In FIGS. 180 to 200, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, but the effects shown in FIGS. 180 to 200 are shown in the second decorative symbol display device. In the pachinko machine 100 that is not provided with the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be an effect example executed by the 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be a production example. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Further, the branch number in each of FIGS. 180 to 200 is “(4)” indicating the period from the time when the reach effect is derived to the fixed stop shown in FIG. “(5)” indicating the period from the start to the end of the jackpot game, or “(1)” indicating the period from the start of the symbol variation display that starts after the end of the jackpot game until the reach state is formed. Or

  FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect after hitting a probable big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -2, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7") that is a big hit with 16R probability change is confirmed and displayed. Yes. Note that the combination of decorative symbols here is different from the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. In addition, the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display that is confirmed and displayed in FIG.

  180 (4) -2, the second holding number display (the holding number in FIG. 1 is 2 and the holding number in FIG. 0) is displayed. Further, a second decorative design may be displayed at the upper left corner. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (4) -2, since the symbol is fixedly displayed, the variation icon h0 is not displayed on the center base hs0. On the other hand, on the second UI part 281 formed on the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In addition, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  When the special symbol jackpot symbol finalization display (decorative symbol jackpot combination finalization display) is completed, the jackpot game is started. In FIG. 180 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -1, the navigation character YM of the first UI unit 280 disappears, the center base hs0 also disappears, and the two reserved icons of the special map 1 of the second UI unit 281 disappear. h11 and h12 have also disappeared, and the character MCK of Machiko-sensei (wedding Machiko-sensei) wearing a wedding dress is displayed with four copandas, and the jackpot is congratulated. In addition, since the big hit this time is a big hit with probability change that shifts to a probable change state (special figure high probability state) after the big hit game ends, compared to the big hit without probability change that does not shift to the positive change state after the big hit game ends, Since it is an advantageous big hit, the word “super big hit” is also displayed, and it is informed that there is a probability change. Also, in the upper left corner of the display screen, one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 7”) that has been confirmed and displayed in combination with the big hit of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display is continuously displayed without disappearing. Further, when the big hit game start effect is started, a character display “right-handed” for prompting the player to make a right-hand strike is first displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen, that is, below the second hold number display. This character display of “right-handed” is continuously displayed during the big hit game, but may disappear once.

  Further, in FIG. 180 (5) -1 and subsequent figures, a first variable winning opening 234a and a unit general winning opening 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Yes.

  In the description of the example after FIG. 180, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is omitted. Or the control state changes between the electric support state and the non-electric support state), the gaming state changes (the gaming state changes between the big hit gaming state and the non-big hit gaming state), mode change, etc. When done, the background screen is changed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 180 (5) -2, right-handed notification 1 is started, and a display 2340h simulating the attacker unit 2340 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display 2341ah simulating the first door member 2341a in the display 2340h simulating the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2 remains fully closed, simulating the first variable winning opening 234. A game ball heading toward the display 234ah is displayed together with an arrow, and a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a is prompted. In addition, the display 2340 h simulating the attacker unit 2340 also displays a display 2266 h simulating the unit general winning opening 2266. In the stage of FIG. 180 (5) -2, the first round has not yet started.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -3, right-handed notification 2 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first door member 2341ah in the display 2340h simulating the attacker unit 2340 is changed to a fully opened state, and the character MCK is displayed. A character display “Aim at the attacker by right-handed” is displayed below, and the player is also prompted to win the first variable winning opening 234a. Even in the stage of FIG. 180 (5) -3, the first round has not yet started.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -4, the first round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the actual first variable winning opening 234a finishes the change from the fully closed state to the fully opened state so far and is fully opened. It is in a state. Here, it can be considered that the round is started at the timing when the accessory operation signal is output from the main control unit 300. In this case, when the round is started, the attacker (here, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a) starts to open. Alternatively, the round may be considered to start when the attacker begins to open. In this case, on the contrary, when the attacker starts to open, the round is started.

  When the first round is started, the right-hand notification 2 disappears. However, the character display “right-handed” continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, when the first round is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a round number display (here, “1R”) and a cumulative prize ball number display (here, 000000Get). Is done. The cumulative number of winning balls here may be a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the current jackpot game, or may be a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the jackpot game during the jackpot game. In addition, it may be a cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the whole period including the period between the jackpot game and the jackpot game (symbol variation display period) during the jackpot game (the same is true in the following).

  In FIG. 180 (5) -5, there is a single winning in the first variable winning opening 234a. In the following FIG. 180 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is added to the value of the number of winning balls (15 balls in this case) for one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000015Get.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -7, there is a single winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 180 (5) -8, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls (three balls in this case) for one winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000018Get.

  In one round, the first door member 2341a maintains a fully opened state for a certain opening period (for example, 29 seconds), but during the opening period, there is a certain amount at the first variable winning opening 234a. If there is a prize (for example, 10 balls), the first door member 2341a will be closed even before the opening period elapses. Hereinafter, a certain number is referred to as an upper limit number. In this example, the number of winnings reaches the upper limit before the opening period elapses, and in FIG. 180 (5) -9, the first round ends, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning port 234a The change from the fully open state to the fully closed state is completed, and the fully closed state is obtained. The period shown in FIG. 180 (5) -9 is an interval period between rounds. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -9, a display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 000156Get is displayed, and 10 balls are displayed in the first variable winning opening 234a during one round. There is a prize, 150 prize balls are paid out, 2 prizes are given to the unit general prize opening 2266, and 6 prize balls are paid out.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has been changed from the fully closed state to the fully open state and is in the fully open state. . In FIG. 180 (5) -11, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 each have a single win. That is, simultaneous winning. In addition, even if it is a simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where there is a winning in one winning mouth and there is a winning in the other winning mouth before being added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls . In FIG. 180 (5) -12, priority is given to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, which has a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 180 (5) -12 is 00171Get. In the following FIG. 180 (5) -13, the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 180 (5) -13 is 000174Get. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 with a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both the number of winning balls may be displayed at once, and the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 180 (5) -12 may be 000174Get.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -14, there is a tenth winning prize in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 180 (5) -15, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed from 00294Get to 000309Get. At (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -17, the addition display of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 00324Get. Note that the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a shown in FIG. 180 (5) -17 has been changed from the fully open state to the fully closed state, and is in the fully closed state. In FIG. 180 (5) -18, sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. Note that the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, but may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -19, the third round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has been changed from the fully closed state to the fully opened state and is in the fully opened state. . Then round digestion proceeds. In this round of digestion, each round will win up to the maximum number, but no over-winning will occur.

  In FIG. 180 (5) -20, the 16th round which is the final round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a has finished changing from the fully closed state to the fully open state, and is in the fully open state. It has become. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -20, a display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 002331 Get is displayed. There is a winning of the ball, and 66 balls are paid out as the winning ball of the unit general winning port 2266. In FIG. 180 (5) -21, the last 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -21 displays a cumulative number of winning balls of 002490Get. The player can win up to the upper limit even in 16 rounds. There is a ball winning, and 159 balls are paid out as 16 rounds.

  When the final round is over, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 180 (5) -23, where the ending effect continues, a winning sound (congratulatory sound) corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is the sound B, but it may be the same sound A as the over-winning sound. Note that the sound B may have a lower pitch than the sound A, or may be higher, but the sound A has more prize balls than the sound B, and the player In some cases, the sound A may be higher than the sound B. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (5) -23, an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is performed on the display of the cumulative prize ball number, and the cumulative prize ball number is displayed. The display is 002493Get.

  It should be noted that a winning sound (congratulatory sound) is output from the speaker 120 every time there is a winning at the first variable winning opening 234a and / or every time there is a winning at the unit general winning opening 2266. Good. Alternatively, a winning sound (a congratulatory sound) may be output from the speaker 120 every time there is a winning in which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed.

  In FIG. 180 (4)-1, it is immediately before the big hit game end effect is finished and the special symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-" Decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 ") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the upper left. The display of the number of accumulated prize balls here is not 002493Get but 002493 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls is continuously displayed even during the probability changing state, but during the probability changing state, the addition display corresponding to the winning at the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. Further, addition display according to winning in other general winning ports 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next jackpot game, the value of the cumulative prize ball number starts from 002493. In the example shown in FIG. 180, the period in which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an advantageous jackpot (for example, jackpot with probability variation). In addition, even during the certainty change state, an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed, or an additional display corresponding to the winning in the other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed. Good. In this case, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a period including a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation), and is in the probability variation state. The period will be included. Alternatively, when the jackpot game executed by winning an advantageous jackpot is consecutive, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is between the jackpot game period and the jackpot game period. It may be a period including a period.

  In addition, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls may be displayed from the period of the jackpot start effect, or during the period of addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, the number of winning balls for the general winning opening is the period of the jackpot start effect. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 180). Furthermore, the period for displaying the cumulative number of winning balls includes the period of the interval between rounds and the period of the jackpot end effect, but only one of these periods may be excluded or both of them may be excluded. It may be excluded (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 180). In addition, the period for adding and displaying the cumulative number of winning balls also includes the period of the round interval and the period of the jackpot end effect, but only one of these periods may be excluded or both May be excluded (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 180).

  FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect after hitting a jackpot without probability change. In the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 181, the description overlapping the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied to the omitted description. .

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (4) -2, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) that is a big hit of 16R is displayed. This combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” may be fixedly displayed in the case of a big hit with probability change or may be fixedly displayed in the case of a big hit without probability change. It is different from the combination of decorative symbols shown in 5 (c). In the example shown in FIG. 181, a big hit with no 16R probability change is made. It is also possible to use a combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”) that is fixedly displayed only in the case of a big hit without certain change. In addition, the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display that is finalized and displayed in FIG. 181 (4) -2 is also a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The big hit this time is a big hit without probability change that does not shift to the probability change state (special figure high probability state) after the big hit game, but remains in the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state), and is displayed when the big hit with probability change Instead of the character display “super big hit”, the character display “simply big hit” is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen, one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 2”) that has been confirmed and displayed with the combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -1 and the subsequent figures, the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Yes.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 181 (5) -2, right-handed notification 1 is started, and a display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first variable winning opening 234a. The first door member 2341ah remains in a fully closed state, and a game ball heading toward the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed with an arrow.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -3, right-handed notification 2 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first door member 2341ah of the first variable winning opening in the display 2340h simulating the attacker unit 2340 is displayed. The character display changes to the fully open state, and a character display “Aim at the attacker by right-handed” is displayed below the character MCK.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -4, the first round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the actual first variable prize winning opening 234a has been shifted to the fully opened state. When the first round is started, the right-hand notification 2 disappears, and the number of rounds (here, “1R”) and the number of accumulated prize balls (here, 000000Get) are displayed at the upper center. The cumulative number of winning balls here may be a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the current jackpot game, or a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the jackpot game during the jackpot game. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the entire period including the period between the jackpot game and the jackpot game (symbol change display period) during the jackpot game may be used.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -5, there is one winning prize in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 181 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is added to the value of the number of winning balls (15 balls in this case) for one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000015Get.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -7, there is one winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, but as shown in the following FIG. 181 (5) -8, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls remains 000015Get. In other words, the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added during a big hit (a big hit without probability change here) that is relatively unfavorable for the game. Note that the relative advantage or disadvantage for the player may be whether or not the electric support is provided in addition to whether or not the probability change is provided. It may be the number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds are advantageous and 2 rounds are unfavorable). There may be. The first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 can receive only a relatively small number of winning balls and a winning opening that can obtain a relatively large number of winning balls for a single winning. The number of winning balls for winning in the other winning ports 2261 to 2265 is not added. Or, on the other hand, among the six general winning ports 2261 to 2266, only the unit general winning port 2266 may be a general winning port to which the number of winning balls is not added.

  Eventually, the number of winnings reaches the upper limit before the opening period elapses, and in FIG. 181 (5) -9, the first round ends and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. The transition to the state has been completed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (5) -9, a display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 00150Get is displayed, and 10 balls are displayed in the first variable winning opening 234a during one round. There is a prize, and 150 prize balls are paid out.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has been shifted to the fully opened state. In FIG. 181 (5) -11, each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 has one winning ball, but only the number of winning balls for winning in the first variable winning opening 234a is added. The displayed number of accumulated prize balls shown in FIG. 181 (5) -12 is 000165Get. That is, the addition display of the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed here either.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -14, there is a tenth prize in the first variable prize opening 234a, and in FIG. At (5) -16, a game ball accidentally enters the first variable winning opening 234a and 11 balls in the middle of the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a being fully closed. An eye-winning (over-winning) has occurred. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (5) -17, the number of over-winning prize balls is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00315Get. Subsequently, in FIG. 181 (5) -18, a sound A which is an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. However, the over winning sound may not be output during the big hit game that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Alternatively, during the big hit game, which is a relatively unfavorable game for the player, the display of the number of over-winning prize balls is not performed, the over winning sound is not output, and the over winning prize itself is not notified. It may be. In addition, although the addition display of the number of winning balls for the over winning is not performed, the over winning sound may be output or the over winning is notified by display (for example, a character display of “Over” is displayed). In particular, you may stop.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -19, the third round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a has been shifted to the fully open state. Then round digestion proceeds. In this round of digestion, each round wins up to the maximum number.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -20, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a has been shifted to the fully open state. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (5) -20, a display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 002295Get is displayed. Sphere) has occurred. In FIG. 181 (5) -21, the last 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (5) -21, a cumulative prize ball number of 002445Get is displayed, and the maximum number of prizes has been won even in 16 rounds.

  In FIG. 181 (5) -22, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure displays a cumulative winning ball number of 002445Get and ends the big hit game. A character display indicating the end of notification is displayed. During this ending performance, the game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning port 2266, but the addition of the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general winning port 2266 is not performed here either, and FIG. 181 (5) -23. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 181 (4)-1, it is immediately before the jackpot game end effect ends and the special symbol variation display starts. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") is displayed. The number display is off. In addition, the character display “right-handed” displayed below the second hold number display in the upper right corner of the display screen is also disappeared. In this example, after the big hit game is over, the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state) is not shifted to the non-probable state (special figure low probability state). "Please return to" is displayed, and a character display prompting the player to make a left strike is displayed, and the player aims at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181 described above, the period in which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot without probability change).

  It should be noted that even after the big hit game is over, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls may be continued, or when the big hit game is over, an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed. In addition to the unit general winning opening 2266, addition display according to winning in the other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may also be performed.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a timer notice effect is performed during a jackpot game and promoted to a jackpot with certainty. In the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 182, the description overlapping with the description of the effect example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 may be omitted, but for the omitted description, the effect example shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 is omitted. The description is applicable.

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (4) -2, the combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols that are 16R big hits, is fixedly displayed. Therefore, the player does not know whether it is with or without probability change only by looking at this combination of decorative symbols. In the case of a big hit without certain change, the promotion effect is not performed as in the example described with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot with probability change, a promotion effect is performed, and the player knows that it was a jackpot with probability change by watching this promotion effect. Even if it is a big hit without a certain change, the promotion effect is started, and the promotion effect may fail. In addition, the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display that is finalized and displayed in FIG. 181 (4) -2 is also a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The same figure (4) -2 in the upper left of FIG. 182 to the same figure (5) -13 in the center of the figure are the same as FIG. 181, and round digestion proceeds from FIG. ) -14, the eighth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a has been shifted to the fully open state. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (5) -14 displays a cumulative number of winning balls of 0001275Get. The player wins up to the upper limit in each round from 1 round to 7 rounds. Between the round and the start of the eighth round, 15 over wins (225 balls) were generated. After the eighth round is started, a timer notice effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the remaining time is three seconds on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (5) -15. A timer notice display j indicating that is displayed.

  In FIG. 182 (5) -16, the countdown of the timer notice display j is started, and in FIG. 182 (5) -17, the remaining time of the timer notice display j is 0 second. Between FIG. 182 (5) -16 and FIG. (5) -17, there are three winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 001335Get. In the timer notice effect, a certain effect is started when the timer notice display j reaches 0 seconds in the countdown. In FIG. 182 (5) -18, the promotion effect is started as a certain effect. That is, first, the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 14 is raised from the initial position to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A part of the display of the cumulative prize ball number displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the family crest character 224E, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number is overlapped by the player. It is more difficult to see after being done than before. It should be noted that the entire display of the accumulated prize balls may be overlapped by the family crest character 224E. Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (5) -19, a character “promotion” is displayed on the elevated family crest member 224E to notify that it was a big hit with certainty.

  Even if the timer notice display j becomes 0 seconds in the countdown, the crest character 224E may not rise. In this case, the promotion fails, and the player has confirmed that the big hit without any probability change. To know. In addition, even if the family crest character 224E rises, there may be a case where a character of “sorry” is displayed instead of the character of “promotion”. You will know that it was a big hit. Alternatively, when the timer notice display j is started, the character “promotion” may be displayed after the family crest character 224E rises, or the crest character 224E may not rise. When the object 224E rises, the word “promotion” may be displayed.

  In FIG. 182 (5) -20, the family crest character 224E is lowered to the initial position, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is easy to visually recognize. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest display k is displayed under one of the decorative symbols ("decoration 2") that has been confirmed and displayed with the combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols. The display c of the family crest is a display indicating that the promotion has been promoted, that is, a jackpot with probability change, and continues to be displayed until the jackpot game ends. Further, during the promotion effect in which the family crest character 224E has been raised, the first variable winning opening 234a has a maximum number of winnings. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (5) -20, The display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 001425 Get.

  In the above description, from the start of rising of the family crest character 224E to the character display of “promotion” is the promotion effect, but from the start of rising of the crest character 224E until the crest character 224E returns to the initial position, Alternatively, from the start of the timer notice effect to the character display of “promotion” may be used as the promotion effect, or from the start of the timer notice effect to the time when the family crest actor 224E returns to the initial position.

  In FIG. 182 (5) -21, the ninth round is started. When the promotion effect is performed and the promotion is successful, the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general prize opening 2266 is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. That is, until the promotion is successful, as shown in FIG. 182 (5) -7, even if there is a winning at the unit general winning opening 2266, the number of winning balls for the winning is displayed on the display of the cumulative winning ball number. It was not added. In terms of control (internal), it is determined whether or not there is a probability change at the stage where the jackpot type is determined before the start of symbol variation (the stage of the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. 7). The promotion is only for production.

  In FIG. 182 (5) -22, during the 9th round, there is a single winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in the following FIG. (5) -23, it is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The number of prize balls for the winning (three balls in this case) is added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 001428 Get. Further, in FIG. 182 (5)-24, a winning sound (congratulatory sound) is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with winning in the unit general winning opening 2266. The output sound here is the sound B, but it may be the same sound A as the over-winning sound.

  In FIG. 182 (5) -25, the last 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (5) -25, a display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 002466Get is displayed.

  In FIG. 182 (5) -26, the big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266.

  FIG. 183 shows the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 182, and further shows the first half of the effect example in the case where the V prize is successful during the big hit game.

  In FIG. 183 (5) -27 continued from FIG. 182 (5) -26, the ending effect is still continued, and a winning sound (congratulatory sound) corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. ing. Here, the output sound may be the same sound B as the output sound output by the timing of FIG. 182 (5) -24, or may be a different output sound (sound B ′). That is, the same type of sound may be used during the round and during the ending effect, or different types of sounds may be used as the output sound corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening. This is not limited to the effect example shown in FIG. 182, but is the same in the effect examples shown in other drawings. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (5) -27, an addition display corresponding to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is performed on the display of the cumulative prize ball number, and the cumulative prize ball number is displayed. The display is 002469 Get. Note that the addition display corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening may not be performed during the ending effect, and conversely, it may be performed only during the ending effect, not during the round. This is not limited to the effect example shown in FIG. 182, but is the same in the effect examples shown in other drawings.

  In FIG. 183 (4)-1, it is immediately before the jackpot game end effect ends and the special symbol variation display starts. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-" (Decoration 2 "-" decoration 2 ") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the upper left. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls here is not 002469 Get, but 002469 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls is continuously displayed even during the probability changing state, but during the probability changing state, the addition display corresponding to the winning at the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. Further, addition display according to winning in other general winning ports 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next jackpot game, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls starts from 002469.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182 to FIG. 183, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an advantageous jackpot (for example, jackpot with probability variation). However, the player does not know that there is a probability change until the promotion is successful, and after the promotion is successful, an addition display corresponding to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is performed. In other words, during the period from the start of the jackpot game until the promotion to probability change is notified, only the addition display corresponding to the winning at the first variable prize opening 234a is performed, and after the jackpot game ends During this period, both the addition display according to the winning at the first variable winning opening 234a and the addition display according to the winning at the unit general winning opening 2266 are performed. In terms of the number of rounds, the 8th and 9th rounds will not be displayed until the 8th round in which the promotion effect has been performed is completed, according to the winning combination at the first variable prize opening 234a. An addition display corresponding to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a may be performed from the interval or from the start of the ninth round. In addition, after the character display of “promotion” is displayed, an addition display corresponding to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a may be performed. In this case, the unit general winning opening is started from the middle of the 8th round. An addition display corresponding to the winning to 2266 is performed. Furthermore, from the start or middle of the eighth round, or from the first round, an addition display corresponding to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed as a advance notice of successful promotion.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the V prize is successful during the big hit game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (4) -2, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”) that is a big hit of 16R is displayed in a definite manner. The combination of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is a round (here, 8 rounds), and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) shown in FIG. When the V-shutter 2352a shown in FIG. 178 opens and closes and the game ball passes through the V passage 2340g, it is a combination of a big hit decoration symbol that shifts to a promiscuous state after a big hit game, as shown in FIG. 5 (c). It is different from the combination of decorative designs. A game ball passing through the V passage 2340 g is referred to as a “V prize”. It should be noted that the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display that is confirmed and displayed in FIG. 183 (4) -2 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  In FIG. 183 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this stage, since the game ball does not pass through the V passage 2340g, the character display “simply big hit” is displayed instead of the character display “super big hit” displayed in the case of the big hit with probability variation. Also, in the upper left corner of the display screen, one of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4”) that has been confirmed and displayed with the combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  Even after FIG. 183 (5) -1, the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Yes.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 183 (5) -2, right-handed notification 1 is started. In this right-handed notification 1, a display 234ah simulating the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed, and the first door member 2341ah remains fully closed, and the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed. The game ball heading is displayed with an arrow. Since it is not a big hit with probability variation yet, the first variable prize which becomes a part of the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 displayed in the right-handed notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2 which is a big hit with probability variation. Only the display 234ah imitating the mouth 234a is displayed, and the display size is relatively small and sober. Further, the unit general winning opening 2266 is not displayed. This is because at this stage, the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general prize opening 2266 is not added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, you may display the display 2340h imitating the attacker unit 2340 displayed by the right-handed alert | report 1 shown to FIG. 180 (5) -2. In this case, the display 2340h simulating the attacker unit 2340 functions as an indication (preliminary notice) that it is a big hit (a kind of advantageous big win) that can be expected to acquire a certainty change by winning the V prize.

  In FIG. 183 (5) -3, right-handed notification 2 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first variable winning opening 1st in the display 234ah imitating the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed. The door member 2341ah is changed to a fully opened state, and a character display “Aim at the attacker by right-handed” is displayed below the character MCK.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 183 (5) -4 to (5) -17 is the same as that of FIG. 182 (5) -4 except for the difference in the display of the decorative symbol on the upper left of the display screen. The same as the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 5 to 17 and detailed description thereof is omitted, but the timer notice effect is started in FIG. Further, until FIG. 183 (5) -13, the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, during the eight rounds shown in FIGS. 183 (5) -14 to 184 (5) -22, the second decorative unit 2340 provided on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L A variable winning opening 235a and a unit general winning opening 2266 are shown. In the second variable prize winning opening 235a, the shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be movable forward and backward in the depth direction, but here, it is schematically shown as a type in which the shutter member 2351a rotates. When the 8th round is started, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a remains fully closed, but as shown in FIG. 183 (5) -14, the second variable winning opening The shutter member 2351a of 235a shifts from the fully closed state to the fully open state. On the other hand, the V shutter 2352a that opens and closes the entrance of the V passage 2340g remains fully closed. In FIGS. 183 (5) -15 to (5) -17, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is increasing. This is because the second variable winning opening 235a is displayed. This is the result of adding the number of winning balls for winning.

  FIG. 184 shows the second half of the performance example when the V winning is successful during the jackpot game, and further shows an example in which the winning is notified every time there is a win at the general winning opening during the jackpot game. .

  FIG. 184 (5) -18 following FIG. 183 (5) -17 is the same as FIG. 182 (5) -18 except for the difference in the display of the decorative symbol on the upper left side of the display screen. In response to the countdown reaching 0 seconds, an effect is started. In FIG. 184 (5) -18, V winning effect is started as a certain effect. First, in FIG. 184 (5) -18, similarly to the promotion effect shown in FIG. 182 (5) -18, the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 14 rises from the initial position to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A part of the display of the cumulative prize ball number is overlapped by the family crest character 224E. Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (5)-19, a letter “Aim for the right V” is displayed on the raised family crest member 224 E to prompt a V prize. Subsequently, in FIG. 184 (5) -20, the V shutter 2352a provided at the back of the second variable winning opening 235a in the fully opened state is also changed from the fully closed state to the fully opened state, and the V passage 2340g indicated by "V" Open and the game ball wins in the V passage 2340g. By winning a game ball in the V passage 2340g (V winning), it is determined that the game will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed. If there is no V winning, the game remains in an uncertain change state even after the jackpot game is over. Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (5) -21, the letter “V” is displayed next to the raised family crest character 224E, and it is notified that there has been a V prize, that is, the probability change acquisition.

  Here, when the V prize production is started, the V prize is easy, and if a game ball is launched aiming at the attacker unit 2340, the V prize can be almost obtained, but the V prize production starts. However, there may be cases where V winning is difficult or impossible. For example, when the V shutter 2352a is opened only for a moment or not at all, or when the shutter member 2351a of the second variable prize opening 235a is opened only for a moment, V winning is difficult or impossible. Further, even if the timer notice display j becomes 0 seconds in the countdown, the crest character 224E may not rise, and in this case, the V winning effect is not started and the V shutter 2352a is not opened. The probability change acquisition failure occurs, and the player knows that there is no probability change. In addition, even if the family crest character 224E rises, the letter “sorry” may be displayed instead of the letter “aiming for the right V”. The player knows that there is no certain change. Alternatively, when the timer notice display j is started, after the crest character 224E rises, the letter “Aim at the right V” may be displayed, or the crest character 224E may not rise. When the family crest member 224E rises, the letter “Aim at the right V” may be displayed.

  In FIG. 184 (5) -22, the family crest member 224E is lowered to the initial position, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is easy to visually recognize. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest display k is displayed under one of the decorative symbols ("decoration 4") that has been confirmed and displayed with the combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols. This family crest display k is a display indicating that the V winning effect has been performed, and continues to be displayed until the end of the big hit game. In addition, in FIG. 184 (5) -22, the character “V” displayed in FIG. 5 (21) -21 overlaps the family crest display k. Furthermore, during the V prize production where the family crest character 224E has risen, the second variable prize opening 235a has a maximum number of prizes, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 001425 Get.

  In the above description, the V winning effect is from the start of ascent of the family crest character 224E to the display of the letter “V”. It is good also as an effect, It is good also as a V prize effect from the timer notice effect start to the character display of "V", It is good also as a promotion effect until the family crest actor 224E returns to an initial position from the timer notice effect start.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to (4) -1 is the same as that of FIG. 182 (5) -21 except for the difference in display of the decorative symbol on the upper left of the display screen. From FIG. 183 (4) -1 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the description is omitted. Up to FIG. 184 (5) -22, the second variable winning opening 235a and the unit general winning opening 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, during the big hit game after the ninth round shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to 184 (5) -29, the attacker unit 2340 is provided on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A first variable winning opening 234a and a unit general winning opening 2266 are shown. In FIGS. 184 (5) -23 through (5) -29, the display of the number of accumulated prize balls on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is increasing. This is because the first prize winning opening 234a is displayed. This is the result of adding the number of winning balls for winning and the number of winning balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, during the period from the start of the big hit game to the 8th round, the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general prize opening 2266 is not added, but after the round (in this case, 8 rounds) where the probability change was obtained From the interval between the 8th and 9th rounds, or from the start of the 9th round to the end of the jackpot game, the number of winning balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is also added and accumulated prize balls A number display appears. In addition, after winning V, the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general prize opening 2266 may be added and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed. The number of winning balls for winning the general winning opening 2266 is also added. Furthermore, an addition display corresponding to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed as a notice of starting the V winning effect from the start, midway of the eighth round, or from the first round.

  Next, an example in which a prize is notified every time there is a prize at a general prize opening during a big hit game will be described. This example is often similar to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, and redundant description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied.

  FIG. 184 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (5) -3 are the same as FIG. 180 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (3) -3, and detailed explanation is omitted, but the big hit game start effect is started. Has been.

  In FIG. 184 (5) -4, the first round is started, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened, and the right-handed notification 2 display disappears. However, the character display “right-handed” continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, when the first round is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a round number display (here, “1R”) and a cumulative prize ball number display (here, 000000Get). Is done. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184 (5) -4, the remaining number of winnings that can be won in the first variable winning opening 234a is indicated by the display number of the face length icon BI. . That is, it is indicated by 10 face-length face icons BI that there are 10 balls until the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a reaches the upper limit number. You wo n’t win. When the round is disclosed, no Banchou face icon BI is displayed, and the Banchou face icon BI increases one by one every time there is a winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. There may be.

  In FIG. 184 (5) -5, there is one winning prize in the first variable winning opening 234a. In the following FIG. 184 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is added with the value of the number of winning balls (15 balls in this case) for one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000015Get, and the face-length face icon The BI is reduced by one, and nine face-length face icons BI are displayed.

  In FIG. 184 (5) -7, there is one winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 184 (5) -8, a background color of “+3” is displayed on the character MCK of Machiko-sensei. Is displayed on the general winning opening prize notification INH and the accumulated number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed as one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266. The number of winning balls (three balls in this case) for the winning is added, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000018Get. The general winning opening prize notification display INH may be displayed simultaneously with the addition display of the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, may be displayed before the addition display, or may be displayed after the addition display. Good. Also, the general winning opening prize notification display INH may disappear for a moment, may disappear when added, and may continue to be displayed until the next winning is made to the unit general winning opening 2266. The display may continue until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 is awarded.

  FIG. 185 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184, and further shows an example in which the winning is notified whenever there is a winning to the attacker during the big hit game.

  In the first round, there was a maximum number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a, all of the face-length icons BI disappeared, and there were a total of 2 wins in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 185 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first round and the second round, a display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 000156Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 185 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. Also, ten face length face icons BI are displayed. In FIG. 185 (5) -11, each of the first variable prize opening 234a and the unit general prize opening 2266 has a prize of one ball. That is, simultaneous winning. In addition, even if it is a simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where there is a winning in one winning mouth and there is a winning in the other winning mouth before being added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls . In FIG. 185 (5) -12, priority is given to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a having a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 is 000171 Get, and the number-long face icon BI is reduced by one and nine number-length face icons BI are displayed. Also, in the lower left corner of Machiko-sensei's character MCK shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12, there is also displayed a general winning entry prize notification display INH in which the character “+3” is displayed on a certain background color. Later, it is suggested that the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is also added. Furthermore, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B is for notifying that the unit general prize opening 2266 has been won, but since the addition display of the number of prize balls in the unit general prize opening 2266 is delayed, the sound output is performed first. It has been broken. However, the sound B is output at the same timing as the display of the general winning opening prize notification INH or at a timing that is not so shifted. In the following FIG. 185 (5) -13, the number of prize balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 185 (5) -13 is 000174Get. The display INH of the general winning opening prize notification disappears in response to the addition display. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 with a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both the number of winning balls may be displayed at once, and the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 may be 000174Get.

  In FIG. 185 (5) -14, in the state where only one face-length face icon BI is displayed, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a. It becomes a prize. In FIG. 185 (5) -15, the cumulative prize ball display is changed from 00294Get to 000309Get, and in FIG. 185 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. It is in the middle of changing from to fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, the addition of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00324Get, and the first decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH is displayed in which characters of “celebration + 15” are displayed on a certain background color together with the princess character. In FIG. 185 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. Note that the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, but may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

  In FIG. 185 (5) -19, the third round is started and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. Also, ten face length face icons BI are displayed. Then round digestion proceeds. In this round of digestion, each round will win up to the maximum number, but no over-winning will occur.

  In FIG. 185 (5) -20, the 16th round which is the final round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -20, a cumulative prize ball number of 002331 Get is displayed. There is a winning of the ball, and 66 balls are paid out as the winning ball of the unit general winning port 2266. Also, ten face length face icons BI are displayed. In FIG. 185 (5) -21, the last 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully closed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -21, the cumulative prize ball number of 002490Get is displayed. Up to the upper limit is awarded even in 16 rounds, and the unit general prize opening 2266 has 3 There is a ball winning, and 159 balls are paid out as 16 rounds.

  When the final round is over, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 185 (5) -23, in which the ending effect continues, the winning sound (congratulatory sound) corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is the sound B, but it may be the same sound A as the over-winning sound. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -23, the general winning opening prize notification in which the character “+3” is displayed on a certain background color on the character display of the next probability change is displayed. The display INH is displayed, and an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is performed on the display of the cumulative prize ball number, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number is 002493 Get.

  Since FIG. 185 (4) -1 is the same as FIG. 180 (4) -1, description thereof is omitted.

  In the example shown from FIG. 184 to FIG. 185, notification is given every time there is a prize at the unit general prize opening 2266. It should be noted that not only the unit general prize opening 2266 but also other general prize openings 2261 to 2265 have been awarded, an addition display is displayed on the display of the cumulative number of winning balls and a general prize opening prize notification display INH is displayed. May be. Alternatively, only the general winning opening prize notification display INH may be displayed without performing the addition display. In this example, the general winning opening prize notification display INH is displayed a plurality of times, but the display positions are different from each other. Note that the display INH of the general prize opening notification may be displayed in a different manner, for example, with a different background color, a different shape, or different characters appearing together. Further, in this example, an over-winning notification display ONH is also displayed separately from the general winning opening winning notification display INH. The display form of the general winning opening prize notification INH and the over-winning notice display ONH differ depending on the presence or absence of a character. That is, the over-winning notification display ONH is a special display compared to the general winning opening winning notification display INH since the character is also displayed.

  Next, an example in which the winning is notified every time there is a winning to the attacker during the big hit game will be described. In many cases, this example is similar to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, and redundant description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied.

  FIG. 185 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (5) -5 are the same as FIG. 180 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (5) -5, and detailed explanation is omitted, but the first round of the jackpot game Is started, and there is a winning of one ball at the first variable winning opening 234a.

  In FIG. 185 (5) -6, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the first variable winning opening 234a with the number of winning balls (here 15). Sphere) value is added, the cumulative prize ball number display becomes 000015Get, and one face length BI icon BI is displayed. In addition, sound C is output from the speaker 120. The output of the sound C notifies that there is a winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. In this example, three types of notifications such as an addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, an additional display of a face-length face icon BI, and an output of sound C are performed for a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. However, these three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately. For example, it may be performed in the order of cumulative prize ball number addition display, additional display of the watch face icon BI, and output of the sound C, or display of cumulative prize ball number addition, output of the sound C, face length May be performed in the order of the additional display of the icon BI, or may be performed in the order of the output of the sound C, the addition display of the cumulative prize ball number, the additional display of the face length icon BI. Additional display of face icon BI, addition display of accumulated prize balls, and output of sound C may be performed in this order. Additional display of face-length face icon BI, output of sound C, accumulated prize ball number It may be performed in the order of addition display, or may be performed in the order of output of the sound C, additional display of the face-length face icon BI, and addition display of the accumulated prize balls. Furthermore, the addition display of the cumulative prize ball number and the additional display of the face length face icon BI may be performed at the same time, and the output of the sound C may be performed before or after that. The output of the sound C may be performed simultaneously, and the additional display of the Banchou face icon BI may be performed before or after that, or the additional display of the Banchou face icon BI and the output of the sound C may be performed simultaneously, The addition display of the cumulative number of prize balls may be performed before or after that. Alternatively, among the three types of addition display of accumulated prize balls, additional display of the face length BI icon BI, and output of the sound C, some may not be performed.

  In FIG. 185 (5) -7, there is a single winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. Is displayed on the general winning opening prize notification INH and the accumulated number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed as one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266. The number of prize balls (three balls in this case) for the winning is added, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 000018Get. The general winning opening prize notification display INH may be displayed simultaneously with the addition display of the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, may be displayed before the addition display, or may be displayed after the addition display. Good. Also, the general winning opening prize notification display INH may disappear for a moment, may disappear when added, and may continue to be displayed until the next winning is made to the unit general winning opening 2266. The display may continue until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 is awarded. Furthermore, sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies the unit general winning opening 2266 that there has been a winning. In this example, two types of notifications such as an addition display of the number of accumulated prize balls and an output of sound B are performed with respect to one winning at the unit general winning opening 2266, but these two types of notifications are performed simultaneously. May be performed separately. For example, the cumulative award ball number may be displayed first and the sound B may be output later. Conversely, the sound B may be output first and the cumulative award ball number displayed. It may be done later. Alternatively, either one of the addition display of the accumulated prize balls and the output of the sound B may not be performed. In this example, there are more types of notifications in the first variable winning opening 234a having a relatively large number of winning balls than in the unit general winning opening 2266 having a relatively small number of winning balls. It has become.

  FIG. 186 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 185, and further shows an example of the effect in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus.

  In the first round, the first variable prize opening 234a has been awarded up to the upper limit, ten face-length face icons BI are displayed, and the unit general prize opening 2266 has two prizes in total. In FIG. 186 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first round and the second round, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 000156Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the ten face-length face icons BI displayed disappear when the first round ends.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 186 (5) -11, there is a winning of one ball at each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, simultaneous winning. In addition, even if it is a simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where there is a winning in one winning mouth and there is a winning in the other winning mouth before being added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls . In FIG. 186 (5) -12, priority is given to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a having a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 186 (5) -12 is 000171 Get, and one face length BI icon is displayed. In addition, in the lower left of Machiko's character MCK shown in FIG. 186 (5) -12, a general winning entry prize notification display INH in which a character of “+3” is displayed on a certain background color is also displayed. Later, it is suggested that the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is also added. Furthermore, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of the sound B is for notifying that the unit general prize opening 2266 has been won. However, since the addition display of the number of prize balls in the unit general prize opening 2266 is delayed, the sound output is higher than that of the addition display. Has been done first. However, the sound B is output at the same timing as the display of the general winning opening prize notification INH or at a timing that is not so shifted. In this example, since the addition display of the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is delayed, the sound B for notifying that there has been a winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 has been won in the first variable winning opening 234a. However, the sound B may be output after the sound C is output, the sound C and the sound B may be output at the same time, or the sound output. Then, the sound C may be output after the sound B is output first.

  In the following FIG. 186 (5) -13, the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 186 (5) -13 is 000174Get. The display INH of the general winning opening prize notification disappears in response to the addition display. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 with a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be added and displayed at once, and the cumulative prize ball display shown in FIG. 186 (5) -12 may be 000174Get.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -14, in the state where up to nine face-length face icons BI are displayed, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the 10th maximum number of balls. It becomes a prize. In FIG. 186 (5) -15, the cumulative number of winning balls is changed from 00294Get to 000309Get, and ten face-length face icons BI are displayed. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -17, the addition of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00324Get, and the first decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH is displayed in which characters of “celebration + 15” are displayed on a certain background color together with the princess character. In FIG. 185 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. Note that the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, but may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -19, the third round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. Then round digestion proceeds. In this round of digestion, each round will win up to the maximum number, but no over-winning will occur.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -20, the 16th round which is the final round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -20, a cumulative prize ball number of 002331 Get is displayed. Between the first round and the 15th round, 22 are displayed in the unit general prize opening 2266. There is a winning of the ball, and 66 balls are paid out as the winning ball of the unit general winning port 2266. In FIG. 186 (5) -21, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -21, ten face-length face icons BI are displayed, and there is a prize up to the upper limit even in 16 rounds. The display is displayed. In the 16th round, there are 3 balls in the unit general winning slot 2266, and 159 balls are paid out as the 16th round.

  When the final round is over, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5) -22 displays a cumulative winning ball number of 002490Get and the next probability change. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 186 (5) -23 in which the ending effect continues, a winning sound (congratulatory sound) corresponding to the winning to the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is the sound B, but it may be the same sound A as the over-winning sound. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (5) -23, the character “+3” is displayed on a background color of a certain color together with the princess character on the character display of the next probability change. A display INH ′ of a winning mouth winning notification is displayed. Since the display INH ′ of the general prize opening prize notification here is displayed together with the princess character, the display mode is different from the display INH of the general prize opening prize notice so far, and FIG. 186 (5) − This is similar to the display mode of the over winning notification display ONH shown in FIG. As described above, in this example, the display in a different display mode is displayed only during the big hit game end effect (ending effect) with respect to the winning in the general winning opening. Note that the winning sound (congratulatory sound) corresponding to the winning at the unit general winning opening 2266 may be changed from the sound B to the sound D only during the big hit game end effect (ending effect).

  Since FIG. 185 (4) -1 is the same as FIG. 180 (4) -1, description thereof is omitted.

  Next, an example of the effect in the jackpot game of the rank up bonus will be described. In many cases, this example is similar to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, and redundant description may be omitted, but the description of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 can be applied.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (4) -2, there is an 8R-rank-up bonus decorative symbol that is 8R big hit and can be expected to win in all of the eight rounds. A combination (“decoration 7” — “RUNK UP” — “decoration 7”) is fixedly displayed. The combination of “decoration 7”-“RUNK UP”-“decoration 7” is a big hit with certainty. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the jackpot will continue. It is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round that can be expected to win the ball will continue. Therefore, the player does not know how many rounds he will continue by simply looking at “decoration 7”-“RUNK UP”-“decoration 7”. Therefore, it is not known that it is 8R big hit. It should be noted that the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display confirmed and displayed in FIG. 186 (4) -2 is also a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -1, the big hit game is started, and the display of the big hit game start effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this jackpot game start effect, it is informed that the jackpot of the rank-up bonus has been won.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 186 (5) -2, right-handed notification 1 is started, but the display of “decoration 7” displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is replaced with the display of “RUNK UP”. ing. The display of “RUNK UP” continues to be displayed until the end of the big hit game. In FIG. 186 (5) -3, right-handed notification 2 is started.

  Then, in FIG. 186 (5) -4, the first round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the actual first variable prize winning opening 234a has been shifted to the fully opened state. When the first round is started, the right-hand notification 2 disappears, and the number of rounds (here, “1R”) and the number of accumulated prize balls (here, 000000Get) are displayed at the upper center. The cumulative number of winning balls here may be a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the current jackpot game, or a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the jackpot game during the jackpot game. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls in the entire period including the period between the jackpot game and the jackpot game (symbol change display period) during the jackpot game may be used.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -5, there is one ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a. In FIG. 181 (5) -6, the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a background color of a certain color. An attacker winning notification display ANH displaying the characters “+15” is displayed. The cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the first variable winning opening 234a by the number of winning balls (here, 15). Sphere) is added, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000015Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. In this example, three types of notifications such as an addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, an attacker winning notification display ANH, and a sound C output are performed with respect to a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. However, these three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately. For example, the cumulative award ball number addition display, the attacker award notification display ANH display, and the sound C output may be performed in this order, or the cumulative award ball number addition display, the sound C output, and the attacker award notification notification. The display may be performed in the order of the display of ANH, the output of sound C, the cumulative prize ball number addition display, the display of the attacker winning notification ANH may be performed in the order, or the display of the attacker winning notification ANH display, cumulative prize ball number addition display, and sound C output may be performed in this order. Attacker prize notification display ANH display, sound C output, cumulative prize ball number addition display order. It may be performed in the order of the output of the sound C, the display of the attacker winning notification ANH, and the addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls. Furthermore, the cumulative award ball number addition display and the attacker prize notification display ANH may be simultaneously displayed, and the output of the sound C may be performed before or after that. The output of C may be performed at the same time, and the display of the attacker winning notification ANH may be performed before or after that. The display of the attacker winning notification ANH and the output of sound C may be performed simultaneously, and the cumulative prize ball The numerical addition display may be performed before or after. Alternatively, there may be one that is not performed among the three types of addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, display of the attacker winning notification ANH, and output of the sound C. Also, the attacker winning notification display ANH may disappear for a moment, may disappear when added, and may continue to be displayed until the next winning is made to the first variable winning opening 234a. The display may continue until one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 is awarded.

  In FIG. 186 (5) -7, there is a single winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 186 (5) -8, a background color of “+3” is displayed on the character MCK of Machiko-sensei. Is displayed on the general winning opening prize notification INH and the accumulated number of winning balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed as one ball to the unit general winning opening 2266. The number of winning balls (three balls in this case) for the winning is added, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000018Get. The general winning opening prize notification display INH is smaller than the attacker winning prize notification display ANH. Furthermore, sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B notifies the unit general winning opening 2266 that there has been a winning. In this example, three types of notifications such as an addition display of the number of accumulated prize balls, an attacker winning notification display ANH, and an output of sound B are performed for one winning at the unit general winning opening 2266. These three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously or separately. For example, the display may be performed in the order of the cumulative prize ball number addition display, the general winning opening prize notification display INH, and the output of the sound B, or the cumulative prize ball number addition display, the output of the sound B, and the general winning prize. Oral winning notification display INH may be performed in the order of display, sound B output, cumulative winning ball number addition display, general winning mouth winning notification display INH display may be performed in this order. , General winning opening prize notification display INH display, cumulative winning ball number addition display, sound B output may be performed in this order, general winning opening prize notification display INH display, sound B output, It may be performed in the order of the cumulative winning ball number addition display, or may be performed in the order of the output of the sound B, the general winning opening winning notification display INH, and the cumulative winning ball number addition display. Further, the cumulative prize ball number addition display and the general winning opening prize notification display INH may be simultaneously displayed, and the output of the sound B may be performed before or after that, or the cumulative prize ball number addition display. And the sound B may be output at the same time, and the general winning opening prize notification display INH may be displayed before or after that. The general winning opening prize notification display INH and the output of the sound B may be simultaneously displayed. It may be performed, and the cumulative prize number display may be performed before or after. Alternatively, there may be one that is not performed among the three types of addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls, display of the general winning opening prize notification INH, and output of the sound B. In addition, the display of the general winning opening prize notification INH may disappear in an instant, disappear when it is added, or displayed until the next winning is made to the first variable winning opening 234a. It may be continued, or may be displayed until a winning is made in any one of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 186.

  In the first round, the first variable prize opening 234a was won up to the maximum number, and the unit general prize opening 2266 was awarded in total of two balls. In FIG. 187 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first round and the second round, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls of 000156Get is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -10, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 187 (5) -11, there is a winning of one ball at each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. That is, simultaneous winning. In addition, even if it is a simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where there is a winning in one winning mouth and there is a winning in the other winning mouth before being added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls . In FIG. 187 (5) -12, priority is given to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a having a relatively large number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -12 is 000171 Get, but an attacker winning notification display ANH in which “+15” is displayed on a certain background color, or Both of the general winning opening winning notifications INH with the characters “+3” displayed on the background color are displayed. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that a winning has been made to the unit general winning opening 2266, and that the right speaker 120 has received a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a. A sound C for notification is output. That is, in this example, the prize display to the first variable prize opening 234a is given priority only for the addition display, but the prize notification display and the sound output are both performed simultaneously. It is not necessary to start both at the same time, but it is sufficient if there is a period in which both are executed in duplicate. In the following FIG. 187 (5) -13, the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -13 is 000174Get. In FIG. 187 (5) -13, neither the attacker winning notification display ANH nor the general winning opening notification notification INH is turned off. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 with a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be displayed at once, and the cumulative prize ball display shown in FIG. 187 (5) -12 may be 000174Get.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -14, there is one ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the tenth ball of the upper limit number. In FIG. 187 (5) -15, an attacker winning notification display ANH in which a character of “+15” is displayed on a background color of a certain color is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is from 00294Get to 000309Get. . The display position of the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is different from the display position at the time of the previous winning to the first variable winning opening 234a. In FIG. 187 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is in the middle of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -17, the number of over-winning winning balls is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00324Get, and the first decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH is displayed in which characters of “celebration + 15” are displayed on a certain background color together with the princess character. In FIG. 187 (5) -18, the sound A is output from the speaker 120. This sound A is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. Note that the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, but may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -19, the fourth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -19 is 000489 Get. In FIG. 187 (5) -19, there is one ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 187 (5) -20, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed. The number of winning balls at the variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000504Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. Further, in the fourth round, a round continuation judge effect is started as a rank-up bonus effect. In this round continuation judge production, instead of Machiko's previously displayed character MCK, Bancho's character BCH appears, and a character display such as “Wake up with button PUSH” prompting the operation of chance button 136 is displayed. The This character display overlaps with the attacker ANH notification display ANH. Note that, at the timing when the round continuation judge effect is started, simultaneous winnings to the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 occur again. As a result, in FIG. 187 (5) -21, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first, and both the display ANH of the attacker winning notification and the display INH of the general winning opening winning notification are both. Are also displayed. The display position is different from the display position at the time of the previous winning, whether it is the display ANH of the attacker prize notification or the display INH of the general prize opening notification. In addition, a part of the general winning opening prize notification display INH overlaps with a part of the long-length character BCH. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that a winning has been made to the unit general winning opening 2266, and that the right speaker 120 has received a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a. A sound C for notification is output. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21, as the round continuation judgment effect, the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and the remaining time of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 are represented. The remaining time display meter MT and the character display “push” are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21, the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. A part of the remaining time display meter MT overlaps a part of the display ANH of the attacker prize notification. Further, a part of the attacker winning notification display ANH overlaps a part of the cumulative prize ball number display, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number is difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that the relationship between the general winning opening prize notification display INH and the character BCH that overlaps the overlap described above, or the remaining time display meter MT and the attacker prize notification display ANH overlap. Even if there is an overlapping relationship between the display ANH of the attacker prize notification and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, not all but the whole may be overlapped or overlapped. The relationship may be reversed. In addition to this, all of the overlap relationships described in this specification may be overlapped not all, but may be overlapped, or may be overlapped only partially instead of all. In addition, they may be overlapped, and furthermore, the relationship between the sides to be overlapped may be reversed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -21, there is a single winning in the first variable winning opening 234a.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -22, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000537Get. . A part of the attacker winning notification display ANH overlaps a part of the character BCH having the longest length. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -22, the operation effective period is started, the remaining time display meter MT is reduced by about 1/5, and the chance button 136 is operated. In the round continuation judge production, if it succeeds, the round will continue, but if it fails, the big hit game will end in the fourth round. The player does not know whether to succeed or fails, and operates the chance button 136 in hope of success. In FIG. 187 (5) -24, an operation response effect is performed, and the awakening change occurs in the long-length character BCH, and the character display “Yataze” is displayed. Even at the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -24, there is a single ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -24, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000552Get. . Further, a round continuation notification indicating success is performed. That is, when the judgment result display including the characters “Continue” is displayed, but the judgment result display ANH overlaps with a part of the judgment result display, and the judgment result display is not overlapped. More difficult to see. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the operation response effect is not performed, but the judgment result display is displayed. While the judgment result display is being displayed, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a.

  Eventually, the fourth round is completed by winning up to the upper limit number in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the round digestion proceeds. From the fifth round, the longest character BCH disappears and returns to the character MCK of Machiko-sensei. In this round of digestion, each round wins up to the maximum number.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -25, the eighth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 187 (5) -25 is “001299Get”. In FIG. 187 (5) -25, there is one ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 187 (5) -26, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 001314Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. Furthermore, in the 8th round, the second round continuation judge production is started as a rank-up bonus production. Here too, the chief character BCH appears and prompts the operation of the chance button 136 “Wake up with the button PUSH” Is displayed. This character display also overlaps with the attacker winning notification display ANH.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -27, the button image 136a, the remaining time display meter MT, and the character display “press” are displayed as the round continuation judgment effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -27, the operation valid period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. In addition, at this timing, there are two balls (two balls at almost the same time) following the first variable winning port 234a. That is, there are a plurality of winnings within a certain period.

  In FIG. 187 (5) -28, two attacker award notification notifications ANH are displayed, and the cumulative number of award balls is displayed at 30 at a stretch, which is 001344Get. In addition, 15 may be added and displayed continuously. A part of one attacker's prize notification display ANH overlaps with a part of the longest character BCH, and a part of another attacker's prize notification display ANH is part of the remaining time display meter MT. It overlaps. At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -28, the operation effective period is started and the remaining time display meter MT is decreased. However, the remaining time display meter MT is decreased by the overlapped attacker ANK notification display ANH. The condition is difficult to see. In addition, the sound 120 for two times is output from the speaker 120 in an overlapping manner, and the volume is larger than the output of the sound C for one time. Note that the sound C for two times may be output continuously. Alternatively, when there are a plurality of winnings within a certain period, a special sound different from the sound C may be output. The chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 187 (5) -28. Even in these 8 rounds, if the round continuation judge production is successful, the round will continue further, but if it fails, the big hit game will end in the 8th round. The player does not know whether it succeeds or fails here, and operates the chance button 136 in hope of success. In terms of control (internal), it is determined that 8R jackpot is achieved at the stage where the jackpot type is determined before the start of symbol variation (the stage of the special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. 7). Has been. In FIG. 187 (5) -29, the operation response effect is performed, the wakefulness change does not occur in the bancho character BCH, the character display of “sorry” is displayed, and the second round continuous judge effect has failed. The eight rounds are the final rounds. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (5) -29, there is a single ball winning at the first variable winning opening 234a, and the winning at the first variable winning opening 234a continues thereafter. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (5) -30, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 001434Get, and the winning to the first variable winning opening 234a in the eighth round is the ninth ball. Become a prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (5) -30, there is an upper limit number of tenth winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in the same FIG. (5) -31, an attacker winning notification display ANH However, it is displayed so as to overlap the face of Machiko-sensei's character MCK, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 001449 Get. A sound C is output from the speaker 120.

  When the eighth round, which is the final round, is ended, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 187 (5) -32 displays a cumulative prize ball number of 001449Get. At the same time, a character display indicating the next probability change is displayed.

  In FIG. 187 (4)-1, it is just before the jackpot game end effect ends and the special symbol variation display starts. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-" "RUNK UP"-"decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the upper left. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls here is not 001449Get but 001449 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls is continuously displayed even during the probability changing state, but during the probability changing state, the addition display corresponding to the winning at the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. Further, addition display according to winning in other general winning ports 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next jackpot game, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls starts from 001449. In the example shown in FIG. 187, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an advantageous jackpot (for example, jackpot with probability variation). In addition, even during the certainty change state, an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed, or an additional display corresponding to the winning in the other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed. Good. In this case, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a period including a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation), and is in the probability variation state. The period will be included. Alternatively, when the jackpot game executed by winning an advantageous jackpot is consecutive, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is between the jackpot game period and the jackpot game period. It may be a period including a period.

  The example shown in FIG. 186 to FIG. 187 is an example of a jackpot game related to a rank-up bonus among a plurality of jackpot games. As described above, this rank-up bonus is a big hit that is difficult to guess at the start of the big hit, and how many players can acquire the game balls, and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) In some cases, it can be raised by adding and displaying. It should be noted that even if the jackpot has no probability change, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) may be added and displayed for the big hit of the rank-up bonus. Further, in this example, an attacker's award notification display ANH is displayed for each winning of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a), and the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is displayed for each winning. A display INH of a winning opening prize notification is displayed, and the feeling of winning a prize ball is enhanced. As described above, the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus is a jackpot in which the number of winning balls of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a) and the number of winning balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) are displayed. A game that is a big hit game other than the big hit game related to the rank-up bonus (for example, a big hit game with 2R probability change or a big hit game without 2R probability change) is the number of winning balls of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a). And, it becomes a big hit game in which only the number of winning balls of the attacker is added and displayed among the number of winning balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266).

  Furthermore, another example of the effect in the jackpot game of the rank up bonus will be described. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing another effect example in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus. In the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 are executed, the example described below may be executed. In the following, differences from the example of production shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 will be mainly described, and overlapping explanation may be omitted, but the explanation of the example of production shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 may be applied. it can.

  FIG. 188 (4) -2 to FIG. (5) -7 are the same as FIG. 186 (4) -2 to FIG. (5) -7, and detailed explanation is omitted, but the first round of the jackpot game Is started, and there is one winning in the unit general winning opening 2266. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 188 (5) -8, the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general prize opening 2266 is not added before the success in the round continuation judge production, and the cumulative number of prize balls The display remains 000015Get. Also, the general winning opening prize notification display INH is not displayed. Furthermore, no winning sound (sound B) is output from the speaker 120.

  In the first round, there is a maximum number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 188 (5) -9 showing the state of the interval between the first and second rounds, the first decorative symbol display device A display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 00150Get is displayed at 208L.

  In FIG. 188 (5) -10, the second round is started and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 188 (5) -11, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 each have one winning. That is, simultaneous winning. In addition, even if it is a simultaneous winning, it also includes the case where there is a winning in one winning mouth and there is a winning in the other winning mouth before being added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls . As shown in FIGS. 188 (5) -12 and (5) -13, the number of winning balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added, and only the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added. The cumulative prize ball number is displayed as 000165Get. Also, the general winning opening winning notification INH is not displayed, and in FIG. 188 (5) -12, the attacker winning notification display ANH in which the character “+15” is displayed on a certain background color is displayed. Yes. Furthermore, no sound B is output from the speaker 120, and in FIG. 188 (5) -12, a sound C for notifying that there has been a winning at the first variable winning opening 234a is output. In FIG. 188 (5) -14, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the 10th maximum number of winnings. In FIG. 188 (5) -15, an attacker winning notification display ANH in which a character of “+15” is displayed on a background color of a certain color is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed from 00285Get to 000300Get. . The display position of the display ANH of the attacker winning notification is different from the display position at the time of the previous winning to the first variable winning opening 234a. In FIG. 188 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is in the process of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (5) -17, the addition of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000315Get, and the first decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH is displayed in which characters of “celebration + 15” are displayed on a certain background color together with the princess character. Subsequently, in FIG. 187 (5)-18, the speaker A outputs a sound A that is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. Note that the output of the over winning sound is after the addition display, but may be before the addition display or at the same time as the addition display.

  In FIG. 188 (5) -19, the fourth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 188 (5) -19 is “000480Get”. In FIG. 188 (5) -19, there is one ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 187 (5) -20, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed. The number of winning balls at the variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000495Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. Further, in the fourth round, a round continuation judge effect is started as a rank-up bonus effect. In this round continuation judge production, instead of Machiko's previously displayed character MCK, Bancho's character BCH appears, and a character display such as “Wake up with button PUSH” prompting the operation of chance button 136 is displayed. The This character display overlaps with the attacker ANH notification display ANH. In addition, at the timing when the round continuation judge production is started, the simultaneous winnings to the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 occur again, as shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21. The general winning opening prize notification display INH is not displayed, and only the attacker prize notification display ANH is displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added, only the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000510Get. Further, the display ANH of the attacker winning notification overlaps the display of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in addition, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the sound B is not output from the speaker 120, but the sound C is output to notify that the first variable winning opening 234a has been won. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21, the button image 136a, the remaining time display meter MT, and the character display “press” are displayed as the round continuation judgment effect. . At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21, the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. A part of the remaining time display meter MT overlaps a part of the display ANH of the attacker prize notification. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (5) -21, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a.

  In FIG. 188 (5) -22, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000525Get. . A part of the attacker winning notification display ANH overlaps a part of the character BCH having the longest length. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (5) -22, the operation effective period is started, the remaining time display meter MT is reduced by about 1/5, and the chance button 136 is operated. In the round continuation judge production, if it succeeds, the round will continue, but if it fails, the big hit game will end in the fourth round. In FIG. 188 (5)-24, an operation response effect is performed, a change in arousal occurs in the long-length character BCH, and a character display “Yataze” is displayed. Even at the timing of FIG. 188 (5) -24, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a.

  In FIG. 188 (5) -24, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 000540Get. . In addition, a round continuation notification indicating success is performed, and a judge result display including the characters “continue” is displayed. An attacker winning notification display ANH overlaps with a part of this judge result display. The judgment result display is more difficult to see than the case where the judgment result is not overlapped. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the operation response effect is not performed, but the judgment result display is displayed. While the judgment result display is being displayed, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a.

  Eventually, the fourth round is completed by winning up to the upper limit number in the first variable winning opening 234a, and the round digestion proceeds. From the fifth round, the longest character BCH disappears and returns to the character MCK of Machiko-sensei. In FIG. 188 (5) -25, the fifth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 188 (5) -25 is “000630 Get”. Also in FIG. 188 (5) -25, there is a simultaneous winning of one ball at each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 188 (5) -26, an attacker winning notification display ANH in which a character “+15” is displayed on a certain background color, and a character “+3” is displayed on a certain background color. Both of the winning opening winning notifications INH are displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 are added and displayed at the same time, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 000648Get. Overlapped by the notification display ANH, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that a winning has been made to the unit general winning opening 2266, and that the right speaker 120 has received a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a. A sound C for notification is output. After 5 rounds of success in the round continuation judgment production, in addition to winning the first variable winning slot 234a, the number of winning balls is displayed for addition to the unit general winning slot 2266. The winning announcement is also made. In this example, addition display, winning notification display and sound output are simultaneously performed. Note that the three do not have to be started at the same time, but there may be a period in which the three are executed in duplicate. Also in FIG. 188 (5) -26, there is a simultaneous winning of one ball at each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

  FIG. 189 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 188, and further shows another example of the effect in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus.

  FIG. 189 (5) -27 shows the state of the interval between the fifth and sixth rounds, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cumulative prize ball display of 000765Get. During the interval between rounds, there is one winning in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 189 (5) -28, the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed. , 000768 Get. Also, in the lower left of Machiko's character MCK, a general winning opening prize notification display INH in which a character of “+3” is displayed on a certain background color is displayed, and a sound D is output from the speaker 120. The The output of this sound D is a special sound different from the sound B, although it notifies the unit general winning opening 2266 that there has been a winning. Thus, when there is a winning during the round interval, a special notification may be performed.

  In FIG. 189 (5) -29, the eighth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 189 (5) -29 is 001248Get. In FIG. 189 (5) -29, there is one ball winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 189 (5) -30, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 001263Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound C for notifying that a winning has been made to the first variable winning opening 234a. Furthermore, in the 8th round, the second round continuation judge production is started as a rank-up bonus production. Here too, the chief character BCH appears and prompts the operation of the chance button 136 “Wake up with the button PUSH” Is displayed. This character display also overlaps with the attacker winning notification display ANH.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (5) -31, a button image 136a, a remaining time display meter MT, and a character display “Press” are displayed as a round continuation judgment effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (5) -31, the operation valid period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. In addition, at this timing, there are two balls (two balls at almost the same time) following the first variable winning port 234a. That is, there are a plurality of winnings within a certain period.

  In FIG. 189 (5)-32, an attacker winning notification display ANH ′ in which a character “+30” is displayed on a certain background color is displayed. The attacker winning notification display ANH ′ is a display for two balls and has the same size as the display for one ball, but may be larger than the display for one ball, and may display colors, shapes, and the like. The embodiments may be different. In addition, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 30 additions at a time, which is 001293 Get. In addition, 15 may be added and displayed continuously. In addition, the sound 120 for two times is output from the speaker 120 in an overlapping manner, and the volume is larger than the output of the sound C for one time. Note that the sound C for two times may be output continuously. Alternatively, when there are a plurality of winnings within a certain period, a special sound different from the sound C may be output. At the timing of FIG. 189 (5) -32, the operation effective period is started, the remaining time display meter MT is reduced by about 1/5, and the chance button 136 is operated. Even in these 8 rounds, if the round continuation judge production is successful, the round will continue further, but if it fails, the big hit game will end in the 8th round. In terms of control (internal), it is determined that 8R jackpot is achieved at the stage where the jackpot type is determined before the start of symbol variation (the stage of the special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. 7). Has been. In FIG. 189 (5) -33, the operation response effect is performed, the awakening change does not occur on the character BCH, and the character display of “sorry” is displayed, and the second round continuous judge effect has failed. The eight rounds are the final rounds Note that even at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (5) -33, there is a single ball winning at the first variable winning opening 234a, and the winning at the first variable winning opening 234a continues thereafter. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (5) -34, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 001383Get, and the winning to the first variable winning opening 234a in the eighth round is the ninth ball. Become a prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (5) -34, the first variable winning opening 234a has the 10th maximum number of winnings. In FIG. 5 (35) -35, an attacker winning notification display ANH. However, it is displayed so as to overlap the face of Machiko-sensei's character MCK, the number of prize balls of the first variable prize opening 234a is added and displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 001398Get. A sound C is output from the speaker 120.

  When the eighth round, which is the final round, is finished, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 189 (5) -32 displays a cumulative prize ball number of 001398Get. At the same time, a character display indicating the next probability change is displayed.

  In FIG. 189 (4)-1, it is immediately before the jackpot game end effect ends and the special symbol variation display starts. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (4) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-" "RUNK UP"-"decoration 7") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the upper left. The display of the number of accumulated prize balls here is not 001398 Get but 001398 is being acquired. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls is continuously displayed even during the probability changing state, but during the probability changing state, the addition display corresponding to the winning at the unit general winning opening 2266 is not performed. Further, addition display according to winning in other general winning ports 2261 to 2265 is not performed. Therefore, in the next jackpot game, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls starts from 001398. In the effect example shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 189, the period during which the cumulative prize number is displayed is a big hit game period that is executed by winning an advantageous big hit (for example, a big hit with probability variation). In addition, even during the certainty change state, an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 may be performed, or an additional display corresponding to the winning in the other general winning openings 2261 to 2265 may be performed. Good. In this case, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is a period including a jackpot game period that is executed by winning an advantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with probability variation), and is in the probability variation state. The period will be included. Alternatively, when the jackpot game executed by winning an advantageous jackpot is consecutive, the period during which the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed is between the jackpot game period and the jackpot game period. It may be a period including a period.

  The example shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 189 is also an example of a jackpot game related to a rank-up bonus among a plurality of jackpot games, similar to the example shown in FIG. 186 to FIG. 187. There are two stages. That is, it is divided into a period before continuing the round in which the number of prize balls of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is not added and a period after continuing the round to be added. In both periods, the number of winning balls of the attacker (here, the first variable winning opening 234a) is added.

  Next, another example of the effect in the jackpot game of the rank-up bonus will be described. In the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 are executed, the example described below may be executed. Moreover, the example demonstrated from now on may be performed also in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 is executed. In the following, differences from the example of production shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 will be mainly described, and overlapping explanation may be omitted, but the explanation of the example of production shown in FIGS. 188 to 189 may be applied. it can.

  FIG. 189 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (5) -8 are the same as FIG. 188 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (8) -8, and detailed description is omitted. Prior to success in the judge performance, the number of winning balls for winning the unit general winning opening 2266 is not added, the general winning opening winning notification INH is not displayed, and a winning sound (sound) is also output from the speaker 120. B) is not output.

  190 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 189.

  FIGS. 190 (5) -9 to (5) -16 are the same as FIGS. 188 (5) -9 to (5) -16, and detailed description is omitted, but the second round is completed. In some cases, over-winning has occurred. However, in this example, although the winning ball for the over winning is paid out, the winning ball is not added and displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (5) -17, FIG. 000300 Get, which is the same as the display of the number of accumulated prize balls shown in FIG. Also, the over-winning notification ONH shown in FIG. 188 (5) -17, in which the characters “celebration +15” are displayed on a certain background color together with the princess character, is not displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (5) -18, the speaker A outputs a sound A that is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, a round continuation judge effect is performed as a rank-up bonus effect. The state of these four rounds is shown in FIGS. 190 (5) -19 to (5) -24. Except for the number of accumulated award balls, FIG. 188 (5) -19 to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (5) -24, description is omitted. The number of cumulative prize balls displayed is smaller than the number of cumulative prize balls displayed as shown in FIG. 188 because there is no addition of prize balls due to over winning.

  As a result of succeeding in the round continuation judgment production as a rank-up bonus production and continuing the round, in FIG. 190 (5) -25, the 5th round has been started, The door member 2341a is fully opened. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 190 (5) -25 is 000600 Get. Also in FIG. 190 (5) -25, there is a simultaneous winning of one ball at each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

  In this example, in the case of success in round continuation judge production, and after 5 rounds that have been continued, in addition to winning in the first variable winning slot 234a, the number of winning balls for winning in the unit general winning slot 2266 is also shown. Is displayed, and a winning notification is also made. In addition, when there is a first prize in the first variable prize opening 234a or the unit general prize opening 2266 after the round is continued, the general prize opening (here, the unit general prize opening 2266) is won before the round is continued. The number of minutes won and the number of over won prize balls are displayed at once in the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, and a prize revival notification is also made. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (5) -26, an attacker's winning notification display ANH for winning in the first variable winning opening 234a in five rounds and a unit general winning opening 2266 in five rounds are displayed. In addition to the general winning opening prize notification display INH for the other prizes, an over-winning notice restoration display ONH2 for the over-winning in FIG. 190 (5) -16 is also displayed. Also displayed is a general winning entry winning notification reinstatement INH2 for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 for a total of five times in FIG. 190 (5) -11, FIG. 5-20, and the like. Note that the display form of the general winning opening notification notification INH and the general winning opening notification notification revival display INH2 are the same, but they may be different. The display form of the over winning notification revival display ONH2 is also shown in FIG. 5) Although it is the same as the display mode of the over-winning notification display ONH shown in -17, it may be different. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (5) -26, the display of the cumulative prize ball number is overlapped by some of these displays ANH, INH, ONH2, INH2, and the cumulative prize is displayed. Although the display of the number of spheres is difficult to visually recognize, at the timing of FIG. 190 (5) -26, it is 70648Get. In addition, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that there has been a prize at the unit general prize opening 2266 for six times, and the right speaker 120 has won a prize at the first variable prize opening 234a. The sound C which notifies this is output twice. As a sound output method for a plurality of times, the sound volume is increased according to the number of times or continuously output according to the number of times. In FIG. 190 (5) -26, there is a simultaneous winning of one ball at each of the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266.

  FIGS. 190 (5) -27 to (5) -35 are the same as FIGS. 189 (5) -27 to (5) -35 and will not be described in detail, but the second round of the eighth round. The 8th round continuation judge production was unsuccessful, and these 8 rounds become the final round.

  FIG. 191 shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 190, and further shows from the example of the effect during the big hit game to the example of the effect during the symbol variation display during the ST period.

  190 (5) -36 and FIG. (4) -1 following FIG. 190 (5) -35 are the same as FIG. 189 (5) -36 and FIG. However, when the 8th round, which is the final round, is finished, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and then the big hit game ends.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190 to FIG. 191, when the round is continued, the first variable winning opening 234 a or the unit general winning opening 2266 is used as a trigger to win the general winning opening until the round continues. The number of prize balls for the minute and the number of prize balls for the over winning prizes are displayed at a stretch on the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. This may be triggered by the fact that the round continuation is confirmed (timing in FIG. 190 (5) -24), or the round in which the round continuation judgment effect is performed (here, 4 rounds) It may be triggered by the end. In this way, after a certain condition is established, notifications regarding winnings so far may be collectively performed.

  Next, a description will be given from an example of an effect during the big hit game to an example of an effect during the symbol variation display during the ST period.

  This example is during a jackpot, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (4) -2 displays that 004482 is being acquired as a display of the cumulative number of winning balls acquired so far. ing. Also, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) that is a big hit with 16R probability change is confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the control state (game state) during the symbol variation display determined and displayed in FIG. 191 (4) -2 is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 191 (5) -1 to (5) -16 except FIG. 180 (5) -1 to FIG. 5) Since it is the same as -16, detailed description is omitted, but when the big hit game is started and the second round is over, an over winning is generated. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (5) -17, the number of over-winning winning balls is added and displayed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004671 Get, and the first decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the device 208L, an over-winning notification display ONH is displayed in which characters of “celebration + 15” are displayed on a certain background color together with the princess character. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A which is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. The output of the over winning sound may be after the addition display, before the addition display, or simultaneously with the addition display.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, round digestion proceeds, and in FIG. 192 (5) -18, the fifth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -18, the cumulative prize ball display is 004971Get. In the following FIG. 192 (5) -19, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 5 (-20), the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004986Get. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (5) -20, there is one winning ball in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5000 balls, and further exceeds 5000 balls. In FIG. 192 (5) -21, the cumulative prize ball number display is 00501Get, and the number of drills that celebrate the fact that the cumulative prize ball number has exceeded 5000 by overlapping the upper body of Machiko-sensei's character MCK. The breakthrough display KTH is displayed. The display mode of the drill number breakthrough display KTH is a display mode in which the characters “5000 breakthrough” are shown together with the panda character. It should be noted that “5000 reached” may be used instead of the characters “5000 breakthrough”, and a drill number arrival display may be used (the same applies to the following examples). There is no overlap between the drill number breakthrough display KTH and the cumulative prize ball number display ("005001Get" display), where there is also a single ball winning at the first variable winning slot 234a.

  In FIG. 192 (5) -22, the 16th round, which is the final round, is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -22, a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 006051Get is displayed. In FIG. 192 (5) -23, the final 16th round is completed, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully closed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -23, the cumulative prize ball number is displayed as 006171 Get. In this final round, the first variable winning opening 234a could not be won up to the upper limit.

  When the final round is over, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. The character display is displayed. During this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In FIG. 192 (5) -25, where the ending effect continues, the winning sound (congratulatory sound) corresponding to the winning to the unit general winning opening 2266 is output from the speaker 120. The output sound here is the sound B, but it may be the same sound A as the over-winning sound. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (5) -25, an addition display corresponding to the winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is performed on the display of the cumulative prize ball number, and the cumulative prize ball number is displayed. The display is 006174 Get. Furthermore, the character display of the next probability change is changed to a character display of 100 times the probability change, and the ST count is notified. The probability change of 100 times notified here means that the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability electric power support state) is maintained until the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure which becomes the 100th time after the big hit game is finished. Means that

  In FIG. 192 (1)-1, it is just before the jackpot game end effect ends and the special symbol variation display starts. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-" Decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 ") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the upper left. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls here is not 006174 Get but 006174 is being acquired. Further, the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the remaining number of STs (100 remaining) together with the navigation character YM. In the second UI unit 281, four hold icons h 21 to h 24 of FIG. 2 are displayed.

  In FIG. 192 (1) -2, the special symbol variation display which is the first time after the big hit game is completed is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The ST remaining number displayed on the first UI unit 280 is 99 times. In addition, since it is also in the electric support state, in order to aim from the normal figure starting port 228 to the second special figure starting port 232, a character display of “right-handed” that prompts the player to make a right stroke is also displayed. During the ST period shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -2 to (1) -15, the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266 are located on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Instead, the electric Chu DC of the second special figure starting port 232 is shown. The electric Chu DC shown in FIG. 192 (1) -2 is in a closed state.

  From Fig. 192 (1) -3 during the decorative symbol variation display to the same Fig. (1) -4 during the decorative symbol confirmation display, the electric Chu DC is open, but the second special diagram starting port 232 is connected. There is no prize.

  In FIG. 192 (1) -5, the special symbol variation display which is the second time after the big hit game is finished is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also from FIG. 192 (1) -6 to FIG. 1 (1) -7 during the decorative display variation display, the electric Chu DC is open and there are two consecutive winnings. In this example, during a part of the ST period, the number of prize balls (three balls in this case) for winning one ball to the second special figure starting port 232 is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. The part of the ST period here is a period in which the symbol variation display of the special figure for the first 20 times after the big hit game is ended. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) -7, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is the number of winning balls for winning in the second special figure starting port 232 at the timing shown in FIG. The number of minutes is increasing and 006177 is being acquired. In addition, a hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 is additionally displayed. In the following FIG. 192 (1) -8, the decoration symbol confirmation display is performed, but the cumulative prize ball number is displayed at the second special figure starting port 232 at the timing shown in FIG. The number of award balls for is increased by 006180. Further, a hold icon h24 of the fourth special figure 2 is additionally displayed.

  Thus, the symbol variation display during the ST period is repeatedly performed without winning a big hit, and in FIG. 192 (1) -9, the ST remaining count is 80 times. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed as “006234”.

  In FIG. 192 (1) -10, the special symbol variation display is started for the 21st time after the big hit game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. From FIG. 192 (1) -10 where the decorative symbol variation display is started to the same diagram (1) -11 during the variation variation display, the electric Chu DC is also open, and here, one ball winning is won. is there. However, since the symbol variation display of the special figure here is the 21st symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, the above-mentioned part of the ST period has passed, The number of winning balls for winning in the starting port 232 in the figure is not added and displayed. Therefore, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 192 (1) -12 remains to be acquired 006234. On the other hand, in the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 192 (1) -12, the fourth hold icon h24 of the special figure 2 is additionally displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 192 (1) -13, the 21st special symbol variation display is completed.

  After that, the symbol variation display during the ST period is repeatedly performed without winning the jackpot, and in FIG. 192 (1) -14, the special chart for the 100th time after the end of the jackpot game at the end of the ST period. The symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) -14, the ST remaining number displayed on the first UI unit 280 is displayed as “Last”. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) 15, the symbol variation display of the 100th special symbol is not a big hit. [0062] Along with the display of “BONUS × 3” indicating that “decoration 7” is stopped and the number of consecutive hits is 3, the title is displayed according to the number of consecutive visits (general return) 006234 A display of the number of accumulated prize balls such as being acquired is also displayed. In FIG. 192 (1) -16, “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7” are finalized, the ST period ends, and the electric support state also ends. Therefore, the character display of “right-handed” disappears from the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (1) -16, and the 101th special symbol variation display is started after the big hit game ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (1) -17, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a display for returning to the left. This state is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, which is not shown, but the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 191 to 192, during the big hit game, the general winning opening prize is added, and during the ST period of 100 times when the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (probability and electric support state) is maintained. In this example, the electric chew prize is added during a part of the period, and the electric chew prize is not added during the remaining period of the ST period. Even when the big hit game is over, there is a case where the payout of the prize balls acquired during the big hit game continues. The above part of the period is shortly after the jackpot game ends, and in addition to paying out the winning balls that were won during the jackpot game, the game will be boosted by adding the winning portion of the electric chew. May be possible. In addition, in this example, since the symbol variation for a short period is likely to be repeated, the period when the symbol variation display of the first 20 special symbols is performed is a short period after the big hit game ends. .

  Next, an example of an effect during a big hit game to an example of an effect during symbol variation display during another ST period will be described. FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating a part of the effect example during the symbol variation display during another ST period from the effect example during the big hit game. The ST period here is a period from the end of the big hit game until the end of the 10th special symbol variation display, but the electric support state is maintained 90 times thereafter. That is, after the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability and electric support state) is maintained 10 times, the probability change falls and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (non-probability and electric support state) is 90 times. Maintained.

  In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 192 are executed, the example described below may also be executed. In the following description, differences from the effects shown in FIGS. 191 to 192 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted, but the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 191 to 192 may be applied. it can.

  193 (4) -2 to (5) -3 in FIG. 193 are the same as FIG. 191 (4) -2 to (5) -3 in FIG. Has been.

  This example is also an example of a big hit consecutive villa. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (5) -4, which has started the first round, shows the cumulative number of winning balls acquired so far. As a display, 004479 GET is displayed. In FIG. 193 (5) -5, there is a single winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in the following FIG. 193 (5) -6, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning one ball to the first variable prize opening 234a is added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 004494Get. Note that the speaker 120 does not output the sound C for notifying that the first variable winning opening 234a has been won. The display of the attacker winning notification ANH and the addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls may be performed simultaneously, or the display of the attacker winning notification ANH may be performed earlier, or the cumulative winning ball The number addition display may be performed first.

  In FIG. 193 (5) -7, there is a single winning in the unit general winning opening 2266, and in FIG. 193 (5) -8, the general winning opening winning notification display INH is displayed. The number of prize balls for winning one ball to the unit general prize opening 2266 is added to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the display device 208L, and the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is 004497 Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that a winning has been made to the unit general winning opening 2266. In this example, three types of notifications such as an addition display of the number of accumulated prize balls, an attacker winning notification display ANH, and an output of sound B are performed for one winning at the unit general winning opening 2266. These three types of notifications may be performed simultaneously as described with reference to FIG. 186 or may be performed separately.

  In FIG. 193 (5) -9, which shows the state of the interval between the first and second rounds when there is no more winnings in the first round, in FIG. A number display is displayed.

  In FIG. 193 (5) -10, the second round is started and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In FIG. 193 (5) -11, the first variable winning opening 234a and the unit general winning opening 2266 each have one simultaneous winning, and the first variable winning opening 234a has a relatively large number of winning balls. An attacker's prize notification display ANH is displayed. In the following FIG. 193 (5) -12, the attacker winning notification ANH disappears and the general winning opening notification INH is displayed. Further, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed first, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 193 (5) -12 is 004512Get. The winning notification display INH overlaps, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. The output of this sound B is for notifying that the unit general prize opening 2266 has been won, but since the addition display of the number of prize balls in the unit general prize opening 2266 is delayed, the sound output is performed first. It has been broken. In the following FIG. 193 (5) -13, the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 193 (5) -13 is 004515Get. The display INH of the general winning opening prize notification disappears in response to the addition display. Contrary to the example here, priority is given to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 with a relatively small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls in the unit general winning opening 2266 is added and displayed first. The number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234a may be added and displayed later. Alternatively, both prize balls may be displayed at once, and the cumulative prize ball display shown in FIG. 193 (5) -12 may be 004515Get.

  In FIG. 193 (5) -14, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a, and this winning is the tenth maximum number of winnings. In FIG. 193 (5) -15, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed from 004641 Get to 004656 Get.

  In FIG. 193 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is in the middle of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (5) -17, the over-winning notification display ONH is displayed, the number of over-winning prize balls is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed. Is 004671 Get. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A which is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. The output of the over winning sound may be after the addition display, before the addition display, or simultaneously with the addition display.

  FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 193.

  Thereafter, round digestion proceeds, and in FIG. 194 (5) -18, the fifth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -18, the cumulative prize ball number is displayed as 004983Get. In the following FIG. 194 (5) -19, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and in FIG. 5 (20) -20, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls Is 004998 Get. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (5) -20, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5000, and further breaks through 5000 balls. In FIG. 194 (5)-21, a general winning opening winning notification INH is displayed. Further, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00501 Get, and a drill number breakthrough display KTH is also displayed so as to overlap from the character MCK of the teacher Machi to the general winning opening prize notification INH. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the character MCK of the teacher Machi and the display INH of the general prize opening notification. As described above, the overlap relationship may be reversed. Also, there is no overlap between the drill number breakthrough display KTH and the cumulative prize ball display ("005001Get" display), and a sound B for notifying the unit general prize opening 2266 is received from the speaker 120. Note that a special sound D congratulating that the cumulative number of winning balls has exceeded 5000 may be output together with the sound B, or this sound D may be output instead of the sound B. As explained here, even if the player reaches 5000 balls in the general winning mouth instead of winning the attacker, and even if it exceeds 5000 balls, the number of drills is displayed. KTH may be displayed and special sound D may be output.

  In FIG. 194 (5) -22, the 16th round which is the final round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully opened. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -22, a display of the cumulative number of prize balls of 006051Get is displayed. In FIG. 194 (5) -23, the electric variable DC is also displayed along with the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. During the big hit game, since it is in a non-electric support state, the electric Chu DC is difficult to open, but in FIG. In this example, even during the big hit game, if there is an electric chew winning, the number of winning balls of the electric chew winning is added and displayed. Accordingly, during the big hit game, both the winning ball of the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) and the winning ball of the electric Chu DC are added and displayed. In FIG. 194 (5) -24, a display DNH for notifying of an electric chew prize display in which characters of “+3” are displayed on a certain background color is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 006054Get. . The display mode of the electric chew winning notification display DNH is the same as the display mode of the general winning award winning notification display INH, but may be different. In addition, the sound B is output from the speaker 120. This sound B is a winning sound for notifying that the second special figure starting port 232 has been won, and is the same as the winning sound for notifying that the unit general winning port 2266 has been won. However, the winning sound for notifying that the second special figure starting port 232 has won may be changed to a special sound different from the sound B.

  In FIG. 194 (5) -25, the 16th round, which is the final round, has ended, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is fully closed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -25, the cumulative prize ball number is displayed as 006174Get. In this final round, the first variable winning opening 234a could not be won up to the upper limit.

  When the final round ends, a big hit game end effect (ending effect) is started, and during this ending effect, a game ball wins one ball in the unit general winning opening 2266. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -26, an addition display corresponding to winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 is performed on the display of the cumulative prize ball number, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number is displayed. It is already 006177 Get. In addition, a character display of next probability change is displayed.

  In the following FIG. 194 (5) -27, the general winning opening prize notification display INH is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that the unit general winning opening 2266 has been won. Here, the addition display is performed prior to the winning notification. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (5) -27, the character display “next probability change” is changed to the character display “10 times probability change 90 times shorter”. The 10 probability changes reported here means that the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change and electric support state) is reached until the symbol variation display of the special figure which becomes the tenth time after the big hit game is finished. This means that it is maintained and corresponds to the ST period. On the other hand, 90 times short means that the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state from the end of the jackpot game until the end of the 11th special symbol variation display until the 100th special symbol variation display ends. This means that (non-probability and electric support state) is maintained, and an electric support period is entered. Note that the display of the cumulative number of winning balls remains 006177 Get.

  In FIG. 194 (1)-1, it is immediately before the jackpot game end effect ends and the special symbol variation display starts. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (1) -1, a combination of decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-" Decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 ") is displayed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed on the upper left. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls here is not 006177 Get but 006177 is being acquired. The first UI portion 280 formed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays “100 remaining” together with the navigation character YM, and the second UI portion 281 displays four reserved icons of special figure 2. h21 to h24 are displayed. Note that the display of “remaining 100” displayed on the first UI unit 280 is the remaining number of times until the power support state ends.

  In FIG. 194 (1) -2, the special symbol variation display which is the first time after the big hit game is completed is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The remaining number of times until the power support state displayed on the first UI unit 280 ends is 99 times. In addition, since it is also in the electric support state, in order to aim from the normal figure starting port 228 to the second special figure starting port 232, a character display of “right-handed” that prompts the player to make a right stroke is also displayed. In FIGS. 194 (1) -2 to (1) -15, the first variable winning opening 234a is shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the unit general winning opening 2266 is displayed. Instead, the electric Chu DC of the second special figure starting port 232 is shown. The electric Chu DC shown in FIG. 194 (1) -2 is in a closed state.

  From Fig. 194 (1) -3 during the decorative symbol variation display to the same diagram (1)-4 during the decorative symbol final display, the electric Chu DC is open, but the second special diagram starting port 232 is connected. There is no prize.

  In FIG. 194 (1) -5, the special symbol variation display which is the second time after the big hit game is ended is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 194 (1) -6 to (1) -7 in FIG. 194 (1) -6 during the variation display of the decorative symbols are also open, and one ball is placed in each of the general winning opening and the second special figure starting port 232. There is a prize. The general winning award here is the unit general winning opening 2266, but may be other general winning openings 2261 to 2265.

  In this example, during the entire ST period, the number of winning balls (three balls in this case) for winning one ball to the second special figure starting port 232 is added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls. Also, the number of winning balls (three balls here) for one winning in the general winning opening (here, the unit general winning opening 2266) is also added to the display of the cumulative number of winning balls. Only one of them may be added. Note that addition display may be performed only for a part of the period, not for the entire period in the ST period.

  In the following FIG. 194 (1) -7, an electric chew winning notification display DNH and a general winning prize winning notification display INH are displayed. The general winning opening prize notification display INH overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in a variable manner in the right symbol display area 208c and the character display of “right-handed”. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the sound B, which is the electric chew winning sound, and the sound B, which is the general winning award winning sound, and the sound volume is larger than the output of the sound B for one time. Note that the sound B may be output continuously, or the winning sound from the speaker 120 may not be output during the ST period. Furthermore, the number of winning balls of the electric Chu DC and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 are displayed at once, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 194 (1) -7 is 006183 Get. In addition, a hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 is additionally displayed. Furthermore, even at this timing, there is a winning of one ball at the second special figure starting port 232.

  In the following FIG. 194 (1) -8, decoration symbols are confirmed and displayed, but the cumulative prize ball number is displayed at the second special figure starting port 232 at the timing shown in FIG. The number of award balls has increased by 0061686. Further, a hold icon h24 of the fourth special figure 2 is additionally displayed.

  Thus, the symbol variation display during the ST period is repeatedly performed without winning a big hit, and in FIG. 194 (1) -9, the remaining number of times until the electric support state is completed is 90 times. In other words, in FIG. 194 (1) -9, the final display of the lost symbol is performed, the special symbol variation display of the tenth special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the ST period ends. It will be. When the ST period ends, although not shown, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched. Further, in FIG. 194 (1) -9, the cumulative prize ball number display is “006203 acquisition”.

  In FIG. 194 (1) -10, the 11th special symbol variation display is started after the big hit game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. From FIG. 194 (1) -10 where the decorative symbol variation display is started to the same diagram (1) -11 during the decorative symbol variation display, the electric Chu DC is open. is there. However, since the symbol variation display of the special figure here is the eleventh symbol variation display after the jackpot game is over, the ST period in this example has elapsed, and the second special diagram start port The number of winning balls for winning 232 is not added and displayed. Therefore, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 194 (1) -12, the fourth hold icon h24 of the special figure 2 is additionally displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 194 (1) -13, the 11th special symbol variation display ends.

  After that, the symbol variation display during the electric support period is repeated without winning the big hit, and in FIG. 194 (1) -14, the 100th time after the end of the big hit game, which is the last of the electric support period. The special symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (1) -14, the ST remaining number displayed on the first UI unit 280 is displayed as “Last”. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (1) 15, the symbol variation display of the 100th special symbol is not a big hit, and “decoration 2”-“decoration 5” —a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. [0062] Along with the display of “BONUS × 3” indicating that “decoration 7” is stopped and the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot is 3, and the display of the title corresponding to the number of consecutive hits (general return) 006203 A display of the number of accumulated prize balls such as being acquired is also displayed. In FIG. 194 (1) -16, “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7” are confirmed and displayed, and the electric support period ends. Therefore, the character display of “right-handed” disappears from the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (1) -16, and the 101th special symbol variation display is started after the big hit game ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 194 (1) -17, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a display for returning to the left. This state is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, which is not shown, but the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched.

  In the example shown in FIG. 193 to FIG. 194, during the jackpot game, both the electric chew prize and the general prize opening prize are added, and both the electric chew prize and the general prize opening prize are added during the entire ST period. This is an example in which neither the electric chew prize nor the general prize opening prize is added during the electric support period after the end of the event. Here, during the big hit game, only one of the electric chew prize and the general prize opening prize may be added. Further, only one of the ST periods may be added. Alternatively, only the other may be added in the ST period. Further, in the electric support period, the one added in the ST period may not be added, and the other may be added.

  The ST period is a period of probability change state that starts when the jackpot game ends. However, as a period advantageous to the player, a probability change state that is unrelated to the end of jackpot game (a special high probability game) It may be a period (for example, a certain production mode period) or a period of the electric support state.

  FIG. 195 shows an example of an effect when a prize is awarded to a general prize opening different from the unit general prize opening 2266 during the big hit game, and further shows an example of a case where a winning to an irregular general prize opening occurs. It is.

  First, a description will be given of an example of an effect in a case where a winning is made in a general winning opening different from the unit general winning opening 2266 during the big hit game. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 are executed, the example described below may be executed. In the following, differences from the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted, but the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

  195 (4) -2 to (5) -10 in FIG. 195 are the same as FIG. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -10 in FIG. ing.

  In FIG. 195 (5) -11, the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A general winning opening different from the unit general winning opening 2266 is also shown. The different general winning opening may be any one of the four general winning openings 2261 to 2264 provided in the left area shown in FIG. 175, or the general winning opening provided in the right area. The mouth 2265 may be used. Here, a description will be given as a general winning opening 2265 provided in the right region.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (5) -7 and FIG. 5 (8) -8, when there is a winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340, the number of winning balls of the winning is displayed in addition. In addition, a winning notification is also displayed with both a display (general winning opening notification notification INH) and sound (sound B), but there is a winning at the general winning port 2265 provided in the right area different from the attacker unit 2340. In such a case, the number of winning balls for the winning is not added and displayed, and no winning notification is made.

  In FIG. 195 (5) -12, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a is added and displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004512 being acquired. ing. Note that there is no output of winning sound (sound C) from the speaker 120. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 195 (5) -12 and (5) -13, there is no addition display of the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 2265, and notification by displaying the winning is displayed. No sound is reported.

  In this example, right-handed and the first variable winning opening 234a of the attacker unit 2340 is aimed, the first variable winning opening 2266 closest to the first variable winning opening 234a is placed in the first variable winning opening 2266a. In the case where a game ball that deviates from the mouth 234a wins, an addition display of the number of winning balls and a winning notification are performed. In other words, only the unit general prize opening 2266 with the highest winning frequency among the six general prize winning openings 2261 to 2266, which may naturally win if the player makes a right turn and aims at the first variable prize winning opening 234a. The target ball number is added and a prize is notified.

  FIG. 195 (5) -13 'is another example continued from FIG. In this example, contrary to the explanation so far, the general winning opening prize notification display INH is displayed for winning in the general winning slot 2265 provided in the right area different from the attacker unit 2340, The number of winning balls of the general winning opening 2265 is also displayed. The display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 195 (5) -13 'is from 004512 GET to 004515 GET. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that a general winning opening 2265 has been won. Note that, unlike the sound B, the sound B may be replaced with a sound dedicated to the general winning a prize opening 2265 (sound *). In this example, irregular winnings such as winning a general winning opening away from the first variable winning opening 234a (attacker) while the period is aimed at the first variable winning opening 234a (attacker). In addition, the addition display of the number of prize balls and the winning notification are performed.

  Next, an example will be described in which a right-handed place should be left-handed during a big hit game. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 are executed, the example described below may be executed. In the following, differences from the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted, but the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

  FIGS. 195 (4) -2 to (5) -8 shown at the right end are the same as FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -8. Has been started.

  FIG. 196 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 195, and further shows a part of the example when a door opening error occurs during the big hit game.

  FIGS. 196 (5) -9 to (5) -13 continuing from FIG. 195 (5) -8 are the same as FIGS. 193 (5) -9 to (5) -13, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, in the second round, there is one winning ball in each of the first variable winning port 234a and the unit general winning port 2266, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004515Get.

  On the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (5) -14, a first variable winning port 234a and a unit general winning port 2266 provided in the attacker unit 2340 are shown. On the left side of the opposite side, one of the four general winning ports 2261 to 2264 provided in the left area shown in FIG. 175 (here, the general winning port 2261) is shown. In FIG. 196 (5) -14, left-handed is performed where originally a right-handed should be made, and there is a single ball winning in the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area.

  In this example, if there is a winning in the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area during the period when it should be right-handed, the number of winning balls is not displayed and the winning notification is made. Is not done at all. In FIG. 196 (5) -15, the addition display of the number of prize balls for the winning in the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area is not performed, and the notification about the winning and the notification by sound are performed. Not. On the other hand, in FIG. 196 (5) -15, an error notification (warning) such as “Please turn right” is displayed.

  FIG. 196 (5) -14 ′ is another example continued from FIG. 5 (5) -13. In this example as well, left-handed is performed where the right-handing should have been originally performed and provided in the left region. There is a single winning prize at the general winning opening 2261. In FIG. 196 (5) -15 ′ continued from FIG. 196 (5) -14 ′, in contrast to the above description, the general winning opening is also given to the winning in the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region. The winning notification display INH is displayed, and the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 2261 is also displayed. The display of the cumulative number of prize balls shown in FIG. 196 (5) -15 'is from 004515 GET to 004518 GET. Note that the speaker 120 does not output a sound for notifying that a winning has been made to the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area. However, you may make it output the winning sound of the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area. In this case, the winning sound may be the sound B or may be a sound dedicated to the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region, unlike the sound B. Also, in FIG. 196 (5) -15 ′, an error notification (warning) such as “right-handed here” is displayed suddenly from Machiko-sensei's character MCK instead of the long-length character BCH. Warning), an addition display of the number of winning balls for winning in a general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area, and notification of the winning are also performed. It should be noted that the general winning award winning notification display INH, which is a winning notification display for the general winning opening 2261 provided in the left region, does not overlap with the error notification (warning), but is not overlapped. , May overlap or may overlap.

  Here, for example, the general winning holes 2262 to 2264 may be general winning holes in which no information regarding the number of winning balls won by the winning is given even if there is a winning. . Alternatively, only the unit general winning port 2266 among the plurality of general winning ports 2261 to 2262 may be a target for reporting information related to the number of winning balls. That is, only the unit general winning opening 2266 is a general winning opening where the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed, and may be a general winning opening where a winning notification is made.

  Next, an example in the case where a door opening error occurs during the big hit game will be described. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 are executed, the example described below may be executed. In the following, differences from the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted, but the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

  196 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (8) -8 shown at the right end are the same as FIG. 193 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (8) -8. Has been started.

  FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 196.

  FIGS. 197 (5) -9 to (5) -16 following FIG. 196 (5) -8 are the same as FIGS. 193 (5) -9 to (5) -16, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, when the second round is over, an over prize is generated. Also, a door opening error occurs at the timing of FIG. 197 (5) -17. That is, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 1 is opened, and an error notification (warning) of “the door is open” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (5) -17. The display is displayed at the center of the screen, and a door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (5) -17, the addition display of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 004671 Get. In the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, an over-winning notification display ONH ′ in which characters “Holiday +15” are displayed on a transparent background together with the princess character is displayed. The over-winning notification display ONH 'is displayed in a special manner because it overlaps with the occurrence of a door opening error. That is, the normal display mode is a certain background color shown in FIG. 193 (5) -17, whereas in this special mode, it is a transparent background. At least a part of the over-winning notification display ONH 'overlaps at least a part of the error notification (warning) indication that "the door is open", but the over-winning notification display ONH' is transparent in a special manner. Since they are backgrounds, they are not difficult to see each other. However, the display of the over-winning notification may be a normal display mode. It should be noted that at least a portion of the over winning notification display ONH 'may overlap at least a portion of the error notification (warning) display that “the door is open”, or conversely, “the door is open. At least a part of the error notification (warning) display may overlap with at least a part of the over-winning notification display ONH ′. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A which is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. This sound A is output from the left speaker 120, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the right speaker 120. Note that the sound A that is an over-winning sound and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together from the left and right speakers 120, or may be output continuously. Alternatively, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output in preference to the over winning sound (sound A) in terms of volume or output time.

  Thereafter, round digestion proceeds, and in FIG. 197 (5) -18, the fifth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. Even when the fifth round is started, the door opening error has not been eliminated, and the error notification (warning) display “the door is open” is still displayed in the center of the screen. Further, a door opening sound (warning sound) is still output from the speaker 120. In the following FIG. 197 (5) -19, there is a single ball winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. At this timing, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is eliminated. As a result, the display of the error notification (warning) that “the door is open” disappears, and the output of the door opening sound (warning sound) is also terminated.

  In FIG. 197 (5) -20, an attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004998Get. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (5) -20, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5000, and further breaks through 5000 balls. In addition, a door opening error occurs again, and in FIG. 197 (5) -20, first, a door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120.

  Then, a little later, as shown in FIGS. 197 (5) -21, an error notification (warning) “door is open” is displayed at the center of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of the error notification (warning) may be displayed simultaneously with the output of the door opening sound (warning sound), or may be displayed before the output of the door opening sound (warning sound). Also, in FIG. 197 (5) -21, a general winning opening prize notification display INH is displayed. Further, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00501 Get, and a drill number breakthrough display KTH ′ is also displayed so as to overlap the face portion of the character MCK of the teacher Machiko. This drill number breakthrough display KTH 'is displayed in a special manner due to the occurrence of a door opening error and the display timing overlapping. That is, the normal display mode is a display mode in which the panda character shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21 is shown, whereas in this special mode, the panda character is not shown. "" Is also somewhat small. Here, the number of breakthrough display is displayed by changing the display mode and changing the display position so as not to overlap with the display of the error notification (warning) that “the door is open”. However, the number of breakthrough display may be a normal display mode or may be displayed at a normal display position. It should be noted that at least a portion of the drilling number breakthrough indication KTH 'may overlap at least a portion of the error notification (warning) indication that “the door is open”, or conversely, “the door is open. At least part of the error notification (warning) display may overlap with at least part of the drill number breakthrough display KTH ′. Also, the drill number breakthrough display KTH ′ and the cumulative prize ball number display (“005001Get” display) do not overlap, and a special sound congratulating the speaker 120 that the cumulative prize ball number has exceeded 5000 balls. The special sound D is output from the left speaker 120, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the right speaker 120. The special sound D is output from the left and right speakers 120. And door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together or alternately, and only one of special sound D and door opening sound (warning sound) is output, The other door may not be output, or the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output in preference to the special sound D in terms of volume or output time. Unit general prize opening 226 May also output sound B for informing that there was prize to.

  Eventually, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is eliminated. As a result, the error notification (warning) “door is open” disappears and the door opening sound (warning sound) is also output.

  FIGS. 197 (5) -22 to (1) -8 are the same as FIGS. 194 (5) -22 to (1) -8, and detailed explanation is omitted, but the big hit game is finished. The symbol variation display is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display of the first 10 special symbols is performed, and is in a special diagram high probability normal diagram high probability state (probability variation and electric support state).

  FIG. 198 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 197, and further shows a part of the example when a dish full tank error occurs during the big hit game.

  FIGS. 198 (1) -9 to (1) -17 following FIG. 197 (1) -8 are the same as FIGS. 194 (1) -9 to (1) -17, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the ST period has ended and the power support period has also ended.

  Next, an example in which a dish full tank error occurs during a big hit game will be described. In addition, in the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 are executed, the example described below may be executed. In the following, differences from the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted, but the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

  FIGS. 198 (4) -2 to (5) -7 are the same as FIGS. 193 (4) -2 to (5) -7, and detailed description is omitted, but the first round is started. , There is a single winning at the unit general winning opening 2266.

  A dish full error occurs at the timing of FIG. 198 (5) -8. That is, the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with game balls, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (5) -8 displays an error notification (warning) “Please remove the ball”. Is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a ball removal sound (warning sound). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (5) -8, the general winning opening prize notification display INH is displayed, and the cumulative number of prize balls displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is added to the unit general winning opening 2266 for the number of award balls, and the cumulative number of award balls is displayed as 004497 Get. The error notification (warning) message “please remove the ball”, the general winning opening prize notification display INH, and the cumulative prize ball number display are not overlapped, and the three types of display are difficult to see. Not. The only part of the error notification (warning) message “please pull out the sphere” overlaps the face part of Machiko-sensei's character MCK. In addition, a sound B is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the unit general prize opening 2266 has been won. This sound B is output from the left speaker 120, and the ball removal sound (warning sound) is output from the right speaker 120. Note that the sound B that is a winning sound and the ball removal sound (warning sound) may be output together from the left and right speakers 120, or may be output continuously. Before the end of one round, the ball is removed from the lower plate 128 and the full plate error is eliminated.

  FIG. 198 (5) -9 shows the state of the interval between the first and second rounds. FIG. 198 (5) -9 to FIG. 5 (5) -16 are shown in FIG. 193 (5) -9. ~ Same as (5) -16 in the figure, and detailed explanation is omitted, but when the second round is over, an over winning is generated. Also, the two errors described above, the door opening error and the dish full error, occur at the timing of FIG. 198 (5) -17. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (5) -17, an error notification (warning) “door is open” is displayed in the center of the screen, and the door 120 sounds (warning) from the speaker 120. Sound) is output. In addition, an error notification (warning) “Please remove the ball” is also displayed. The speaker 120 does not output a ball removal sound (warning sound), but may output a ball removal sound (warning sound). For example, a door opening sound (warning sound) may be output and then a ball removing sound (warning sound) may be output, or a door opening sound (warning sound) and a ball opening sound (warning sound) may be output alternately. May be. Alternatively, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output in preference to the volume or output time over the ball removal sound (warning sound). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (5) -17, the addition display of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 004671 Get. In the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, an over-winning notification display ONH ′ in which characters “Holiday +15” are displayed on a transparent background together with the princess character is displayed. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound A which is an over winning sound for notifying that there has been an over winning. This sound A is output from the left speaker 120, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the right speaker 120. Note that the sound A that is an over-winning sound and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together from the left and right speakers 120, or may be output continuously. Over-winning notification display ONH 'overlaps with the error notification (warning) indication that “the door is open”, and the error notification (warning) indication that “please remove the ball” also overlaps. ing. For this reason, the over-winning notification display ONH 'is more difficult to visually recognize even if it is a transparent background in a special manner, as compared with the case where it is not overlapped. For this reason, the display position of the over-winning notification display ONH 'may be changed to a position that does not overlap with the error display, or the over-winning notification display ONH' may not be displayed. On the other hand, the display of the error notification (warning) that “the door is open” and the display of the error notification (warning) that “please pull out the sphere” do not overlap each other, and the visibility is good. However, both error notifications (warnings) may overlap at least partially, and the error notification (warning) indication that “the door is open” says “please pull out the ball”. There may be cases where the error notification (warning) display overlaps, or vice versa.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, round digestion proceeds, and in FIG. 199 (5) -18, the fifth round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. Even when the 5th round is started, the door open error and the dish full error have not been resolved. Warning) is still displayed. It should be noted that the over-winning notification display ONH 'disappears, and these two types of error display only overlap the character MCK of the teacher Machiko, so that the visual recognition is good. Further, a door opening sound (warning sound) is still output from the speaker 120. As described above, the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output and then the ball removing sound (warning sound) may be output, or the door opening sound (warning sound) and the ball opening sound (warning sound) may be output. You may continue outputting alternately.

  In the following FIG. 199 (5) -19, there is a single-ball winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. At this timing, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is eliminated. As a result, the display of the error notification (warning) that “the door is open” disappears, and the output of the door opening sound (warning sound) is also terminated. However, even at this timing, the pan full error has not been eliminated, and the error notification (warning) message “please remove the ball” is still displayed. In addition, from the speaker 120, a ball removal sound (warning sound) is output this time.

  In FIG. 199 (5) -20, the attacker winning notification display ANH is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 004998Get. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (5) -20, there is one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, the cumulative number of winning balls reaches 5000, and further breaks through 5000 balls. At this timing, the ball is removed from the lower pan 128 and the pan full error disappears, the error notification (warning) message “Please remove the ball” disappears, and the output of the ball clearing sound (warning sound) is also terminated. ing. However, this time, the door opening error occurs again, and in FIG. 199 (5) -20, first, a door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the speaker 120.

  A little later, as shown in FIGS. 199 (5) -21, an error notification (warning) “door is open” is displayed at the center of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of the error notification (warning) may be displayed simultaneously with the output of the door opening sound (warning sound), or may be displayed before the output of the door opening sound (warning sound). Also, in FIG. 199 (5) -21, a general winning opening prize notification display INH is displayed. Furthermore, the cumulative number of award balls is displayed as 00501 Get, and a special number breakthrough number display KTH ′ is also displayed so as to overlap the face portion of the character MCK of Mr. Machiko. The display of the number of breakthrough display KTH ′ is changed so that it does not overlap with the error notification (warning) display that “the door is open”. Note that the display position may also be changed. However, the number of breakthrough display may be a normal display mode. It should be noted that at least a portion of the drilling number breakthrough indication KTH 'may overlap at least a portion of the error notification (warning) indication that “the door is open”, or conversely, “the door is open. At least part of the error notification (warning) display may overlap with at least part of the drill number breakthrough display KTH ′. On the other hand, the drill number breakthrough display KTH ′ and the cumulative prize ball number display (“005001Get” display) do not overlap each other, and the cumulative number of prize balls has exceeded 5000 from the speaker 120. This special sound D is output from the left speaker 120, and the door opening sound (warning sound) is output from the right speaker 120. The left and right speakers From 120, the special sound D and the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output together or alternately, and either the special sound D or the door opening sound (warning sound) may be output. Only one side may be output and the other may not be output, or the door opening sound (warning sound) is output in preference to the special sound D in terms of volume or output time. In addition, Sound notifying that there was a win to knit general winning opening 2266 B may also be outputted.

  When the error notification (warning) message “Please remove the ball” is displayed, the display position is changed from the normal display position (see FIG. 199 (5) -19), and the number of breakthroughs is displayed. It may be avoided that it overlaps with KTH ′, or it may overlap with the drill number breakthrough display KTH ′ without changing the display position. In this case, the display of the error notification (warning) “please remove the ball” may overlap the drill number breakthrough display KTH ′, or vice versa.

  Eventually, the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is closed, and the door opening error is eliminated. As a result, the error notification (warning) “door is open” disappears and the door opening sound (warning sound) is also output.

  FIGS. 199 (5) -22 to (1) -8 are the same as FIGS. 194 (5) -22 to (1) -8, and detailed explanation is omitted, but the big hit game is finished. The symbol variation display is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display of the first 10 special symbols is performed, and is in a special diagram high probability normal diagram high probability state (probability variation and electric support state).

  The example of the door opening error and the pan full error has been described above. However, in the door opening error and the pan full error, the door opening error is more likely to be related to fraud and is a serious error. Examples of serious errors handled in the same manner as the door opening error shown in FIGS. 196 to 199 include, for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an error detected by the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600, and a clerk. It is possible to enumerate errors that cannot be resolved without calling, errors that do not automatically disappear (not disappear) even if the error is resolved, and the like. Moreover, as an example of an error handled in the same manner as the dish full tank error shown in FIGS. It is possible to list errors that can be displayed, errors that are automatically hidden (disappear) when errors are resolved, and the like.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating an example when power interruption / recovery occurs during a big hit game.

  In the same pachinko machine as the pachinko machine in which the production examples shown in FIG. 193 to FIG. In the following, differences from the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted, but the description of the effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 194 may be applied. it can.

  200 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (5) -8 are the same as FIG. 193 (4) -2 to FIG. 5 (8) -8, and detailed description is omitted, but the first round is started. ing.

  In FIG. 200 (5) -9, power interruption occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -10, power is turned on immediately and power is restored. The first door member 2341ah of the first variable prize opening 234a that was fully opened at the time of power interruption is also fully opened at the time of power recovery, and until the attacker close command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 after power recovery. , Remains fully open. In FIG. 200 (5) -10, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L informs the user that power has been restored, such as “Please wait for a while.” Only “In preparation” is displayed. In the preparation display, a power recovery command or a normal return command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 to the sub control unit side (the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. 4). It is a display that is displayed in response. In addition, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -10, there is a single winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 in the state where the display in preparation is displayed.

  In FIG. 5 (5) -11 continued from FIG. 200 (5) -10, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The power recovery command or normal return command transmitted from the main control unit 300 includes information on the number of held balls, and the second held number display is a display displayed according to the information on the number of held balls. is there. Further, on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (5) -11, a display for prompting the player to make a right strike is displayed, such as “please make a right strike”. A character display “right-handed” is also displayed below the number of holds. The display for prompting the right strike is a display that is displayed according to the firing position command that is transmitted from the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on and that specifies the right strike or the left strike. Note that the firing position information may be included in the power recovery command or the normal return command.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (5) -12, as the default screen of the jackpot game, the character MCK of the teacher Machi, the start display of the cumulative number of winning balls (000000Get), and the characters “BONUS” The display is displayed, but the number of rounds is not displayed. The power recovery command or normal return command transmitted from the main control unit 300 includes information on the jackpot game, and the default screen of the jackpot game is a display displayed according to the information on the jackpot game. Note that the character display of “BONUS” is an alternative to the display of a decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7” in FIG. 200 (5) -8) when a big hit is made. The information on the jackpot game includes information indicating that it was in the jackpot game state at the time of the power interruption (before power recovery), but does not include the jackpot stop symbol, information on the number of winning balls, and the number of rounds Therefore, immediately after power recovery, a start display (000000Get) of the cumulative number of winning balls and a character display of “BONUS” are displayed, and the number of rounds is not displayed. Here, for the addition of the number of prize balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 in the state where the preparation in progress display shown in FIG. 200 (5) -10 is displayed, a winning command is transmitted from the main control unit 300. However, no addition display is made at this timing. Even if there is no launch position command, if it can be understood from the information about the big hit game that the sub-control unit side 400, 500 was in the big hit game state at the time of power interruption (before power recovery), a display prompting the right hit is displayed. It is also possible to display. Even if various information is not included in the power recovery command or the normal recovery command, the main control unit 300 is in a big hit gaming state at the time of power interruption (before power recovery) from the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. If the jackpot command indicating the number of held balls or the number of reserved balls indicating the number of held balls at the time of power interruption (before power recovery) is transmitted, the display screen shown in FIG. 200 (5) -11 can be displayed. .

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -12, there is a single winning in the first variable winning opening 234a in a state where the default screen of the big hit game is displayed.

  In FIG. 200 (5) -13, an attacker prize notification display ANH is displayed in accordance with the winning command of the first variable winning opening 234a from the main control unit 300, and further, the winning of the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed. Is added to the start display of the cumulative prize ball number, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number shown in FIG. 200 (5) -13 is 000015Get. However, the winning sound of the sound C is not output from the speaker 120. When the default screen of the jackpot game is displayed and there is a win in the general winning slot (in this case, the unit general winning slot 2266), the cumulative winning ball number is not added and displayed. Neither a notification nor a winning notification by sound output is performed.

  Thereafter, winning in the first variable winning opening 234a continues, and in FIG. 200 (5) -14, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 00120Get. Also in FIG. 200 (5) -14, there is a single-ball winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. The winning here is the tenth ball winning from before power interruption / recovery. That is, before the power interruption / power recovery, there is a single ball winning at the timing of FIG. 200 (5) -5, and when viewing after the power interruption / power recovery, it is the ninth ball winning. The main control unit 300 saves the number of winnings in the first round as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is cut off, and reads the return data in the power recovery process in step S111 shown in FIG. Thereafter, in the special figure state update process (steps S225 and S227) shown in FIG. 7, when the number of winnings reaches the upper limit number before the elapse of a predetermined opening period, the first door member 2341ah is closed.

  In FIG. 200 (5) -15, an attacker prize notification display ANH is displayed, and the number of winning balls for winning in the first variable winning opening 234a is additionally displayed. The displayed number of accumulated prize balls is 000135Get. That is, the number of winning balls for winning at the first variable winning opening 234a at the timing of FIG. 200 (5) -5 before power interruption / recovery is not included. Also, the number of winning balls for winning in the unit general winning opening 2266 before power interruption / recovery is not included. Also here, the winning sound of the sound C is not output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 200 (5) -16, the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is in the middle of changing from the fully open state to the fully closed state. In the middle of this, a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a by chance, and an eleventh winning (over winning) occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (5) -17, the addition of the number of winning balls for over winning is performed, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 00150Get. Note that the over-winning notification display ONH shown in FIG. 193 (5) -17 is not displayed. Further, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a shown in FIG. 200 (5) -17 has been changed from the fully open state to the fully closed state, and is in the fully closed state. Note that the speaker A does not output an over-winning sound A.

  In FIG. 200 (5) -18, the second round is started, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is fully opened. When the second round is started, a round designation command and a symbol command are transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (5) -18, “decorative symbol 7” which is a big hit stop symbol is displayed together with 2R display. However, the cumulative number of winning balls does not include the number of winning balls before power failure / recovery, but only the number of winning balls for the first variable winning opening 234a obtained after power failure / power recovery. It remains 000150 Get.

  Thereafter, winning in the first variable winning opening 234a continues, and in FIG. 200 (5) -19, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is 00285Get. Also in this FIG. 200 (5) -19, there is a single winning at the first variable winning opening 234a. The winning here is the tenth ball winning in the second round. The unit general winning opening 2266 also has a single winning prize. In FIG. 200 (5) -20, an attacker winning notification display ANH and a general winning opening notification notification INH are both displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of winning balls of the unit general winning opening 2266 are displayed at the same time, and the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed as 00003Get. Further, the left speaker 120 outputs a sound B for notifying that a winning has been made to the unit general winning opening 2266, and that the right speaker 120 has received a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a. A sound C for notification is output.

  In FIG. 200 (5) -21, which is the end of the second round, an over-winning has occurred. However, as shown in FIG. 200 (5) -22, an over-winning notification is given for the over-winning here. ONH is displayed, and the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. 200 (5) -22 is displayed as 000318Get by adding and displaying the number of winning balls for over winning. The speaker 120 outputs a sound A that is an over-winning prize.

  In the example described above, in the round of power interruption / recovery, the number of winning balls for the winning at the first variable winning opening 234a is displayed, but the winning sound is not notified, and the general winning opening (here, In addition to displaying the addition of the number of winning balls for winning a prize in the unit general winning opening 2266) and receiving the winning notification, the addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls and the winning notification from the round following the power-off / restoring round are interrupted.・ Do the same as before power recovery. This is because the round designation command and symbol command are received from the round following the power-off / power-recovery round, and the jackpot game (round effect) itself has returned to normal, so the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed. And the winning announcement is also restored to normal.

  Further, at least in the case of over-winning in the power-off / recovery round, no winning notification (display of over-winning notification display ONH or output of over-winning sound) is not performed. It is unfortunate for the player that the first door member 2341a is closed after a certain opening period before the number of winnings in one round reaches the upper limit. The over-winning phenomenon is such that the game ball is about to win when the attacker tries to close, and the game ball wins when the first door member 2341a is about to close after a certain opening period has passed. It seems to have done. Here, if the cumulative number of winning balls of one round is displayed, the player can determine whether the closing of the first door member 2341a is a closing when the number of winnings reaches the upper limit or a certain opening period. It can be distinguished whether it is closed after the elapse of time, but in the rounds of power interruption and power recovery, the cumulative number of winning balls of one round is not accurately displayed, it is difficult to distinguish, and unfortunately for the player For over-winnings that may be expected, we will refrain from winning notifications.

  Note that the winning sound and the over winning sound of the general winning opening may not be output from the power-off / recovery round to the end of the big hit game. That is, the sound output may not be restored after the round following the power-off / recovery round. Or, conversely, sound output may be output regardless of power interruption / recovery. For example, sound C, sound B, and sound A may be output from a round in which power is interrupted or restored. In particular, by outputting the sound A which is an over-winning sound, even if the closing of the first door member 2341a looks like a closing after a certain opening period has passed, In some cases, profits can be reported with certainty.

  Further, the winning notification display may not be performed from the round of power interruption / power recovery until the end of the big hit game. For example, the display ANH of the attacker prize notification, the display INH of the general winning opening prize notification, and the display ONH of the over-winning notification may not be displayed.

  Furthermore, from the round of power interruption / recovery to the end of the jackpot game, while displaying the winning notification display, the winning notification sound may not be output, or conversely, the winning notification sound is output, The winning notification display may not be displayed.

  In this example, the general prize opening is the unit general prize opening 2266, but may be other general prize openings 2261 to 2265. In addition, in addition to or in addition to the general winning a prize opening, with respect to winning in the electric Chu DC (second special figure start opening 232), an addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls shown in FIG. May be performed.

  In this example, the cumulative number of winning balls after power recovery does not include the number of winning balls before power interruption / power recovery. The number is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM as return data, and when the power is restored, the return data is read out, and the number of winning balls before power failure / power recovery is included in the cumulative number of winning balls after power recovery. May be. Alternatively, the main control unit 300 saves the accumulated number of winning balls as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM at the time of power failure, reads the return data at the time of power recovery, and acquires it before power failure / power recovery. The number of winning balls may be included in the cumulative number of winning balls after power recovery. In these cases, the number of winning balls before power failure / power recovery from the power failure / power recovery round may be included in the cumulative number of winning balls after power recovery, or after the power failure / power recovery round. From the round, the number of winning balls before power interruption / power recovery may be included in the cumulative number of winning balls after power recovery.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 200 described above are examples in one pachinko machine 100, and even in one pachinko machine 100 that can execute the examples shown in FIGS. 15 to 174, FIG. The example shown in FIG. 200 is feasible.

  In addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the speaker 120, the notification means includes a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, various lamps (LEDs) 442 and 452, and various effect movable bodies. 224, 224E, 224H, 224Ga to Gd may be used, and these may be used alone or in combination. The winning means include an attacker (first variable winning port 234a or / and second variable winning port 235a), general winning ports 2261 to 2266, and electric Chu DC (second special figure starting port 232). In addition, the first special figure starting port 230 and the general figure starting port 228 may be used. Here, if the winning means are divided into two, a group of attackers (first variable winning port 234a or / and second variable winning port 235a), general winning ports 2261 to 2266, electric Chu DC (second The special drawing start port 232), the first special drawing start port 230, and the universal drawing start port 228 are divided into groups.

  In addition, in the present invention, in addition to the 1-2 type machine, ST machine, probability changing machine, and right-handed machine, if a big hit is not made, a lottery lottery is performed, and a small hit is won with a high probability, and the ball is increased by a small hit It can also be applied to a type of pachinko machine.

  In addition, when passing the normal starting port 228 (gate) a certain number of times (for example, 10 times), a prize ball is paid out and a premier effect may be given. Not done.

In the above description,
[Notifying means [for example, any one, two, or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the speaker 120, etc.] ,
Multiple winning means,
A game machine equipped with
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, an attacker (first variable winning opening 234a or / and second variable winning opening 235a)],
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means [for example, general winning ports 2261 to 2266, electric Chu DC (second special figure starting port 232)],
The notification means is in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as “a certain state”) [for example, a big hit gaming state, a state during the ST period, a power support (special figure low probability general figure high probability) state, a big hit It is a means capable of reporting information on the number of winning balls acquired in a different probability (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability, special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability) state after the game ends,
The notifying means provides information on the number of winning balls acquired by the game balls entering the first winning means (hereinafter referred to as “first information”) [for example, attacker-acquired winning ball number information]. Is a means that may inform,
The notifying means is information relating to the number of winning balls acquired when a game ball has entered the second winning means (hereinafter referred to as “second information”) [for example, general winning mouth winning prize ball number information. ] May be used to notify
In the first case in the certain state [for example, when the jackpot game with probability variation shown in FIG. 180 is being executed (period), FIG. 182 (5) -21 to FIG. 183 (5) In the case (period) from the next round of the round in which the probability change promotion notification shown in -27 is performed until the jackpot game is ended (period), the probability change is caused by the V prize shown in FIGS. 184 (5) -23 to (5) -29 When the jackpot game is executed (period) from the next round of the round that has won the game, when the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 is executed (period), FIG. 188 (5)- When the jackpot game (5R to 8R to jackpot game end effect) after the round shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 189 (5) -36 is executed (period), FIG. 191 (5) -2 to FIG. 192 (1) − When the symbol variation display of the special figure for the first 20 times after the jackpot game is completed (period) or as shown in FIG. 192 (1) -2 to FIG. 192 (1) -9 When the symbol variation display of the special figure for the first 20 times after the jackpot game is shown (part of the ST period), FIG. 193 (5) -2 to FIG. 194 (1)- When the symbol variation display of the special chart for the first ten times after the jackpot game to the jackpot game is finished (period) shown in FIG. 9, or FIGS. 194 (1) -2 to 192 (1) -9 When the probability variation state in which the symbol variation display of the first 10 special symbols after the jackpot game ends is maintained (ST period), etc.], the first information and the second Information notification (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”) [for example, FIG. 180 (5)- Is a means for performing a notification] by the display of "000018Get" shown in,
In the second case in the certain state [for example, when the big hit game without probability change shown in FIG. 181 is executed, FIG. 182 (5) -4 to FIG. 182 (5) -20 From the start of the first round shown to the round in which the probability change promotion notification was made (period), from the start of the first round shown in FIG. 183 (5) -4 to FIG. In the case (period), when a jackpot game other than the jackpot game related to the rank-up bonus shown in FIGS. 186 to 187 is executed (period), it is shown in FIGS. 188 (5) -4 to (5) -24. When the jackpot game (1R to 4R) before the round is continued (period), the special feature of the 21st time after the jackpot game is finished as shown in FIGS. 192 (1) -10 to 192 (1) -16 Figure design When the ST period ends after the dynamic display is started (the remaining period of the ST period), 11 after the jackpot game shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -10 to 192 (1) -16 ends In the case where the symbol variation display of the 100th special symbol is completed after the start of the symbol variation display of the 100th special symbol (electric support period), etc., the first information is not notified. Is a means for performing information notification (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”) [for example, notification by displaying “000015Get” shown in FIG. 181 (5) -8]
The first case and the second case are different cases,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the notification means. In addition, the player may easily recognize the first case in the certain state by the second notification. Further, the first case may be conspicuous.

  The certain state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. Alternatively, the player after the jackpot game may be in an advantageous state (high probability state). More specifically, it may be the state of the ST period (probability change state in which the number of games is determined), the probability change state, or the time-short state. Further, it may be ST period state + short time state.

  The first case is a case where a jackpot game with probability change is being performed, while the second case may be a case where a jackpot game without probability change is being performed. In addition, the first case is a case after it is suggested that there is a certain change in one big hit game, while the second case is a case where there is a certain change in one big hit game. It may be the case before it is suggested. The first case is after the probability change promotion is suggested in one jackpot game, whereas the second case is before the probability change promotion is suggested in one jackpot game. It may be the case. Further, the first case is a case of a big hit game related to a so-called rank up bonus, while the second case may be a case of a big hit game other than the rank up bonus. Also, the first case is after a successful success in a jackpot game related to one rank-up bonus, whereas the second case is a jackpot game related to one rank-up bonus. It may be a case before the continuous production is successful. Also, the first case is up to a certain number of games (for example, the first 20 times) in the ST period (for example, 100 times in total), whereas the second case is It may be the case after the number of games played (for example, the remaining 80 times). Further, the first case may be a case of the ST period, and the second case may be a case of a short time state after the end of the ST period. Further, the first case may be a case of the ST period, and the second case may be a case of a short time state after the end of the ST period.

  The first winning means may be an attacker, and the second winning means may be a general winning opening. The first winning means may be an attacker, and the second winning means may be a general winning port provided at a position closest to the attacker among a plurality of general winning ports. The first winning means may be an attacker, and the second winning means may be both a general winning opening and an electric chew (second special figure starting opening). The first winning means may be an electric chew (second special figure starting port), and the second winning means may be a general winning port. The second winning means may be all of the general winning ports of a plurality of general winning ports, or the general winning ports provided in the first area (for example, the right area, the area near the attacker). Or a general winning opening provided in the second region (for example, the left region, a region far from the attacker).

  The information regarding the number of prize balls acquired may be a number representing a specific number of prize balls, or may be a symbol or symbol representing the number of prize balls. Further, a meter, bar display, or level display indicating the number of winning balls may be used. Furthermore, it may be a number representing the number of prize balls different from the specific number of prize balls (for example, the number of prize balls more or less than the true number of prize balls), It may be a symbol or symbol, or a meter, bar display, or level display.

  Note that information on prize balls may be used instead of information on the number of prize balls acquired. For example, it may be a number representing the number of winning balls, a symbol or symbol, a meter, bar display, or level display. Further, instead of information relating to the number of winning balls acquired, information relating to winning may be used. For example, it may be a number representing the number of winnings, a symbol or symbol, a meter display, a bar display, or a level display.

  The first information may be a notification of the number of winning balls for each winning to the first winning means (for example, +15), or a notification of the cumulative total number of winning balls (for example, 2250 Get). There may be. The second information may be a notification of the number of winning balls for each winning to the second winning means (for example, +3), or a notification of the cumulative total number of winning balls (for example, 33 Get). There may be.

  In the second notification, the first information and the second information may be separately reported, or both may be notified together. For example, notification of the cumulative total number of winning balls of the first winning means (for example, 2250 Get, red bar display) and notification of the cumulative total number of winning balls of the second winning means (for example, 33 Get) , Blue bar display) may be separately notified, or both may be notified together (for example, 2283Get, gold-colored bar display).

  Whether it is the second notification or the first notification, it may be a display notification, a sound notification, a light notification, or a movable object notification. It may be a notification by a combination of these.

  In the first case in the certain state, if the timing of winning the first winning means is the same as the timing of winning the second winning means, the first information The notification may be performed first, and the second information may be notified later. Conversely, the second information may be notified first, and the first information may be notified later. Good. Alternatively, the notification of the first information and the notification of the second information may be performed simultaneously. Note that the notification of the second information may not be performed and only the notification of the first information may be performed. Conversely, the notification of the first information may not be performed and only the notification of the second information may be performed. May be performed.

  The informing means may be means for informing information on the number of prize balls acquired in the certain state without fail.

Also,
“The first winning means is a winning means whose state changes between a first state [for example, a difficult to win state (fully closed state)] and a second state [for example, easy to win state (fully open state)]. And
The second state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state,
In the first case, the first winning means is a winning means that repeats the second state a plurality of times [for example, a plurality of rounds],
In the first case, the notification means is a period in which the first winning means is in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) [for example, an interval between rounds, a jackpot game The second notification may be performed during the period in which the end effect (ending effect) is performed [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -17 to FIG. (5) -18, FIG. 5) -22 to (5) -23] in FIG.
The second notification, which may be performed during the first period, is a notification of information relating to the number of winning balls acquired by the game balls entering the second winning means during the first period [for example, [Additional display of accumulated prize balls]] [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -23],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the second information is information relating to the number of winning balls acquired by winning the second winning means during the period in which the first winning means is not in the easy-to-win state in the first case. It may be.

  According to this aspect, there is a case where the player does not feel that the first winning means is in the period in which the winning is not easy. In some cases, the first winning means may be able to fire a game ball during a period when the winning is not easy.

  Note that the notification unit may not perform the second notification during the first period, or may perform the second notification without fail.

  In addition, the second notification that may be performed in the first period may not be notification of information regarding the number of winning balls acquired by winning in the first period to the second winning means. Alternatively, the second winning means may be informed of information related to the number of winning balls acquired by winning in the first period.

Also,
The first winning means is a winning means that makes it easy for a game ball to enter by right-handed [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. 176]
The second winning means is a winning means [for example, a unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 176] that makes it easy for a game ball to enter by right-handed.
The notification means includes means for displaying [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
The display means is a display that prompts the player to make a right stroke (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”) [for example, the right stroke notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2 and the display shown in FIG. 180 (5) -3. It is a means that can display right-handed notification 2],
The operation promotion display includes a display simulating the first winning unit [for example, a display 234ah simulating the first variable winning port 234] and a display simulating the second winning unit [for example, a unit general winning port Display 2266h imitating 2266],
The operation promotion display prompts the game ball to enter the first winning means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first winning means can be recognized by the player, and the presence of the second winning means which is an extra winning means may be hinted.

  The operation promotion display may not prompt the player to win the second winning means. Here, “no need to be prompted to win” means that a display prompting a winning (for example, an arrow indicating a winning track of a ball or a character display such as “Aim for second winning means”) is displayed. It is not.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying the operation promotion display.

Also,
The second winning means is a plurality of general winning openings,
The plurality of general winning awards include a general winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a “left-handed general winning opening”) that facilitates winning by left-handed.
The plurality of general winning openings include a general winning opening that makes it easy to win by right-handed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting the player to make a right turn (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”),
When the display means displays the operation promotion display and there is a winning in the left-handed general winning opening, a display requesting the display means to change the right-handed manner is displayed on the display means. Is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.
It may be.

Also,
“The first winning means is a winning means for ending the second state when a certain number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as“ first number ”) [for example, the upper limit of 10] is entered. Yes,
The notification means is means capable of executing a third notification;
The notification means is means capable of executing a fourth notification;
The third notification is a notification that is executed when more than the first number of game balls enter the first winning means [for example, a sound that is an over winning sound shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18. A output, display ONH of over winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17],
The fourth notification is a notification that is executed each time a game ball enters the second winning means [for example, output of the sound B that is a general winning mouth winning sound shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12, FIG. 185 (5) -12, etc.] is a display of the general winning opening prize notification INH.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if the first winning means is normally fired, the upper limit number (the first number) can be awarded to the first winning means. In some cases, the over-winning exceeding the first number may occur in the winning means, and only in this case, the player is pleased with a special notification (third notification). The player can be pleased by notifying every time.

  The notification means may be a means for surely executing the third notification, and the notification means may be a means for surely executing the fourth notification.

Also,
The third notification is a notification including a notification by sound [for example, the sound A which is an over winning sound shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18]
The fourth notification is a notification including notification by sound [for example, sound B which is a general winning opening winning sound shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The third notification sound pitch and the fourth notification sound pitch are higher than the third notification sound pitch.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of excitement against an over-winning prize with a rare value.

Also,
“The first information is information on a cumulative total number of award balls acquired by entering a game ball into the first winning means,
The second information is information on a cumulative total number of award balls acquired when a game ball enters the second winning means,
The second notification is a notification of the total number obtained by adding the cumulative total number in the first information and the cumulative total number in the second information [for example, display of “000018Get” shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8] Notification by],
The fourth notification is a notification different from the notification of the second information [for example, a notification indicating that there has been a prize itself (output of sound B, display of general winning opening prize notification display INH)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, when the fourth notification is a notification of the cumulative total number of winning balls acquired by winning the second winning means, the second winning means is won. In some cases, it is difficult to understand whether or not the second winning means has been won by making another notification.

  The fourth notification may be notification of information on the number of winning balls acquired by one winning to the second winning means (for example, notification of +3).

Also,
'The notification means is means capable of executing a sixth notification,
The second notification is notification including notification by display,
The sixth notification is notification including notification by display,
The sixth notification may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value [for example, 5000] [for example, FIG. 192 (5) -21. And a notification by the output of the special sound D shown in FIG. 194 (5) -21].
The display by the second notification (hereinafter referred to as “sixth display”) [for example, the display of the number of breakthrough display KTH shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21] is also displayed ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display”.) [For example, “005001Get” shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21] is continuously displayed.
The second display and the sixth display are not overlapped with each other [eg, FIG. 192 (5) -21],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to inform the player that the total number has reached the certain value and to please the player, and to grasp the increase in prize balls during that time.

  The first display and the sixth display may be overlapped. For example, the sixth display may be overlapped with the first display, and conversely, the first display may be overlapped with the sixth display. Good.

  Here, the sixth notification that may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value is, for example, notification by a display such as “5000 balls reached”. It may also be a notification by a display such as “5000 ball breakthrough” which has reached and further broke through.

  Note that the notification means may be means for surely executing the sixth notification.

  In addition, the sixth notification may not be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value. There may be.

Also,
"The fourth notification is a notification including a notification by display [for example, a notification by display of the general winning opening prize notification display INH]
The display by the fourth notification may overlap the sixth display [for example, FIG. 194 (5) -21],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it can be displayed conspicuously that the certain value has been reached.

  Note that the display by the fourth notification may not overlap the sixth display, but conversely, the display by the fourth notification may necessarily overlap the sixth display. Good.

Also,
“The sixth display is a display including the display of the certain value,
The certain value is a value [for example, 5000] larger than the value of the maximum number of winning balls obtained in a single jackpot game including a plurality of rounds,
The sixth display may be overlapped with a ball removal display [for example, “please remove the ball” shown in FIG. 199 (5) -18].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, in a state where a large number of prize balls have been acquired, there is a possibility that a ball removal operation may be necessary, and when the sixth display is overlapped with the ball removal display, There may be cases where it is possible to realize that the unplugging operation is necessary.

  Note that the sixth display may not be overlapped with the ball removal display, but on the contrary, the sixth display may be necessarily overlapped with the ball removal display.

Also,
'The certain state is a state including a period in which the jackpot gaming state is executed,
After power is cut off during execution of a certain round and power is restored during execution of the certain round, the first winning means is set to the first winning means before the next round of the certain round is started. Even when a game ball exceeding the number [e.g., the upper limit of 10] has entered, the third notification [e.g., the sound A that is an over-winning sound shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18] Output, display of ON winning notification display ONH shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17] is not executed [for example, FIG. 200 (5) -17],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“If a game ball enters the second winning means after power interruption during the execution of the certain round and power restoration during the execution of the certain round, it was acquired by the entry of the game ball. Notification of information regarding the number of winning balls is performed as the second notification [for example, notification by displaying “000303Get” shown in FIG. 200 (5) -20].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  If the second winning means wins after the power is cut off during the execution of the round and the power is restored during the execution of the round, the number of winning balls won by the winning Information regarding the information is always performed as the second notification. The second notification may be performed every time the winning is made.

Also,
“The notification means is means capable of executing a fifth notification,
The fifth notification is performed every time a game ball enters the first winning means until the first number of game balls enters the first winning means [for example, FIG. 5) The output of the sound C shown in -15, the display of the attacker winning notification ANH shown in FIG. 187 (5) -15]
The third notification [e.g., the output of the sound A which is the over winning sound shown in FIG. 187 (5) -18, the display of the over winning notification display ONH shown in FIG. 187 (5) -17] and the first The five notification modes are different modes.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the third notification, the fourth notification, and the fifth notification may be able to be raised for each winning prize.

  The notification means may be a means for surely executing the fifth notification.

Also,
The fifth notification is notification including sound notification [for example, output of sound C shown in FIG. 187 (5) -15].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first winning means than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second prize means [for example, three balls] [for example, 15 balls] is more,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where a player who has more prize balls can be raised by raising the notification sound.

Also,
The first winning means is an attacker [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a or / and the second variable winning opening 235a]
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker [for example, general winning holes 2261 to 2266, electric Chu DC (second special figure starting port 232)],
The first notification is notification of only the first information.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first notification may be a notification of information relating to the number of winning balls acquired when a game ball has entered only the first winning means among the plurality of winning means.

Also,
The second winning means is an electric chew [for example, electric chew DC].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the second winning means is a variable start area where the size of the winning opening changes. On the other hand, when there is a winning in the starting area where the size of the winning opening is constant, the information regarding the number of winning balls acquired by the winning may not be notified.

Also,
“The second winning means is a general prize opening [for example, the unit general prize opening 2266 shown in FIG. 195, the general prize opening 2265 provided in the right area shown in FIG. 195 (5)-11, FIG. 196 (5 ) -14, a general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` Equipped with multiple general winning entries,
The second winning means is a general winning port [for example, a unit general winning port 2266 shown in FIG. 180] among the plurality of general winning ports.
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, information on the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is notified as the second notification [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -8]. “000018Get” shown in FIG.
When a game ball enters a general winning port other than the certain general winning port among the plurality of general winning ports [for example, the general winning ports 2261 to 2265], a prize obtained by the entry of the gaming ball Information on the number of balls is not reported,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The certain general winning opening may be a part of the plurality of general winning openings provided in the right region, or the general winning opening provided closest to the first winning means. It may be a winning opening. Alternatively, the certain general winning award is all of the plurality of general winning awards provided in the right area, and if there is a win in the general award opening provided in the left area, the winning ball obtained by the winning Information on the number may not be notified. On the contrary, the certain general winning award is a plurality of general winning awards provided in the left area, and if there is a winning in the general award opening provided in the right area, the award acquired by the winning is obtained. Information on the number of balls may not be notified. The certain general winning opening may be a part of the plurality of general winning openings provided in the left region.

Also,
"Multiple jackpots [For example, jackpot with probability variation, jackpot without probability variation, jackpot with V winning effect executed, jackpot for rank up bonus]
One of the plurality of jackpots is a first jackpot [eg, jackpot with probability variation],
One big hit of the plurality of big hits is a second big hit [eg, big hit without probability change],
The first case is a case where a jackpot game related to the first jackpot [for example, a jackpot game with probability change shown in FIG. 180] is executed,
The second case is a case where a jackpot game related to the second jackpot [for example, a jackpot game without probability change shown in FIG. 181] is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“Electric support state [For example, special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability]
The certain state is a state including a period during which the jackpot game is executed,
In the first case, the period during which the jackpot game is executed [for example, FIG. 191 (5) -1 to 192 (5) -25] and the period for the electric support state [for example, FIG. 192 (1)- 1 or a part of the period (1) -2 to 192 (1) -16] (hereinafter referred to as “third period”) [for example, FIG. 192 (1) -1 or FIG. (1) -2 to FIG. 192 (1) -9] are games being executed,
In the second case, a game is being executed in a period excluding the third period in the period of the electric support state [eg, FIG. 192 (1) -10 to FIG. 192 (1) -16]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of game balls into the electric Chu after the big hit game is also displayed in addition to the cumulative number of prize balls, the case of shifting to the electric support state after the big hit game is more in the non-electric support state. It is easier to add and display the cumulative number of prize balls than when the game is left as it is, and the interest of the game may be improved.

here,
With a probable state,
The certain state is a state including a period during which the jackpot game is executed,
The first case is a case where a game is being executed during a period during which the jackpot game is being executed and a part of the period of the probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period”). ,
The second case is a case where a game is being executed in a period excluding the fourth period in the period of the probability change state.
A game stand characterized by that.
It may be.

  The probability variation state here is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state. Alternatively, when the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of a game ball into the special figure 1 starting port after a big hit game is also added to the cumulative prize ball number, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (probability state and non-electricity state) However, it is easier to win with the electric chew with the blades open than the starting port of Special Figure 1, and it is easier to display the cumulative number of winning balls. In addition, it is easy to improve the interest of the game by adding and displaying the number of prize-winning balls of the electric chew in the electric support state.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
[Notifying means [for example, any one, two, or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the speaker 120, etc.] ,
Multiple winning means,
A game machine equipped with
It is possible to transition to the electric support state [for example, special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.]
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, an attacker (first variable winning opening 234a or / and second variable winning opening 235a), etc.]
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means [for example, a general winning opening 2261 to 2266, an electric Chu DC (second special figure starting opening 232), etc.]
The notification means is in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as “a certain state [for example, a big hit gaming state, a state during the ST period, an electric support (special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state, Is a means capable of reporting information on the number of winning balls acquired in different probability variations (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability, special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability) state, etc.]
The notification means is information relating to the number of winning balls acquired by the game balls entering the first winning means (hereinafter referred to as “first information [for example, attacker-acquired winning ball number information]”). Is a means that may inform
The informing means is referred to as information relating to the number of winning balls acquired when a game ball enters the second winning means (hereinafter referred to as “second information [for example, general winning mouth winning prize ball number information, etc.]”). .) Is a means that may be notified,
The notifying means is a fourth period in the certain state [e.g. , the first 10 special events after the end of the big hit game to the big hit game shown in FIGS . 193 (5) -2 to 194 (1) -9). informing the first information and the second information to the ST period, etc.] which symbol variable display of FIG is being performed (hereinafter, "second notification [e.g., shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8" 000018Get And so on "), and so on.
The notification means is a fifth period in the certain state [for example , as shown in FIG. 194 (1) -10 to FIG. 192 (1) -16, the symbol variation of the 11th special figure after the big hit game ends. The period from the start of display until the end of the 100th special symbol symbol variation display (electric support period) etc.] is a means that does not notify the second information,
The fourth period and the fifth period are different periods;
The fourth period is a period in which a jackpot game is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “a jackpot period [for example , a period in which a jackpot game shown in FIGS . 193 (5) -2 to 194 (5) -27 is performed, etc.) ] ”))),
The fourth period, the collector support state and probability variation state [e.g., special symbol high probability Hiroshizu high probability state etc.] the period (hereinafter, "third period [for example, FIG. 194 (1) -1 ~ shown in FIG. (1) -9 is a period including a.) of ST period, etc.] "from the jackpot gaming has ended up symbol variable display of the first ten special symbol is Ru performed,
The third period is a period following the jackpot period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 194 (5) -27 to (1) -9, the ST period starts following the end of the jackpot game. Etc.]
The fifth period is a period not including the jackpot period,
The fifth period, the collector support state and non-probability variation state [e.g., special symbol low probability Hiroshizu high probability state etc.] Ri period der is,
The fifth period is a period following the third period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 194 (1) -9 to 194 (1) -16, the ST period ends (the tenth special chart). When the symbol fluctuation display is completed), the electric support period, which is an uncertain change electric support state, until the symbol fluctuation display of the 100th special symbol is completed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Further, the first winning means is a winning means that makes it easy for a game ball to enter by right-handed [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, etc. shown in FIG. 176]. ,
The second winning means is winning means [for example, a unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG.
The informing means includes means for displaying [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
The display means is a display that prompts the player to make a right stroke (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display [eg, right stroke notification 1 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -2, right stroke notification 2 shown in FIG. 180 (5) -3]. Etc.] ”) is a means capable of displaying,
The operation promotion display includes a display simulating the first winning means [for example, a display 234ah simulating the first variable prize opening 234] and a display simulating the second winning means [for example, Display 2266h imitating the unit general prize opening 2266, etc.]
The operation promotion display prompts the game ball to enter the first winning means ,
The operation promotion display does not prompt the game ball to enter the second winning means,
After the jackpot period is started, the display of the operation promotion display is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 180 (5) -1 to (5) -3, when the jackpot game is started, The strike notification 1 and the right strike notification 2 are displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the state of the first winning means changes between a first state [for example, a difficult winning state (fully closed state)] and a second state [for example, an easily winning state (fully opened state)]. Winning means,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state,
The first winning means is a winning means for repeating the second state a plurality of times (for example, a plurality of rounds) in the jackpot game,
In the jackpot game, the notification means is a period in which the first winning means is in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “first period [for example, interval period between rounds, jackpot game end effect (ending effect)”). Is a means that may perform the second notification [for example, FIGS. 180 (5) -17 to (5) -18, 180 (5)]. ) -22 to (5) -23] in FIG.
The second notification, which may be performed during the first period, is a notification of information relating to the number of winning balls acquired by the game balls entering the second winning means during the first period [for example, , The cumulative awarded ball count display]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “the first winning means ends the second state when a certain number of game balls enter (hereinafter referred to as“ first number [for example, 10 is the upper limit number] ”). Winning means,
The notification means is means capable of executing a third notification;
The notification means is means capable of executing a fourth notification;
The third notification is a notification that is executed when more than the first number of game balls enter the first winning means [for example, a sound that is an over winning sound shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18. Output of A, display ONH of over winning notification shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, etc.]
The fourth notification is a notification that is executed each time a game ball enters the second winning means [for example, output of the sound B that is a general winning mouth winning sound shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12, 185 (5) -12 etc. General winning award winning notification display INH display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the third notification is a notification including a sound notification [for example, the sound A that is an over winning sound shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18]
The fourth notification is notification including sound notification [for example, the sound B that is a general winning opening winning sound shown in FIG. 185 (5) -12 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the pitch of the third notification sound and the fourth notification sound pitch are higher in the third notification sound pitch,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the first information is information on a cumulative total number of winning balls acquired by entering a gaming ball into the first winning means,
The second information is information on a cumulative total number of award balls acquired when a game ball enters the second winning means,
The second notification is a notification of the total number obtained by adding the cumulative total number in the first information and the cumulative total number in the second information [for example, display of “000018Get” shown in FIG. 180 (5) -8] Etc.]
The fourth notification is a notification different from the notification of the second information [e.g., a notification that tells that there has been a prize (output of sound B, display of general winning opening prize notification display INH) and the like]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the notification means is a means capable of executing a sixth notification;
The second notification is notification including notification by display,
The sixth notification is notification including notification by display,
The sixth notification may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value [for example, 5000] [for example, FIG. 192 (5) − Notification by the display of the drill number breakthrough display KTH shown in FIG. 21, notification by the output of the special sound D shown in FIG. 194 (5) -21, etc.]
Even during the display of the sixth notification (hereinafter referred to as “six display [for example, the number of breakthrough display KTH shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21]”), the second notification is displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, display of“ 005001Get ”shown in FIG. 192 (5) -21]”),
The second display and the sixth display are not overlapped with each other [eg, FIG. 192 (5) -21],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
The “fourth notification is a notification including a notification [for example, a notification by displaying the general winning award winning notification display INH]”
The display by the fourth notification may overlap the sixth display [for example, FIG. 194 (5) -21],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the sixth display is a display including the display of the certain value,
In the jackpot game, a certain number of rounds (for example, 16 etc.) are executed,
The certain value means that the first number [for example, the upper limit of 10] game balls has entered the first winning means in each of the certain number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. The number of winning balls obtained in this case [for example, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game (16R) × the upper limit number of winnings to an attacker in one round (10) × the number of winning balls when winning an attacker (15) = 2400] [for example, 5000 etc.]
The sixth display may be overlapped with a ball removal display [for example, a display of “please remove the ball” shown in FIG. 199 (5) -18].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, after the power is cut off during execution of a certain round in the jackpot game and power is restored during execution of the certain round, the first round is started before the next round of the certain round is started. Even when the number of game balls exceeding the first number [for example, the upper limit of 10] has entered the winning means, the third notification [for example, the overload shown in FIG. 180 (5) -18] The output of the sound A that is the winning sound, the display of the over-winning notification display ONH shown in FIG. 185 (5) -17, etc.] is not executed [for example, FIG. 200 (5) -17],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, if a game ball enters the second winning means after power interruption during execution of the certain round and power recovery during execution of the certain round, the game ball is acquired by entering the game ball. Notification of information regarding the number of awarded balls is performed as the second notification [for example, notification by displaying “000303Get” shown in FIG. 200 (5) -20],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “the notification means is means capable of executing a fifth notification;
The fifth notification is performed every time a game ball enters the first winning means until the first number of game balls enters the first winning means [for example, FIG. 5) The output of the sound C shown in -15, the display of the attacker winning notification ANH shown in FIG. 187 (5) -15, etc.]
Aspects of the third notification [e.g., output of sound A, which is an over winning sound shown in FIG. 187 (5) -18, display ONH of over winning notification shown in FIG. 187 (5) -17, etc.] The fifth notification mode is a different mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the fifth notification is notification including sound notification [for example, output of sound C illustrated in FIG. 187 (5) -15].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also, “the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first winning means rather than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second winning means [for example, three balls, etc.] [For example, 15 balls] is more,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
The first winning means is an attacker [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a or / and the second variable winning opening 235a, etc.]
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker (for example, general winning holes 2261 to 2266, electric Chu DC (second special figure starting port 232), etc.)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “the second winning means is an electric chew [for example, electric chew DC etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the second winning means includes a general winning opening [for example, a unit general winning opening 2266 shown in FIG. 195, a general winning opening 2265 provided in the right area shown in FIG. 195 (5) -11, FIG. (5) -14, a general winning opening 2261 provided in the left area, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, "we have multiple general winning mouths,
The second winning means is a general winning port [for example, a unit general winning port 2266 shown in FIG. 180] among the plurality of general winning ports,
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, information on the number of prize balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is notified as the second notification [for example, FIG. 180 (5) -8]. “000018Get” shown in FIG.
When a game ball enters a general winning port other than the certain general winning port among the plurality of general winning ports [for example, the general winning ports 2261 to 2265, etc.], it is acquired by the entry of the gaming ball. Information about the number of prize balls is not reported.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained .
Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the above, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always to be” or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  FIG. 201 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 201, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  In addition, the aspect in which the display unit 903 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 described above with reference to FIG. 1 may be adopted, and the display unit 903 may be provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the touch panel In such a state that the touch panel continues to be touched, a pseudo continuous hit operation on the touch panel may be performed. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled. Further, in some effects, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to be small. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects due to the continuous operation on the touch panel, and when the operation is performed on the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 201 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  Next, a slot machine (cylinder gaming machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 202 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1000 illustrated in FIG. 202 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 202), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the present embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, every time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display device 1025, the game information display device 1026, and the payout number display device 1027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operations of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Under the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, and examples. You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button 208L First decorative symbol display device 208M Second decorative symbol display device 208N Third decorative symbol display device 212 First special symbol display device 214 Second special symbol display device 224 Production movable body 224E Family crest role Items 2261 to 2266 General winning port 2266 Unit general winning port 230 First special figure starting port 232 Second special drawing starting port 2340 Attacker unit 234a First variable winning port 235a Second variable winning port 2340g V passage 246 Shielding device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Gaming board lamp 542 Gaming table frame lamp KTH Number of drills exceeded display INH General winning award winning notification display INH2 General winning award winning alert display ANH Attacker winning alert display ONH Over winning alert notification ONH2 Over winning alert notification Revival display

Claims (20)

Notification means;
Multiple winning means,
A game machine equipped with
It is possible to shift to the electric support state,
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means,
One winning means of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means,
The informing means is means capable of informing information relating to the number of prize balls acquired in a state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as “a certain state”),
The notification means is a means that may notify information related to the number of winning balls (hereinafter referred to as “first information”) acquired when a game ball enters the first winning means.
The notification means is a means that may notify information related to the number of winning balls (hereinafter referred to as “second information”) acquired when a game ball has entered the second winning means.
The notification means is means for performing notification of the first information and the second information (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”) in a fourth period in the certain state.
The informing means is means for not informing the second information in a fifth period in the certain state,
The fourth period and the fifth period are different periods;
The fourth period is a period including a period in which the jackpot game is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “jackpot period”),
The fourth period, the collector support between states and the period is a probability variation state (hereinafter. Referred to as "third period") is a period including,
The third period is a period following the jackpot period,
The fifth period is a period not including the jackpot period,
The fifth period, Ri said conductive support state and period der is non probability variation state,
The fifth period is a period following the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first winning means is a winning means that facilitates entry of a game ball by right-handed,
The second winning means is a winning means that facilitates entry of a game ball by right-handed,
The notification means is means including display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting the player to make a right turn (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”),
The operation promotion display is a display including a display imitating the first winning means and a display imitating the second winning means,
The operation promotion display prompts the game ball to enter the first winning means ,
The operation promotion display does not prompt the game ball to enter the second winning means,
Display of the operation promotion display is started after the jackpot period is started.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first winning means is a winning means that changes state between the first state and the second state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state,
The first winning means is a winning means for repeating the second state a plurality of times in the jackpot game,
The notification means may perform the second notification during the period in which the first winning means is in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in the jackpot game. And
The second notification that may be performed during the first period is a notification of information relating to the number of winning balls acquired by the game balls entering the second winning means during the first period. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The first winning means is a winning means for ending the second state when a certain number of game balls enter (hereinafter referred to as “first number”);
The notification means is means capable of executing a third notification;
The notification means is means capable of executing a fourth notification;
The third notification is a notification executed when game balls exceeding the first number enter the first winning means,
The fourth notification is a notification executed each time a game ball enters the second winning means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
The third notification is notification including notification by sound,
The fourth notification is notification including notification by sound.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
In the third notification sound pitch and the fourth notification sound pitch, the third notification sound pitch is higher,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 4 thru | or 6,
The first information is information on a cumulative total number of award balls acquired by entering a game ball into the first winning means.
The second information is information on a cumulative total number of award balls acquired when a game ball enters the second winning means,
The second notification is a notification of the total number obtained by adding the cumulative total number in the first information and the cumulative total number in the second information,
The fourth notification is a notification different from the notification of the second information.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 7,
The notification means is means capable of executing a sixth notification;
The second notification is notification including notification by display,
The sixth notification is notification including notification by display,
The sixth notification is a notification that may be executed when the total number notified by the second notification reaches a certain value,
During the display of the sixth notification (hereinafter referred to as “six display”), the second notification display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) is continuously displayed.
The second display and the sixth display do not overlap each other;
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 8,
The fourth notification is notification including notification by display,
The display by the fourth notification may be overlapped with the sixth display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 8 or 9, wherein
The sixth display is a display including the display of the certain value;
In the jackpot game, a certain number of rounds are executed,
The certain value is based on the value of the number of winning balls obtained when the first number of gaming balls enter the first winning means in each of the certain number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. Is also a big value,
The sixth display may be overlapped with a ball removal display,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 4 thru | or 10, Comprising:
After power is cut off during execution of a round in the jackpot game and power is restored during execution of the round, the first winning means is set before the next round of the round is started. Even if a game ball exceeding the first number enters, the third notification is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 11,
If a game ball enters the second winning means after the power is cut off during the execution of the certain round and the power is restored during the execution of the certain round, the prize obtained by the entry of the game ball Notification of information regarding the number of balls is performed as the second notification,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 4 to 12,
The notification means is means capable of executing a fifth notification;
The fifth notification is a notification executed each time a game ball enters the first winning means until the first number of game balls enters the first winning means,
The third notification mode and the fifth notification mode are different modes.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 13,
The fifth notification is notification including notification by sound.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The number of prize balls when one game ball enters the first prize means is larger than the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the second prize means,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The first winning means is an attacker,
The second winning means is a winning means different from the attacker.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 16, wherein
The second winning means is an electric chew.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 16, wherein
The second winning means is a general winning opening.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 16, wherein
It has multiple general winning entries,
The second winning means is a general winning port among the plurality of general winning ports,
When a game ball enters the certain general winning opening, notification of information on the number of winning balls acquired by the entry of the game ball is performed as the second notification,
When a game ball enters a general winning port other than the certain general winning port among the plurality of general winning ports, information on the number of winning balls acquired by the entry of the gaming ball is not notified. ,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 19,
  The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.